OPERATOR'S MANUAL

CHART RADAR

FCR-2119-BB
FCR-2129-BB
FCR-2139S-BB
FCR-2819
FCR-2829
FCR-2839S
FCR-2829W
Model FCR-2839SW
(Product Name: MARINE RADAR)

www.furuno.com
 The paper used in this manual
is elemental chlorine free.

・FURUNO Authorized Distributor/Dealer

9-52 Ashihara-cho,
Nishinomiya, 662-8580, JAPAN

All rights reserved. Printed in Japan A : JUN . 2012

E1 : OCT . 07, 2016
Pub. No. OME-36040-E1
( DAMI ) FCR-2119-BB

0 0 0 1 7 6 1 3 2 1 4
IMPORTANT NOTICES
General
• This manual has been authored with simplified grammar, to meet the needs of international users.
• The operator of this equipment must read and follow the descriptions in this manual. Wrong oper-
ation or maintenance can cancel the warranty or cause injury.
• Do not copy any part of this manual without written permission from FURUNO.
• If this manual is lost or worn, contact your dealer about replacement.
• The contents of this manual and equipment specifications can change without notice.
• The example screens (or illustrations) shown in this manual can be different from the screens you
see on your display. The screens you see depend on your system configuration and equipment
settings.
• Save this manual for future reference.
• Any modification of the equipment (including software) by persons not authorized by FURUNO will
cancel the warranty.
• The following concern acts as our importer in Europe, as defined in DECISION No 768/2008/EC.
- Name: FURUNO EUROPE B.V.
- Address: Ridderhaven 19B, 2984 BT Ridderkerk, The Netherlands
• InstantAccess bar is a registered trademark of FURUNO Electric Co., Ltd.
• All brand and product names are trademarks, registered trademarks or service marks of their re-
spective holders.
• “C-MAP” means “C-MAP by Jeppesen” in this manual.

How to discard this product

Discard this product according to local regulations for the disposal of industrial waste. For disposal
in the USA, see the homepage of the Electronics Industries Alliance (http://www.eiae.org/) for the
correct method of disposal.

How to discard a used battery

Some FURUNO products have a battery(ies). To see if your product has a battery, see the chapter
on Maintenance. Follow the instructions below if a battery is used. Tape the + and - terminals of
battery before disposal to prevent fire, heat generation caused by short circuit.

In the European Union

The crossed-out trash can symbol indicates that all types of batteries
must not be discarded in standard trash, or at a trash site. Take the
used batteries to a battery collection site according to your national
Cd
legislation and the Batteries Directive 2006/66/EU.

In the USA
The Mobius loop symbol (three chasing arrows) indicates that Ni-Cd
and lead-acid rechargeable batteries must be recycled. Take the used
batteries to a battery collection site according to local laws.
Ni-Cd Pb
In the other countries
There are no international standards for the battery recycle symbol. The number of symbols can
increase when the other countries make their own recycle symbols in the future.

i
 SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
The operator must read the safety instructions before attempting to operate the equipment.

WARNING Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided,

could result in death or serious injury.

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided,

CAUTION could result in minor or moderate injury.

Warning, Caution Prohibitive Action Mandatory Action

WARNING
Radio Frequency Radiation Hazard
The radar antenna emits electromagnetic radio frequency (RF) energy that can be harmful,
particularly to your eyes. Never look directly into the antenna aperture from a close distance
while the radar is in operation or expose yourself to the transmitting antenna at a close
distance. Distances at which RF radiation level of 100, 50 and 10 W/m2 are given in the table
below.

Radar model Transceiver Magnetron Antenna* 100W/m2 50W/m2 10W/m2

FCR-2119-BB/ XN20AF 0.1m 0.7m 2.2m
RTR-078A MAF1565N
FCR-2819 XN24AF 0.1m 0.4m 1.5m
FCR-2129-BB/ XN20AF 0.5m 1.7m 4.6m
RTR-079A MG5436
FCR-2829 XN24AF 0.2m 1.0m 3.3m
FCR-2139S-BB/
RTR-080 MG5223F SN36AF 0.1m 0.7m 2.0m
FCR-2839S
XN20AF 0.4m 1.0m 5.6m
FCR-2829W RTR-081A MG5436
XN24AF 0.2m 0.5m 3.4m
FCR-2839SW RTR-082 MG5223F SN36AF - 0.2m 1.9m
* XN20AF: 198cm, XN24AF: 243cm, SN36AF: 377cm

ii
 SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

WARNING WARNING
Do not open the equipment. Do not operate the equipment with
wet hands.
The equipment uses high voltage that
can cause electrical shock. Refer any Electrical shock can result.
repair work to a qualified technician.
Keep objects away from the open-
Before turning on the radar, be sure type antenna unit, so as not to
no one is near the antenna. impede rotation of the antenna.

Prevent the potential risk of being Fire, electrical shock or serious injury
struck by the rotating antenna, which can result.
can result in serious injury or death.
Use the proper fuse.
If water leaks into the equipment or
something is dropped into the Use of the wrong fuse can cause fire or
equipment, immediately turn off the damage the equipment.
WARNING
power at the switchboard.
The TT function is a valuable aid to
Fire or electrical shock can result. navigation. However, the navigator
must check all aids available to
If the equipment is giving off smoke avoid collision.
or fire, immediately turn off the
power at the switchboard. - The TT automatically tracks an
automatically or manually acquired
Fire or electrical shock can result. radar target and calculates its course
and speed, indicating them with a
If you feel the equipment is acting vector. Since the data generated by
abnormally or giving off strange the TT depends on the selected radar
noises, immediately turn off the targets, the radar must be optimally
power at the switchboard and tuned for use with the TT, to ensure
contact a FURUNO service techni- required targets will not be lost or
cian. unnecessary targets, like sea returns
and noise, will not be acquired and
Do not disassemble or modify the tracked.
equipment.
- A target is not always a landmass,
Fire, electrical shock or serious injury reef, ship, but can also be returns
can result. from the sea surface and from clutter.
As the level of clutter changes with
Make sure no rain or water splash the environment, the operator must
leaks into the equipment. correctly adjust the sea and rain
clutter controls and the gain control so
Fire or electrical shock can result if that the target echoes do not dis-
water leaks into the equipment. appear from the radar screen.

Do not place liquid-filled containers

on or near the equipment.

Fire or electrical shock can result if a

liquid spills into the equipment.

iii
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

Warning Label(s)
CAUTION
CAUTIO Warning label(s) is(are) attached to the
equipment. Do not remove the label(s). If a
The plotting accuracy and response of this label is missing or damaged, contact a
TT meets IMO standards. Tracking accuracy FURUNO agent or dealer about replacement.
is affected by the following:
•
Tracking accuracy is affected by course WARNING Name: Warning Label 1
change. One to two minutes is required to To avoid electrical shock, do not Type: 86-003-1011-1
restore vectors to full accuracy after an
remove cover. No user-serviceable Code No.: 100-236-231
parts inside.
abrupt course change. (The actual amount
depends on gyrocompass specifications.)
•
The amount of tracking delay is inversely
proportional to the relative speed of the
target. Delay is approx. 15-30 seconds for WARNING Name: Warning Sticker
the higher relative speed; approx. 30-60 Radiation hazard. Only qualified
personnel should work inside scanner.
Type: 03-142-3201-0
seconds for the lower relative speed. The Confirm that TX has stopped before
opening scanner.
Code No.: 100-266-890
following factors can affect accuracy:
- Echo intensity
- Radar transmission pulse length
- Radar bearing error
- Gyrocompass error
- Course change (own ship and targets)

Handle the LCD carefully.

The LCD is made of glass, which can

cause injury if broken.

The data presented by this equipment

is intended as a source of navigation
information.

The prudent navigator never relies

exclusively on any one source of
navigation information, for safety of
vessel and crew.

iv
TABLE OF CONTENTS
FOREWORD ................................................................................................................ xvii
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION ......................................................................................... xx

1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW .................................................................................1-1

1.1 Radar Control Unit RCU-025......................................................................................1-1
1.1.1 Radar Control Unit RCU-025 description .......................................................1-1
1.1.2 Operator fitness ..............................................................................................1-3
1.2 Trackball Control Unit RCU-026 .................................................................................1-4
1.2.1 Trackball Control Unit RCU-026 description ..................................................1-4
1.2.2 Operator fitness ..............................................................................................1-5
1.3 Processor Unit EC-3000.............................................................................................1-5
1.4 How to Turn the System On/Off .................................................................................1-6
1.5 How to Select a Color Palette.....................................................................................1-7
1.6 How to Adjust the Display Brilliance, Control Unit Backlighting..................................1-8
1.6.1 Manual brilliance adjustment..........................................................................1-8
1.6.2 Control unit backlighting .................................................................................1-9
1.7 Display Modes ..........................................................................................................1-10
1.7.1 How to select a display mode.......................................................................1-10
1.7.2 Limitations when using the chart radar mode...............................................1-10
1.8 Display Screens........................................................................................................1-11
1.8.1 Radar display ...............................................................................................1-11
1.8.2 Chart radar display .......................................................................................1-13
1.8.3 Chart for radar display ..................................................................................1-14
1.9 Status Bar.................................................................................................................1-15
1.9.1 Status bar for radar, chart radar mode .........................................................1-15
1.9.2 How to operate the buttons, slider bars on the Status bar ...........................1-16
1.10 InstantAccess BarTM ...............................................................................................1-17
1.10.1 How to operate the buttons on the InstantAccess bar™ ..............................1-19
1.11 Sensor Information Box ............................................................................................1-19
1.12 Menu Overview.........................................................................................................1-21
1.12.1 Basic menu operation...................................................................................1-21
1.12.2 How to enter numeric data ...........................................................................1-23
1.12.3 How to enter alphanumeric character data ..................................................1-23
1.13 Context-Sensitive Menus in the Radar Mode ...........................................................1-24
1.13.1 Context-sensitive menus available with buttons and boxes .........................1-24
1.13.2 Context-sensitive menus in the display area in the radar and
chart radar modes ........................................................................................1-26
1.14 Cursor Position .........................................................................................................1-27
1.15 How to Select Sensor Settings .................................................................................1-27
1.16 How to Enter Ship Speed .........................................................................................1-28
1.17 How to Enter Heading ..............................................................................................1-30
1.18 How to Mark MOB Position ......................................................................................1-31
1.19 How to Offset Position ..............................................................................................1-32
1.20 How to Select Time Format, Set Local Time ............................................................1-32
1.21 How to Take a Screenshot of the Display ................................................................1-33
1.22 The Settings Menu ...................................................................................................1-33
1.23 User Profiles for Radar, Chart Radar .......................................................................1-33
1.23.1 How to create a profile .................................................................................1-33
1.23.2 How to disable a profile ................................................................................1-33
1.23.3 How to restore default settings to a profile ...................................................1-34
1.23.4 How to activate a profile ...............................................................................1-34
1.23.5 How to restore a profile to the default settings .............................................1-34

v
TABLE OF CONTENTS

1.23.6 How to change the settings on the current display to the

recommended settings................................................................................. 1-34
1.24 How to View Chart Software Version No., Chart System Information, and
Operator's Manual.................................................................................................... 1-38
1.25 Tips (operational guidance) ..................................................................................... 1-39

2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION................................................................2-1

2.1 How to Transmit ......................................................................................................... 2-1
2.2 How to Tune the Radar Receiver............................................................................... 2-1
2.2.1 How to initialize tuning ................................................................................... 2-1
2.2.2 Automatic tuning ............................................................................................ 2-1
2.2.3 Manual tuning................................................................................................. 2-2
2.3 Pulse Length .............................................................................................................. 2-2
2.3.1 How to select a pulse length .......................................................................... 2-2
2.3.2 How to change the pulse length..................................................................... 2-3
2.4 How to Adjust the Sensitivity...................................................................................... 2-3
2.5 How to Suppress Sea Clutter..................................................................................... 2-3
2.5.1 How to reduce sea clutter automatically ........................................................ 2-4
2.5.2 How to reduce sea clutter manually ............................................................... 2-4
2.6 How to Suppress Rain Clutter.................................................................................... 2-5
2.6.1 How to reduce rain clutter automatically ........................................................ 2-5
2.6.2 How to reduce rain clutter manually............................................................... 2-5
2.7 Interference Rejector.................................................................................................. 2-7
2.8 Echo Stretch............................................................................................................... 2-7
2.9 Echo Averaging.......................................................................................................... 2-8
2.10 Noise Rejector............................................................................................................ 2-9
2.11 Wiper........................................................................................................................ 2-10
2.12 How to Preset Controls for Specific Navigation Purpose ......................................... 2-10
2.12.1 How to select a customized echo................................................................. 2-12
2.12.2 How to edit a customized echo .................................................................... 2-12
2.12.3 How to restore a user customized echo to saved setting............................. 2-13
2.12.4 How to restore a user customized echo to factory default settings.............. 2-13
2.13 How to Suppress Second-trace Echoes .................................................................. 2-14
2.14 Presentation Modes ................................................................................................. 2-14
2.14.1 Orientation modes........................................................................................ 2-14
2.14.2 How to select a presentation mode.............................................................. 2-15
2.14.3 Description of presentation modes............................................................... 2-16
2.15 How to Select the Range Scale ............................................................................... 2-18
2.16 How to Measure the Range to a Target ................................................................... 2-19
2.16.1 How to measure the range by using a VRM ................................................ 2-19
2.16.2 How to set VRM attributes ........................................................................... 2-20
2.17 How to Measure the Bearing to a Target ................................................................. 2-21
2.17.1 How to measure the bearing ........................................................................ 2-21
2.17.2 How to select bearing reference .................................................................. 2-22
2.18 Collision Assessment by Offset EBL........................................................................ 2-22
2.18.1 How to assess risk of collision .................................................................... 2-22
2.18.2 Point of reference for origin point of offset EBL ........................................... 2-23
2.19 How to Measure the Range and Bearing Between Two Targets ............................. 2-24
2.20 How to Off-center the Display .................................................................................. 2-25
2.21 Target Trails ............................................................................................................. 2-26
2.21.1 Target trails-related indications .................................................................... 2-26
2.21.2 True or relative target trails .......................................................................... 2-26
2.21.3 Trail time ...................................................................................................... 2-27
2.21.4 How to reset target trails .............................................................................. 2-27
2.21.5 How to temporarily remove all target trails from the display ........................ 2-27
2.21.6 Trail stabilization in true motion.................................................................... 2-27

vi
 TABLE OF CONTENTS

2.21.7 Target trail attributes on the TRAIL menu ....................................................2-28

2.22 Parallel Index (PI) Lines ...........................................................................................2-28
2.22.1 How to display, erase a PI line .....................................................................2-29
2.22.2 How to enable/disable PI lines .....................................................................2-29
2.22.3 How to adjust PI line orientation, PI line interval ..........................................2-29
2.22.4 How to select the number of PI lines to display............................................2-29
2.22.5 How to select the bearing reference for the PI line ......................................2-30
2.22.6 How to select the PI lines orientation ...........................................................2-30
2.22.7 How to reset PI lines ....................................................................................2-30
2.22.8 How to adjust PI line length..........................................................................2-31
2.23 Zoom ........................................................................................................................2-32
2.24 Markers.....................................................................................................................2-33
2.24.1 Heading line .................................................................................................2-33
2.24.2 Stern marker.................................................................................................2-33
2.24.3 North marker ................................................................................................2-33
2.24.4 Own ship marker ..........................................................................................2-33
2.24.5 Vectors .........................................................................................................2-34
2.24.6 Barge marker................................................................................................2-34
2.24.7 Antenna marker............................................................................................2-35
2.24.8 Cursor...........................................................................................................2-35
2.25 How to Adjust Brilliance of Screen Data...................................................................2-36
2.26 Watch Alert ...............................................................................................................2-37
2.27 Information Box ........................................................................................................2-38
2.27.1 Information box contents ..............................................................................2-38
2.27.2 How to show the information box .................................................................2-39
2.27.3 How to turn NAV data on/off.........................................................................2-40
2.28 Interswitch ................................................................................................................2-41
2.28.1 How to display antenna information .............................................................2-41
2.28.2 How to preset antenna and display combinations ........................................2-42
2.28.3 How to select an antenna.............................................................................2-43
2.29 Dual Radar (B type only) ..........................................................................................2-44
2.29.1 How to enable or disable the dual radar display ..........................................2-45
2.29.2 Operating considerations for the dual radar display .....................................2-45
2.30 Performance Monitor ................................................................................................2-47
2.31 Magnetron Reset (For A- and B-types) ....................................................................2-48
2.32 CCRP (Common Consistent Reference Point).........................................................2-49
2.33 Drop Mark.................................................................................................................2-51
2.33.1 How to show, hide the drop mark box ..........................................................2-51
2.33.2 How to inscribe a drop mark.........................................................................2-51
2.33.3 Drop mark bearing reference .......................................................................2-51
2.33.4 How to erase a drop mark ............................................................................2-52
2.34 Anchor Watch ...........................................................................................................2-52
2.35 SART ........................................................................................................................2-53
2.35.1 What is an SART?........................................................................................2-53
2.35.2 How to receive an SART ..............................................................................2-53
2.36 Alert Box, Alert List ...................................................................................................2-55
2.36.1 Alert box .......................................................................................................2-55
2.36.2 Alert list.........................................................................................................2-55
2.36.3 Changing priority of primary alerts ...............................................................2-56
2.37 Echo Area.................................................................................................................2-57
2.38 Echo Color................................................................................................................2-57
2.39 Chart Radar Functions .............................................................................................2-57
2.39.1 How to switch between radar and chart radar modes ..................................2-57
2.39.2 How to show or hide chart objects ...............................................................2-58
2.39.3 How to create and recall custom sets of chart display objects .....................2-60
2.39.4 Chart database information ..........................................................................2-60

vii
TABLE OF CONTENTS

2.39.5 How to set value for shallow contour, safety depth, safety contour and
deep contour ................................................................................................ 2-61
2.39.6 How to select the chart color and tone......................................................... 2-62
2.39.7 How to show/hide the curved EBL ............................................................... 2-62
2.39.8 Chart scale indications ................................................................................. 2-63
2.39.9 Chart status.................................................................................................. 2-63
2.39.10Chart alert function....................................................................................... 2-63
2.39.11Notes details ................................................................................................ 2-64
2.40 Radar Observation ................................................................................................... 2-65
2.40.1 General ........................................................................................................ 2-65
2.40.2 False echoes................................................................................................ 2-66
2.40.3 RACON ........................................................................................................ 2-68
2.40.4 Radar Target Enhancer (RTE) ..................................................................... 2-68

3. TARGET TRACKING (TT) .....................................................................................3-1

3.1 About TT .................................................................................................................... 3-1
3.2 How to Show, Hide the TT Display ............................................................................ 3-1
3.3 How to Input Your Ship's Speed ................................................................................ 3-2
3.3.1 Echo-referenced speed input ......................................................................... 3-2
3.4 Automatic Acquisition................................................................................................. 3-3
3.4.1 How to enable auto acquisition ...................................................................... 3-3
3.4.2 How to set an automatic acquisition zone...................................................... 3-3
3.5 Manual Acquisition ..................................................................................................... 3-5
3.5.1 How to set manual acquisition conditions ...................................................... 3-5
3.5.2 How to manually acquire a target................................................................... 3-5
3.6 How to Stop Tracking Targets (including reference targets)...................................... 3-7
3.6.1 How to cancel tracking on individual tracked targets ..................................... 3-7
3.6.2 How to cancel tracking on all TTs .................................................................. 3-7
3.7 TT Symbols and TT Symbol Attributes ...................................................................... 3-8
3.7.1 TT symbols..................................................................................................... 3-8
3.7.2 TT symbol brilliance ....................................................................................... 3-9
3.7.3 Color for TT symbol........................................................................................ 3-9
3.8 How to Display TT Data ........................................................................................... 3-10
3.8.1 How to display target data for individual TT ................................................. 3-10
3.8.2 TT pop-up information.................................................................................. 3-11
3.8.3 Target list ..................................................................................................... 3-11
3.9 Vector Modes ........................................................................................................... 3-12
3.9.1 Description of vectors................................................................................... 3-12
3.9.2 Vector motion and length ............................................................................. 3-14
3.10 Past Position Display ............................................................................................... 3-15
3.10.1 How to enable/disable the past position display, select past
position reference......................................................................................... 3-15
3.10.2 Past position points ...................................................................................... 3-15
3.11 How to Enter Set and Drift ....................................................................................... 3-16
3.12 TT CPA/TCPA Alarm ............................................................................................... 3-17
3.12.1 How to set the CPA and TCPA limits ........................................................... 3-17
3.12.2 How to enable, disable the TT CPA/TCPA alarm ........................................ 3-17
3.12.3 How to acknowledge the TT CPA/TCPA alarm............................................ 3-18
3.13 TT Lost Target Alert ................................................................................................. 3-18
3.13.1 How to enable, disable the TT lost target alert............................................. 3-18
3.13.2 How to set the TT lost target filter ................................................................ 3-19
3.14 Trial Maneuver ......................................................................................................... 3-19
3.14.1 Types of trial maneuvers.............................................................................. 3-19
3.14.2 How to do a trial maneuver .......................................................................... 3-21
3.15 TT Simulation Mode ................................................................................................. 3-22
3.16 TT Alerts................................................................................................................... 3-23

viii
 TABLE OF CONTENTS

3.17 Criteria for Selecting Targets for Tracking................................................................3-24

3.18 Factors Affecting Target Tracking ............................................................................3-25

4. AIS OPERATION ...................................................................................................4-1

4.1 How to Deactivate the AIS Function...........................................................................4-2
4.2 How to Show, Hide the AIS Display ...........................................................................4-3
4.3 AIS Symbols ...............................................................................................................4-3
4.4 How to Filter AIS Targets ...........................................................................................4-6
4.5 How to Activate Targets .............................................................................................4-7
4.5.1 How to activate specific target........................................................................4-7
4.5.2 How to automatically activate targets .............................................................4-7
4.6 How to Sleep Targets .................................................................................................4-8
4.6.1 How to sleep an activated AIS target .............................................................4-8
4.6.2 How to sleep all activated AIS targets ............................................................4-8
4.7 How to Display AIS Target Data.................................................................................4-9
4.7.1 AIS pop-up information...................................................................................4-9
4.7.2 Basic AIS target data......................................................................................4-9
4.7.3 Expanded AIS data ......................................................................................4-10
4.8 AIS CPA/TCPA Alarm ..............................................................................................4-11
4.9 AIS Symbol Brilliance ...............................................................................................4-11
4.10 AIS Symbol Color .....................................................................................................4-12
4.11 AIS Lost Targets.......................................................................................................4-12
4.11.1 How to enable, disable the AIS lost target alarm .........................................4-12
4.11.2 How to set the AIS lost target filter ...............................................................4-13
4.12 How to Display AIS Target Past Positions................................................................4-13
4.12.1 How to enable/disable the past position display, select past
position reference.........................................................................................4-13
4.12.2 Past position points ......................................................................................4-14
4.13 How to Display True or Relative Speed Vectors ......................................................4-14
4.14 Association of TT and AIS Targets...........................................................................4-14
4.14.1 How to select the association method ..........................................................4-14
4.14.2 How to set the conditions for association .....................................................4-15
4.15 Voyage Data.............................................................................................................4-16
4.16 AIS Messages ..........................................................................................................4-17
4.16.1 How to create and transmit a new AIS message .........................................4-17
4.16.2 How to transmit a saved AIS message ........................................................4-18
4.16.3 How to display received AIS messages .......................................................4-18
4.17 How to View Own Ship Data ....................................................................................4-20
4.18 Other AIS Features...................................................................................................4-21

5. RADAR MAP AND TRACK ...................................................................................5-1

5.1 What is a Radar Map?................................................................................................5-1
5.2 Orientation Modes ......................................................................................................5-1
5.3 How to Show, Hide the Radar Map Display ...............................................................5-1
5.4 How to Enter Radar Map Marks and Lines.................................................................5-2
5.5 How to Find Number of Map Points Used ..................................................................5-3
5.6 How to Select the Radar Map to Display....................................................................5-4
5.7 How to Attach a Comment to a Radar Map, Find Comment for a Map ......................5-4
5.8 How to Erase Radar Map Marks and Lines................................................................5-5
5.8.1 How to erase individual radar map marks and lines.......................................5-5
5.8.2 How to erase map marks and lines in an area ...............................................5-5
5.8.3 How to erase all radar map marks and lines in a map file..............................5-6
5.9 How to Copy Radar Map Marks and Lines.................................................................5-7
5.9.1 How to copy individual radar map marks and lines to another map file .........5-7
5.9.2 How to copy radar map marks and lines within an area to another
map file...........................................................................................................5-7

ix
TABLE OF CONTENTS

5.9.3 How to copy all radar map marks and lines in a map file to another
map file........................................................................................................... 5-8
5.10 How to Export Radar Map.......................................................................................... 5-9
5.11 How to Import Radar Map ........................................................................................ 5-10
5.12 How to Show, Hide Radar Map Features................................................................. 5-13
5.13 Track ........................................................................................................................ 5-13
5.13.1 How to set up ship's track ............................................................................ 5-13
5.13.2 How to erase track ....................................................................................... 5-14
5.14 Route Display........................................................................................................... 5-14
5.15 User Chart Display ................................................................................................... 5-15

6. CHART OVERVIEW...............................................................................................6-1
6.1 Chart Screen Overview .............................................................................................. 6-1
6.1.1 Electronic chart area ...................................................................................... 6-2
6.1.2 Status bar....................................................................................................... 6-4
6.1.3 InstantAccess bar™ ....................................................................................... 6-6
6.1.4 Sensor information box .................................................................................. 6-9
6.1.5 Own ship functions box ................................................................................ 6-10
6.1.6 Route information box .................................................................................. 6-11
6.1.7 Overlay/NAV Tools box................................................................................ 6-12
6.1.8 Alert box ....................................................................................................... 6-12
6.1.9 Permanent warning box ............................................................................... 6-12
6.1.10 EBL, VRM boxes.......................................................................................... 6-12
6.1.11 North mark ................................................................................................... 6-13
6.1.12 Context-sensitive menus.............................................................................. 6-13
6.1.13 How to enter alphanumeric data .................................................................. 6-14
6.2 How to Select a Display Mode ................................................................................. 6-15
6.3 How to Select the Chart Operating Mode ................................................................ 6-16
6.4 How to Select the Chart Scale ................................................................................. 6-16
6.5 How to Select the Presentation Mode...................................................................... 6-17
6.6 Cursor Position Box ................................................................................................. 6-18
6.7 The Silent Mode ....................................................................................................... 6-18
6.8 True Motion Reset.................................................................................................... 6-19
6.9 How to Control Route and User Charts in Voyage Navigation and
Voyage Planning Modes .......................................................................................... 6-20
6.10 How to Use the VRM and EBL................................................................................. 6-21
6.10.1 How to hide/show an EBL, VRM .................................................................. 6-21
6.10.2 How to measure the range and bearing....................................................... 6-21
6.10.3 How to select bearing reference .................................................................. 6-21
6.10.4 EBL, VRM functions available with the context-sensitive menu................... 6-22
6.10.5 How to select the calculation method for EBL and VRM.............................. 6-23
6.11 Split Screen.............................................................................................................. 6-24
6.11.1 How to activate, deactivate the split screen ................................................. 6-24
6.11.2 Function availability...................................................................................... 6-24
6.11.3 Split screen usage characteristics................................................................ 6-25
6.12 Datum....................................................................................................................... 6-25
6.12.1 General ........................................................................................................ 6-25
6.12.2 Paper charts................................................................................................. 6-25
6.12.3 Electronic sea charts.................................................................................... 6-25
6.12.4 Positioning devices and datum .................................................................... 6-25
6.12.5 Chart radar and datum ................................................................................. 6-26
6.13 How to Select Sensor Settings................................................................................. 6-26
6.14 How to Enter Ship Speed......................................................................................... 6-27
6.15 How to Enter Heading .............................................................................................. 6-29
6.16 Set up Before Departure .......................................................................................... 6-30
6.16.1 Updates before departure ............................................................................ 6-30

x
 TABLE OF CONTENTS

6.16.2 Create or update a route ..............................................................................6-31

6.16.3 How to check and prepare the route, user chart to monitor .........................6-32
6.16.4 Check configuration of navigation sensors...................................................6-35
6.16.5 How to reset odometer and trip meter ..........................................................6-36

7. HOW TO MANAGE CHARTS................................................................................7-1

7.1 How to Install Public Keys for ENC Charts.................................................................7-1
7.2 How to Install ENC Licenses, Charts..........................................................................7-2
7.2.1 How to install an ENC license ........................................................................7-2
7.2.2 How to install ENC charts...............................................................................7-3
7.3 How to Delete ENC Licenses .....................................................................................7-5
7.4 How to Read ENC Chart Manufacturer Info ...............................................................7-6
7.5 How to Install C-MAP Charts......................................................................................7-6
7.5.1 How to register the eToken ............................................................................7-6
7.5.2 How to install the C-MAP database................................................................7-7
7.5.3 How to install C-MAP licenses .......................................................................7-8
7.5.4 How to generate and order an update file ....................................................7-10
7.5.5 How to apply the update file .........................................................................7-10
7.5.6 How to check license status .........................................................................7-11
7.6 How to Delete a C-MAP Database ...........................................................................7-11
7.7 How to Install C-MAP DL (Dynamic Licensing) Charts.............................................7-11
7.7.1 How to generate and order an update file ....................................................7-11
7.7.2 How to apply the update file .........................................................................7-12
7.7.3 How to enable and set up the C-MAP DL ....................................................7-12
7.8 How to Export a List of Charts..................................................................................7-13
7.9 How to Export a List of Specific Licenses.................................................................7-13
7.10 How to Show the ENC Permit ..................................................................................7-13
7.11 How to Backup, Restore Licenses............................................................................7-14
7.12 How to View Permit Expiration Date.........................................................................7-15
7.13 How to Display Install/Update History ......................................................................7-16
7.14 Catalog of Chart Cells ..............................................................................................7-17
7.14.1 How to group chart cells ...............................................................................7-19
7.14.2 How to view status of chart cells ..................................................................7-20
7.15 How to Open Charts .................................................................................................7-21
7.16 How to Print Chart List, Cell Status List....................................................................7-21
7.16.1 How to print the chart list ..............................................................................7-21
7.16.2 How to show the cell status list ....................................................................7-22
7.17 How to Delete Charts ...............................................................................................7-23
7.18 How to Show Publishers Notes for ENC Charts.......................................................7-24
7.19 How to Find the Chart Type......................................................................................7-25
7.20 How to Update ENC, C-MAP Charts Manually.........................................................7-25
7.20.1 How to insert update symbols ......................................................................7-26
7.20.2 How to copy objects from an official chart and insert them ..........................7-27
7.20.3 How to ignore chart objects ..........................................................................7-27
7.20.4 How to delete (hide) a chart object...............................................................7-28
7.20.5 How to modify existing update symbols .......................................................7-28
7.20.6 How to review a chart object ........................................................................7-28
7.21 How to Synchronize Chart Data ...............................................................................7-29
7.21.1 How to select the units to synchronize .........................................................7-29
7.21.2 How to check synchronization status ...........................................................7-30
7.21.3 Manual updates and synchronization...........................................................7-31
7.22 How to Reconvert All SENC Charts .........................................................................7-32

8. HOW TO CONTROL CHART OBJECTS ..............................................................8-1

8.1 How to Browse Your Charts .......................................................................................8-1
8.2 How to Control Visibility of Chart Objects...................................................................8-1

xi
TABLE OF CONTENTS

8.2.1
How to set value for shallow contour, safety depth, safety contour and
deep contour .................................................................................................. 8-1
8.2.2 Basic Setting menu ........................................................................................ 8-3
8.2.3 Chart Display menu........................................................................................ 8-4
8.2.4 Display base................................................................................................... 8-6
8.3 How to Control Visibility of Symbols, Features .......................................................... 8-6
8.3.1 General page ................................................................................................. 8-6
8.3.2 Tracking page ................................................................................................ 8-8
8.3.3 Route page .................................................................................................... 8-9
8.3.4 Mariner page ................................................................................................ 8-10
8.3.5 Targets page ................................................................................................ 8-11
8.4 Control of Predefined IMO Chart Display Settings................................................... 8-12

9. VECTOR (S57) CHARTS .......................................................................................9-1

9.1 Introduction to S57 Charts ......................................................................................... 9-1
9.1.1 Definitions of terms ........................................................................................ 9-2
9.1.2 Chart legend for S57 charts ........................................................................... 9-2
9.1.3 Permanent warnings for S57 charts............................................................... 9-3
9.2 Chart Viewing Dates and Seasonal Features of the S57 Chart ................................. 9-4
9.2.1 Introduction .................................................................................................... 9-4
9.2.2 How to set Display date and Update Review dates ....................................... 9-4
9.2.3 About chart viewing date dependency of S57 standard................................. 9-4
9.2.4 How to approve and highlight S57 chart updates .......................................... 9-5
9.3 Symbology Used in S57 Charts ................................................................................. 9-6
9.3.1 Presentation library used for S57 chart features............................................ 9-6
9.4 How to Find Information About S57 Chart Objects .................................................... 9-7
9.5 Admiralty Information Overlay (AIO) .......................................................................... 9-8
9.5.1 Installation ...................................................................................................... 9-8
9.5.2 How to display the AIO................................................................................... 9-8
9.5.3 Catalog of AIO cells ....................................................................................... 9-9
9.5.4 How to find AIO chart object information........................................................ 9-9
9.5.5 How to select the information to display....................................................... 9-11

10. C-MAP BY JEPESSEN CHARTS ........................................................................10-1

10.1 How to Register the System at C-MAP .................................................................... 10-1
10.2 How to Order Charts ................................................................................................ 10-1
10.3 How to Apply for Licenses........................................................................................ 10-1
10.4 Troubleshooting ....................................................................................................... 10-2
10.5 Chart Subscription Services..................................................................................... 10-2
10.5.1 C-MAP services ........................................................................................... 10-2
10.5.2 What is ENC delivery? ................................................................................. 10-2
10.6 Chart Display............................................................................................................ 10-3
10.6.1 Introduction .................................................................................................. 10-3
10.7 Permanent Warnings ............................................................................................... 10-4
10.8 Notice to Mariners (NM) ........................................................................................... 10-5

11. CHART ALERTS..................................................................................................11-1

11.1 Chart Alerts .............................................................................................................. 11-2
11.1.1 How to set safety contour............................................................................. 11-2
11.1.2 Chart object related settings ........................................................................ 11-3
11.2 How to Activate Own Ship Look-ahead Area ........................................................... 11-4
11.3 Route Planning......................................................................................................... 11-5
11.3.1 Chart alerts for route planning...................................................................... 11-5

12. ROUTES...............................................................................................................12-1
12.1 Route Planning Overview......................................................................................... 12-1

xii
 TABLE OF CONTENTS

12.2 Main Menu for Route Planning .................................................................................12-2

12.3 How Route Data is Synced.......................................................................................12-2
12.4 How to Create a New Route.....................................................................................12-3
12.4.1 How to use the Waypoints page...................................................................12-5
12.4.2 How to use the User Chart page ..................................................................12-6
12.4.3 How to use the Optimize page .....................................................................12-7
12.4.4 How to use the Alert Parameters page ........................................................12-7
12.4.5 How to use the Check Results page ............................................................12-9
12.5 How to Modify an Existing Route..............................................................................12-9
12.5.1 How to change waypoint position.................................................................12-9
12.5.2 How to change other waypoint data ...........................................................12-10
12.5.3 How to add a new waypoint at the end of a route ......................................12-10
12.5.4 How to insert a waypoint ............................................................................12-10
12.5.5 How to delete a waypoint ...........................................................................12-10
12.5.6 Geometry check of route ............................................................................12-11
12.6 SAR Operations......................................................................................................12-11
12.7 Route Bank.............................................................................................................12-14
12.8 Route Optimization .................................................................................................12-15
12.8.1 Available route optimization strategies .......................................................12-15
12.8.2 How to optimize a route..............................................................................12-16
12.8.3 How to plan a speed profile........................................................................12-17
12.9 How to Import Routes.............................................................................................12-18
12.9.1 How to import FMD-3x00, FCR-2xx9, FAR-3xx0 route data ......................12-18
12.9.2 How to import FEA-2x07 route data ...........................................................12-18
12.9.3 How to import RTZ, CSV, ASCII format route data ....................................12-19
12.10How to Export Route Data .....................................................................................12-20
12.10.1How to export FAR-3xx0 route data ...........................................................12-20
12.10.2How to export route data in RTZ, CSV, ASCII format ................................12-20
12.11How to Delete Routes ............................................................................................12-21
12.12How to Transfer Routes .........................................................................................12-22
12.13Reports ..................................................................................................................12-23

13. USER CHARTS ...................................................................................................13-1

13.1 Introduction...............................................................................................................13-1
13.1.1 Objects of user charts ..................................................................................13-1
13.2 How User Charts are Synced ...................................................................................13-2
13.3 How to Create a User Chart .....................................................................................13-3
13.4 How to Edit Objects on a User Chart........................................................................13-7
13.5 How to Delete Objects from a User Chart ................................................................13-8
13.6 How to Copy User Chart Objects .............................................................................13-8
13.7 How to Select the User Chart Objects to Display .....................................................13-9
13.8 How to Import User Chart Data ................................................................................13-9
13.8.1 How to import user chart data from other units ............................................13-9
13.8.2 How to import a user chart created with ECDIS FEA-2x07 ........................13-10
13.8.3 How to import RTZ format user charts .......................................................13-11
13.9 How to Export User Chart Data ..............................................................................13-11
13.9.1 How to export user chart data created on the FMD-3x00 ..........................13-11
13.9.2 How to export RTZ format user chart data .................................................13-11
13.10How to Delete User Charts ....................................................................................13-12
13.11User Chart Reports ................................................................................................13-12
13.12How to Select the User Chart(s) to Use in Route Monitoring.................................13-16

14. HOW TO MONITOR ROUTES.............................................................................14-1

14.1 How to Start Route Monitoring .................................................................................14-1
14.2 How to Stop Route Monitoring (Manual, Auto) .........................................................14-3
14.3 How to Select What Parts of a Route to Display ......................................................14-4

xiii
TABLE OF CONTENTS

14.4 How to View Waypoint Information .......................................................................... 14-4

14.5 How to View User Chart Information Linked Monitoring Route................................ 14-5
14.6 How to View User Chart Object Information in Route Monitoring ............................ 14-6
14.7 How to Change Monitored Route to Planned Route ................................................ 14-6
14.8 How to Use Instant Track to Return to or Deviate from Monitored Route................ 14-7
14.8.1 Safe off track mode ...................................................................................... 14-7
14.8.2 Back to track mode ...................................................................................... 14-8
14.8.3 Instant track messages .............................................................................. 14-10
14.8.4 Instant track details .................................................................................... 14-11
14.8.5 How to monitor, stop monitoring an instant track route.............................. 14-11
14.8.6 How to change a monitored route when following an instant track
route (safe off track mode only) ................................................................. 14-13
14.8.7 Button label and unit state.......................................................................... 14-13
14.9 How to Share Route During Route Monitoring....................................................... 14-14

15. NAVIGATION TOOLS..........................................................................................15-1

15.1 How to Access the NAV Tools in the Overlay/NAV Tools Box................................. 15-1
15.2 Radar Overlay .......................................................................................................... 15-2
15.2.1 How to show the radar overlay..................................................................... 15-3
15.2.2 Error Between Radar Echo Image and Chart .............................................. 15-3
15.2.3 Error Sources for Radar Echo Image and TT Mismatch .............................. 15-4
15.3 Parallel Index (PI) Lines ........................................................................................... 15-5
15.3.1 How to activate, deactivate PI lines ............................................................. 15-5
15.3.2 PI line bearing reference .............................................................................. 15-5
15.3.3 Number of PI lines to display ....................................................................... 15-5
15.3.4 PI line mode ................................................................................................. 15-5
15.3.5 How to adjust PI line orientation, PI line interval .......................................... 15-6
15.3.6 How to reset the PI lines .............................................................................. 15-6
15.3.7 How to adjust PI line length.......................................................................... 15-7
15.4 Look-ahead .............................................................................................................. 15-7
15.5 Ring.......................................................................................................................... 15-8
15.6 Predictor................................................................................................................... 15-9
15.7 Anchor Watch......................................................................................................... 15-10
15.8 UKC (Under Keel Clearance)................................................................................. 15-11
15.8.1 UKC overview ............................................................................................ 15-11
15.8.2 How to set UKC.......................................................................................... 15-12
15.8.3 UKC window............................................................................................... 15-12
15.9 Curved EBL............................................................................................................ 15-13
15.10Divider ................................................................................................................... 15-14
15.10.1How to use the divider................................................................................ 15-14
15.10.2Usage characteristics, limitations............................................................... 15-15
15.10.3How to deactivate and erase the divider .................................................... 15-15
15.10.4How to select the calculation method for the divider.................................. 15-16

16. NAVIGATION SENSORS.....................................................................................16-1

16.1 CCRS ....................................................................................................................... 16-1
16.2 How to Select Navigation Sensors........................................................................... 16-2
16.2.1 Sensors menu description............................................................................ 16-2
16.3 Source of Position .................................................................................................... 16-6
16.4 Primary and Secondary Positions of Own Ship ....................................................... 16-7
16.5 Source of Navigation Data ....................................................................................... 16-8
16.6 Switching of Sensor and Indication ........................................................................ 16-10
16.7 Filter Status ............................................................................................................ 16-10
16.8 Position Alignment ................................................................................................. 16-13
16.8.1 How to align position .................................................................................. 16-13
16.8.2 How to cancel position alignment............................................................... 16-13

xiv
 TABLE OF CONTENTS

16.9 Wind Sensor ...........................................................................................................16-13

16.10Depth Sensor .........................................................................................................16-15

17. AIS SAFETY, NAVTEX MESSAGES ..................................................................17-1

17.1 AIS Safety Messages ...............................................................................................17-1
17.1.1 How to send an AIS safety message ...........................................................17-1
17.1.2 How to display received and sent AIS safety messages ..............................17-2
17.1.3 How to delete received and sent AIS safety messages ...............................17-3
17.2 Navtex Messages .....................................................................................................17-3
17.2.1 How to receive Navtex messages ................................................................17-4
17.2.2 How to delete received Navtex messages ...................................................17-5

18. TT AND AIS DISPLAYS ......................................................................................18-1

18.1 TT Display ................................................................................................................18-1
18.1.1 TT symbols ...................................................................................................18-1
18.1.2 TT symbol color and size .............................................................................18-1
18.1.3 How to display tracked target data ...............................................................18-2
18.1.4 Past position point attributes ........................................................................18-3
18.1.5 How to set the TT lost target filter ................................................................18-3
18.1.6 TT recording functions..................................................................................18-3
18.2 AIS Display ...............................................................................................................18-4
18.2.1 AIS symbols .................................................................................................18-4
18.2.2 Voyage data .................................................................................................18-4
18.2.3 How to filter AIS targets................................................................................18-5
18.2.4 How to set conditions for automatic activation of sleeping targets ...............18-6
18.2.5 How to sleep all activated targets.................................................................18-6
18.2.6 How to set the AIS lost target filter ...............................................................18-7
18.2.7 How to display AIS target data .....................................................................18-7
18.2.8 How to display own ship data.......................................................................18-9
18.3 Association ...............................................................................................................18-9
18.3.1 How to select association method................................................................18-9
18.3.2 How to set the conditions for association ...................................................18-10

19. RECORDING FUNCTIONS .................................................................................19-1

19.1 How to Record User, Position Events ......................................................................19-1
19.1.1 User events ..................................................................................................19-1
19.1.2 Position events .............................................................................................19-2
19.2 Details Log................................................................................................................19-5
19.3 Voyage Log ..............................................................................................................19-6
19.3.1 How to set conditions of logging...................................................................19-8
19.4 Chart Usage Log ......................................................................................................19-8
19.5 Danger Targets Log..................................................................................................19-9
19.6 Route Transfer Log.................................................................................................19-11

20. ALERTS ...............................................................................................................20-1

20.1 What is an Alert? ......................................................................................................20-1
20.2 Alert Box ...................................................................................................................20-2
20.3 How to Temporarily Silence the Buzzer for an Emergency, Alarm or Warning ........20-5
20.4 How to Acknowledge an Emergency, Alarm or Warning..........................................20-5
20.5 Alert List....................................................................................................................20-6
20.6 Alert Log ...................................................................................................................20-9
20.7 Alert Reception from Connected Sensors ..............................................................20-10
20.8 List of Alerts............................................................................................................20-11

21. PARAMETERS ....................................................................................................21-1

21.1 Ship and Route Parameters .....................................................................................21-1

xv
TABLE OF CONTENTS

21.2 Forwarding Distances .............................................................................................. 21-2

21.3 Cost Parameters ...................................................................................................... 21-3
21.4 Instant Track Parameters......................................................................................... 21-4

22. SETTINGS MENU ................................................................................................22-1

22.1 How to Access the Settings Menu ........................................................................... 22-1
22.2 File Export ................................................................................................................ 22-2
22.3 File Import ................................................................................................................ 22-3
22.4 File Maintenance...................................................................................................... 22-4
22.5 Alert Setting.............................................................................................................. 22-5
22.6 Self Test ................................................................................................................... 22-7
22.7 Data Sharing .......................................................................................................... 22-10
22.8 Customize .............................................................................................................. 22-11
22.9 Display Test ........................................................................................................... 22-12
22.10Keyboard Test ....................................................................................................... 22-13
22.11Screenshots........................................................................................................... 22-15
22.11.1How to export screenshots......................................................................... 22-16
22.11.2How to delete screenshots......................................................................... 22-16
22.11.3How to print screenshots............................................................................ 22-16
22.12User Default........................................................................................................... 22-17
22.13CCRP .................................................................................................................... 22-18

23. COMMON REFERENCE SYSTEM ......................................................................23-1

23.1 Installation of the System ......................................................................................... 23-1
23.2 Accuracy of the System ........................................................................................... 23-1

24. CONNING DISPLAYS..........................................................................................24-1

24.1 Main Conning Display .............................................................................................. 24-1
24.2 Conning Display Examples ...................................................................................... 24-3
24.3 Mini Conning Display ............................................................................................... 24-9
24.4 Side Conning Display (landscape monitor only) .................................................... 24-10

25. MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING.....................................................25-1

25.1 Maintenance............................................................................................................. 25-2
25.2 How to Replace the Fuses ....................................................................................... 25-3
25.3 Trackball Maintenance ............................................................................................. 25-4
25.4 How to Clean the Filter in the Processor Unit .......................................................... 25-5
25.5 Troubleshooting ....................................................................................................... 25-5
25.6 Consumable Parts.................................................................................................... 25-7
25.7 Color Differentiation Test for S57 Charts ................................................................. 25-9
25.8 Fallback Arrangements .......................................................................................... 25-10

APPENDIX 1 MENU TREE .......................................................................................AP-1

APPENDIX 2 ABBREVIATIONS, SYMBOLS ...........................................................AP-9
APPENDIX 3 DATA COLOR AND MEANING........................................................AP-22
APPENDIX 4 ALERT LIST......................................................................................AP-23
SPECIFICATIONS .....................................................................................................SP-1
INDEX.......................................................................................................................... IN-1

xvi
FOREWORD
Congratulations on your choice of the FURUNO FCR-21x9-BB, FCR-28x9 Series Marine Radar.
We are confident you will see why the FURUNO name has become synonymous with quality and
reliability.

Since 1948, FURUNO Electric Company has enjoyed an enviable reputation for innovative and
dependable marine electronics equipment. This dedication to excellence is furthered by our ex-
tensive global network of agents and dealers.

This equipment is designed and constructed to meet the rigorous demands of the marine environ-
ment. However, no machine can perform its intended function unless installed, operated and
maintained properly. Please carefully read and follow the recommended procedures for operation
and maintenance.

Features
This radar series meets the requirements of IEC 62388 (Marine navigation and radiocommunica-
tion equipment and systems - Shipborne radar - Performance requirements, method of testing and
required test results) and IMO MSC.192(79), IMO Resolution A.817(19), and IEC 61174. This ra-
dar displays radar targets, electronic charts, nav lines, Tracked Target (TT) data, AIS targets and
other navigation data on a 23.1-inch display (FCR-28x9).

The main features of this series are

• The FCR-21x9-BB, FCR-28x9 series consists of the following models and configurations:
Frequency Size of Output Transceiver
Model
Band Monitor Unit Power location
FCR-2119-BB X-band Local supply 12 kW Antenna unit
FCR-2129-BB 25 kW Antenna unit
FCR-2139S-BB 30 kW Antenna unit
FCR-2819 X-band 23.1”* 12 kW Antenna unit
FCR-2829 X-band 25 kW Antenna unit
FCR-2829W X-band 25 kW Transceiver unit
FCR-2839S S-band 30 kW Antenna unit
FCR-2839SW Transceiver unit
* Viewing distance: 1020 mm

• New HMI (Human Machine Interface) gives improved operability.

• Accepts SXGA, UXGA video inputs.
• SOLAS category 2 compatible display (320 mm). (Category 1 compatible display optionally avail-
able.)
• Radar, chart and chart radar modes. (The chart radar mode does not meet the criteria for naviga-
tion aid for Japanese flag vessels as defined by Japanese law.)
• Many warning features to support safer and more efficient navigation.
• Grounding warnings, safe depth contours.
• Chart database installed and updated using DVD-ROM, CD-ROM.
• Tracked Target (TT) data and AIS data to aid in collision avoidance.
• AIS messaging.
• Route created in chart mode can be displayed on the radar.
• Route planning and route monitoring facilities in the chart mode.

xvii
FOREWORD

Signal Processing Functions

This radar has the signal processing functions described in the table below. All signal processing
functions are set with the picture preset feature.

Signal processing function Description Section

Interference rejector Suppress interference transmitted by other radars. Inter- section
ference received simultaneously from many radars can 2.7
be difficult to reduce.
Echo stretch Enlarge target echoes, especially small echoes. Sup- section
press interference, sea clutter and rain clutter before us- 2.8
ing echo stretch, to prevent the enlargement of unwanted
echoes.
Echo averaging The radar samples echoes with each scan. Targets that section
show a large change with each scan are judged as clutter 2.9
and are reduced to display only echoes from legitimate
targets.
Noise rejector Reduce the white noise then improves the on-screen S/N section
ratio by processing the weighted moving average filter for 2.10
the received echoes in the range direction. Use this func-
tion with caution. Weak target echoes may disappear
from the screen or the range resolution may worsen.

Standards Used in this Manual

• Three types of Control Units are available: Radar Control Unit RCU-025 (radar controls with
trackball module), ECDIS Control Unit RCU-024 (alphabet keyboard, controls, trackball mod-
ule) and Trackball Control Unit RCU-026 (trackball module only). Unless noted otherwise, “Con-
trol Unit” refers to the RCU-025.
• The system can be operated with the controls of the Radar Control Unit, ECDIS Control Unit or
a trackball module. The descriptions in this manual use the trackball module.
• Unless noted otherwise, "click" means to push the left button on a trackball module.
• The keys and controls of the Radar Control Unit are shown in bold face; for example, the EN-
TER key.
• The buttons on the InstantAccess bar™, Status bar and menu items are shown in brackets; for
example, the [TUNE] button.
• Context-sensitive menus are available with many buttons, and boxes and objects. Right-click
an item to display the related context-sensitive menu.
• This radar is available in three types of specifications: IMO, A, or B. This manual provides the
descriptions for the B type, of which some functions are not available with the IMO or A type.
See the menu tree in Appendix 1 for function availability.
• The display colors mentioned in this manual are those with the color palette setting “Day-Gray”.

xviii
 FOREWORD

Program Number
System Program no. Version no.
Radar
SPU 0359204 03.xx
RFC 0359202 01.xx
EC-3000
Main 0359266 02.xx

Virus Prevention
This equipment is not equipped with a virus checker. The system operates in real time; therefore,
having a virus checker that periodically checks the equipment for viruses would increase the pro-
cessing load, which can affect operation. However, you can avoid viruses by following the instruc-
tions in this section.

When you update a chart

The PC and medium (USB flash memory, etc.) used to download and store an update for an ex-
isting chart or a new chart may be infected with a virus. Check the PC and the medium for viruses
with a commercial virus checker - BEFORE you connect them to this equipment. Be sure the virus
checker contains the latest virus definition files.

Network connection
The equipment receives and displays information from various navigation equipment and radar
via a LAN. A PC and other equipment connected to a network can carry viruses. To prevent the
introduction of a virus to the LAN, DO NOT connect the system or HUB to an external network,
including other shipboard LAN.

Do not install 3rd party programs in the system

Do not install any 3rd party programs.

Open Source Software

This product includes software to be licensed under the GNU General Public License (GPL), GNU
Lesser General Public License (LGPL), BSD, Apache, MIT and others. The program(s) is/are free
software(s), and you can copy it and/or redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GPL
or LGPL as published by the Free Software Foundation. Please access to the following URL if you
need source codes: https://www.furuno.co.jp/cgi/cnt_oss_e01.cgi

This product uses the software module that was developed by the Independent JPEG Group.

Reverse engineering
Reverse engineering (reverse assemble, reverse compiler) of the software of this equipment is
prohibited.

CE declaration
With regards to CE declarations, please refer to our website (www.furuno.com) for further infor-
mation on RoHS conformity declarations.

xix
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

NOTICE
The radar(s) must be interconnected to the following type approved sensors:

EPFS meeting the requirements of the IMO resolution MSC.112(73).

Gyrocompass meeting the requirements of the IMO resolution A.424(XI).

SDME meeting the requirements of IMO resolution MSC.96(72).
The radar may be interconnected via HUB-3000 to other FURUNO processing
units having approved LAN ports.

FCR-2119-BB/FCR-2129-BB/FCR-2139S-BB/FCR-2819/FCR-2829

DE-ICER ANTENNA UNIT Radiator

XN-20AF (6 ft)
Chassis XN-24AF (8 ft)
RSB-096-078A
RU-3305 RSB-097-078A Performance Monitor
110 VAC RSB-096-079A PM-31
1ø, 50-60 Hz RSB-097-079A
110/115/220/230 VAC
1ø, 50-60 Hz

A-D Converter
Gyro Converter Gyrocompass
Sub Display 1 GC-10
Sub Display 2 Heading Sensor

RPU-013 Brake Unit

RADAR BR-001/002
PROCESSOR
110-115/ UNIT
220-230 VAC
1ø, 50-60 Hz LAN
Transformer
440 VAC RU-1803
1ø, 50-60 Hz
Serial 1, 2
Sensor Adapter*4 IEC-61162-2
(Gyro*1, AIS)
Radar Control
Unit RCU-025
OR Serial 3 - 8
Trackball Control Unit IEC-61162-1
RCU-026 (EPFS*2(navigator),
SDME(speed log),
ECDIS Control Unit Echo sounder,
RCU-024 Wind, Alarm*5,
EC-3000 Navtex, etc.)
OR
Radar Control PROCESSOR
UNIT
Unit RCU-025 Digital Out 1 - 6*6
OR 1: System Fail
Trackball Control Unit 2: Power Fail
RCU-026 3: Normal Close 1
4: Normal Close 2
Monitor Unit*3 5: Normal Open 1
FCR-21x9-BB series: MU-190 (option) 6: Normal Open 2
FCR-28x9 series: MU-231
VDR
Digital In (ACK IN)
Category of Units Intelligent Hub
Antenna Unit: Exposed to the weather HUB-3000
All other units: Protected from the weather
Dashed lines indicate
100-115/220-230 VAC
optional or local supply
1ø, 50-60 Hz
equipment.

xx
 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

FCR-2829W

DE-ICER ANTENNA UNIT Radiator

XN-20AF (6 ft)
XN-24AF (8 ft)
Chassis
RU-3305 RSB-103 Performance Monitor
110 VAC PM-31
1ø, 50/60 Hz
110/115/220/230 VAC
1ø, 50-60 Hz
Transceiver Unit
RTR-081A

A-D Converter
Sub Display 1 Gyro Converter Gyrocompass
GC-10
Sub Display 2 Heading Sensor

RPU-013 Brake Unit

RADAR BR-001/002
PROCESSOR
110-115/ UNIT
220-230 VAC
LAN
1ø, 50-60 Hz
Transformer
440 VAC
RU-1803
1ø, 50-60 Hz
Serial 1, 2
Sensor Adapter*4 IEC-61162-2
(Gyro*1, AIS)
Radar Control
Unit RCU-025
OR Serial 3 - 8
Trackball Control Unit IEC-61162-1
RCU-026 (EPFS*2(navigator),
SDME(speed log),
ECDIS Control Unit Echo sounder,
RCU-024 Wind, Alarm*5,
EC-3000 Navtex, etc.)
OR
Radar Control PROCESSOR
UNIT
Unit RCU-025 Digital Out 1 - 6*6
OR 1: System Fail
Trackball Control Unit 2: Power Fail
RCU-026 3: Normal Close 1
4: Normal Close 2
Monitor Unit*3 5: Normal Open 1
FCR-21x9-BB series: MU-190 (option) 6: Normal Open 2
FCR-28x9 series: MU-231
VDR
Digital In (ACK IN)
Category of Units Intelligent Hub
Antenna Unit: Exposed to the weather HUB-3000
All other units: Protected from the weather
Dashed lines indicate
100-115/220-230 VAC
optional or local supply
1ø, 50-60 Hz
equipment.

xxi
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

FCR-2839S

Radiator
ANTENNA UNIT SN36AF (12 ft)

Performance Monitor
PM-51
Chassis
200/380 VAC, 3ø, 50 Hz
RSB-098/099
220/440 VAC, 3ø, 60 Hz
RSB-100/101/102
Transformer 110 VAC,
RU-5693 3ø, 60 Hz
Power Supply Unit
PSU-007 Transformer 220 VAC,
RU-6522 3ø, 50 Hz

Transformer 440 VAC,

RU-5466 3ø, 50 Hz

Sub Display 1 A-D Converter

Gyro Converter Gyrocompass
Sub Display 2 GC-10
Heading Sensor
RPU-013
RADAR
PROCESSOR
Power Supply Unit UNIT
110-115/ PSU-011
220-230 VAC
LAN
1ø, 50-60 Hz
440 VAC Transformer
1ø, 50-60 Hz RU-1803
Serial 1, 2
Sensor Adapter*4 IEC-61162-2
(Gyro*1, AIS)
Radar Control
Unit RCU-025
OR Serial 3 - 8
Trackball Control Unit IEC-61162-1
RCU-026 (EPFS*2(navigator),
SDME(speed log),
ECDIS Control Unit Echo sounder,
RCU-024 Wind, Alarm*5,
EC-3000 Navtex, etc.)
OR
Radar Control PROCESSOR
UNIT
Unit RCU-025 Digital Out 1 - 6*6
OR 1: System Fail
Trackball Control Unit 2: Power Fail
RCU-026 3: Normal Close 1
4: Normal Close 2
Monitor Unit*3 5: Normal Open 1
FCR-21x9-BB series: MU-190 (option) 6: Normal Open 2
FCR-28x9 series: MU-231
VDR
Digital In (ACK IN)
Category of Units Intelligent Hub
Antenna Unit: Exposed to the weather HUB-3000
All other units: Protected from the weather
Dashed lines indicate
100-115/220-230 VAC
optional or local supply
1ø, 50-60 Hz
equipment.

xxii
 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

FCR-2839SW

Radiator
ANTENNA UNIT SN36AF (12 ft)

Performance Monitor
PM-51
Chassis
RSB-104/105 200/380 VAC, 3ø, 50 Hz
220/440 VAC, 3ø, 60 Hz
Transformer 110 VAC,
RU-5693 3ø, 60 Hz
Transceiver Unit
RTR-082 Transformer 220 VAC,
RU-6522 3ø, 50 Hz

Transformer 440 VAC,

RU-5466 3ø, 50 Hz

A-D Converter
Sub Display 1 Gyro Converter Gyrocompass
GC-10
Sub Display 2 Heading Sensor
RPU-013
RADAR
PROCESSOR
UNIT
110-115/
220-230 VAC
1ø, 50/60 Hz LAN
440 VAC Transformer
1ø, 50/60 Hz RU-1803
Serial 1, 2
Sensor Adapter*4 IEC-61162-2
(Gyro*1, AIS)
Radar Control
Unit RCU-025
OR Serial 3 - 8
Trackball Control Unit IEC-61162-1
RCU-026 (EPFS*2(navigator),
SDME(speed log),
ECDIS Control Unit Echo sounder,
RCU-024 Wind, Alarm*5,
EC-3000 Navtex, etc.)
OR
Radar Control PROCESSOR
UNIT
Unit RCU-025 Digital Out 1 - 6*6
OR 1: System Fail
Trackball Control Unit 2: Power Fail
RCU-026 3: Normal Close 1
4: Normal Close 2
Monitor Unit*3 5: Normal Open 1
FCR-21x9-BB series: MU-190 (option) 6: Normal Open 2
FCR-28x9 series: MU-231
VDR
Digital In (ACK IN)
Category of Units Intelligent Hub
Antenna Unit: Exposed to the weather HUB-3000
All other units: Protected from the weather
Dashed lines indicate
100-115/220-230 VAC
optional or local supply
1ø, 50-60 Hz
equipment.

xxiii
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

Category of Units
Antenna units: Exposed to the weather
Other units: Protected from the weather

Notes
1. The gyrocompass must be type approved for compliance with IMO resolution A.424(XI) (and/
or resolution A.821(19) for installation on HSC). The gyrocompass must also have an update
rate that is adequate for the ship’s rate of turn. The update rate must be better than 40 Hz
(HSC) or 20 Hz (conventional vessel).
2. The EPFS must be type approved for compliance with IMO resolution MSC.112(73).
3. These monitors have been approved by the IMO, MU-190 for CAT 2C and CAT 2HC, MU-231
for CAT 1C and CAT 1HC. If a different monitor is to be used on IMO vessels, its effective
diameter must meet the applicable Category requirements:
• CAT 1C and CAT 1HC: effective diameter 320 mm or higher
• CAT 2C and CAT 2HC: effective diameter 250 mm or higher
For installation, operation and viewing distance of other monitor, see its manuals.For BB type,
a monitor unit is prepared by user.
4. The sensor adapters are Control Serial MC-3000S, Analog IN MC-3010A, Digital INMC-
3020D and Digital OUT MC-3030D.
5. Characteristics of contact output for Alarm:
• (Load current) 250 mA
• (Polarity) Normally Open: 2 ports, Normally Close: 2 ports
• Serial I/O for alarm is also possible, which complies with IEC 61162-1.
6. Six Digital Out connections are available.

xxiv
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

1.1 Radar Control Unit RCU-025

1.1.1 Radar Control Unit RCU-025 description

The Radar Control Unit RCU-025 consists of various controls and a trackball module
(trackball, scrollwheel and left and right buttons). The trackball module functions like
a PC mouse. The user rolls the trackball and operates the left and right buttons and
the scrollwheel to do various functions.

The RCU-025 has 28 direct access keys, five knob-type controls, two rotary encoders,
a power switch, a USB port, and a trackball module. The system can be operated with
the keys and controls or with the trackball module.

Status LED
Rotary encoder USB
for EBL Rotary encoder port
for VRM Power switch

InstantAccess knob Trackball module

When you press the correct key, a single beep sounds to alert you to correct opera-
tion. For wrong operation, several beeps sound. You can select the loudness of the
beep or deactivate the beep on the [Customize] menu.

1-1
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

Control Description
Turns the system on or off. (With a FURUNO monitor unit, the monitor is also
turned on or off with this switch.)

Status LED The color and state of the LED change according to system or alert status.
Green, lighting: Normal operation status; no alerts generated.
Green, flashing: The heater on the CPU board is on, because ambient tem-
perature is not at least 0°C. The heater takes about two minutes to warm the
equipment. The LED lights green after the heater goes off.
Red, lighting: Acknowledged alert or SYSTEM FAIL. SYSTEM FAIL occurs
when there is trouble in the Processor Unit or communication failure between
the Processor Unit and a Control Unit. Each Control Unit detects trouble and
its lamp flashes in red and the buzzer sounds. If this condition occurs at the
No. 1 Control Unit, the SYSTEM FAIL signal is output.
Red, flashing: Unacknowledged alert or SYSTEM FAIL.
Rotary control Rotary control: Rotates the active EBL.
EBL1, EBL2 EBL1, EBL2: Activates or deactivates the respective EBL.
ALARM ACK • Silences the aural alarm.
• Acknowledges unacknowledged alert.
InstantAccess Selects the buttons on the InstantAccess bar™.
knob
ESC Goes back one step in current operating sequence on the InstantAccess
bar™.
BRILL Rotate: Adjusts the brilliance of the display (FURUNO-supplied monitor only).
Push: Selects a color palette.
A/C RAIN Rotate: Suppresses rain clutter.
Push: Toggles between manual and automatic rain clutter adjustment.
A/C SEA Rotate: Suppresses sea clutter.
Push: Toggles between manual and automatic sea clutter adjustment.
GAIN Adjusts the sensitivity of the radar receiver.
HL OFF • Temporarily erases everything but radar echoes when held down.
• Enters the numeric 1.
• Selects like-numbered menu item.
OFFSET EBL • Activates or deactivates the offset EBL.
• Enters the numeric 2.
• Selects like-numbered menu item.
MODE • Selects a presentation mode.
• Enters the numeric 3.
• Selects like-numbered menu item.
STBY TX Toggles the radar between standby and TX.
OFF CENTER • Re-centers radar position at the cursor location.
• Enters the numeric 4.
• Selects like-numbered menu item.
CU/TM RESET • Course-up: Resets heading line to 000°.
• True motion: Moves own ship position 75% of the radius in stern direction.
• Enters the numeric 5.
• Selects like-numbered menu item.
INDEX LINE • Selects an index line (in the PI line box).
• Long press to activate or deactivate selected index line.
• Enters the numeric 6.
• Selects like-numbered menu item.
MENU Opens, closes the menu.

1-2
 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

Control Description
VECTOR TIME • Sets the vector time (length) for TT and AIS targets.
• Enters the numeric 7.
• Selects like-numbered menu item.
VECTOR MODE • Sets the vector mode (relative, true).
• Enters the numeric 8.
• Selects like-numbered menu item.
TARGET LIST • Displays AIS, TT data in the target list.
• Enters the numeric 9.
• Selects like-numbered menu item.
CANCEL Cancels the changes made on the currently selected menu.
TRAIL • Goes back one page in the menu.
• Moves cursor leftward in text box.
• Turns the echo trail display on or off.
• Long-push to reset all trails.
PANEL • Adjusts the backlighting of the keys.
• Enters the numeric 0.
• Selects like-numbered menu item.
MARK • Goes forward one page in the menu.
• Moves cursor rightward in text box.
• Inputs selected mark on the radar screen, at the position selected.
ENTER Confirms selection on menu.
Rotary control Rotary control: Adjusts the diameter of the active VRM.
VRM1, VRM2 VRM1, VRM2: Activates or deactivates the respective VRM.
UNDO Undo edit or text input on radar map.
VIEW HIDE Radar mode, chart radar mode: Shows or hides the AZ box, Drop mark box-
es, EBLs, Mark box, PI line box, Trial box, VRMs.
Chart for radar mode: Shows or hides the EBLs, InstantAccess bar™, [Over-
lay/NAV Tools] box, [Route information] box, VRMs.
RANGE Selects radar range (radar and chart radar modes), chart scale (chart mode).
ACQ ACT • TT: Acquires target selected with cursor, for target tracking.
• AIS: Activates cursor-selected sleeping AIS target.
TARGET DATA Displays the detailed data for selected TT, AIS target, in the TT/AIS informa-
tion box.
TARGET • TT: Stops tracking the cursor-selected tracked target.
CANCEL • AIS: Sleeps cursor-selected activated AIS target.
• Long-push to erase all displayed TT target data.
Trackball The trackball module is the same as that used in the Trackball Control Unit
module RCU-026. See the description in the next section.
USB port For connection of USB flash memory (FAT16 or FAT32 format only). Do not
connect a USB HDD or PC keyboard. The DVD drive (Maker: TEAC, Type:
PU-DRV10) is for chart updates.

1.1.2 Operator fitness

The system outputs the operator fitness signal when a key or button is pressed, the
trackball is moved or a rotary control is rotated.

1-3
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

1.2 Trackball Control Unit RCU-026

1.2.1 Trackball Control Unit RCU-026 description

The Trackball Control Unit RCU-026 has a power switch, a trackball module (trackball,
scrollwheel and left and right mouse buttons), a status LED, and a USB port. The
trackball module functions like a PC mouse; the user rolls the trackball and operates
the left and right buttons and the scrollwheel to do various functions.

Scrollwheel
Power Left
switch button USB port

Status
LED

Right
button

Trackball

Control Description
Power switch Turns the system on or off. (With a FURUNO monitor unit, the monitor is also
turned on/off with this switch.)
Status LED The color and state of the LED change according to system or alert status. See the
Status LED description on page 1-2.
Left button • Does the operation related to the object selected.
• Confirms the operation done for the object selected.
Scrollwheel • Selects menu options.
• Selects chart scale.
• Sets numeric data.
Right button • Displays context-sensitive menu when the cursor is put in the display
area.
• Cancels operation done on the object selected.
Trackball • Moves the cursor.
• Selects an object.
USB port For connection of USB flash memory (FAT16 or FAT32 format). Do not connect a
USB HDD or PC keyboard. The DVD drive (Maker: TEAC, Type: PU-DRV10) is for
chart updates.

1-4
 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

1.2.2 Operator fitness

The system outputs the operator fitness signal when a key or button is pressed, the
trackball is moved or a rotary control is rotated.

1.3 Processor Unit EC-3000

The Processor Unit is the heart of the chart system, and is mainly responsible for the
chart management, route planning and route navigation.

The Processor Unit has two power switches. The Mains switch controls the power
from the switchboard, and the Power switch controls the power to the system.

DVD
drive

RJ45 Network

Mains switch LAN1 port (Gateway network)

LAN2 port (IEC61162-450 equipment)
LAN3 port (Radar)

Power switch

Notes on usage:

• Do not operate the system with a medium inserted in the DVD drive when its use is
not required, to prevent damage to the drive and medium. After use of a medium is
completed, remove the medium from the drive and store it in its case.
• To keep the system stable, restart the unit at least once every two weeks.
• Close the lid of the DVD drive when the drive is not in use.
• The DVD ROM provided with this equipment contains the chart radar program.
Store the DVD in a place where the temperature and humidity are moderate. The
recommended storage temperature is -10°C(14°F) to 40°C(104°F).

1-5
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

1.4 How to Turn the System On/Off

Normally, leave the power switches at the front of the Processor Unit on and control
the power with the power switch on a Control Unit (RCU-025, RCU-026). The monitor
unit is powered independently.

How to power the system

Push the mains switch on the Processor Unit for the "I" position. Turn on the power
switch on the Processor Unit or a Control Unit. The start-up display appears on the
screen.

After the power is applied, the program starts up and about one minute later the bear-
ing scale appears. The radar then goes into three minutes of warm-up time to warm
the magnetron, which transmits radar pulses. The timer at the center of the screen
counts the time remaining for warm-up. When the timer shows 0:00, the indication
"ST-BY" appears at the screen center. The radar is now ready to transmit radar puls-
es. In the stand-by condition, no radar pulses are transmitted and TT nor AIS is active.

The settings on the menus are stored in a non-volatile memory (hard disk) and are
preserved when the power is turned off.

Note: If the ambient temperature is less than 0°C (32°F) when the power is applied,
nothing appears on the display. This is because the heater is warming the unit. The
display appears in approx. two minutes.

How to power off the system

Press the power switch on the Processor Unit or a Control Unit. Push the Mains switch
for the "O" position.

Note: Provided that the radar was once in use with the transmitter tube (magnetron)
still warm, you can put the radar in transmit state without three minutes of warm-up. If
the Power switch was turned off by mistake or the like and you wish to restart the radar
promptly, turn on the Power switch not later than 10 seconds after power-off.

1-6
 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

1.5 How to Select a Color Palette

This radar provides three sets of color and brilliance sets (palette), day, dusk and
night, to match any ambient lighting condition. The default specifications of each pal-
ette are as shown in the table below. The panel dimmer setting is automatically
changed, and the number of steps depends on the color palette selected.

Brilliance Panel dimmer Text Background

Palette
MU-190 MU-231 (step) color color
Day-gray 86 88 9 White Gray
Day-blue 86 88 9 White Blue
Dusk-gray 77 79 8 Light gray Dark gray
Dusk-blue 77 79 8 Light gray Dark blue
Night-gray 53 53 5 Orange Dark gray
Night-blue 53 53 5 Light gray Dark blue
To select a palette, do the following:

1. Click the [Palette] button.

[Palette]
button

2. Click[Day], [Dusk] or [Night] as appropriate. For example, select [Day] to show its
options.

3. Click the palette (gray, blue) desired.

Note: A palette can also be selected by pushing the BRILL control on the Control Unit.

1-7
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

1.6 How to Adjust the Display Brilliance, Control

Unit Backlighting
The monitor brilliance setting is defined according to the color palette setting. Howev-
er, manual adjustment of the brilliance is also possible.

In the chart for radar mode, the backlighting for the control unit can be adjusted from
the monitor brilliance adjustment window.

Note 1: Use a serial cable for brilliance adjustment to make the connection between
the Processor Unit and the Control Unit.
Note 2: For how to adjust display brilliance of other monitor, see its operator’s manual.
Note 3: Improper brilliance may affect the visibility of information, especially on the
night display.

1.6.1 Manual brilliance adjustment

Manual brilliance adjustment with BRILL control on the ECDIS control unit
Operate the BRILL control to adjust brilliance. Turn it clockwise to increase the bril-
liance; counterclockwise to decrease the brilliance. Watch the brilliance level indica-
tion on the [BRILL] button (see the illustration below) to see the current brilliance level.

Manual brilliance adjustment from the InstantAccess bar™

1. Push the InstantAccess knob.
2. Rotate the knob to select the [BRILL] button then push the knob to show the bril-
liance adjustment window.

Calibration
Current brilliance level state
(CALIB or UNCALIB)

[BRILL] [CALIB]
button button

Control unit backlight adjustment

(Appears in chart for radar mode only.)
3. Push the knob, rotate the knob to set the brilliance then push the knob to confirm
the setting. The calibration state indication changes to "UNCALIB".
4. Rotate the knob to select the [CALIB] button then push the knob to calibrate the
brilliance. The calibration state indication changes to "CALIB".

1-8
 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

Manual brilliance adjustment with the trackball module

1. Click the [BRILL] button on the InstantAccess bar™ to show the brilliance adjust-
ment window.
2. For coarse adjustment, put the cursor on a location within the slider bar area
then push the left button. For fine adjustment, put the cursor on the end of the
slider bar and roll the trackball while holding down the left button.
3. Release the left button to confirm setting. The calibration state indication changes
to "UNCALIB".
4. Click the [CALIB] button to calibrate the brilliance. The calibration state indication
changes to "CALIB".

1.6.2 Control unit backlighting

How to adjust the brilliance manually with the control unit (RCU-025)
Push the PANEL key to adjust backlighting of the control unit.

How to adjust the brilliance manually on the menu (For Radar mode and
Chart radar mode)
1. Right-click the BRILL button on the InstantAccess bar™ then select [Brill Menu].
2. Adjust the backlighting on the [1 CONTROL PANEL] menu.

How to adjust the brilliance manually with the InstantAccess knob (For chart
mode)
1. Push the InstantAccess knob.
2. Rotate the knob to select the [BRILL] button then push the knob to show the bril-
liance adjustment window.
3. Put the cursor on the backlighting setting, and up and down arrows appear. Click
the arrows to adjust the backlighting.

Backlight
setting range

Current backlighting level

Click arrows to set backlighting.

1-9
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

1.7 Display Modes

This chart radar has three main display modes:

• The radar mode provides the traditional radar display.

• The chart for radar mode shows the electronic charts.
• The conning mode provides a comprehensive navigation data display.

1.7.1 How to select a display mode

Click the Display mode button to select desired mode.

[ RADAR]: Radar or chart radar mode (see section 1.8.2)

[CHART for RADAR]: Chart for radar mode
[CONNING for RADAR]: Conning mode (see section 24.1)

Display mode
button

1.7.2 Limitations when using the chart radar mode

The presentation mode in the chart radar mode can be course-up RM, north-up RM,
or north-up TM. The presentation mode is automatically switched to north-up RM if the
mode is head-up at the time the chart radar mode is selected.

1-10
 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

1.8 Display Screens

All display screens have operational buttons, boxes and indications, and display mark-
ers. Click a button or indication to execute the related operation. Context-sensitive
menus are available with several boxes outside the display area and objects inside the
display area. Right-click the appropriate box or object to show the related context-sen-
sitive menu.

Monitor viewing distance

The optimal viewing distance for the FURUNO-supplied monitors is 1020 mm.

1.8.1 Radar display

The illustration below shows the markers, data, etc. as they appear on the FURUNO
19-inch monitor unit. The layout for the 23-inch monitor unit is similar.

Message
area

24
NAV data Route 1 Route 2
0 Depth : 403 m
100
200
300
Water

26 28 27 -30 -20
400
500
-10 min m
TEMP : 3.7°C

29 N
Wind True-North
124.5° 20.1 kn
35 W E
Current
S 177.6°T 25.9 kn

32 31 30

33

11
34 12

No. Name Description

1 Status bar • Selects an antenna.
• Selects the mode.
• Adjusts the radar picture.
• Displays radar operational messages. See section 1.9.
2 Sensor information Shows your ship's heading, heading source, ship's speed, water
box tracking speed, speed source, course over ground, speed over
ground, position source.
Note: Position source shall meet the requirements of IMO
MSC.112(73).

1-11
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

No. Name Description

3 Menu Drop-down menu with various radar and chart functions.
4 Information box Provides various navigation data and route information.
5 TT/AIS setting box Sets the parameters for TT and AIS targets.
6 Trail box Sets the parameters for the target trails.
7 Alert box Shows alert messages by alert name and alert number.
• Unacknowledged or regenerated warning alerts flash in red
(alarm) or yellow-orange (warning).
• Acknowledged alerts are shown in normal video.
8 Acquisition zone box Sets an acquisition zone for TT, AIS.
9 VRM boxes Show the range and TTG to the VRM1, VRM2.
10 Target list button Displays the TT and AIS target list.
11 Trial maneuver box Sets the parameters for the trial maneuver.
12 Drop mark 2 box Shows the bearing and range to the drop mark 2.
13 EBL boxes Show the bearing to the EBL1, EBL2.
14 Mark box Selects the mark to inscribe on the radar display.
15 Drop mark1 box Shows the bearing and range to the drop mark 1.
16 PI line box • Adjusts the direction and width of the parallel index lines.
• Activates or deactivates the parallel index lines.
17 Watch box Counts down the time remaining until the buzzer sounds to alert the
operator to view the radar picture.
18 InstantAccess bar™ Quick access to often-used radar, chart radar and chart functions.
For radar and chart radar functions, see section 1.10. For chart func-
tions, see section 1.9.1.
19 Tuning bar Shows tuning status.
20 Range/presentation • Selects the radar range.
mode box • Selects the presentation mode.
21 REF point box Selects the reference point (antenna or CCRP) for measurements
(range, bearing, etc.) and markers (position, etc.)
22 Heading line Indicates ship's heading.
23 Bearing scale The bearing scale provides an estimate of the bearing to a target.
24 Cursor position box This box shows
• Latitude and longitude of the cursor position.
• Range and bearing to the cursor position.
• TTG to the cursor position.
25 EBL1 Measures the bearing to a target.
26 EBL2 Measures the bearing to a target.
27 VRM1 Measures the range to a target.
28 VRM2 Measures the range to a target.
29 Drop mark 1 Find the range and bearing to drop mark position.
30 Drop mark 2 Find the range and bearing to drop mark position.
31 Antenna marker A cross marks antenna position.
32 Own ship marker An inverted “T” marks your ship’s position.
33 Stern marker Marks location of stern.
34 North marker Marks North.
35 Range rings Provide an estimate of the range to a target.

1-12
 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

How to minimize, maximize the boxes at the bottom of the screen

The boxes at the bottom of the screen that contain an arrow can be minimized. Click
the arrow to minimize the box. To restore maximum size, click the minimized box.

Click arrow
to minimize.

Click here
to maximize.

Note: The respective VRM or EBL is erased from the screen when the corresponding
VRM or EBL box is minimized.

1.8.2 Chart radar display

The chart radar display overlays an electronic chart on the radar picture. To switch be-
tween the radar and chart radar displays, click the [Chart ON/OFF] button on the In-
stantAccess bar™.

Click to hide,
show chart.

1-13
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

1.8.3 Chart for radar display

The chart display shows only the electronic chart. Click the Display mode button to se-
lect [CHART for RADAR] to activate this display. See Chapter 6 for a description of
the chart display.

Select [CHART for RADAR].

CHART
for RADAR
030.1°
Voyage

030.1°

XTD Limit:
XTD:

0.50 NM

0.50 NM

0.5NM 4min
AUTO ACT FILT

1-14
 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

1.9 Status Bar

The Status bar is displayed at the top of screen in all modes. This bar provides, in the
radar and chart radar modes, buttons for selection of the mode, antenna and chart da-
tabase, and adjustment of the radar picture.

For a description of the Status bar used in the conning for radar, chart for radar mode,
see section 24.1 and section 6.1.2.

1.9.1 Status bar for radar, chart radar mode

2 4 6 8 10 12

1 3 5 7 9 11 13

No. Button name Description

1 Display mode Selects a mode: radar, chart for radar, or conning for radar.
2 STBY/TX Toggles the radar between stand-by and transmit.
3 Antenna Selects an antenna.
4 Customize echo Presets the radar controls for specific navigation purpose; for example,
congested waters.
5 Chart database Selects the IMO chart database (base, primary, standard or all). Available
in the chart radar mode.
6 Message area Shows operational messages and icons.
7 RAIN Reduces rain clutter.
8 SEA Reduces sea clutter.
9 GAIN Adjusts the gain of the radar receiver.
10 Settings Manages user profiles; opens the Settings menu.

11 Date • Displays the date and whether the time indication is local or UTC.
• Selects the time to use, local or UTC.
• Sets the time difference between local and UTC (to use local time).
12 Time Displays the time.
13 Working Rotates clockwise if the system is working properly.
indicator
Picture freeze
R If the picture freezes, the picture is not updated. After the picture freezes,
the buzzer sounds and the Status LED blinks in red. Reset the power to re-
E C store normal operation.

1-15
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

1.9.2 How to operate the buttons, slider bars on the Status bar
The Status bar has three types of controls: toggle button, drop-down list button and
slider bar. You operate the buttons and bars with the trackball module.

Control type Example of control

Toggle button
A toggle button alternately selects one of two
functions assigned to the button. For example,
the [STBY TX] button toggles the radar between
stand-by and TX. The background color of the
[STBY TX] button momentarily changes to light-
blue when switching from standby to TX.
Drop-down list button
A drop-down list button provides a list from which
to select an option related to the label on the but-
ton. A drop-down list button is identified by a tri-
angle on the button’s bottom-right corner. The Click button to show
[Chart database] button, shown in the right figure, drop-down list.
is an example of a drop-down list button.

Slider bar
The slider bars provide for adjustment of the ra-
dar picture. [GAIN], [SEA] and [RAIN] are slider
bar buttons. To adjust the bar coarsely, put the
cursor at any location within the slider bar area
then push the left button. For fine adjustment, put
the cursor at the end of the slider bar and roll the
trackball while holding down the left button. Re-
lease the button to finish.

1-16
 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

1.10 InstantAccess BarTM

The InstantAccess bar™ runs vertically along the
left edge of the screen and is displayed always.
This bar provides, in the radar and chart radar
modes, buttons for adjustment of the radar picture
and chart, AIS operations, display brilliance con-
trol (FURUNO monitor only), MOB, screenshot,
etc.

For a description of the InstantAccess bar™

used in the chart mode, see section 6.1.2.

13

Radar Radar
mode, mode,
map chart
ON ON

1-17
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

No. Button name Description

1 PULSE Selects radar pulse length.
2 TUNE Select the radar receiver tuning method, automatic or man-
ual, and manually tunes the radar receiver.
3 IR Activates or deactivates the interference rejector.
4 ES Activates or deactivates the echo stretch.
5 EAV Activates or deactivates the echo averaging.
6 HL OFF Temporarily erases everything but radar echoes.
7 CU/TM reset Resets ship's position in course-up and true motion modes.
8 MAP ON/OFF Shows or hides the radar map marks on the radar display,
in the radar mode.
9 CHART ON/OFF Shows or hides the electronic chart.
10 Chart Disp Shows, hides various chart objects. Shown in the chart ra-
dar mode. See section 2.39.2.
11 OWN AIS Shows the [VOYAGE DATA] menu, to set your ships AIS
data.
12 Displays screen for “received AIS message.”

AIS message
13 Selects a color palette.

Palette
14 Adjusts the brilliance of the monitor. (Adjustment of the
backlighting for the control unit is available in the chart for
radar mode.)
BRILL
15 MOB Enters the MOB mark at the current position.
16 Takes a screenshot.

Capture
17 Restore previous condition in radar map and text input.

UNDO

1-18
 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

1.10.1 How to operate the buttons on the InstantAccess bar™

The InstantAccess bar™ has three types of buttons: toggle button, drop-down list but-
ton, and slider bar button. (The MOB and Capture buttons are special buttons.) The
buttons can be operated with the trackball module or the InstantAccess knob. This
section shows you how to use the InstantAccess knob.

Toggle button Drop-down list button Slider bar button

A drop-down list button provides the
functions related to the label on the
button. This type of button is identi-
fied by the triangle at the bottom-right
corner of the button.

[Palette]
button

Palette list
1. Push the InstantAccess knob to enable its use with the InstantAccess bar™.
2. Rotate the InstantAccess knob to select a button. The background color of the
button selected is light-blue.
3. Do one of the following depending on button type.
1) Toggle button: Push the knob to select setting.
2) Drop-down list button or slider bar: Push the knob then rotate the knob to
select an item or adjust the slider bar. Push the knob to confirm your selection.
Note: You can use the ESC key to return to the previous state.

1.11 Sensor Information Box

The Sensor information box displays the sen-
sor data and the name of the datum in use.
The sensor indications and names are col-
ored according to sensor state. See the table
on the next page.
• HDG: Heading and its source.
• SPD: Longitudinal speed and its source.
The direction of transverse speed is indi-
cated with arrows, , Starboard, , Port.
• COG: Course over ground and its source.
• SOG: Speed over ground and its source.
• POSN: Latitude and longitude position of
own ship and its source.
Note: The position source shall meet
• Datum: Chart datum (WGS84, WGS72,
the requirements of IMO MSC.112(73).
etc.) in use. No datum appears when there
is no datum sentence.

1-19
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

Color of nav data indications and sensor name

The color of the nav data indications and sensor names changes according to the
state of the sensor data. The table shown below provides basic indication and color
meanings. For detailed information, see Appendix 4. When no sensor data is received,
the sensor source indication is blank and the related indication shows asterisks.

Color of nav Color of

Nav data indication State
data indication sensor name
Green White Sensor is normal.

Yellow White Validity of data is low or

offset is applied.

Yellowish- Yellowish- Integrity check failed

12.5kn orange orange
GPS1
0.3kn
286.0°T GPS1
13.1kn
30°00.0000'N
GPS1 020°00.0000'E

Green, data No display Data is not being re-

shown with as- ceived.
terisks (***.*)

Yellow White Data is input manually

(manual heading, gyro
correction, manual
speed, dead reckoning).

1-20
 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

1.12 Menu Overview

The menu consists of eight main menus and several sub menus. You can operate the
menu with the Radar Control Unit or trackball module. The system closes open menus
whenever there is no menu operation for 30 seconds.

1.12.1 Basic menu operation

1. Open the main menu.
Control Unit: Press the MENU key.
Trackball module: Click the menu title bar at the right side of the display.

Menu title bar

2. Select a menu.
Control Unit: Press the corresponding numeric key. For example, press the 3 key
to show the [NAV TOOL] menu.
Trackball module: Click the menu desired. The current selection is highlighted in
green.

1
2
Click
3
[3 NAV TOOL]
4
OR 5
press the 6
3 key.
7

3. Select a menu item.

Control Unit: Press the corresponding numeric key.
Trackball module: Click the menu item desired. The current selection is highlight-
ed in green.
4. Select a menu option.
Control Unit: Press the corresponding numeric key. The current selection is high-
lighted in orange.
Trackball module: Spin the scrollwheel. The current selection is highlighted in or-
ange.
5. Confirm your selection.
Control Unit: Press the ENTER key.
Trackball module: Push the left button.
Note: Hereafter, "select" in a menu operating procedure means to press the applica-
ble numeric key on the Control Unit or push the left button on the trackball module.

1-21
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

Keys, buttons to use for navigation in menus

Control Unit

MENU key: Open main menu, or close menu when main menu is displayed.
CANCEL key: Go back one layer in menu, or close menu when main menu is dis-
played.
key: Return to main menu, in no. 2 layer or higher.

Trackball module
Right button: Go back one layer, or close menu when main menu is displayed.
Left button: (1) Click menu title bar to go back one layer, or close menu when main
menu is displayed, (2) Click the left arrow on the menu title bar to return to the main
menu, in no.2 layer or higher.

Menu history feature

This chart radar remembers the 10 last-used menus to help you go to recently used
menus quickly. The memorized menus are cleared when the power is turned off. In-
stallation- and service-related menus and menus where no operation occurred are not
memorized. Menus accessed multiple times are counted as one menu.

Click the memory history buttons on the menu title bar to navigate through the last-
used menus.

Menu history buttons

History back History forward

button button

For example, the last two used menus are [NAV TOOL] and [AIS].

Click

Click

Memorized menu no. 1

Memorized menu no. 2

1-22
 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

1.12.2 How to enter numeric data

Select the numeric data, then do one of the following:
Control Unit: Use the ten keys to enter data.
Trackball module: Spin the scrollwheel to set data then push the left button.

1.12.3 How to enter alphanumeric character data

Some operations display a software keyboard to enter alphanumeric character data.

Click to switch between

letters and symbols.

To enter characters, click applicable characters on the software keyboard. You can
switch between letter input and symbol input by clicking the key shown in the illustra-
tion above:

1-23
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

1.13 Context-Sensitive Menus in the Radar Mode

Context-sensitive menus are available with many of the boxes and buttons surround-
ing the display area and objects within the display area. Right-click the boxes and but-
tons marked with numerals in the illustration below to show the related context-
sensitive menus. If a menu is not operated within 30 seconds it is automatically closed.

For context-sensitive menus in the chart mode, see the chapter on chart overview.

1.13.1 Context-sensitive menus available with buttons and boxes

40 41 1

38 39 2

37
3

36 RADAR
FUNCTIONS
35 (see next page)

33
34 5
6 7
8 9 10
32 11 12
23 13 14
15 16
30 25 18
17 20
21
31 19 20
3229
29 ° 28
240.8° 27 26 24 22
0.088

No. Box name Menu No. Box name Menu

1 Adjust Local Time Local Time Adjust 2 Cursor Position Range-Bearing Po-
sition, X-Y Position,
Cursor Menu
3 Sensor Informa- Select Sensor, OS 4 AIS Info Expanded AIS Data,
tion, Datum Box Info Menu AIS Message
5 Association Association OFF/ 6 TT OFF / MAN / AUTO /
TT•AIS, Association MAN/AUTO,TT
Menu Menu, Symbol Menu
7 AIS DISP OFF / FILT / 8 Vector OS Vector Menu,
ALL, AIS Menu, Target Vector Menu
Symbol Menu

1-24
 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

No. Box name Menu No. Box name Menu

9 Vector Time Vector Time (30 s - 10 Vector Reference True-G(S), REL, OS
60 min), OS Vector Vector Menu, Target
Menu, Target Vector Vector Menu
Menu
11 CPA Range CPA Range 12 CPA time CPA Time
(0.5 - 6.0 NM) (1 - 15 min)
13 AIS CPA Auto Activate Menu 14 Auto Activate OFF, AUTO ACT
FILT, AUTO ACT
ALL, Auto Activate
Menu
15 Lost TGT TT Lost Filter Menu, 16 Lost TGT Filter OFF, FILT, ALL, TT
AIS Lost Filter Menu Lost Filter Menu,
AIS Lost Filter Menu
17 Past POSN Past POSN Menu 18 Past POSN time Past POSN Time
(OFF, 30 s - 6 min),
Past POSN Menu
19 Trail Trail All Clear, Trail 20 Trail Time Trail Time (OFF, 15
Menu s - 30 min, CONT),
Trail Menu
21 Trail/Past POSN True-G(S), REL, 22 Alert List Alert List/Log Win-
Reference Past POSN Menu, dow
Trail Menu
23 Trial Trial Mode, Trial 24 AZ Acquisition Zone
Maneuver Menu Menu
25 Drop Mark 2 Drop2 Off 26 VRM 2 VRM2 Off,
EBL•VRM Menu
27 VRM 1 VRM1 Off, 28 EBL 2 EBL2 Off,
EBL•VRM Menu EBL•VRM Menu
29 EBL 1 EBL1 Off, 30 Drop Mark 1 Drop1 Off
EBL•VRM Menu
31 Mark Mark Color (B-type 32 PI Line Number of PI Line,
only), Mark Position, Reset PI Line,
MAP File, Edit Map PI Menu
Comment,
Map•Mark Menu
33 Watch Watch Time 34 Brill Menu Brill Menu
(OFF, 6 - 20 min)
35 Chart ON/OFF Chart Display Menu 36 MAP ON/OFF Radar Map Menu,
Route Menu, Event
Menu, User Chart
Menu
37 TUNE Tune Initialize 38 PULSE Pulse Menu
39 RANGE Range Scales 40 Antenna Selection Dual Radar,
(0.125 - 96.0 NM) ANT Select Menu
41 Customize Echo Customize Echo
Menu

1-25
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

1.13.2 Context-sensitive menus in the display area in the radar and

chart radar modes
Right-click anywhere in the display area in the radar and chart radar modes to show
the context-sensitive menu.

Radar Map Off, Chart On

Radar Map On, Chart Off Radar Map Off, Chart Off

Radar Map Off, Chart On,

area selected
Radar Map On, Chart Off, Radar Map Off, Chart Off,
area selected area selected

[Target Data/ACQ/ACT]: For cursor-selected TT or AIS target, display target data, acquire
target for TT, or activate sleeping AIS target.
[Target Cancel]: Cancel tracking on selected tracked target (erase target), sleep activated
AIS target.
[Off Center]: Off center the display.
[EBL Offset]: Offset EBL1, EBL2 (to measure range and bearing between two targets).
[Zoom Set]: Select zoom area.
[Area Select]: Specify the area where to delete, copy marks.
[Mark Delete]: Delete cursor-selected mark. Grayed out when radar map is off.
[Mark Copy]: Copy cursor-selected mark. Grayed out when radar map is off.
[Own Ship Offset]: Apply an offset to own ship
position.
[REF Mark]: Make cursor-selected target a reference target (for use in TT). Grayed out un-
less TT is active.
[Cursor Size]: Select cursor size, large or small.
[Notes Detail]: Show details about cursor-selected Notes.
[MOB Delete]: Delete selected MOB mark. This menu is shown only when the context-sen-
sitive menu is shown on MOB.

Area selected
[Area Target Cancel]: Cancel tracking on targets within the area selected. The targets to can-
cel tracking can be selected as follows;
• [Any]: Cancel tracking of TT or AIS target; delete REF mark.
• [TT Only]: Cancel tracking of TT; delete REF mark.
• [AIS Only]: Cancel tracking of AIS target.
[Area Mark Delete]: Delete all marks within the area selected.
[Area Mark Copy]: Copy all marks within the area selected.
[Area Cancel]: Cancel the area created.

1-26
 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

1.14 Cursor Position

Cursor data appears in the Cursor position box at the top-right position on the display.
The appearance of the box is slightly different between the 23-inch and 19-inch dis-
plays, although the content is the same.

For the Cursor position box that appears in the Chart mode, see section 6.6

Cursor position
(lat/lon) Time to go to
cursor position
Bearing and
range to cursor Click indication to switch
position between bearing and range and
x and y coordinates.
x and y
coordinates of
cursor position

The indication below the cursor position can show the range and bearing to the cursor
or x-y coordinates of the cursor position. Click that indication and select [Range-Bear-
ing position] or [x-y position] as appropriate. For the X-Y coordinate display, the
Y-axis is the heading line, right/top is "plus" and left/lower is "minus".

Note 1: The cursor bearing can be selected to true or relative with [1 CURSOR BEAR-
ING] in the [CURSOR] menu. Right-click the indication and select [Cursor Menu] to
open the [CURSOR] menu.
Note 2: The cursor position is shown as "---.-" when the cursor is not within the effec-
tive display area.

1.15 How to Select Sensor Settings

This radar system accepts navigation data input two ways: System or Local. System
shares sensor data among multiple radars in a network. Sensor priority is also com-
monly shared among the radars. Local selects a sensor outside the network.

1. Right-click anywhere in the Sensor information box to show the context-sensitive

menu.
2. Click [Select Sensor].

ng]

Select Sensor System

[OS Info Menu] Local
[Setting]

3. Click [Local] or [System] as applicable.

Note: The sensor system can also be selected in the chart mode through this pro-
cedure and through the menu. Open the menu then select [7 OWN SHIP INFO]
followed by [1 SENSOR].

1-27
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

1.16 How to Enter Ship Speed

The TT and azimuth stabilized orientation modes require own ship speed input and
compass signal. The speed can be entered automatically from a speed log (STW,
SOG) or GPS (SOG), or manually on the menu. Note that the FURUNO GPS Naviga-
tor GP-150 provides COG and SOG.

1. Right-click anywhere in the Sensor information box to show the context-sensitive

menu.

ng]

Select Sensor System

[OS Info Menu] Local
[Setting]

2. Click [Select Sensor] then click [Setting].

3. Use the arrow buttons to select the [SPD] page.
Arrow buttons

Stablilization
mode
Sensor type
selection

Check for automatic

speed input

Speed
sensor
list

Check for manual

speed input

Select to use radar Set speed and

as source for speed course of drift
and course

SPD page
4. For automatic input, follow the procedure below. For manual input, go to step
5.
1) Check [Sensors].
2) Set the priority for the speed sensors in case of Local sensor. Click the triangle
on any line then select the sensor to set as the primary source of speed. All
other sensors are then set as secondary source. Only one sensor can be pri-

1-28
 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

mary while the others can be secondary. If a speed sensor is changed from
secondary to primary state and another speed sensor was selected as prima-
ry, then that sensor previously selected to primary state is then automatically
selected to secondary state.
3) Select [Bottom] or [Water] at [Stabilization Mode] to set the stabilization meth-
od. Select [Bottom] for GPS or [Water] for a speed log.
4) Check [LOG] or [GPS] at [Sensor Type] to select the source of speed data.
5) Go to step 6.
5. For manual input, set the stabilization mode for [Water] and check [Manual].
Click the manual box to show the up and down arrows then click appropriate arrow
to set speed.
Note: For set and drift, see chapter 16.
6. Click the [OK] button to save the settings then click the [MENU] bar to close the
menu.

Notes on speed input

• IMO Resolution A.823(19) for TT requires that a speed log to be interfaced with a
TT should be capable of providing through-the-water speed (forward speed).
• A single-axis water log cannot measure speed when the wind is coming from the
leeway direction.
• When AIS is active, [Manual], [Reference SPD] and [Set Drift] are shown in gray to
indicate that they are not available for selection.

1-29
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

1.17 How to Enter Heading

Choose manual or automatic heading input as follows:

1. Right-click anywhere in the Sensor information box to show the context-sensitive

menu.
2. Click [Select Sensor] then click [Setting].
3. Use the arrow buttons to select the [HDG] page.

Check for automatic heading input

GY001
2
Heading sensor list

Analog gyro heading

Manual heading input

(not shown on IMO type)

[Gyro Correction] is shown when a Gyro Correction

autopilot which is compliant with
IEC 62065 Ed. 2 is connected.

HDG page
4. For automatic input, follow the procedure below. For manual input, go to step
5.
1) Check [Sensors].
2) Set the priority for the heading sensors. Click the triangle on any line then se-
lect the sensor to set as the primary source of heading. All other sensors are
then set as secondary source. Only one sensor can be primary while the oth-
ers can be secondary. If a heading sensor is changed from secondary to pri-
mary state and another heading sensor was selected as primary, then that
sensor previously selected to primary state is then automatically selected to
secondary state.
3) Go to step 6.
5. For manual input, check the [Manual] box. Click the heading input box to show
the up and down arrows. Click the arrows to set heading.
6. Click the [OK] button to save the settings then click the [MENU] bar to close the
menu.

1-30
 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

1.18 How to Mark MOB Position

Use the MOB (man overboard) feature to mark the position of man overboard on the
display screen. Click the [MOB] button (in any mode) on the InstantAccess bar™.

[MOB]
button

The MOB mark (orange) instantly appears at the geographical position of your ship
when the button is clicked.

Up to 100 MOB marks can be saved. When the capacity for MOB marks is reached,
the oldest mark is automatically erased to make room for the latest.
To delete an MOB mark, right-click the mark to show the context-sensitive menu then
select [MOB Delete].

Exercise caution when using this feature in strong tide or current. The person will not
be at the MOB position for a very long time.

How to find MOB information

In a Chart for RADAR mode other than Chart maintenance, put the cursor on a MOB
mark and click. Text can be entered in the [MOB Description] window. Click the [OK]
button to save the text and close the window.

1-31
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

1.19 How to Offset Position

The position shown in the Sensor information box may be different from the actual po-
sition. This error affects the positioning accuracy of radar echoes, radar map and TT
and AIS symbols. If there is a difference, apply an offset to position as shown below
to compensate for the error.

1. Right-click the display area to show the

context-sensitive menu.
2. Select [Own Ship Offset] and push the Offset value
left button. The color of the cursor be- range, bearing)
comes cyan.
3. Roll the trackball until the cursor is at the "correct position".
4. Push the left button to confirm.
To cancel the offset, show the context-sensitive menu then select [Reset Own Ship
Offset]. The indication [Offset] and the offset values are then erased from the display.

1.20 How to Select Time Format, Set Local Time

A GPS navigator feeds time and date data (ZDA sentence) to the chart radar and they
appear on the Status bar. Neither the time nor the date can be adjusted, however you
can select between UTC time (default) and local time. You can switch between the lo-
cal time and the UTC time by left-clicking the Current time format indication.

Current time format

Left click: Switch between local
and UTC times Time
Right click: Adjust local time

To use the local time, enter the time difference between the local time and the UTC
time as shown below.
Note: Where the on-board time is synchronized, the local time setting is not available.
1. Right-click the Current time format indication to show the context-sensitive menu.
2. Click [Adjust Local Time] to display the [Local Time Adjust] dialog box.
3. Enter the time difference between the local time and
the UTC time, in hours and minutes. Use the button
on the left to select the time offset direction. Select
"+" if the local time is ahead of the UTC time, or "-"
if it is behind the UTC time.
4. When input is complete, click [OK] to apply the
changes.

1-32
 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

1.21 How to Take a Screenshot of the Display

Click the [Capture] button on the InstantAccess bar™ to
take a screenshot and save it to the SSD (Solid State
Drive). You can save a maximum of 100 screenshots.
When the memory for screenshots becomes full, you [Capture]
cannot take any more screenshots. In this case, delete button
unnecessary screenshots. You cannot take a screen-
shot when a menu or a dialog box is opened.

Screenshots can be copied to a USB flash memory. For how to process screenshots,
see section 22.11.

1.22 The Settings Menu

The [Settings] button gives you access to the user profiles and the [Settings] menu.
The [Settings] menu has facilities for screenshot management, file management, di-
agnostic tests and customizing. See chapter 22.

[Settings]
button

1.23 User Profiles for Radar, Chart Radar

The [Settings] button lets you store ten sets of custom settings for brilliance settings
and color settings (echoes, TT and AIS symbols and echo trails). This allows individual
users to quickly set the system according to their preferences.

1.23.1 How to create a profile

1. Set the color settings (echoes, TT and AIS symbols, echo trail) as desired.
2. Click [ ] on the Status bar then click [Manage Pro-
file].
3. Select a profile number from the “Profile” drop-down
list.
Note: Profiles 06-10 are disabled in the default set-
ting. To enable a disabled profile, select the profile
to enable from the “Profile” drop-down list then uncheck [Disable this profile].
4. Click [Save Current Settings].

1.23.2 How to disable a profile

Select the profile to disable from the “Profile” drop-down list then check [Disable this
profile]. The profile enabled at section 1.23.4 cannot be disabled.

1-33
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

1.23.3 How to restore default settings to a profile

Select the applicable profile from the “Profile” drop-down list then click [Restore De-
fault Settings].

1.23.4 How to activate a profile

1. Click [ ] on the Status bar.

Profiles
(enabled)

2. Click the profile number to activate.

1.23.5 How to restore a profile to the default settings

1. Click [ ] on the Status bar then click [Manage Profile].
2. Select a profile number from the “Profile” drop-down list.
3. Click [Restore Default Settings]. The confirmation message "Attention: This profile
will be restored to the default. Do you wish to continue?" appears.
4. Click [Yes].
Note: This setting for the default is available when selecting a profile to activate next
time. See section 1.21.3.

1.23.6 How to change the settings on the current display to the rec-
ommended settings
1. Click [ ] on the Status bar.
2. Click [Default Settings]. The confirmation message "Attention: Settings will be
changed to the default. Do you wish to continue?" appears.
3. Click [Yes]. The settings on the following table are changed to the recommended
settings.
Note: This function is not available when using the interswitch function. See sec-
tion 2.28.

Radar Mode
Items Settings
RAIN, SEA AUTO
GAIN 80
EAV No change
TUNE TUNE AUTO
RANGE 6 NM, 6 SM, 6 km, 6 kyd
VRM1 0.25 NM, 0.25 SM, 0.25 km, 0.25 kyd

1-34
 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

Items Settings
VRM2 OFF (No change)
EBL1 ON (No change)
EBL2 OFF (No change)
Presentation mode North-up TM
Note: Head-up RM with no heading or position data.
Off Center The ship’s position is put beyond 75% of the range scale.
Trail Trail time: 6 min, Trail mode: True-G
Past POSN OFF
Lost TGT OFF
TT ACQ No change
Note: TT OFF with no heading data.
Vector Vector time: 6 min, Vector reference: REL
AZ1, AZ2 (acquisition OFF
zone)
AIS DISP ALL
Note: FUNC OFF with no heading or position data.
Association TT (>)
CPA/TCPA CPA: 2 NM, TCPA: 12 min
AIS CPA AUTO ACT ALL
Display mode RADAR
MAP (Radar map) No change
Route No change
Alert AZ1/AZ2: OFF, Lost TGT: OFF
Antenna connection status No change
RANGE RING OFF
PI LINE PI1 to PI6: OFF
Number of PI line, mode, bearing range truncate: No
change
SPD (Own Ship Sensor Stabilization Mode: Bottom*
Setting) Sensor Type: GPS*
Sensor Setting: No change (System or Local)
*: These settings can not be applied, the settings are
changed according to the priority order of SPD.

Chart for Radar mode

Item Settings
[Route Information] menu
Route information page unit of “XTD” m
[System Sensor Settings]/[Local Sensor Settings] menu
SPD page Stabilization Mode Bottom
[Other Sensor Settings] menu
Other Sensor page Wind m/s
[Basic Setting] menu
Basic Setting page TM Reset 90%

1-35
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

Item Settings
[Chart Display] menu
General page Symbols Paper Chart
Boundaries Plain
Four Shades Unchecked
Full Light Lines Unchecked
Scale MIN Checked
Shallow Pattern Unchecked
Shallow Water Dangers Checked
Unknown Checked
Accuracy Unchecked
Highlight Date Dependent Unchecked
Highlight INFO Unchecked
Highlight Document Unchecked
General page Contour Labels Unchecked
LAT/LON Grid Unchecked
Text page Important Text Checked
NtoM page Temporary Notices Unchecked
Preliminary Notices Unchecked
No Information Unchecked
[Symbol Display] menu
General page Ship Outlines OFF
AIS Outlines OFF (greyed out)
Tracking page CCRP Checked
Primary Checked
Secondary Checked
Pivot Checked
Length 720 min
Labels 30 min
Mariner page Labels Checked
Lines Checked
Clearing Lines Checked
Tidals Checked
Areas Checked
Circles Checked
[Chart Alert] menu
Chart Alert page Safety Contour Keeps previous setting
Safety Depth Keeps previous setting
Safety Contour check box Checked
Dangerous or special areas Checked
*1
Navigational Hazard check Checked
box
Navigation Hazard Alert C (Caution)
level

1-36
 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

Item Settings
(TT•AIS) [Setting] menu
Setting.1 page Sleeping Class A OFF
Sleeping Class B OFF
Physical AtoN ON
Virtual AtoN ON
MAX Range ON, 6 NM
Chart scale/presentation mode box
Chart scale 3 NM
Presentation mode North Up TM
[Overlay/NAV Tools] box
Look-ahead page Ahead Time, 6 min
Echo page * 2 Display OFF
TT/AIS page TT display OFF
AIS display DISP ALL
Vector 6 min, TGND
Past POSN OFF
Other functions
Brilliance CALIB
Viewing Date - Display Date Auto: Today
Split Screen Full Screen (no split)
Chart database mode CUSTOM
TM Reset function Enabled
Own track Disabled
Log - NAV Log - Detail dialog SHOW TRACK
*1: Chart alert objects other than the following:

• Safety Contour • Navigational Hazard

• No Vector Chart • UKC Limit
• Sounding UKC Limit • Non-official ENC
• Not up-to-date • Permit Expired
*2: Available on when the [Echo] page is enabled at installation.

1-37
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

1.24 How to View Chart Software Version No., Chart

System Information, and Operator's Manual
You can show chart program no., chart system information, and the operator's manual
as follows:.

1. Click the Display mode button at the left end of the Status bar to select [CHART
for RADAR].
[?] button

2. Click the [?] button on the Status bar.

3. Select [Manual] to show the operator's manual, or [About] to show chart and sys-
tem information.
On the [About] screen, click the [Version] tab to show the chart software version no.,
conning software version no., S52 presentation library version, ENC user permit no.,
and C-MAP SDK software version no. Click the [System 1] tab to show system infor-
mation: CPU type, RAM capacity, SSD free/SSD capacity, Equipment ID and dongle
information. [Function] shows this unit’s capabilities. Click the [System 2] tab to show
the startup time for this equipment.

The information shown below may be different from those on your system.

Jeppesen SDK Software Ver.:

Actual permit number

appears here
Chart [Version] tab Conning [Version] tab

[System 1] tab [System 2] tab

1-38
 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

1.25 Tips (operational guidance)

This chart radar provides operational tips for the status bar, InstantAccess bar™ and
Mark box. To get a tip, simply put the cursor on the object. For example, put the cursor
on the [BRILL] button on the InstantAccess bar™. The tip "Adjust brilliance" appears.

Tip

If you do not need the tips, you can turn them off with [TIPS GUIDANCE] in the [INI-
TIAL SETTING] menu.

1-39
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

This page is intentionally left blank.

1-40
2. RADAR, CHART RADAR
OPERATION

2.1 How to Transmit

After the power is turned on and the magnetron has warmed,
[STBY TX] button
"ST-BY" appears at the screen center, meaning the radar is
ready to transmit radar pulses. You can transmit by pressing
the STBY TX key on the Control Unit, or clicking the [STBY
TX] button on the Status bar.

The radar is initially set to previously used range and pulse length. Other settings such
as brilliance levels, VRMs, EBLs and menu option selections are also set to previous
settings.

The STBY TX key (or [STBY TX] button) toggles the radar between STBY and
TRANSMIT state. The antenna is stopped in stand-by and rotates in transmit. Set the
radar in standby when its use is not required, to conserve the life of the magnetron.

2.2 How to Tune the Radar Receiver

After the radar is transmitting, adjust the receiver to the exact frequency of the trans-
mitter, automatically or manually. The current tuning method and tuning status is
shown at the top-left position.

[TUNE] button Tuning bar

TUNE MAN: Manual tuning
TUNE AUTO: Automatic tuning

2.2.1 How to initialize tuning

Automatic tuning is initialized during the installation. However, if you feel that automat-
ic tuning is not working properly try re-initializing the tuning. Right-click the [TUNE] but-
ton then select [Tune initialize] to start the initialization. "Tune INI" appears during the
initialization.

2.2.2 Automatic tuning

Click the [TUNE] button on the InstantAccess bar™ to display [TUNE AUTO].

2-1
2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION

2.2.3 Manual tuning

To tune the radar, start by setting the brilliance to a comfortable level, adjusting the
gain until the background speckle just disappears, and selecting the 48 NM range.
Then, do the following:

1. Choose a weak contact somewhere near the edge of the screen and concentrate
on that, while adjusting the gain control in small steps - allowing at least two sec-
onds between each step - until the chosen contact is as big, bright and consistent
as possible.
2. Click the [TUNE] button on the InstantAccess bar™ to display [TUNE MAN].
3. Put the cursor on the tuning bar.
4. Spin the scrollwheel to tune. The best tuning point is where the bar swings maxi-
mum. The arrow below the bar shows the tuning control position; not the tuning
condition.

2.3 Pulse Length

The pulse length in use is displayed at the top-left position on the screen, using the
indications shown in the table below.

Pulse length indication Pulse length (s)

S1 0.07
S2 0.15
M1 0.3
M2 0.5
M3 0.7
L 1.2
Appropriate pulse lengths are preset to individual range scales and function keys. If
you are not satisfied with the current pulse length settings, you can change them as
shown below.

2.3.1 How to select a pulse length

You can select the pulse length for the 0.5 to 24 NM range
MENU
scales as shown below. ECHO
CUSTOMIZE ECHO
1. Open the menu then select [1 ECHO], [1 CUSTOMIZE ← PULSE
ECHO] and [8 PULSE] menus to show the [PULSE] 1 0.5NM
menu. S1 / S2
2 0.75NM
2. Do one of the following: S1 / S2 / M1
Control Unit: Press appropriate numeric key to select 3 1.5NM
corresponding item number. S1 / S2 / M1
4 3NM
Trackball module: Click appropriate item.
S2 / M1 / M2 / M3
3. Select desired option by pressing the numeric key 5 6NM
pressed at step 2 or spinning the scrollwheel. M1 / M2 / M3 / L
6 12-24NM
4. To confirm selection, press the ENTER key on the Con- M2 / M3 / L
trol Unit, or push the left button.

2-2
 2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION

2.3.2 How to change the pulse length

1. Click the [Pulse] button at the top of the
InstantAccess bar™.
2. Click a pulse length.

2.4 How to Adjust the Sensitivity

The GAIN control (or [Gain] button) adjusts the sensitivity of the receiver. The proper
setting is such that the background noise is just visible on the screen. If you set up for
too little sensitivity, weak echoes may be missed. On the other hand excessive sensi-
tivity yields too much background noise; strong targets may be missed because of the
poor contrast between desired echoes and the background noise on the display.

Adjust the gain so background noise is just visible on the screen, using one of the fol-
lowing methods:

Control Unit: While monitoring the radar image and the gain slider bar, operate the
GAIN control to adjust the sensitivity.

Trackball module: For coarse adjustment, put the cursor within the slider bar area
then push the left button. For fine adjustment, put the cursor at the end of the slider
bar then roll the trackball while pushing and holding down the left button. Release the
button to finish.

Put cursor on slider bar and push and

hold left button. Drag cursor to new
location then release left button.

2.5 How to Suppress Sea Clutter

Echoes from waves cover the central part of the display with random signals known
as sea clutter. The higher the waves, and the higher the antenna above the water, the
further the clutter will extend. When sea clutter masks the picture, suppress it with the
A/C SEA control (or [SEA] on the Status bar), either manually or automatically.

When both sea clutter and rain clutter are reduced, the sensitivity is decreased more
than when only one is adjusted. For that reason adjust them carefully.

The echo average is useful for reducing reflections from the sea surface. However,
high-speed targets are harder to detect than stationary ones when the echo average
is active.

2-3
2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION

2.5.1 How to reduce sea clutter automatically

Auto A/C SEA allows for fine-tuning of the A/C SEA circuit, within ±20 dB. Accordingly,
with the bar reading set to 100, gain is not lowered to minimum as with manual A/C
SEA on close-in ranges. Further, the auto A/C SEA level is low because the average
value of the original input echo is low in areas where there are no sea surface reflec-
tions. For example, when the ship is alongside a quay and the radar picture shows
echoes from both land and sea, you can observe the size of echoes because the STC
curve is different depending size of echoes.

To get automatic adjustment of sea clutter, do one of the following:

Control Unit: Push the A/C SEA control to display SEA mode indication
[AUTO] on the [SEA] mode indication on the Status
bar.

Trackball module: Click the [SEA] mode indication

to display [AUTO].

2.5.2 How to reduce sea clutter manually

The A/C SEA control reduces the ampli-
fication of echoes at short ranges (where
clutter is the greatest) and progressively
increases amplification as the range in-
creases, so amplification will be normal
at those ranges where there is no sea
clutter. Sea clutter at A/C SEA adjusted; sea
screen center clutter suppressed
The proper setting of the A/C SEA
should be such that the clutter is broken
up into small dots, and small targets become distinguishable. If the setting is set too
low, targets will be hidden in the clutter, while if the setting is too high, both sea clutter
and targets will disappear from the display. In most cases adjust the control until clut-
ter has disappeared to leeward, but a little is still visible windward.

Be careful not to remove all sea clutter, because you may erase weak echoes. Fur-
ther, the possibility of losing weak echoes is greater when you use both A/C SEA and
A/C RAIN to reduce clutter.

To reduce sea clutter manually, do one of the following:

Control Unit: Push the A/C SEA control to display [MAN] on the [SEA] mode indica-
tion on the Status bar. Rotate the A/C SEA control to adjust the sea clutter.

Trackball module: Click the [SEA] mode indication on the Status bar to display
[MAN]. For coarse adjustment, put the cursor within the slider bar area then push the
left button. For fine adjustment, put the cursor at the end of the slider bar then roll the
trackball while pushing and holding down the left button. Release the button to finish.

2-4
 2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION

2.6 How to Suppress Rain Clutter

The vertical beam width of the antenna is designed to see surface targets even when
the ship is rolling. However, by this design the unit will also detect rain clutter (rain,
snow, or hail) in the same manner as normal targets.

The A/C RAIN control adjusts the receiver sensitivity as the A/C SEA control does but
rather in a longer time period (longer range). The higher the setting, the greater the
anti-clutter effect. When echoes from precipitation mask solid targets, adjust the A/C
RAIN control to split up these unwanted echoes into a speckled pattern, making rec-
ognition of solid targets easier.

Be careful not to remove all rain clutter, because you can erase weak echoes. Further,
the possibility of losing weak echoes is greater when you use both A/C RAIN and A/C
SEA to reduce clutter.

Note 1: When both sea clutter and rain clutter are reduced the sensitivity is decreased
more than when only one is adjusted. For that reason adjust them carefully.
Note 2: The echo average feature useful for reducing reflections from the sea surface.
However, high-speed targets are harder to detect than stationary ones when the echo
average is active.

2.6.1 How to reduce rain clutter automatically

Control Unit: Push the A/C RAIN control to display [AUTO1], [AUTO2], [AUTO3] or
[AUTO4] on RAIN mode indication on the Status bar. The higher the number the great-
er the degree of rain clutter reduction.

RAIN mode indication

Trackball module: Click the [RAIN] mode indication on the Status bar to display [AU-
TO1], [AUTO2], [AUTO3] or [AUTO4]. The higher the number the greater the degree
of rain clutter reduction.

2.6.2 How to reduce rain clutter manually

Control Unit: Push the A/C RAIN control to display [MAN] on the [RAIN] mode indi-
cation on the Status bar. While watching the radar picture, adjust the A/C RAIN control
to reduce the clutter.

Trackball module: Click the [RAIN] mode indication on the Status bar to show [MAN].
For coarse adjustment, put the cursor within the slider bar area then push the left but-
ton. For fine adjustment, put the cursor at the end of the slider bar then roll the trackball
while pushing and holding down the left button. Release the button to finish.

Note: The detection range is reduced when the RAIN is used to show targets in rain.
Generally, the amount of rain, TX pulse length and TX frequency are factors in deter-
mining how the detection range is affected. The figures on the next page illustrate this
occurrence.

2-5
2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION

16
4 mm/h rain (short pulse)

(NM)
16 mm/h rain - short pulse

Detection(NM)
14 4 mm/h rain - short pulse 16 mm/h rain (short pulse)
16 mm/h rain - long pulse
4 mm/h rain - long pulse
detection
12
4 mm/h rain (short pulse)
10
First

16 mm/h rain (long pulse)

ofoffirst

16 mm/h rain - short pulse

48mm/h rain - short pulse
16 mm/h rain - long pulse
Range

46mm/h rain - long pulse

range
of of

4
Reduction
Reduction

0
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
Original range of first detection (NM)
Reduction of rain to first detection due to rain at S-band

16
16 mm/h rain - short pulse
4 mm/h rain - short pulse
14
Reduction of Range of First Detection (NM)

16 mm/h rain - long pulse

4 mm/h rain - long pulse 4 mm/h rain (short pulse)
12
4 mm/h rain (long pulse)
10
16 mm/h rain (short pulse)
8

4
16 mm/h rain (long pulse)
2

0
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
Original range of first detection (NM)
Reduction of rain to first detection due to rain at X-band

The author thanks the International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) for permission to reproduce
Information from its Interantional Standard IEC 62388 ed.1.0 (2007). All such extracts are copyright of
IEC, Geneva, Switzerland. All rights reserved. Further information on the IEC is available from
www.iec.ch. IEC has no responsibility for the placement and context in which the extracts and
contents are reproduced by the author, or is IC in any way responsible for the other content or
accuracy therein.

How to read the graph

Using the X-band graph as an example, a radar target detected in rain on the 8 NM
range scale can only be detected at the ranges shown below:

4 mm/h rain (short pulse): approx 7.5 NM

16 mm/h rain (short pulse): approx 5.6 NM
4 mm/h rain (long pulse): approx 2.6 NM
16 mm/h rain (long pulse): approx 0.9 NM

2-6
 2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION

2.7 Interference Rejector

Mutual radar interference may occur in the vicinity of an-
other shipborne radar operating in the same frequency
band. It is seen on the screen as a number of bright
spikes either in irregular patterns or in the form of usual-
ly curved spoke-like dotted lines extending from the cen-
ter to the edge of the picture. Activating the interference
rejector circuit can reduce this type of interference.

The interference rejector is a kind of signal correlation

circuit. It compares the received signals over succes-
sive transmissions and reduces randomly occurring sig-
nals. There are three levels of interference rejection depending on the number of
transmissions that are correlated.

Click the [IR] button on the InstantAccess bar™ then click desired rejection level. The
higher the number the greater the degree of interference rejection.

IR button

2.8 Echo Stretch

The echo stretch feature enlarges targets in the range and bearing directions to make
them easier to see, and it is available on any range. There are three levels of echo
stretch, 1, 2 and 3. The higher the number the greater the amount of stretching.

The echo stretch magnifies not only small target pips but also returns from the sea sur-
face, rain and radar interference. For this reason, suppress those types of interference
before activating the echo stretch.

Click the [ES] button on the InstantAccess bar™ then click desired echo stretch level.

ES button

2-7
2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION

2.9 Echo Averaging

The echo averaging feature, which requires heading, position and speed data, effec-
tively reduces sea clutter. Echoes received from stable targets such as ships appear
on the screen at almost the same position every rotation of the antenna. On the other
hand, unstable echoes such as sea clutter appear at random positions.

To distinguish real target echoes from sea clutter, echoes are averaged over succes-
sive picture frames. If an echo is solid and stable over successive frames, it is present-
ed in its normal intensity. Sea clutter is averaged over successive scans and its
brilliance reduced, making it easier to discriminate real targets from sea clutter.

Echo averaging uses scan-to-scan signal correlation technique based on the true mo-
tion over the ground of each target. Thus, small stationary targets such as buoys will
be shown while reducing random echoes such as sea clutter. True echo averaging is
not however effective for picking up small targets running at high speeds over the
ground.

Note 1: With echo average active it is harder to detect high-speed targets than sta-
tionary ones.
Note 2: Do not use echo averaging under heavy pitching and rolling; loss of targets
can result.
Note 3: Echo averaging is turned off and the indication is greyed out when the heading
sensor signal is lost.
Before using the echo averaging function, reduce sea clutter with the A/C SEA control.
Leave a little sea clutter on the screen so as not to erase weak targets. Then, do as
follows:

Click the [EAV] button on the InstantAccess bar™ then click desired setting.
OFF: Echo averaging OFF.
1, 2: Detects targets hidden in sea clutter. "2" is more effective than "1" in detecting
targets hidden in strong sea clutter. However, "1" is more effective than "2" in display-
ing high-speed targets. Select the setting best suited to your objective.
3: Stably displays unstable targets; distinguishes high-speed craft from sea clutter.

EAV button

Note: Echo averaging is turned off and the indication is greyed out when the perfor-
mance monitor or SART is active.

2-8
 2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION

2.10 Noise Rejector

White noise may show itself on the screen as random "speckles" spread over the en-
tire radar image. This equipment reduces the white noise then improves the on-screen
S/N ratio by processing the weighted moving average filter for the received echoes in
the range direction.

Note: Use this function with caution. Weak target echoes may disappear from the
screen or the range resolution may worsen.
You can remove this noise as follows:

1. Open the menu then select the [1 ECHO] and [1 CUSTOMIZE ECHO] menus to
show the [CUSTOMIZE ECHO] menu.

2. Select [4 NOISE REJECT].

3. Select [OFF] or [ON] as appropriate.
4. Close the menu.
The status of the noise rejector is indicated at the top-left position, [NR: ON] or [NR:
OFF].

Noise Rejector ON Noise Rejector OFF

2-9
2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION

2.11 Wiper
The wiper feature automatically reduces the brilliance of unwanted weak echoes, such
as noise, sea clutter and rain clutter, to clear the picture. There are two wiper settings,
1 and 2. The difference between 1 and 2 is that the brilliance is lowered more slowly
in 2.
To use the wiper feature, do the following:

1. Open the main menu.

2. Select [1 ECHO] to show the [1 ECHO] menu.
3. Select [8 WIPER] (IMO and A type and B type).
4. Select [OFF], [1] or [2] as appropriate.
5. Close the menu.

2.12 How to Preset Controls for Specific Navigation

Purpose
Every time your navigating environment or task changes, you must adjust the radar,
which can be a nuisance in a busy situation. Instead of changing radar settings case
by case, it is possible to assign the function keys to provide optimum settings for often-
encountered situations.

The radar's internal computer offers several picture preset options to be assigned to
each function key for your specific navigating requirements. For instance, one of the
presets is labeled HARD RAIN, and is designed to be used in heavy rain.
Two user-programmable presets are also provided (labeled CUSTOM1, CUSTOM2),
so that you can have the radar automatically adjusted to those conditions that are not
covered by the provided setup options.

Below are the preset options provided with this radar.

Label Description Label Description

OCEAN Optimum setting for long ROUGH SEA Optimum setting for operation
range detection, on a range in rough seas.
scale of 6 NM or larger.
CANAL Optimum setting for operating HARD RAIN Optimum setting for rough
in a canal. weather or heavy rain.
BERTHING Optimum setting when CUSTOM1 User-defined custom
berthing. settings.
CONGESTION Optimum setting for short CUSTOM2 User-defined custom
range navigation (for exam- settings.
ple, a harbor) using a range
scale of 1.5 NM or less.
Each picture option defines a combination of several radar settings for achieving op-
timum setup for a particular navigating situation. These include interference rejector,
echo stretch, echo average, noise rejector, automatic anti-sea and anti-rain clutters,
video contrast, pulse length and sea and radar conditions.

2-10
 2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION

Adjusting these features from the [CUSTOMIZE ECHO] menu changes the original
function key settings. To restore the original settings for a particular customize option,
it is necessary to select the default setting. For this reason, we recommended that you
use the user-programmable presets when frequent adjustment of the radar image is
necessary.

INT ECHO ECHO NOISE AUTO AUTO VIDEO

REJECT STRETCH AVERAGE REJECT SEA RAIN CONTRAST
OCEAN 2 2 3 ON OFF* OFF* 3-B
CANAL 2 OFF OFF OFF OFF* OFF* 2-B
BERTHING 2 OFF OFF OFF OFF* OFF* 2-B
CONGESTION 2 OFF 2 OFF OFF* OFF* 1-B
ROUGH SEA 2 OFF 2 OFF OFF* OFF* 2-A
HARD RAIN 2 OFF OFF OFF OFF* ON 2-A
CUSTOM1 2 OFF OFF OFF OFF* OFF* 1-B
CUSTOM2 2 2 1 OFF OFF* OFF* 2-B
* Manual

8 PULSE

0.5 NM 0.75 NM 1.5 NM 3 NM 6 NM 12, 24 NM

OCEAN S2 M1* M1 M3 L L
CANAL S1 S2 M1 M2 M3 L
BERTHING S1 S1 S2 M1 M3 L
CONGESTION S1 S2 S2 M1 M2 L
ROUGH SEA S1 S1 S2 M1 M2 M3
HARD RAIN S1 S2 S2 M1 M2 L
CUSTOM1 S1 S2 S2 M1 M1 L
CUSTOM2 S2 S2 M1 M2 M3 L

9 CONDITION

STC LOW
STC
ANT. LEVEL GAIN SEA RAIN
RANGE
HEIGHT ECHO
OCEAN Set at in- 0 ±0 80 MAN-30 MAN-0
CANAL stallation 0 ±0 80 MAN-30 MAN-0
BERTHING 0 ±0 80 MAN-30 MAN-0
CONGESTION 0 ±0 80 MAN-30 MAN-0
ROUGH SEA 0 ±0 80 MAN-30 AUTO
HARD RAIN 0 ±0 80 AUTO MAN-0
CUSTOM1 0 ±0 80 MAN-30 MAN-0
CUSTOM2 0 ±0 80 MAN-30 MAN-0

2-11
2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION

2.12.1 How to select a customized echo

Click the [Customize Echo] button on the Status bar to select a customized echo op-
tion from the drop-down list.

[Customize Echo] button

Click to show
drop-down list.

2.12.2 How to edit a customized echo

You can edit a customized echo as below.

1. Right-click the [Customize Echo] button on the Status bar

then click [Customize Echo Menu].
2. Set the items below referring to the sections shown.
Int Reject: section 2.7 Auto Sea: section 2.5
Echo Stretch: section 2.8 Auto Rain: section 2.6
Echo Average: section 2.9 Pulse Length: section 2.3
Noise Reject: section 2.10
3. Click [7 VIDEO CONTRAST].
4. Spin the scrollwheel to select 1, 2, 3 or 4 (Dynamic
Range) or A, B, C (Curve) as appropriate then push the
left button. Refer to the description and illustration below.

2-12
 2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION

1-4: Control dynamic range. 1 provides

the widest dynamic range; 4 is the nar- CONTRAST CONTRAST
rowest dynamic range. C 4
3
A: The mid-level in the curve is low, so B 2 1
A
this setting is suitable for suppressing
rain clutter.
B: Curve between A and C.
C: The mid-level in the curve is high, so this setting is suitable for detecting distant
targets.
5. Click [9 CONDITION].
6. Click [2 STC ANT HEIGHT].
7. Spin the scrollwheel to select appropriate sea condition then push the left button.
The larger the number the rougher the sea state.
8. If necessary, select [3 LOW LEVEL ECHO] to reject low level echoes. The setting
range is 0-8. The higher the figure, the stronger the low level echo that is erased.
9. To save the custom settings, select [SAVE] from [0 DEFAULT].
10. Click the Close button (X) to close the menu.

2.12.3 How to restore a user customized echo to saved setting

If you get lost in operation while adjusting the settings for a user customized echo, you
can easily restore the settings for that user customized echo saved at section 2.12.2).

1. Click the [Customize Echo] button on the Status bar then click the picture preset
option for which you want to restore its original user settings.
2. Right-click then select [Customize Echo Menu].
3. Click [0 DEFAULT].
4. Select [USER].
5. Click the Close button (X) to close the menu.

2.12.4 How to restore a user customized echo to factory default

settings
You can erase a customized echo options to restore its factory default options (see
the tables in section 2.12).

1. Click the [Customize Echo] button on the Status bar to select the customized echo
option for which you want to restore its user settings.
2. Right-click then select [Customize Echo Menu].
3. Click [0 DEFAULT].
4. Select [FACTORY].
5. Click the Close button (X) to close the menu.

2-13
2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION

2.13 How to Suppress Second-trace Echoes

In certain situations, echoes from very distance targets may appear as false echoes
(second-trace echoes) on the screen. This occurs when the return echo is received
one transmission cycle later, or after a next radar pulse has been transmitted.

Pulse
interval

Actual ranges

Second-trace
echo

Measured ranges

This equipment lengthens the pulse repetition period to reject the false echoes.

Note: This function decreases the number of echoes hits. Carefully use this function
so that the possibility of detecting small targets and high-speed craft does not lessen.
To reject second-trace echoes, open the [1 ECHO] menu then set [5 2ND ECHO REJ]
(B type) or [4 2ND ECHO REJ] (IMO and A types) to [ON] then close the menu.

2.14 Presentation Modes

This radar has the following orientation modes in the radar mode:

2.14.1 Orientation modes

This radar has the following orientation modes in the radar mode:

Relative Motion (RM)

Head-up: Unstabilized.
STAB H UP: Head-up with compass-stabilized bearing scale (True Bearing) where
the bearing scale rotates with the compass reading.
Course-up: Compass-stabilized relative to ship's orientation at the time of selecting
course-up.
North-up: Compass-stabilized with reference to North.
Stern-up: Unstabilized.

2-14
 2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION

True Motion (TM)

North-up: Ground- or sea-stabilized with compass and speed inputs.

Mode availability

Availability
Presentation mode
Radar Chart radar
Course-up RM Yes Yes
Head-up RM Yes No
STAB H UP RM Yes No
North-up RM Yes Yes
North-up TM Yes Yes
Stern-up RM* Yes No
*: Not available with IMO or A type.

2.14.2 How to select a presentation mode

How to select a presentation mode from the Control Unit
Push the MODE key consecutively to select desired presentation mode. The Range/
Presentation mode box shows the current presentation mode.

How to select a presentation mode from the Range/Presentation mode box

Selection method 2

6 Click to show drop-down list.

Click desired mode on list.

STAB H UP RM
Selection method 1
Click indication to select mode.

IMPORTANT
Loss of gyrocompass signal

When the gyrocompass signal is lost, the Alert

“Gyro xxx COM1 Error” (xxx=a number be-
tween 255 and 259 (ALF format: between
10400,1 and 10400,5) according to gyro no.)
appears in the [Alert] box. After all signals are
lost, the Alert 450 (ALF format: 10601,9)
“Heading Sensor Not Available” appears, the
presentation mode becomes head-up and all
TT and AIS are erased. Check the gyrocom-
pass and select the presentation mode with the
MODE key or the Range/Presentation mode
box.

2-15
2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION

2.14.3 Description of presentation modes

Head-up mode
The head-up mode is a display in which the line
North marker Heading
connecting own ship and the top of the display in- line
dicates own ship's heading.

The target pips are painted at their measured dis-

tances and in their directions relative to own ship's
heading.

The short line on the bearing scale is the north

marker, which indicates heading sensor north. A
failure of all the heading sensor inputs will cause
the heading readout to disappear, and the Alert 450 "Heading Sensor Not Available"
or "Gyro xxx COM1 Error" (a number between 250-259 according to gyro no.) appears
in the [Alert] box.

Course-up mode
The course-up mode is an azimuth stabilized dis-
North marker
play in which a line connecting the center with the Heading
top of the display indicates own ship's intended line
course (namely, own ship's previous heading just
before this mode has been selected).

Target pips are painted at their measured dis-

tances and in their directions relative to the in-
tended course, which is maintained at the 0-
degree position. The heading line moves in ac-
cordance with ship's yawing and course change. This mode is useful for avoiding
smearing of the picture during course change.

STAB Head-up mode

Radar echoes are shown in the same way as in the head-up mode. The difference
from the normal head-up presentation lies in the orientation of the bearing scale. The
bearing scale is heading sensor stabilized. That is, it rotates in accordance with the
heading sensor signal, enabling you to know own ship's heading at a glance.

This mode is available when the radar is interfaced with a gyro heading sensor. If the
gyro heading sensor fails, the bearing scale returns to the state of head-up mode.

North-up mode
The north-up mode paints target pips at their mea- North marker
sured distances and in their true (heading sensor) di-
Heading
rections from own ship, north bearing maintained at line
the top of the screen. The heading line changes its di-
rection according to the ship's heading. Requires
heading signal.

If the compass fails, the presentation mode changes

to head-up and the north marker disappears. A failure
of the heading sensor input will cause the heading
readout to disappear, and the Alert 450 (ALF format:

2-16
 2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION

10601,9) "Heading Sensor Not Available" or "Gyro COM1 Error" (a number between
255-259 (ALF format: between 10400,1 and 10400,5) according to gyro no.) appears
in the [Alert] box.

Stern-up mode
The stern-up mode is a display in which the line Heading
connecting own ship and the top of the display in- line
dicates own ship's stern.

The target pips are painted at their measured dis-

tances and in their directions relative to own ship's
stern.

The short line on the bearing scale is the north North

marker, which indicates stern sensor north. marker

True motion mode

Own ship and other moving objects move in accordance Heading
with their true courses and speed. In ground stabilized North marker line
TM, all fixed targets, such as landmasses, appear as sta-
tionary echoes. In the sea stabilized TM without set and
drift inputs, the landmass can move on the screen. Note
that true motion is not available on the 96 NM or higher
range scale range scale. If COG and SOG (both over the
ground) are not available on the TM mode, enter the set
(tide direction) and drift (tide speed) manually referring to
a Tide Table.
If the position of the CCRP results in a part of the bearing
scale not being distinguishable, that part of the bearing scale is indicated with appro-
priate reduced detail.

A failure of the heading sensor input will cause the heading readout to disappear, and
the Alert 450 (ALF format: 10601,9) "Heading Sensor Not Available" or "Gyro COM1
Error" (a number between 255-259 (ALF format: between 10400,1 and 10400,5) ac-
cording to gyro no.) appears in the [Alert] box.

When own ship reaches a point corresponding to 50% of the radius of the display, own
ship position is automatically reset to a point of 75% radius opposite to the extension
of the heading line passing through the display center. You can also reset the own ship
symbol manually by pushing the CU/TM RESET key, or click the [CU/TM reset] button
on the InstantAccess bar™.

North marker
Heading
line

(a) True motion (b) Own ship has reached a (c) Own ship is automatically
is selected point 50% of display radius reset to 75% of display radius

2-17
2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION

2.15 How to Select the Range Scale

The selected range scale and range ring interval are shown at the top-left position on
the screen. When a target of interest comes closer, reduce the range scale so that it
appears in 50-90% of the display radius.

Range ring interval

Range scale Range selection

buttons

Note: The IMO- and A-type radars do not have the 1 NM, 2 NM, 4 NM, 8 NM, 16 NM,
32 NM and 120 NM ranges.

How to select a range scale from the Control Unit

Use the RANGE key to select range desired. Hit the "+" part of the key to raise the
range; the "-" part to lower the range.

How to select a range scale from the Range/Presentation mode box

Method 1: Click the range scale indication.
Method 2: Click the appropriate range selection button. Click the "+" button to raise
the range; the "-" button to lower the range.
Method 3: Right-click the range scale indication to show a drop-down list of available
ranges then click a range.

2-18
 2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION

2.16 How to Measure the Range to a Target

The range to a target may be measured three ways: with the fixed range rings, with
the cursor, or with the VRM.

Use the range rings to obtain a rough estimate of the range to a target. They are the
concentric solid circles about own ship, or the sweep origin. The number of rings is
automatically determined by the selected range scale and their interval is displayed in
the Range/Presentation mode box at the top-left position on the screen. Count the
number of rings between the center of the display and the target. Check the range ring
interval and judge the distance of the echo from the inner edge of the nearest ring.

The range rings can be turned on/off with [RANGE RING] on the [NAV TOOL] menu.

2.16.1 How to measure the range by using a VRM

There are two VRMs, No. 1 and No. 2, which appear as dashed rings so that you can
distinguish them from the fixed range rings. The two VRMs can be distinguished from
each other by the different lengths of their dashes; the dashes on the No. 2 VRM are
longer.

350 000 010

340 020
330 030
VRM1 320 040 Target
310 050

300 060

290 070

280 080

270 090

260 100

250 110 VRM2

240 120
230 130
220 140
210 150
200 160
190 180 170
VRM1 VRM2
TTG 45:02 TTG 99:59
0.66 NM 1.18 NM

How to measure the range from the Control Unit

1. Press the VRM 1 or VRM 2 key to display desired VRM.
2. Rotate the VRM rotary control to align the active variable range marker with the
inner edge of the target of interest and read its distance at the bottom-right posi-
tion on the screen. Each VRM remains at the same geographical distance when
you operate the range control. This means that the apparent radius of the VRM
ring changes in proportion to the selected range scale.
To erase a VRM, press the VRM 1 or VRM 2 key to erase corresponding VRM.

How to measure the range from the trackball module

1. Click the title bar on a VRM box to activate the corresponding VRM, then click the
VRM box.
2. Spin the scrollwheel or use the trackball to align the active variable range marker
with the inner edge of the target of interest and read its distance at the bottom-
right position on the screen. Each VRM remains at the same geographical dis-
tance when you operate the range control. This means that the apparent radius of
the VRM ring changes in proportion to the selected range scale set the outer edge
of the VRM on the inner edge of the target.

2-19
2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION

3. To anchor the VRM, push the left button.

To turn off a VRM, click the arrow in the applicable VRM box. The VRM disappears
and the VRM box is minimized.

2.16.2 How to set VRM attributes

You can customize the VRMs to suit your needs.

1. Open the menu then select [3 NAV TOOL] and [2 EBL•VRM] (B type) or [2
EBL•VRM•CURSOR] (IMO and A types) to display the [EBL•VRM] menu
(EBL•VRM•CURSOR menu for the IMO and A types).

IMO- and A-type radars

B-type radar
2. For the B-type radar, select [3 VRM1] or [4 VRM2] as appropriate. Spin the
scrollwheel to select desired unit then push the left button.
3. Select [6 VRM TTG] and then select the VRM(s) that are to show/hide the TTG
indication. [OFF] shows no TTG indication.
4. The [LINK EBL] option for [7 VRM OFFSET] automati- 330
340
350 000 010
020
030

cally activates the corresponding VRM when the offset 310

320

VRM
040

050

EBL is enabled. 290

300 060

070

5. Close the menu.

280 080

270 090

260
Offset 100

250 EBL 110

240 120
230 130
220 140
210 150
200 160
190 180 170

2-20
 2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION

2.17 How to Measure the Bearing to a Target

Use the Electronic Bearing Lines (EBLs) to take bearings of targets. There are two
EBLs, No. 1 and No. 2. Each EBL is a straight dashed line extending from the own
ship position up to the circumference of the radar picture. The two EBLs can be dis-
tinguished from each other by the different lengths of their dashes; the dashes on the
No. 2 EBL are longer.

Each EBL carries a range marker, or a short line crossing the EBL at right angles. Its
distance from the EBL origin is indicated at the VRM readout whether or not the cor-
responding VRM is displayed. The range marker changes its position along the EBL
with the rotation of the VRM control. To operate this marker, rotate the VRM rotary
control on the Control Unit, or put the cursor in the applicable VRM box and roll the
scrollwheel.

350 000
EBL2 330
340
010
020
030 Target
320 040
310 050

300 060

290 070

280 080

270 090

260 100
EBL1
250 Range marker 110

240 120
230 130
220 140
210 150
200 160
190 180 170
EBL1 EBL2
EBL bearing 128.0° R 100.8° R

EBL reference

2.17.1 How to measure the bearing

How to measure the bearing from the Control Unit
1. Press the EBL 1 or EBL 2 key to display desired EBL.
2. Rotate the EBL rotary control to bisect the target with the EBL. Read the bearing
to the target at the appropriate EBL box.
To erase an EBL, press the EBL 1 or EBL 2 key to erase appropriate EBL.

How to measure the bearing from the trackball module

1. Click the title bar on a EBL box to activate the corresponding EBL, then click the
EBL box.
2. Spin the scrollwheel or use the trackball to bisect the target with the EBL.
3. To anchor the EBL, push the left button.
To turn off an EBL, click the arrow in applicable EBL box. The EBL disappears and the
EBL box is minimized.

2-21
2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION

2.17.2 How to select bearing reference

An EBL box has an "R" (relative) if the EBL bearing is relative to own ship's heading;
"T" (true) if it is referenced to the north. True or relative indication is available regard-
less of presentation mode.

To change the bearing reference, click the EBL reference indication to display R or T
as appropriate. The bearing reference can also be selected on the [EBL•VRM] menu
([EBL•VRM•CURSOR] menu with the IMO- and A-type radars).

Note: When the gyrocompass heading changes, the EBL and its indication change as
follows:
Course-up, relative: EBL indication remains the same, EBL moves.
Course-up, true: EBL indication and EBL remain unchanged.
Head-up, relative: EBL indication and EBL remain unchanged.
Head-up, true: EBL indication remains the same; EBL moves.
North-up, relative: EBL indication remains the same, EBL moves.
North-up, true: EBL indication and EBL remain unchanged.

2.18 Collision Assessment by Offset EBL

The origin of the EBL can be placed anywhere with the trackball to enable measure-
ment of range and bearing between two targets. This function is also useful for as-
sessment of the potential risk of collision. It is possible to read CPA (Closest Point of
Approach) by using a VRM as shown in Figure (a) on the next page. If the EBL passes
through the sweep origin (own ship) as illustrated in Figure (b), the target ship is on a
collision course.

2.18.1 How to assess risk of collision

How to assess risk of collision from the Control Unit
1. Press the EBL1 or EBL2 key to activate an EBL.
2. Put the cursor on a target that appears as a threatening target (A in the figure on
the next page).
3. Press the EBL OFFSET key to shift the EBL origin to the cursor location.
4. Wait approx. three minutes. Operate the EBL rotary control to bisect the target at
the new position (A'). The EBL indication shows the target ship's course, which
may be true or relative depending on the EBL bearing reference setting.
5. If relative motion is selected, it is also possible to read CPA by using a VRM as
shown in the left figure on the next page. If the EBL passes through the sweep
origin (own ship) as illustrated in the right figure on the next page, the target ship
is on a collision course.
To return the EBL origin to the center of the screen, press the EBL OFFSET key.

2-22
 2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION

How to assess risk of collision from the context-sensitive menu

1. Right-click the display area to show the context-sensitive menu.
2. Select [EBL Offset] and then [EBL1] or [EBL2].
3. Put the cursor on a target that appears as a threat (A in the figure below).
4. Push the left button to shift the EBL origin to the cursor location.
5. Spin the scrollwheel or use the trackball to bisect the target at the new position
(A'). The EBL indication shows the target ship's course, which may be true or rel-
ative depending on the EBL bearing reference setting.
6. It is also possible to read CPA by using a VRM as shown in left-hand figure below.
If the EBL passes through the sweep origin (own ship) as illustrated in the right-
hand figure below, the target ship is on a collision course.
To return the EBL origin to the center of the screen, put the cursor on the EBL origin
then right-click.

350 000 010 350 000 010

340 020 340 020
330 030 330 030
320 040 320 040

310 050 310 050

300 A 060 300 060

290 070 290

A 070

280 080 280 080

A’ A’
270 090 270 090

260 100 260 100

250 250 110

110

240 240 120

120
230 130 230 130
EBL1 220 140
EBL1 220 140
210 150 210 150
200
190 180 170
160 (a) 200
190 180 170
160 (b)
EBL1 VRM1 EBL1 VRM1
TTG 10:00 TTG 10:00
150.3° T 0.850 NM 138.2° T 0.850 NM

2.18.2 Point of reference for origin point of offset EBL

The origin point of the offset EBL can be ground stabilized (geographically fixed), north
stabilized (true) or referenced to your ship's heading (relative).

1. Open the menu then select the [3 NAV TOOL] and [2 EBL•VRM] (B type) or [2
EBL•VRM•CURSOR] (IMO and A types) menus to display the [2 EBL•VRM] (B
type) or [2 EBL•VRM•CURSOR] (IMO and A types) menu.
2. Select [5 EBL OFFSET BASE POINT].
3. Select [STAB GND], [STAB HDG], or [STAB NORTH] as appropriate.
STAB GND: Reference to latitude and longitude. Origin position is always fixed
regardless of your ship's movement.
STAB HDG: Reference to heading. The relationship between origin position and
own position is kept always.
STAB NORTH: Reference to North. The rel position changes with North position.
4. Close the menu.

2-23
2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION

2.19 How to Measure the Range and Bearing Between

Two Targets
How to measure the range and bearing between two targets from the Control
Unit
1. Press the EBL1 to activate EBL1.
2. Operate the trackball to place the origin of the EBL1 on a target of interest.
3. Press the EBL OFFSET key.
4. Operate the EBL rotary control to bisect the other target of interest.
5. Operate the VRM rotary control until the range marker on the EBL is on the inside
edge of target 2.
You can repeat the same procedure on third and fourth targets (targets 3 and 4) by
using the EBL2 and the VRM2.

Bearing is shown relative to own ship with suffix "R" or as a true bearing with suffix "T".
To return the EBL origin to the screen center, push the EBL OFFSET key.

How to measure the range and bearing between two targets from the track-
ball module
1. Right-click the display area to show the context-sensitive menu.
2. Select [EBL Offset] then [EBL1].
3. Put the origin of the EBL on a target of interest.
4. Push the left button to anchor the EBL.
5. Spin the scrollwheel or use the trackball to bisect the other target of interest.
6. Put the cursor on the VRM1 box then spin the scrollwheel to put the range marker
on the EBL on the inside edge of target 2.
You can repeat the same procedure on third and fourth targets (targets 3 and 4) by
using the EBL2 and the VRM2.

Bearing is shown relative to own ship with suffix "R" or as a true bearing with suffix "T".
To return the EBL to its origin, open the context-sensitive menu then select [Reset
EBL].

EBL2
Range 340
350 000 010
020
330 030
marker 320 040
310 050
Target 2 Range
300 060
EBL1 Target 4 marker
290 070
Target 1
280 080

270 090

260 EBL origin Target 3 100

250 110

240 120
230 130
220 140
EBL1 EBL2 210 150 VRM1 VRM2
200 160 TTG 45:02 TTG 99:59
190 180 170
140.0° R 335.2° R 0.50 NM 0.98 NM

Range/bearing
between targets Range/bearing
1 and 2 between targets 3 and 4

2-24
 2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION

2.20 How to Off-center the Display

Own ship position, or sweep origin, can be displaced to expand the view field without
switching to a larger range scale. The sweep origin can be off-centered to the cursor
position, but not more than 75% of the range in use; if the cursor is set beyond 75%
of the range scale, the sweep origin will be off-centered to the point of 75% of the limit.

Cursor

Normal display Off-centered display

This feature is available on the ranges between 0.125 and 48 NM and any presenta-
tion mode other than true motion.

If the position of the CCRP results in a part of the bearing scale not being distinguish-
able, that part of the bearing scale is indicated with appropriate reduced detail.

How to off-center the display from the Control Unit

1. Put the cursor on the position within the display area where you want to move the
sweep origin.
2. Press the OFF CENTER key to move the sweep origin to the cursor position.
To cancel off-centering, press the OFF CENTER key again.

How to off-center the display from the context-sensitive menu

1. Put the cursor where you want to off-center the display then right click to show the
context-sensitive menu.
2. Select [Off Center].
3. Push the left button. Then, the sweep origin is off-centered to the cursor position.
To cancel the off-center display, put the cursor on the sweep origin and right-click.

If you cannot cancel off-center…

When the conditions shown below are met, offcenter cannot be cancelled. This is be-
cause the radar antenna position is located at a position greater than 75% of the ef-
fective radar display.

• Own ship marker is large.

• The distance between the antenna position and the conning position is large.
• Short-distance display range.
To cancel the off-center in the above-mentioned conditions, first select a larger range,
then cancel the off-center.

2-25
2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION

2.21 Target Trails

The trails of the radar echoes of targets may be displayed in the form of synthetic af-
terglow. Target trails are selected either relative or true and may be sea or ground sta-
bilized. True motion trails require a compass signal, and position and speed inputs.

2.21.1 Target trails-related indications

Trail-related indications are located at the bottom-right position on the screen. Several
trail-related operations can be done from the [TRAIL] menu, which you can show by
right-clicking the Trail time indication. You can also left-click the trail time indication to
change the trail time.

Trail mode

Elapsed trail time

Trail time
Click to change the
setting or right-click to
show the [TRAIL] menu.

TRAIL COLOR not available

with IMO or A type.

2.21.2 True or relative target trails

You may display echo trails in true or relative motion. Relative trails show relative
movements between targets and own ship. True motion trails present true target
movements in accordance with their over-the-ground speeds and courses. The trail
and past position modes in the North-up true motion are fixed to True.

Click the Trail mode indication to select [True-G], [True-S] or [REL] as appropriate.

True target trails Relative target trails

(No smearing of (Targets moving
stationary targets) relative to own ship)

2-26
 2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION

2.21.3 Trail time

Trail time, the trail plotting interval, can be selected with the scrollwheel, left button or
right button.

The trail timer counts up the trail time and is erased once the terminal count is
reached. For example, if the trail time is six minutes, the timer is erased when trails
have been plotted six minutes. The maximum time of count up for continuous plotting
is 29:59.

Note: Caution is advised when using the trail timer, as the trail accuracy of other ship’s
echoes may be lowered.

How to select a trail time

Four controls are available to select a trail time.

• Control Unit: Push the TRAIL key.

• Trackball module: Put the cursor on the Trail time indication at the bottom-right po-
sition then operate the control (left button or scrollwheel). For the right button, a con-
text-sensitive menu appears. Click the desired time.
The times available depend on the control used as shown in the table below.

Control Available setting

Left button, right button, OFF, 15 sec, 30 sec, 1 min, 3 min, 6 min, 15 min, 30 min,
TRAIL key CONT(inuous)
Scrollwheel OFF, 15 sec, 30 sec, 1-30 min (30 sec intervals), CONT(inu-
ous)

2.21.4 How to reset target trails

All trails may be erased (including those in the memory) and restarted to start trails
fresh.

Control Unit: Press and hold down the TRAIL key until trails disappear.
Context-sensitive menu: Right-click the Trail box to show the context-sensitive
menu then select [Trail All Clear].

2.21.5 How to temporarily remove all target trails from the display
You may wish to temporarily remove all trails from the display. Trails are removed but
are continued internally.
Control Unit: Press the TRAIL key to show [OFF] in the trail time indication.
Trackball module: Click the trail time indication to display [OFF].

2.21.6 Trail stabilization in true motion

True motion trails can be ground stabilized or sea stabilized. The [Trail time] indication
shows current stabilization as [True-G] or [True-S]. To change the stabilization mode,
open the [SPD] page of the sensor settings menu (see section 1.16) and set [Stabili-
zation Mode] to Bottom (GPS) or Water (speed log).

2-27
2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION

2.21.7 Target trail attributes on the TRAIL menu

[1 TRAIL MODE]: Switch the trail mode to [REL] or
[TRUE].
[2 TRAIL GRAD]: The afterglow of the target trails can be
shown in a single tone or gradual shading.

Monotone Gradual shading

(Single) (Multi)

[3 TRAIL COLOR]: The trail color can be selected from

the colors shown in the left figure. This feature is not avail-
able with the IMO or A type radar.
[4 TRAIL LEVEL]: The level (intensity) of the afterglow
that extends from radar targets can be adjusted. The high-
er the number the greater the intensity of the afterglow.
[5 OS TRAIL]: Show or hide trail for own ship.
[6 SUPPRESS TRAIL AROUND OS]: You can prevent
the display of sea clutter in true trails about your ship, to
clear the radar picture.
Note: [6 SUPPRESS TRAIL AROUND OS] is automatically turned on when [5 OS
TRAIL] is activated. The possible ON/OFF combinations between [5 OS TRAIL] and
[6 SUPPRESS TRAIL AROUND OS] are as shown in the table below.
Setting ON/OFF pairings available

[5 OS TRAIL]*1 OFF ON OFF ON

[6 SUPPRESS OFF ON ON OFF

TRAIL AROUND
OS]
Remarks No OS trail - - Setting not
possible

*1 When activated, [6 SUPPRESS TRAIL AROUND OS] automatically turns on.

2.22 Parallel Index (PI) Lines

PI lines are useful for keeping a constant distance between own ship and a coastline
or a partner ship when navigating. Up to six sets of PI lines are available depending
on the maximum number of PI lines selected on the menu.

PI
lines

Control of the orientation and interval of the PI lines is done from the PI line box, which
is at the bottom-left position.

2-28
 2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION

Minimize button

PI line no. PI line ON/OFF

PI line angle PI line reference

PI line interval

2.22.1 How to display, erase a PI line

How to display, erase a PI line from the Control Unit
Displaying a PI line: Press the INDEX LINE key until desired PI line no. appears.
Erasing a PI line: Press the INDEX LINE key until desired PI line no. appears. Press
and hold down the INDEX LINE key to erase the PI line.

How to display, erase a PI line from the trackball module

Click the PI line no. indication to select a PI line. Click the PI line status indication (ON,
OFF) to display or erase a PI line.

2.22.2 How to enable/disable PI lines

The PI line function can be enabled or disabled at any time. Dis-
able this function to hide all PI lines and also disable the PI line
box. To use the PI line box, enable this function.

1. Open the menu.

2. Select [3 NAV TOOL] and [1 PI LINE] to show the [PI LINE]
menu.
3. Select [2 SET ALL PI LINE], then select [OFF] to disable the
PI line function, or select [ON] to enable the PI line function.
4. Close the menu.

2.22.3 How to adjust PI line orientation, PI line interval

1. If not already displayed, display a PI line.
2. Put the cursor on the PI line angle indication then spin the scrollwheel to set the
angle (000-359.9). Enter a negative value to move the PI line to the opposite side
of the PI line that passes through your position.
3. Put the cursor on the PI line interval indication then spin the scrollwheel to adjust
the PI line interval.

2.22.4 How to select the number of PI lines to display

You can select the number of PI lines to display among 1, 2, 3 or 6.

2-29
2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION

For all PI lines

1. Open the menu.
2. Select [3 NAV TOOL] and [1 PI LINE] to show the [PI
LINE] menu.
3. Select [3 NUMBER OF ALL PI LINE] and the desired
number of PI lines among [1], [2], [3] or [6].
Note: This setting cannot be changed if [2 SET ALL PI
LINE] is set to [OFF] in the [PI LINE] menu.
4. Close the menu.

For individual PI line

1. Select the PI line no. to set the number of PI lines refer-
ring to section 2.22.4.
2. Right-click the PI line box to show the context-sensitive menu then select [Number
of PI Line].
3. Select the desired number of PI lines among [1], [2], [3] or [6].
Note: The actual number of lines visible can be less depending on line interval.

2.22.5 How to select the bearing reference for the PI line

PI line bearing reference can be relative to your ship's heading (Relative) or refer-
enced to North (True).

1. Open the menu.

2. Select [3 NAV TOOL] and [1 PI LINE] to show the [PI LINE] menu.
3. Select [1 PI LINE BEARING].
4. Select [REL] or [TRUE].
5. Close the menu.

2.22.6 How to select the PI lines orientation

1. Open the menu.
2. Select [3 NAV TOOL] and [1 PI LINE] to show the [PI LINE] menu.
3. Select [4 PI LINE MODE].
4. Select [PARALLEL] or [PERPENDICULAR].
[PARALLEL]: PI lines are displayed in parallel to your ship's heading when PI line
angle is set to 0°.
[PERPENDICULAR]: PI lines are displayed in perpendicular to your ship's head-
ing when PI line angle is set to 0°.
5. Close the menu.

2.22.7 How to reset PI lines

You can automatically return all or selected PI lines to default orientation, 0-degrees
for parallel orientation, 90-degrees for perpendicular orientation. This is faster than do-
ing it manually.

1. Open the menu.

2-30
 2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION

2. Select [3 NAV TOOL] and [1 PI LINE] to show the [1 PI LINE] menu.

3. Select [5 RESET PI LINE] (reset currently displayed line) or [6 RESET ALL PI
LINE] as appropriate. The confirmation message "Attention: Do you wish to reset
PI No.x line setting?" or "Attention: Do you wish to reset all PI line settings?" ap-
pears. Click the ["OK"] button to reset the PI line(s)
4. Close the menu.

2.22.8 How to adjust PI line length

You can adjust the length of each PI line. This function is available when [2 SET ALL
PI LINE] is set to [1].

1. If not already displayed, display a PI line to adjust the length referring to

section 2.22.4.
2. Open the menu.
3. Select [3 NAV TOOL] and [1 PI LINE] to show the [PI LINE] menu.
4. Select [7 TRUNCATE].
5. Select [ON] in [PI 1 (or 2, 3, 4, 5, 6) TRUNCATE].

MENU
NAV TOOL
PI LINE
← TRUNCATE
1 PI 1 TRUNCATE
OFF / ON
Adjust the length 24.000NM 24.000NM Adjust the length
forward a PI line. 2 PI 2 TRUNCATE backward a PI line.
OFF / ON

6. Set the length (setting range: 0.000 to 24.000 NM).

Heading line PI line

Own ship position

Adjust the length
forward a PI line.

Adjust the length

backward a PI line.

7. Close the menu.

2-31
2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION

2.23 Zoom
The zoom function enlarges an area of interest in the information area (magnification
range: 1.0, 1.5, 2.0, 2.5, 3.0; 2.0 is default). To use the zoom display, right-click the
operational area to show the context-sensitive menu then select [Zoom Set]. Roll the
trackball to put the zoom cursor on the area to zoom. Spin the scrollwheel to change
the magnification then push the left button to confirm the magnification and the posi-
tion. See the zoom display at the right side of the screen.

Zoomed
echo

Zoom
display

Zoom
cursor

To deactivate the zoom function, right-click the operational area to show the context-
sensitive menu then select [Zoom Off].

Zoom display format

You can select the zoom display format with the following procedure.

1. Open the menu then select [4 INFORMATION BOX] and [3 ZOOM DISPLAY].
2. Select the appropriate zoom display format:
[STAB GND]: Ground stabilized zoom (Geographically fixed).
[STAB HDG]: Heading stabilized zoom (Relative).
[STAB NORTH]: North stabilized zoom (True).
[TT TRACK]: Tracked targets are zoomed.
3. Close the menu.

2-32
 2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION

2.24 Markers

2.24.1 Heading line

The heading line indicates the ship's heading in all orientation modes. The heading
line is a line from the own ship position to the outer edge of the radar display area and
appears at zero degrees on the bearing scale in head-up mode. It changes its orien-
tation in the north-up and true motion modes according to orientation.

Temporarily erasing the heading line

To temporarily extinguish the heading line (and anything but radar echoes within the
display area) to look at targets existing dead ahead of own ship, push the HL OFF key
on the Control Unit, or click the [HL OFF] button on the InstantAccess bar™. Release
the respective control to redisplay the heading line, etc.

2.24.2 Stern marker

The stern marker, which is a dotted line, appears opposite to the heading line and
marks your ship’s stern. To display or erase this marker, do the following:

1. Open the main menu, then select [5 MAP•MARK] and [1 MARK SETTING].
2. Select [6 STERN MARK].
3. Select [ON] or [OFF] as appropriate.

2.24.3 North marker

The north marker appears as a short dashed line. In the head-up mode, the north
marker moves around the bearing scale in accordance with the compass signal.

2.24.4 Own ship marker

The own ship marker is displayed at your ship's position. It can be turned on or off and
its configuration selected from the [MARK SETTING] menu. Two configurations are
available: minimized marker and scaled marker. The scaled marker is scaled accord-
ing to the length and beam of the vessel. If the beam width or length of the marker (set
at installation) gets smaller than 6 mm, the marker is replaced with the minimized
marker. Ship's dimensions should be entered at installation to use the scaled marker.

Antenna Heading line

Heading line position X Beam line

Beam line

Minimized marker Scaled marker

1. Open the main menu, then select [5 MAP•MARK] and [1 MARK SETTING].
2. Select [4 OWN SHIP MARK].
3. Select [MIN] or [SCALED] as appropriate.
MIN: Show the minimized own ship marker.
SCALED: Show the scaled own ship marker.

2-33
2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION

2.24.5 Vectors
You can show or hide the vector for own ship and reference targets, on the [NAV
TOOL] menu.

TARGET VECTOR menu

[1 REF TARGET VECTOR]: Turn the vec-
4 VECTOR COLOR tor for the reference target on or off.
[RED] and [YEL]
GRN / BLU / CYA / are added with A
MAG / WHT and B types.

OWN SHIP VECTOR menu

[1 VECTOR STAB IND]: Turn ON to show
double arrow for ground tracking; single
arrow for water tracking.
[2 TIME INCREMENTS]: A short horizon-
tal line may be marked on the own ship
vector in one-minute intervals to show ap-
proximate later positions.
[3 OWN SHIP VECTOR]: Turn vector
OFF, or show ship's heading or course
with a vector.
[4 VECTOR COLOR]: Set the color of the
vector for own ship.

2.24.6 Barge marker

The length and breadth of the total barge size can be displayed as a simple rectangle
on the radar display. Up to five rows of barges and nine barges per row can be shown.

Barge mark

This feature is available with an installation preset. Set up barge information as fol-
lows:

2-34
 2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION

1. Open the main menu.

2. Select the [3 NAV TOOL] and [7 BARGE] to show the
[BARGE] menu.
3. Select [1 BARGE MARK].
4. Select [ON] to turn on the barge mark.
5. At [2 BARGE SIZE], enter length (three digits) and width
(two digits) of the total number of barges.
6. Select [3 ARRANGEMENT].
7. Enter the number of barges that will be in front of your
vessel, row by row:
1) Select a barge row.
2) Spin the scrollwheel to set the number of barges in the row. (The maximum
number is nine.) The numerical indication to the right of the squares changes
with scrollwheel operation.
3) Push the left button to confirm your selection. The squares on the row are
“filled” according to the number of barges selected at step 2).
8. Close the menu.
The radar display now shows the barge mark on the display.

2.24.7 Antenna marker

The antenna marker appears as a blue cross at the antenna location. The marker can
be shown or hidden as follows:

1. Open the main menu.

2. Select [5 MAP•MARK] and [1 MARK SETTING].
3. Select [5 ANTENNA MARK].
4. Select [ON] or [OFF] as appropriate.

2.24.8 Cursor
The cursor measures the range and bearing to an object, selects menu items, selects
location for mark entry, etc. For the B-type radar, you can select cursor attributes
(bearing reference, range unit and size for the cursor) on the [CURSOR] menu in the
[NAV TOOL] menu. For the IMO- and A-type radars you can select only the cursor
bearing reference, with [EBL/CURSOR BEARING] in the [EBL/VRM/CURSOR] menu
of the [NAV TOOL] menu.

[1 CURSOR BEARING]: Show cursor bearing reference in

true or relative.

[2 CURSOR RANGE]: Show the cursor range indication in

the NM, SM, km or kyd. Not available with either IMO- or A-
type radar.

[3 CURSOR SIZE]: Select the cursor size for small or large.

The large cursor covers the entire echo area. Not available
with either IMO- or A-type radar.

2-35
2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION

2.25 How to Adjust Brilliance of Screen Data

You can adjust the relative brilliance levels of various markers and alphanumeric read-
outs displayed on the screen.

1. Right-click the [BRILL] button on the InstantAccess bar™ then select [Brill Menu].

[BRIGHTNESS] menu, page 1 [BRIGHTNESS] menu, page 2

2. Click the brilliance adjustment bar of the item to adjust.
Page 1 Page 2
Item Adjust brightness of Item Adjust brightness of
[1 CONTROL PANEL] backlighting of keys on [1 EBL] EBLs, blind sector
Control Unit
[2 CHARACTER] Alphanumeric charac- [2 VRM] VRMs
ters
[3 CURSOR] Cursor [3 PI LINE] PI lines
[4 ECHO] Radar echoes [4 TT SYMBOL] TT symbols, AZ area,
TT vector, TT past
posn
[5 TRAIL] Target trails [5 AIS SYMBOL] AIS symbols, AIS vec-
tor, AIS past posn
[6 HL] Heading line, stern line [6 MARK] Radar map marks,
route, waypoint/MOB
mark, anchor watch,
drop1/2, zoom, north
mark, user chart
[7 OS SYMBOL] Own ship symbol, [7 CHART] Chart-related objects
barge mark, antenna
mark, own ship track,
own ship vector
[8 RING] Fixed range rings
[9 BEARING CURSOR] Bearing cursor
3. Spin the scrollwheel to set brilliance level.
4. Close the menu.

2-36
 2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION

2.26 Watch Alert

The watch alert provides a flashing visual alert at regular intervals to remind you to
monitor the radar picture for safety or other purposes.

To enable the watch alert, open the [8 INITIAL SETTING] menu followed by the [4
ALERT] menu. Select [WATCH ALERT] and set desired watch interval. The [Watch]
box appears at the bottom-left position. (The watch interval can also be selected from
the [Watch] box when the watch alert feature is active. Right-click the time indication
in the [Watch] box to show a drop-down list of watch intervals. Select a watch interval
from the list.)

Watch box

The timer counts down from the interval set (for example, "12:00") and when the time
interval elapses;
• the buzzer sounds
• the visual Alert 500 (ALF format: 10499) “Watch Alert” flashes in orange in the [Alert]
box
• the watch alert timer freezes at "0:00".
Stop the flashing visual alert with the ALARM ACK key on the Control Unit or click the
[Alert] box.

After the alert is acknowledged the count-down sequence is repeated.

Note: The countdown can be restarted, before the count reaches 0:00, by clicking the
countdown indication in the watch box.

2-37
2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION

2.27 Information Box

The information box shows navigation data and, when following a route set on the
chart display, route information is also shown.

2.27.1 Information box contents

Navigation data
• Depth, analog indication and graph
• Current (tide) speed and direction
• Wind speed and direction
• Water temperature
• Current (tide) and wind gauge
Nav data requires appropriate navigation sensors and IEC 61162-1/-2 sentences out-
put from the sensor. If there is no sentence or data input, asterisks (**) appear at the
corresponding indication.

NAV data Route 1 Route 2

0 Depth : 403 m Depth
100
200
Depth graph 300
Water
Water
400 TEMP : 3.7°C temperature
500
-30 -20 -10 min m

N
Wind True-North
Wind direction
124.5° 20.1 kn and speed
Current and W E
wind gauge Current
Current direction
(See inset.) S 177.6°T 25.9 kn and speed

Current and wind gauge

N
Heading

W E

Current Wind
direction S direction

2-38
 2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION

Route information
The route 1 information displays route name, plan speed, plan course, course to steer,
XTD limit and XTD. The route 2 information displays waypoint no., distance to WOP
(wheel over point), time to go, planning turn radius, turn rate, next waypoint no., bear-
ing to next waypoint. Click the [Route 1] or [Route 2] tab to find route information.

ROUTE10 2
10 2 17
123 2 T 0 10 27
123 2 T 08
XTD Limit : 250 2 00
XTD : 45 4 3
123 7 T

Route 1 Route 2

2.27.2 How to show the information box

1. Open the menu and select [4 INFORMATION BOX].

2. Select [1 DISP INFO BOX] then [ON].

3. Close the menu.

2-39
2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION

2.27.3 How to turn NAV data on/off

Wind, depth, ocean current, water temperature, date and time and waypoint data may
be set up as follows:

1. Open the menu then select [4 INFORMATION BOX].

2. Select [2 SET NAV DATA].

3. Set up the nav data referring to the table below.

Item Description
[1 DEPTH] Selects unit of depth measurement, or turn depth indication OFF.
[2 DEPTH GRAPH SCALE] Selects depth scale range. The depth for the last 30 minutes is plotted
with a yellow line. The [AUTO] setting automatically adjusts the scale
according to depth.
[3 DEPTH MARK] Selects the depth at which to show the depth mark.
[4 CURRENT] Turns the current (tide) display ON (current relative to North) or OFF.
[5 WIND] Selects the unit of wind speed measurement.
[6 WIND STAB] Selects Wind vector format, among three choices:
[APPARENT]: Apparent wind measured by wind meter, with ship's
bow as reference.
[NORTH]: Apparent wind minus ship's movement, with North as refer-
ence.
[THEORETICAL]: Apparent wind minus ship's movement, with ship's
bow as reference.
[7 TEMPERATURE] Turns water temperature indication ON or OFF and selects the unit of
measurement.
Note: Appropriate sensors are required to display any data. The wind vector
shows a direction from which the wind blows in, relative to own ship heading, and
is labeled "T *". Wind velocity is a true wind speed as a result of compensating for
own ship's speed and orientation. Ocean current (tide) is shown relative to bow in
head-up, cursor gyro and course-up, and reference to North in north-up and true
motion.
4. Close the menu.

2-40
 2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION

2.28 Interswitch
The interswitch uses a network to transfer multiple radar signals to the monitor units
connected in the network. A master/slave relation can be set for a single radar signal
and that signal can be shown on multiple displays. Up to four antennas and four dis-
play units can be connected. Set the radar display and antenna groups from the [An-
tenna] button on the Status bar.

When you switch to a different antenna, the heading skew and timing adjustment (set
at installation) for that antenna are automatically applied.

The [Antenna] button on the Status bar shows current antenna selection.

[Antenna] button
- ANT-3(M): Antenna no. 3, (M)=Master (or (S)=Slave)
- X-BAND (or S-BAND)

Note: Switching to a different antenna or change the interswitch settings in the stand-
by mode.

2.28.1 How to display antenna information

The [ANT SELECT] display shows:
• Radar band, output power and antenna position of each antenna currently powered.
(If an antenna is not powered, its data area is blank.)
• Current antenna and display combinations.
To show antenna information, open the menu then select the [8 INITIAL SETTING]
and [5 ANT SELECT] menus.

ANT 1 : X-BAND Using the information displayed in this example the antenna system configuration would
25UP Main Top look something like this.

ANT 2 : S-BAND
ANT1 ANT2 ANT3 ANT4
30UP Main 2nd
ANT 3 : X-BAND ← Antenna Unit
12 Fore
ANT 4 : X-BAND
12 Aft ← Radar Processor Unit

DISP1 DISP2 DISP3 DISP4 ← Processor Unit

HUB-3000

2-41
2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION

2.28.2 How to preset antenna and display combinations

You can preset the antenna and display combinations for each antenna and display
in the radar system. As an example, the procedure below shows how to select the no.
1 antenna unit for the no. 2 display unit.

1. Open the menu then select the [8 INITIAL SETTING] and [5 ANT SELECT]
menus.
2. Select the display unit for which to select an antenna (at the next step). For exam-
ple, select [DISP2] to select the no. 2 display unit.
3. Select [ANT1] and [M].
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to set other display and antenna combinations.
5. Click [STORE INT-SW] and select [YES] to save your selections.
6. Close the menu.

Antenna selection considerations

• An antenna unit cannot be controlled from multiple display units. Select one Master
display unit for one antenna unit. If two antenna units are set as masters, the display
last-set as master becomes the master and all other displays are automatically
changed to slave.
• An antenna unit without a Master display cannot be selected on the sub display
units. If there is no antenna unit set as master, the lowest number display is auto-
matically set as master.
• If the Alert 750 (ALF format: 10740,3) “EXT Radar COM Error” appears, do one of
the following as applicable:
• If only your antenna is not displayed on the [ANT SELECT] display, the LAN line
in the Processor Unit may be faulty. In this case, use the standalone mode.
• If the antenna that was in use does not appear on the [ANT SELECT] display, the
LAN line in other Processor Unit may be faulty. In this case, see the preceding
page for how to select a different antenna unit.
• When the Network fails, the Interswitch does not work, but standalone operation is
possible.
• Radar functions are controlled independently, dependently or commonly depending
on selection as Master or Slave (see the table on the next page).
• When connecting with the FAR-2xx7 series radar, the maximum number of ac-
quired targets ([NUMBER OF TT]) should be set to 100 in the [RADAR INSTALLA-
TION] menu. Only a qualified technician can set the [RADAR INSTALLATION]
menu. Contact your dealer.

Compatibility of display and operation

• When connecting with FAR-3000 series radar
The FAR-3000 is compatible with the FCR-2xx9 in display and operation. For ex-
ample, when switching the antenna from FCR-2xx9 to FAR-3000 the image for
FAR-3000 is displayed on the screen and each function is operative, and vice versa.
• When connecting with FAR-2xx7 series radar
When switching the antenna from FCR-2xx9 to FAR-2xx7, the image for FAR-2xx7
is displayed on the screen and each function is operative. However, when switching
the antenna from FAR-2xx7 to FCR-2xx9, the following functions are not operative.

2-42
 2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION

Radar Functions Control Master Display Option Slave Display Option

AIS function
Brilliance
Echo trails
EBL
Lat/long data
Presentation mode
Speed data
TT, AIS on/off
TT, AIS track interval
Vector mode
Vector time Independent Desired value can be set
VRM
Range
Reference Point Desired value can be set
A/C SEA
A/C RAIN
Auto Rain
Gain
Echo stretch
Echo averaging
IR
Picture setting
(Customize echo)
Performance monitor
Dependent control Cannot control
SART
STBY/TX
Tuning
TT Lost alert
TT CPA/TCPA alert
TT ALARM ACK Common control Item commonly controlled Item commonly controlled
TT acquire
TT/AIS AZ

2.28.3 How to select an antenna

For the ship that carries multiple antennas, you can select the antenna to use. Click
the [Antenna] button to select the antenna.

2-43
2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION

2.29 Dual Radar (B type only)

The image from two FCR-2xx9 radars (main radar and external radar) may be shown
together on one radar display. This allows you to take advantage of the best charac-
teristics each type of radar has to offer.

Image from main radar

Image from external radar

Preparations
The following should be done from the [RADAR INSTALLATION] menu at the time of
installation in order to enable the dual radar display:

• Set the display area on both the main radar and the external radar ([2 COMBINE
SECTOR], [3 COMBINE RANGE]).
• Select the number of external radar to use ([4 EXT RADAR]).
• Turn the dual radar function on ([5 COMBINE FUNC] is set to [ON]).

TT information
When a TT target crosses over the boundary line between the two displays, its infor-
mation is passed to the other radar display. Tracking of the target continues. The num-
ber of the antenna which acquires a TT target is displayed in front of the TT number.

TT
TT

TT target crosses over the

boundary line of the display area.

TT information is passed to the

Boundary lines of display area other radar display. Tracking on
the TT continues.

2-44
 2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION

2.29.1 How to enable or disable the dual radar display

Turn on the power of main radar and external radar to set them in standby. The dual
radar function is not available when one of two radars is in TX (transmit) state or turned
off.

From the menu

1. Open the menu then select [1 ECHO] and [9 DUAL RADAR].
2. Select [COMBINE] to enable the dual radar display. To disable the dual radar dis-
play, select [OFF].
3. Close the menu.

From the antenna button

1. Right-click the [Antenna] button on the Status bar to show the context-sensitive
menu.
2. Select [Dual Radar].
3. Select [Combine]. To disable the dual radar display, select [Off].
"(D)" is displayed in the [Antenna] button on the Status bar when the dual radar display
is enabled.

ANT-1(D) "(D)" appears on the [Antenna] button

when the dual radar display is enabled.
X-BAND
2.29.2 Operating considerations for the dual radar display
In the dual radar mode, you can operate the antenna displayed in the [Antenna] button
on the Status bar. To operate a different antenna, select it with the [Antenna] button.

You can toggle each radar between standby and TX in the dual radar display. When
switching to the standby mode, he Alert 730 (ALF format: 10740,1) "EXT Radar STBY"
appears and the radar echoes are not displayed.
The following functions are based on the settings in the radar which enables the dual
radar display. These settings are shared between the two radars.

• Off-center display • Trail settings

• Range scale • Electronic chart on/off
• Presentation mode • TT lost target filter
• CU/TM reset
Notes

• The dual radar function is available with two FCR-2xx9 series radars using the LAN.
FAR-2xx7 or FAR-3xx0 is not available.
• When a transmission error occurs between two radars in the dual radar mode,
the Alert 750 (ALF format: 10740,3) "EXT Radar COM Error" appears and the dual
radar function is turned off.
• The dual radar display is not available on the external radar which overlays the main
radar image even though the dual radar is turned on.
• If the external radar is using TT data from the own radar, the tracked targets will be-
come lost targets on the external radar.

2-45
2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION

Restrictions
The followings are the restrictions of the dual radar function.

• TT targets can only be acquired manually.

• The reference position is set to [CCRP] (see section 2.32). Set the same CCRP po-
sition between two radars at the time of installation.
• [ECHO AREA] is set to [CIRCLE] (see section 2.37).
• The following functions are not available in the dual radar mode: performance mon-
itor, SART, tune initialization, SART, TT Test, interswitch.
• Performance monitor • TT simulation mode
• SART • Interswitch
• Tune initialize

2-46
 2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION

2.30 Performance Monitor

The performance monitor, installed in the antenna unit, produces a visual indication
on the radar display screen when the radar transmitter power and the radar receiver
sensitivity and tuning are within the prescribed limits. A graph is also provided and it
shows degradation of TX/RX/Power over time.

How to activate, deactivate the performance monitor

To activate, deactivate the performance monitor, do the following.

Note: Activate, deactivate the performance monitor in TX (transmit) state.

1. Open the menu then select the [1 ECHO] menu.
2. Select [6 PERFORMANCE MON].
3. Select [OFF] or [ON] as appropriate.
4. Close the menu. The icon "PM" appears in the message area on the status bar
(see paragraph 1.8.1) when the performance monitor is active.
Note: If the blind sector and the direction of the PM antenna overlap one another, turn
off the blind sector in order to display echoes correctly.
The radar is automatically set as follows when the performance monitor is activated.

Setting at activation Adjustable while PM Setting at deactivation

Item
of PM is active of PM
CONDITION Setting stored No Setting before activation
CUSTOMIZE Grayed out, setting No Return to active display
ECHO stored
EAV OFF No Setting before activation
ES OFF No Setting before activation
GAIN 70 *1 Yes*3 Setting before activation
IR OFF No Setting before activation
LOW LEVEL Setting stored No Setting before activation
ECHO
NOISE OFF No Setting before activation
REJECT
OFF center OFF Yes Setting at deactivation
Presentation Mode Setting stored *2 Yes Setting at deactivation
PULSE LONG No Setting before activation
RAIN 0 No Setting before activation
RAIN AUTO MAN No Setting before activation
RANGE 24 NM, 24 SM, Yes *4 Setting at deactivation
48 km, 48 kyd
SEA 0 No Setting before activation
SEA AUTO MAN No Setting before activation
TUNE AUTO No Setting before activation
VIDEO 4B No Setting before activation
CONTRAST
WIPER OFF No Setting before activation
*1 Gain is automatically set according to [PM GAIN ADJ] if it was adjusted at installa-
tion.
*2 North-up RM is selected when the mode is North-up TM.

2-47
2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION

*3 The setting is not memorized.

*4 The performance monitor is deactivated if the range is changed.

How to check radar performance

The range scale is automatically set to 24 NM. The radar screen will show arcs. You
can set the number of arcs. If the radar transmitter and receiver are in good working
order in as much as the original state when the monitor was turned on, the innermost
arc should appear between 8.0 NM and 19.8 NM. The performance monitor can ob-
serve a total of 10 dB loss in the transmitter and receiver.

Note: The lengths and location of the arcs may change with the direction in which the
antenna unit is installed. Judge the strength of the echo that appears within 60° from
arc location to confirm if the radar is working properly or not.

Display Transmitter, receiver state

Transmitter: Normal
Receiver: Normal

13.5 nm
to 18.5 nm

Transmitter and receiver:

No arc indicates 10 dB loss.
Replacement of the magnetron is neces-
13.5 nm
to 18.5 nm
sary.

2.31 Magnetron Reset (For A- and B-types)

After replacing the magnetron for the antenna unit, reset the TX time then adjust the
PM gain as follows:

1. Open the menu then select [8 INITIAL SETTING].

2. Select [9 MAGNETRON RESET].
MENU
3. Select [1 TX TIME] then set the transmit time to INITIAL SETTING
← MAGNETRON RESET
000000.0H.
1 TX TIME
4. Select [2 PM GAIN ADJ]. 4000H
2 PM GAIN ADJ
5. Select [AUTO] or [MANUAL]. AUTO/ 0
[AUTO]: PM gain is automatically adjusted. Go to step 7.
[MANUAL]: Set PM gain manually. Go to step 6.
6. Adjust the PM gain manually as follows:
Note: If the blind sector and the direction of the PM antenna overlap one another,
turn off the blind sector before adjusting the PM gain.
1) Set the radar settings as follows:

2-48
 2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION

• Range: 24 NM • A/C RAIN: OFF (turn off manually)

• Pulse Length: Long • Echo Averaging (EAV): OFF
• A/C SEA: OFF (turn off manually) • Video Contrast: 2-B
2) Adjust the gain so that a slight amount of white noise appears on the screen.
Arcs for the performance monitor appear on the screen.
3) Set [PM GAIN ADJ] so that the outer arc faintly appears. The setting range is
0 to 255. Wait at least eight scans then adjust.
7. Close the menu.

2.32 CCRP (Common Consistent Reference Point)

The reference position for measurements (range, bearing, etc.) and markers (heading
line, stern mark, etc.) can be antenna position or CCRP, which is a location on own
ship to which all horizontal measurements, for example range, bearing, relative
course, relative speed, closest point of approach (CPA) or time to closest point of ap-
proach (TCPA), are normally referenced.

To select the reference position, click the button below [REF point] at the top-left po-
sition to select [ANT] or [CCRP] as applicable.

Click button
to switch

Radar antenna Conning position at

position at center center of display
of display

ANT position CCRP position

The position of the own ship marker changes according to reference position as
shown on the next page. If the CCRP is positioned outside of the effective display ar-
ea, the bearing scale is indicated with the appropriate reduced detail.
Range and bearing are measured and graphics are drawn according to reference
point as shown in the table below.

2-49
2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION

Reference point
Category Item
CCRP Antenna position
Range and bear- EBL Range and bearing Range and bearing
ing measurement VRM measured from measured from an-
Cursor CCRP tenna position
PI line
Range ring
Drop mark
Graphics Heading line Drawn from CCRP Drawn from antenna
Stern mark position
Beam line
Own ship vector
Own ship track
Bearing cursor Drawn with CCRP at Drawn with antenna
center position at center
Course, speed Calculated with Calculated with an-
CCRP at center tenna position at
center
CPA, TCPA Calculated with Calculated with an-
CCRP at center tenna position at
center
BCR, BCT Calculated from bow position
Own ship data Heading Data from sensor, regardless of reference
Speed point selected
Course over ground
Speed over ground
Own L/L Location of the CCRP

2-50
 2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION

2.33 Drop Mark

The drop mark is used to find the angle and distance from a point to your ship. This
can be useful for marking a point to avoid while navigating to a destination. The drop
marks can be shown or hidden on the screen.

Drop mark

The Drop mark box shows the angle and distance between the drop mark and your
ship.

Drop mark no. Minimize button

(1 or 2)
Drop angle

Drop distance

Note: The drop mark feature is inoperative when position data is lost.

2.33.1 How to show, hide the drop mark box

The drop mark box can be shown or hidden by trackball.

OFF: Click the arrow on the [Drop mark] box or right-click the box and select
[DROPx Off] (x=Drop mark no.).
ON: Click the minimize box.

2.33.2 How to inscribe a drop mark

Click the desired Drop mark box at the bottom of the screen. Click a position on the
display area where to put a drop mark, and a drop mark is inscribed at the position
selected. The angle and distance to the point appear in the corresponding Drop mark
box.

2.33.3 Drop mark bearing reference

The bearing of a drop mark is automatically referenced to True or Relative according
to the presentation mode.

Presentation mode Bearing reference

Head-up RM Relative
STAB H UP RM
Stern-up RM
Course-up RM True
North-up RM
North-up TM

2-51
2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION

2.33.4 How to erase a drop mark

Erase drop mark from menu
1. Open the menu then select the [5 MAP MARK] and [1 MARK SETTING] menus.
2. Select [7 DROP MARK].
3. Select [OFF].
4. Close the menu.

Erase drop mark by trackball

Right-click the applicable Drop mark box to show the context-sensitive menu then se-
lect [Drop 1 Off] (or [Drop 2 Off]). The drop mark and its data are erased.

2.34 Anchor Watch

The anchor watch is used to monitor if the ship is staying at anchor. If your vessel trav-
els more than the distance set here, the Alert 495 "Anchor Watch Error" appears in the
[Alert] box and the audio alarm sounds.

Alarm
setting

Your ship's position, where

you start the anchor watch. : Alarm triggered

How to activate anchor watch

1. Open the menu then select [8 INITIAL SETTING] and [4
ALERT] menus.
2. Select [3 ANCHOR WATCH].
3. Select [ON]. Use the scrollwheel to set the alarm radius
(0.01 to 9.99 NM).
4. Close the menu.

2-52
 2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION

2.35 SART

2.35.1 What is an SART?

A Search and Rescue Transponder (SART) may be triggered by any X-band (3 cm)
radar within a range of approximately 8 NM. Each radar pulse received causes it to
transmit a response which is swept repetitively across the complete radar frequency
band.

Screen A: When SART is distant Screen B: When SART is close

Radar antenna beamwidth

Echo from SART Echo from SART
(Lines of 12 dots (Lines of 12 dots
are displayed in are displayed in
concentric arcs.) concentric arcs.)

Own ship position Own ship position

Position of SART Position of SART
24 NM 1.5 NM

2.35.2 How to receive an SART

This radar is equipped with a feature that optimally sets up the radar for SART detec-
tion. This feature automatically detunes the radar receiver out of its best tuning condi-
tion. This erases or weakens all normal radar echoes, but the SART marks are not
erased because the SART response signal scans over all frequencies in the 9 GHz
band. When the radar approaches the SART in operation, the SART marks will en-
large to large arcs, blurring a large part of the screen.

1. Open the menu then select the [1 ECHO] menu.

2. Select [7 SART] (B type).
3. Select [ON].
4. Close the menu. The message "SART" appears in the message area when the
SART function is active.
When the SART is activated the radar controls are automatically set as follows.

Adjustable during
Setting at activation Setting at deactivation
Item activation of SART
of SART feature of SART feature
feature
CONDITION Setting stored Yes Setting at deactivation
CUSTOMIZE Grayed out, setting No Return to active display
ECHO stored
EAV OFF No Setting before activation
ES OFF No Setting before activation
GAIN Setting stored Yes Setting at deactivation
IR OFF No Setting before activation
LOW LEVEL Setting stored Yes Setting at deactivation
ECHO

2-53
2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION

Adjustable during
Setting at activation Setting at deactivation
Item activation of SART
of SART feature of SART feature
feature
NOISE OFF No Setting before activation
REJECT
OFF center OFF Yes Setting at deactivation
Presentation Mode Setting stored * 1 Yes Setting at deactivation
PULSE LONG No Setting at deactivation
RAIN Setting stored Yes Setting at deactivation
RAIN AUTO MAN No Setting before activation
RANGE 12 NM, 12 SM, 24 km, Yes *2 Setting at deactivation
24 kyd
SEA Setting stored Yes Setting at deactivation
SEA AUTO Setting stored Yes Setting at deactivation
TUNE Setting stored Yes Setting at deactivation
VIDEO Setting stored Yes Setting at deactivation
CONTRAST
WIPER Setting stored Yes Setting at deactivation
*1 North-up RM selected when the mode is North-up TM.
*2 The SART feature is deactivated if the range is changed.

2-54
 2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION

2.36 Alert Box, Alert List

2.36.1 Alert box

When an alert condition is found, the applicable alert message and alert ID appear in
the [Alert] box. For the alarm- and warning-type alerts a buzzer sounds. The [Alert] box
is composed of the four items shown in the figure below. See chapter 20 for details.

Alert state Buzzer stop

icon icon (Click to
stop buzzer
temporarily.)
Alert message Alert list/log icon
(Alert ID and alert name) (Click to display.)

2.36.2 Alert list

The [Alert List] displays the status of the latest 900 system alerts, in order of genera-
tion, latest to the earliest. To display the list, click the Alert list/log icon in the [Alert]
box. The Alert list/log icon is light-blue when the list is displayed. A maximum of nine
alerts are shown per page. Unacknowledged alerts are displayed in flashing red
(alarm) or flashing yellow-orange (warning). The ZDA sentence is required to display
time in the list.

Click to close list.

• Click to close list. (Press ← on the
Control Unit to close list.)
• [BACK] shown when there are two
or more pages. Switch to previous
page in multiple page displays.
The name of the alert not
acknowledged or not rectified.

Status icon

Switch to next page in multiple page

displays. (Not shown when only one
page exists.)

How to acknowledge or rectify from the list

Control Unit: Press appropriate numeric key.
Trackball module: Click alarm name.

2-55
2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION

How to find details about an alert

Click the status icon in the list to show details about an Alert Number : 255
alert. Source: No. 2 Chart Radar
Description: Gyro 1 COM Error
Detail : Gyro 1 COM Error

2.36.3 Changing priority of primary alerts

Alerts are categorized and prioritized as shown below.

Priority Alert category

High Alarm
Middle Warning
Low Caution
If desired, you can specify the events that are to have the same priority as “Alarm”.

1. Open the menu then select the [8 INITIAL SETTINGS] and [4 ALERT] menus.
2. Select [3 PRIMARY ALERT].

3. Click the box to the left of an alarm name to show a circle to give that alarm the
same priority as the alert category "Alarm."
4. Close the menu.
The priority is immediately changed for an inactive alert. For an active alert, the priority
selected becomes effective when the alert is acknowledged and regenerated.

2-56
 2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION

2.37 Echo Area

The echo display area for the B-type radar can be selected for [CIRCLE] or [WIDE].

CIRCLE WIDE

To select the echo display area type to use, open the menu, select the [1 ECHO] menu
then set [2 ECHO AREA] to [CIRCLE] or [WIDE] as appropriate.

2.38 Echo Color

The default echo color is green. Echo color is also available in the following colors:

B type: Yellow, green, white, amber, and “color”. “Color” displays echoes in red, yel-
low or green corresponding to the signal levels of strong, medium and weak.
IMO and A types: Yellow, green and white.
To select the echo color, open the [1 ECHO] menu then select desired color from [3
ECHO COLOR].

2.39 Chart Radar Functions

2.39.1 How to switch between radar and chart radar modes

Click the [CHART ON/OFF] button on the InstantAccess bar™ to show or hide the
chart.

[Chart
ON/OFF]
button

Indication on button and corresponding mode

Chart ON: Chart radar mode active. (Chart and radar picture are displayed.)
Chart OFF: Radar mode active. (Only the radar picture is displayed.)

When the GPS position is lost, the chart radar mode cannot be used. When this oc-
curs, the label on the button shows [Chart OFF] and the button is greyed out.

2-57
2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION

2.39.2 How to show or hide chart objects

The [Chart Disp] button on the InstantAccess bar™ has several buttons which control
chart object visibility.

No. Item Function

1 [Coast Line Only] Hold down the left button to temporarily display only the coast-
line. Chart symbols (depth contours, navigation buoys, etc.)
are temporarily erased from the screen.
2 [Chart Top Layer] Hold down the left button to temporarily put the chart objects
(buoy, lighthouse, etc.) on the top layer.
3 [Chart DISP Show the [CHART DISPLAY] menu, where you set safety con-
Menu] tours, safety depth, etc. See the figure on the next page for the
content of this menu and see section 8.2 How to Control Visi-
ble Chart Objects for details.
Note: This menu can also be shown by right-clicking the
[CHART ON/OFF] button and selecting [Chart Display Menu].

4 [Sel DISP Object] Show the [SEL DISP OBJECT] menu, where you can select
the chart objects and text to show or hide. See the next page
for the menus and see section 8.3 How to Control Visible Nav-
igation Features (symbol display) for details.
5 [Chart Legend] Show the chart legend for
the current chart. See the
chapters on Vector and
C-MAP charts for a
description of the chart
legends.

2-58
 2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION

CHART DISPLAY menu

GENERAL menu

STANDARD objects OTHER objects TEXT objects

2-59
2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION

2.39.3 How to create and recall custom sets of chart display objects
You can create one custom set of chart display objects and recall them when required.
For example, you can create a custom set of chart display objects to display when you
navigate a certain coastline.

How to create a custom set of chart display objects

1. Open the menu then select the [6 CHART DISPLAY] and [2 SEL DISPLAY OB-
JECT] menus.
2. Open the [2 STANDARD ITEMS], [3 OTHER ITEMS], [4 IMPORTANT TEXT] and
[5 OTHER TEXT] menus and turn objects and text on or off as appropriate.
3. Click [SEL DISPLAY OBJECT] on the menu.
4. Select [1 SAVE TO PERSONAL] to save the settings. The confirmation message
"Attention: Do you wish to overwrite current settings to PERSONAL?" appears.
5. Click the [OK] button to save the settings.

How to activate the custom set of chart display objects

Click the [Chart database] button (see the illustration below) on the Status bar then
select [PERSONAL].

2.39.4 Chart database information

You can select the quantity of objects and text to display on the chart radar screen,
with the [Chart database] button on the Status bar. There are four different pre-defined
settings available and one user-definable ([PERSONAL]). Indication of selected set-
ting appears on the label of the [Chart database] button. The [Chart ON/OFF] button
(on the InstantAccess bar™) must be ON to show the [Chart database] button. The
[Chart database] button is grayed out if the [Chart ON/OFF] button is OFF.

[Chart database] button Selection Setting in [SEL DISP OBJECT] menu

[IMO Base] Nothing checked in [GENERAL], [STANDARD], [OTH-
ER] or [TEXT].
[IMO Primary] Nothing else checked but [BUOYS AND BEACONS] in
[STANDARD] and [SHALLOW WATER DANGERS] in
[GENERAL]. This is the "Primary Chart Information
Set (PCIS)", based on IEC 62388 Ed.2 sec-
tion12.1.5.1, IEC61174 and IMO Resolution
MSC.232(82).
[IMO Standard] All objects checked in [STANDARD]; nothing checked
in [GENERAL], [OTHER] or [TEXT].
[IMO All] Everything checked in [STANDARD] and [OTHER].
[PERSONAL] Use the settings recorded for [GENERAL], [STAN-
DARD], [OTHER] and [TEXT].

2-60
 2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION

2.39.5 How to set value for shallow contour, safety depth, safety con-
tour and deep contour
You can set values for shallow contour, safety depth, safety contour and deep contour,
on the [CHART DISPLAY] menu. Colors used for depth presentation on the electronic
chart are controlled by setting values for shallow contour, safety depth, safety contour
and deep contour. Soundings on the electronic chart, which are equal to or less than
the value of safety depth, are highlighted. For details, see the ECDIS operator’s man-
ual.

Note: The shallow contour cannot be set higher than the safety contour.
1. Open the menu then select the [6 CHART DISPLAY] menu.
2. Select [3 SHALLOW CONTOUR], [4 SAFETY DEPTH], [5 SAFETY CONTOUR],
or [6 DEEP CONTOUR].
3. Spin the scrollwheel to set the value then push the left button.
4. Close the menu.
To reset the value for shallow contour, safety depth, safety contour and deep contour,
open the menu then select [6 CHART DISPLAY] and [9 RESET CNT AND DEPTH]
menus. The message "Do you wish to restore default contour and depth settings?" ap-
pears. Select [Yes].

2-61
2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION

2.39.6 How to select the chart color and tone

You can select color and tone for chart display.

1. Open the menu then select the [6 CHART DISPLAY] menu.

2. Select [7 CHART MONOCHROME].
3. Select [OFF] or [ON] as appropriate.
[OFF]: Displays the chart in multicolor.
[ON]: Displays the chart in monochrome.
4. Select [8 AREA COLOR].
5. Select [COLOR FILL], [GRAY SCALE], or [NO COLOR] as appropriate.
[COLOR FILL]: Displays chart in multi color.
[GRAY SCALE]: Displays water area in gray scale.
[NO COLOR]: Does not fill the chart.
6. Close the menu.

2.39.7 How to show/hide the curved EBL

The [Curved EBL] function shows the planned steering radius. You can use this func-
tion to determine the best location to begin a turn. You can also use the [Curved EBL]
function to determine whether a turn is conduct as planned.

XTD limit Curved EBL

Steering line

OS mark

WPT1

To show/hide the [Curved EBL], click the [ON]/[OFF] button on the [Curved EBL] page
of the [Overly/NAV Tools] box.

Note: This function is only available when a EC-3000 with TCS functionality is con-
nected to the network.
1. Open the menu and select [5 MAP•MARK] and [MARK SETTING].
2. Select [DISP CURVED EBL] from page 2 of the [MARK SETTING] menu.
3. Select [ON] to display the curved EBL, [OFF] to hide the curved EBL.
4. Close the menu.

2-62
 2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION

2.39.8 Chart scale indications

The system alerts you to the availability of larger
Location of chart scale indications
scale ENC and overscale, at the top-left position.

When the radar display range is higher than the

chart scale of the ENC chart, the indication,
"Larger scale ENC" is displayed. For example,
the radar range is 24 NM and the range available
with the ENC chart is less than 12 NM.

When the radar display range is lower than the

chart scale of the ENC chart, the indication "Over-
scale x.xx" (x.xx=overscale factor). For example,
the radar range is 0.25 NM and the chart scale is
0.5 NM.
If both conditions exist, both indications are displayed.

2.39.9 Chart status

The indication "Chart status" appears at the top-right position on the screen when the
display date for the currently displayed chart has passed.

2.39.10 Chart alert function

The chart alert function operates in chart mode only. There are two types of chart
alerts: your ship's predicted course, and route alert. See the chapter on chart alerts for
details.
For the ship's predicted course alert, the operator sets a safety contour. (See
section 8.2.1 for how to set a safety contour suitable for the ship.) The operator also
sets the parameters for own ship predicted movement. (See section 11.2 How to Ac-
tivate Own Ship Check.)

For the route alert, route planning (see section 12.4 How to Create a New Route) and
route monitoring (see section 14.1 How to Select the Route to Monitor) functions are
available.

2-63
2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION

2.39.11 Notes details

"Notes" provides messages for the operator relative to a specific ship position. The
chart radar compares the Notes position and own ship position and displays the Notes
when own ship is at the distance from the Notes specified in route planning. To display
the Notes at other times, right-click the display area to show the context-sensitive
menu, then select [Notes details]. In the example below the Notes about a wreck are
shown.

• Object name: The name assigned to the Notes.

• Object class: The type of object (point, line, area or
circle) linked to the Notes.
Wreck area
• Position: Position of the object in latitude and
longitude.
• Range: The range to the object.
• Description: A description of the object, input in the
Voyage planning mode.

Wreck within circle

2-64
 2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION

2.40 Radar Observation

2.40.1 General
Minimum range
The minimum range is defined by the shortest distance at which, using a scale of 1.5
or 0.75 NM, a target having an echoing area of 10 m2 is still shown separate from the
point representing the antenna position.

It is mainly dependent on the pulse length, antenna height, and signal processing such
as main bang suppression and digital quantization. It is a good practice to use a short-
er range scale as far as it gives favorable definition or clarity of picture. The IMO Res-
olution MSC.192(79) requires the minimum range to be less than 40 m, respectively.
This series of radars satisfy this requirement.

Maximum range
The maximum detecting range of the radar, Rmax, varies considerably depending on
several factors such as the height of the antenna above the waterline, the height of the
target above the sea, the size, shape and material of the target, and the atmospheric
conditions.

Under normal atmospheric conditions, the maximum range is equal to the radar hori-
zon or a little shorter. The radar horizon is longer than the optical one by about 6%
because of the diffraction property of the radar signal. The Rmax is given in the follow-
ing equation.

R max= 2.2 x ( h1 + h2 )

where Rmax: radar horizon (nm)

h1: antenna height (m)
h2: target height (m)

Radar horizon
Optical horizon

For example, if the height of the antenna above the waterline is 9 meters and the
height of the target is 16 meters, the maximum radar range is;

R max= 2.2 x ( 9 + 16 ) = 2.2 x (3 + 4) = 15.4 nm

It should be noted that the detection range is reduced by precipitation (which absorbs
the radar signal).

X-band and S-band

In fair weather, the equation on the previous page does not give a significant differ-
ence between X- and S-band radars. However, in heavy precipitation condition, an S-
band radar would have better detection than an X-band radar.

Radar resolution
There are two important factors in radar resolution (discrimination): bearing resolution
and range resolution.

2-65
2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION

Bearing resolution
Bearing resolution is the ability of the radar to display as separate pips the echoes re-
ceived from two targets which are at the same range and close together. It is propor-
tional to the antenna length and reciprocally proportional to the wavelength. The
length of the antenna radiator should be chosen for a bearing resolution better than
2.5° (IMO Resolution). This condition is normally satisfied with a radiator of 1.2 m (4
ft) or longer in the X-band. The S-band radar requires a radiator of about 12 feet (3.6
m) or longer.

Range resolution
Range resolution is the ability to display as separate pips the echoes received from
two targets which are on the same bearing and close to each other. This is determined
by pulse length only. Practically, a 0.08 microsecond pulse offers the discrimination
better than 40 m as do so with all FURUNO radars. Test targets for determining the
range and bearing resolution are radar reflectors having an echoing area of
10 m2 (X-band) or 1 m2 (S-band).

Bearing accuracy
One of the most important features of the radar is how accurately the bearing of a tar-
get can be measured. The accuracy of bearing measurement basically depends on
the narrowness of the radar beam. However, the bearing is usually taken relative to
the ship's heading, and thus, proper adjustment of the heading line at installation is an
important factor in ensuring bearing accuracy. To minimize error when measuring the
bearing of a target, put the target echo at the extreme position on the screen by se-
lecting a suitable range.

2.40.2 False echoes

Occasionally echo signals appear on the screen at positions where there is no target
or disappear even if there are targets. They are, however, recognized if you under-
stand the reason why they are displayed. Typical false echoes are shown below.

Multiple echoes
Multiple echoes occur when a transmitted pulse returns from a solid object like a large
ship, bridge, or breakwater. A second, a third or more echoes may be observed on the
display at double, triple or other multiples of the actual range of the target as shown
below. Multiple reflection echoes can be reduced and often removed by decreasing
the gain (sensitivity) or properly adjusting the sea clutter.

True
echo

Target
Own ship
Multiple
echo

2-66
 2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION

Sidelobe echoes
Every time the radar pulse is transmitted, some radiation escapes on each side of the
beam, called "sidelobes." If a target exists where it can be detected by the side lobes
as well as the main lobe, the side echoes may be represented on both sides of the true
echo at the same range. Side lobes show usually only on short ranges and from strong
targets. They can be reduced through careful reduction of the gain or sea clutter.

Target A
Target B
(Spurious) Target B
(True)

Virtual image
A relatively large target close to your ship may be represented at two positions on the
screen. One of them is the true echo directly reflected by the target and the other is a
false echo which is caused by the mirror effect of a large object on or close to your
ship as shown in the figure below. If your ship comes close to a large metal bridge, for
example, such a false echo may temporarily be seen on the screen.

Target ship

Own ship

True
echo

False
echo
Mirror image
of target ship

2-67
2. RADAR, CHART RADAR OPERATION

Shadow sectors
Funnels, stacks, masts, or derricks in the path of the antenna block the radar beam. If
the angle subtended at the antenna is more than a few degrees, a non-detecting sec-
tor may be produced. Within this sector targets can not be detected.

Radar
antenna

Radar
mast

Shadow sector

2.40.3 RACON
A RACON is a radar beacon which emits radar receivable signals in the radar frequen-
cy spectrum (X- or S-band). There are several signal formats; in general, the RACON
signal appears on the radar screen as a rectangular echo originating at a point just
beyond the position of the radar beacon. It has a Morse coded pattern. Note that the
position on the radar display is not accurate.

RACON

2.40.4 Radar Target Enhancer (RTE)

An RTE is a radar transponder that is mounted on navigation buoys and masts of
small crafts to significantly improve their detection by radar. Unlike a SART or
RACON, which are passive, the RTE receives a radar signal, amplifies it and re-trans-
mits it, with the intention of making the target's signal look larger on a radar display.
The RTE can be detected on both X-band and S-band radars.

2-68
3. TARGET TRACKING (TT)

3.1 About TT
The TT tracks and plots the movement of up to 100 radar targets and fully complies
with IMO standards for TT.

The TT automatically tracks an automatically or manually acquired radar target and

calculates its course and speed, indicating them with a vector. Since the data gener-
ated by the TT depends on the radar targets selected, the radar must be optimally
tuned for use with the TT, to ensure required targets will not be lost or unnecessary
targets like sea returns and noise will not be acquired and tracked.

Tracking accuracy is affected by course change. One to two minutes is required to re-
store vectors to full accuracy after an abrupt course change. (The actual amount de-
pends on gyrocompass specifications.)
The amount of tracking delay is inversely proportional to the relative speed of the tar-
get. Delay is approx. 15-30 seconds for the higher relative speed; approx. 30-60 sec-
onds for the lower relative speed. The following factors can affect accuracy:

• Echo intensity
• Radar transmission pulse length
• Radar bearing error
• Gyrocompass error
• Course change (own ship and targets)

3.2 How to Show, Hide the TT Display

Click the TT mode indication at the bottom-right position
to show [OFF] to hide the TT display, or [AUTO]*,
[MAN]* or [MAN/AUTO]* to show the TT display. You
can right-click the TT mode indication to show a context-
sensitive menu with the choices shown above. In this
case, click the applicable option.

* The indication shown depends on the setting of [TT

SELECT] in the [TT AIS] menu.

3-1
3. TARGET TRACKING (TT)

3.3 How to Input Your Ship's Speed

The TT requires own ship's speed and heading data. The speed can be STW, SOG,
or echo-referenced speed (based on 3 max. stationary objects) taken from this radar.
Manual input is also possible.

For automatic or manual speed input, see section 1.16. For echo-referenced speed
input see the next section.

3.3.1 Echo-referenced speed input

The use of echo-referenced speed is recommended when:

• The speed log is not operating properly or not connected to the radar.
• The vessel has no device that can measure ship's leeward movement (Doppler so-
nar, speed log, etc.) when leeward movement cannot be disregarded.
If you select echo-referenced speed, the TT calculates own ship's speed relative to a
fixed reference target. The number of targets may be 1, 2 or 3. They appear as tracked
targets, each denoted with a small circle. When a plural number of objects are select-
ed, the mean value is used.

Note: This feature is not available when the AIS is active.

1. Right-click the display area to show the context-sensitive menu then select [REF
Mark].
2. Select a small fixed island or any radar prominent point located at 0.1 to 24 NM
from own ship.
3. Use the trackball to put the cursor (+) on the target selected at step 2.
4. Push the left button to insert the reference mark.

Changes to in three minutes

R R01 R 01

5. Repeat steps 2-4 to continue entering reference marks. Three may be entered.
6. Right click the Sensor information box then choose [Select Sensor] and [Setting].
Open the [SPD] page and put a checkmark at [Reference SPD]. Click the [OK]
button to finish.

Notes on speed input by reference target

• Reference targets are only used for the calculation of true speed.
• Do not use reference target generated true speed to calculate relative speed. Rel-
ative speed data is not accurate because response to speed change is slow, ham-
pering the TT's ability to accurately judge the possibility of collision.
• Select a stationary target as a reference target to calculate own ship speed as
ground tracking speed. Do not choose a moving target as a reference target. A mov-
ing target produces error in the vector for TT and AIS, which results in wrong colli-
sion avoidance information. Further, an unstable stationary target produces
inaccurate speed data and the target itself may become lost.
• When a reference target is lost or goes out of the acquisition range, the reference
target mark flashes and the Alert 528 "REF Target Lost" appears in the [Alert] box.

3-2
 3. TARGET TRACKING (TT)

If all reference targets are lost, the speed indication disappears. Select a different
reference target if the currently selected one is lost.
• When all tracked targets are deleted, the reference target mark is also deleted and
the target-based speed becomes invalid.
• Loss of reference target will affect the calculation of true speed and true course of
targets. Further, own ship speed will be inaccurate.

Canceling echo-referenced speed input

Right click the Sensor information box then choose [Select Sensor] and [Setting].
Open the [SPD] page and select a speed sensor.

3.4 Automatic Acquisition

This radar can automatically acquire and track a maximum of 100 targets. The number
of automatically and manually acquired targets is determined by the setting of [TT SE-
LECT] in the [TT] menu.

A target just acquired automatically is marked with a dashed circle and a vector ap-
pears within one minute to indicate the target's motion trend. Within three minutes, the
initial tracking stage is finished and the target becomes ready for stable tracking. At
this time, the dashed circle changes to a solid circle.

3.4.1 How to enable auto acquisition

1. Right-click the TT mode indication then select [TT Menu] to show the [TT] menu.
2. Select [1 TT SELECT] and the acquisition condition.
Menu setting Acquisition condition
[MANUAL 100] 100 targets manually, Not available for auto acquisition
[MANUAL 75 • AUTO 25] 25 targets automatically, 75 targets manually
[MANUAL 50 • AUTO 50] 50 targets automatically, 50 targets manually
[MANUAL 25 • AUTO 75] 75 targets automatically, 25 targets manually
[AUTO 100] 100 targets automatically, Not available for manual ac-
quisition
3. Close the menu.
Note 1: The TT indication in the TT/AIS setting box shows [AUTO], [MAN/AUTO] or
[MAN] depending on the acquisition condition selected.
Note 2: When the menu-set number of automatically acquired targets have been ac-
quired, the Alert 523 (ALF format: 190,4) "TT Auto ACQ 100%" appears in the [Alert]
box.

3.4.2 How to set an automatic acquisition zone

You can set an automatic acquisition zone to automatically track any targets entering
the zone. The acquisition zone can be fan-shaped or polygonal. The maximum track-
ing range is set during the installation.
Fan-shaped zone of AZ1: The range is fixed at 3 - 6 NM (width 0.5 - 1.0 NM).
Fan-shaped zone of AZ2: The range is available between 0.7 - 24 (or 32) NM (width
0.5 - 1.0 NM)
Polygon zone of AZ2: The zone can be set within the range of 0.125 NM to 120 NM.

3-3
3. TARGET TRACKING (TT)

Note: When processing two acquisition zones, create the zones in numerical order
and turn them off in reverse numerical order.

To set the zone for AZ2, first set the zone for AZ1.

To turn off the zone for AZ1, first turn off the zone for AZ2.

When a target enters an acquisition zone, the following occurs:

• the buzzer sounds

• the Alert 521 (ALF format: 192,1) "TT New Target" appears in the [Alert] box
• the symbol of the target is red and flashes
• the AIS function is automatically turned on if it is off
1. Click one of the boxes AZ1 or AZ2 at the right side of the screen. The indication
in the AZ box changes from [OFF] to [SET].

For example,
click here for
AZ1.
2. Click point A.
3. Click point B. The indication in the AZ box changes from [SET] to [WORK].

340
350 000 010
020 Acquisition zone Other acquisition zone examples
330 030
320 040 Point A
310 050
X
300 060 Point B
290 A B
070 X
280 080
X
270 090 Point A X
260 100 Point B
250 110

240 120
230 130
220 140
210 150
200 160
190 180 170

Note 1: You are alerted when the capacity for automatic acquisition is 95% and 100%.
These alerts are 522 (ALF format: 10190,4) "TT Auto ACQ 95%" and 523 (ALF format:
190,4) "TT Auto ACQ 100%".
Note 2: If the range scale is changed to less than half of the acquisition zone, the AZ
box shows [OUT]. If the left button is pushed in this state, the acquisition alarm zone
goes into [SLEEP] state (inactive).

How to sleep, deactivate an acquisition zone

Use the trackball to select the appropriate AZ box. Sleep or deactivate the acquisition
zone as appropriate:
Sleep acquisition zone: Push the left button momentarily to remove the acquisition
zone from the screen. The indication in the AZ box changes from [WORK] to [SLEEP].
To reactivate and display the acquisition zone, repeat this procedure to display
[WORK].
Deactivate acquisition zone: Click applicable AZ box and select [OFF].

3-4
 3. TARGET TRACKING (TT)

How to acknowledge the acquisition zone audio alarm

Press the ALARM ACK key, or click the [Alert] box.

Acquisition zone stabilization

The acquisition zone may be referenced to heading or North. Open the menu then se-
lect the [TT•AIS] and [1 ACQUISITION ZONE] menus. Set [1 AZ STAB] to [STAB
HDG] or [STAB NORTH] as appropriate. For a polygon acquisition zone, stabilization
can be selected to [2 AZ POLYGON].

3.5 Manual Acquisition

This radar can manually acquire and track a maximum of 100 targets.

The number of automatically and manually acquired targets is determined by the set-
ting of [TT SELECT] in the [TT] menu.

3.5.1 How to set manual acquisition conditions

1. Right-click the TT mode indication then select [TT Menu] to show the [TT] menu.
2. Select [1 TT SELECT] and the acquisition condition.
Menu setting Acquisition condition
[MANUAL 100] 100 targets manually, Not available for auto acquisition
[MANUAL 75 • AUTO 25] 25 targets automatically, 75 targets manually
[MANUAL 50 • AUTO 50] 50 targets automatically, 50 targets manually
[MANUAL 25 • AUTO 75] 75 targets automatically, 25 targets manually
[AUTO 100] 100 targets automatically, Not available for manual ac-
quisition
3. Close the menu.

3.5.2 How to manually acquire a target

Acquire a target from the Control Unit
Use the trackball to put the cursor on the target you want to acquire. Push the ACQ
ACT key.

Acquire a target by the trackball module

1. When the target to acquire and the AIS symbol overlap one another, push the right
button to show the context-sensitive menu then select [Target Data/ACQ/ACT]
and [TT Only] to acquire the target.
2. Put the cursor on the target to acquire then push the left button.
The plotting symbol is drawn by a dashed circle during the initial acquisition stage. A
vector appears approximately one minute after acquisition. The vector indicates the
motion trend of the target. If the target is consistently detected for three minutes, the
plotting symbol changes to a solid circle. If acquisition fails, the target symbol blinks.

Note 1: For successful acquisition, the target should be within 24 NM (or 32 NM, de-
pending on initial setting) from own ship and not obscured by sea or rain clutter.
Note 2: You are alerted when the capacity of manual acquisition is 95% and 100%.
These alerts are Alert 524 (ALF format: 10190,5) "TT MAN ACQ 95%" and Alert 525

3-5
3. TARGET TRACKING (TT)

(ALF format: 190,5) "TT MAN ACQ 100%". If the capacity is 100% you cannot acquire
more targets. Cancel tracking of non-threatening targets if you wish to acquire addi-
tional targets manually.
Note 3: When a target being tracked nears another target being tracked, the targets
may be "swapped". When two targets acquired either automatically or manually come
close to each other, one of the two may become a lost target. If this occurs, manual
re-acquisition of the lost target may be necessary after the two have separated.
Note 4: You can reuse a target number. This is useful when you acquire the “wrong”
target. Drag and drop the symbol onto the correct target.

3-6
 3. TARGET TRACKING (TT)

3.6 How to Stop Tracking Targets (including refer-

ence targets)
When the TT has acquired the menu-set number of targets, the Alert 523 (ALF format:
190,5) "TT AUTO ACQ 100%" (automatic acquisition) or 525 (ALF format: 190,4) "TT
MAN ACQ 100%" (manual acquisition) appears in the [Alert] box and no more auto or
manual acquisition occurs unless targets are lost. Should this happen, cancel tracking
of less important targets to acquire new targets.

3.6.1 How to cancel tracking on individual tracked targets

Cancel tracking on a target from the Control Unit
1. Use the trackball to put the cursor (+) on the TT or reference target to cancel track-
ing.
2. Push the TARGET CANCEL key.

Cancel tracking on a target by the trackball module

1. Right-click the operational area of the screen to show the context-sensitive menu.
2. Select [Target Cancel] and [Any] or [TT Only] as applicable.
3. Click the TT or reference target to cancel tracking.

3.6.2 How to cancel tracking on all TTs

Cancel tracking on all target from the menu
1. Right-click the TT mode indication on the bottom-right of the screen then select
[TT Menu] to show the [TT] menu.
2. Select [2 ALL CANCEL].
3. Select [YES].
4. Close the menu.

Cancel tracking on all target from the Control Unit

Long-press the TARGET CANCEL key to erase all displayed TT target data.

3-7
3. TARGET TRACKING (TT)

3.7 TT Symbols and TT Symbol Attributes

3.7.1 TT symbols
The symbols used in this equipment comply with IEC 62288.

Symbol Default color Name Description

Green Past position marker Past position point
Green Target under acquisition Plotting symbol selected for a target ac-
quired manually is shown in broken lines.
Red Target under automatic ac- Thick, broken circle around an echo to in-
quisition dicate the target under acquisition and
initial stage of tracking, before steady-
state tracking.
Green Acquired target Solid circle with vector indicating steady
state tracking (within three minutes after
acquisition)
Red Acquired target in ACQ Solid circle with vector indicating steady
zone (before acknowledg- state tracking (within three minutes after
ment) acquisition)
Red Dangerous target Dangerous TT (thick, solid circle)

Green Reference target Used to calculate own ship’s over-the-

R 01 ground speed (echo-referenced speed)
for ground stabilization.
Green Association target Association TT is shown in AIS symbol
and TT data.
Red Association dangerous tar- Association dangerous TT is shown in
get AIS symbol and TT data.
Red Lost target Lost TT is shown with cross mark.

Green Target selected TT selected to show its data.

White Trial maneuver Displayed (flashing) during trial maneu-

T
ver test.
S White TT test Displayed (flashing) during TT test.

3-8
 3. TARGET TRACKING (TT)

3.7.2 TT symbol brilliance

1. Right-click the [BRILL] button on the InstantAccess bar™ then select [BRILL
menu].

㻝㻡

㻝㻡

㻝㻡

㻝㻡

㻝㻡

㻝㻡

㻝㻡

2. Go to page 2, select [4 TT SYMBOL] then spin the scrollwheel to adjust the bril-
liance.

3.7.3 Color for TT symbol

You can select the color for the TT symbol as follows:

1. Right-click the TT mode indication then select [Symbol Menu] to show that menu.

2. Select [1 SYMBOL COLOR] and desired color. (Red and yellow are available with
the A-and B-type.

3-9
3. TARGET TRACKING (TT)

3.8 How to Display TT Data

The TT mode provides the fully functionality of TT as required by the IMO
MSC.192(79) and IEC62288, including display of range, bearing, course, speed, CPA
and TCPA of all tracked targets.

The target bearing is shown in relative bearing in head-up mode and true bearing in
course-up, north-up and true motion modes, with the suffix “R” (Relative) or “T” (True).

The target speed and course are shown as speed and course over the ground or
speed through the water depending on speed source.

3.8.1 How to display target data for individual TT

You can show the data for two (19-inch display) or three (23-inch display) tracked tar-
gets in the TT information window.

By Control Unit: Put the cursor on a target then push the TARGET DATA key.
By Trackball: Click the target for which you want to show its data.

Tracked target data

 To erase data from a data box, click the appropriate close data button.
 The basic target data display for a TT consists of the following information:
• TT no. Target numbering starts from "1". When a target is erased the number will
not be reused until the power is re-set or more than 100 targets are acquired.
• Bearing (BRG) and distance (RNG) of the target from own ship
• True speed over the ground (SOG) and true course over the ground (COG) of
the target
• CPA and TCPA. A negative TCPA value means that you have already passed
the closest point and the TT is going away from own ship.
• Bow Crossing Range (BCR) and Bow Crossing Time (BCT)

Title bar
TT
TT no. 001 002
Bearing BRG 137.0° T 138.5° T
Range RNG 8.587NM 8.726NM
Course over ground T COG 040.0° T 062.5° T
Speed over ground T SOG 9.81kn 7.35kn
CPA CPA 5.724NM 5.847NM
TCPA TCPA -33:24 -35:48
Bow crossing range BCR -7.171NM -7.326NM
Bow crossing time BCT -12:05 -13:03

3-10
 3. TARGET TRACKING (TT)

Number of TT/AIS target data box to display

You can select how many target data boxes to display with the following procedure.

1. Open the menu, then select [4 INFORMATION BOX] and [4 TARGET DATA].
2. Select the number of boxes to display from [1 BOX], [2 BOX], or [3 BOX].
Note: The [3 BOX] option is not available for 19 inch monitors.
3. Close the menu.
The target data are displayed from bottom up in order of acquisition. When target data
box(es), information box and zoom display are available, target data box(es) has pri-
ority.

3.8.2 TT pop-up information

The TT pop-up shows abbreviated TT data (target no.,
COG, SOG, CPA and TCPA) for the selected TT. Simply
put the cursor on the TT symbol to show the pop-up. The
pop-up can be enabled or disabled with [TT POP-UP INFO]
in the [TT•AIS SYMBOL] menu.

3.8.3 Target list

The target list shows the data for all tracked targets and AIS targets. To show the list,
click the [Target List] button at the right side of the screen or press the TARGET LIST
key on the Control Unit. (The button is light-blue when the target list is displayed.)

To close the list, click the Close button (X) on the list or press the TARGET LIST key.

Sort targets by:

Filter targets:
CLOSE
1 TT Target
No. 21
BRG: 125.5°T RNG 3.434NM
CPA: 2.923NM TCPA: 12:00

2 AIS Target INFO: A [INFO] column: Click to show/hide the

FURUNO target information for each target. The
BRG: 120.2°T RNG: 5.211NM information displayed varies depending
CPA: 3.345NM TCPA: 14:30 on the target selected.
• For AIS targets: The order in which the
3 AIS Target
VOYAGER targets appear in the details window is
BRG: 88.2°T RNG: 7.321NM displayed (A, B or C). For example, a
CPA: 3.662NM TCPA: 16:25 target with the indication “B” in the [INFO]
column appears in the second target
details box.
Click to refresh data 0 Refresh data “C” is not shown for 19” monitors.
→ Next • For TT targets: The target number (01
to 200) appears.
• For reference targets: The referrence
number (R01 to R03) appears.

3-11
3. TARGET TRACKING (TT)

How to sort the list

You can sort the list by CPA, TCPA, BCR, BCT, RANGE, SPEED or NAME, with the
[Sort by] drop-down list.

How to filter the list

The list shows all tracked targets and AIS targets received. If you do not need to see
all targets you can filter unnecessary ones. Use the [Filter] drop-down list to select
what targets to filter: Show all targets, TT only, AIS targets only, or show only the AIS
targets that meet the criteria set on the [DISP FILTER] menu.

3.9 Vector Modes

Target vectors can be displayed relative to own ship's heading (Relative) or North
(True).

Note: IMO recommends the use of the true vector mode in sea stabilization or relative
vector mode for collision avoidance.

3.9.1 Description of vectors

Stabilization modes
It is important to select the optimum stabilization mode for the radar display. To assess
risk of collision the relative motion of a target gives the clearest indication of CPA and
may be monitored by observing either the direction of the target's relative trail, or the
CPA predicted by the relative vector. By default, relative motion displays relative target
trails and true motion displays true target trails. Where true target trails is selected, a
sea stabilized display will indicate all targets' motion through the water. A ground sta-
bilized display will indicate all targets' motion over the ground.

In coastal, estuarial and river waters where a significant set and drift may be experi-
enced, a sea stabilized display will produce significant target trails from all fixed (sta-
tionary) objects possibly producing an unacceptably high level of clutter and masking.
In such circumstances a ground stabilized display may reduce its effect and enable
the observer to detect clearly the trails of moving targets, thus enhancing the observ-
er's situational awareness.

However, the display should be considered only as an approximation of the course

and speed made good over the ground. Among other factors, the accuracy of the
ground-stabilization is affected by inaccuracies in speed and heading inputs as well
as radar measurement imprecision and will require the display to be readjusted peri-
odically. The information displayed should be interpreted with due regard to these fac-
tors.

Note: It should be noted that in determining a target's aspect by radar; the calculation
of its true track is dependent on the choice and accuracy of the own ship's course and
speed input. A ground-stabilized target plot may accurately calculate the ground track
of the target, but the target's heading may be significantly different from its track when
experiencing set, drift or leeway. Similarly, a sea stabilized target plot may be inaccu-
rate when own ship and the target, are experiencing different rates of set, drift or lee-
way.

3-12
 3. TARGET TRACKING (TT)

Ground stabilization and sea stabilization

Target vectors can be ground stabilized or sea stabilized in the True Motion mode. To
select speed over the ground or speed through the water data, open the page from the
menu. Select for ground stabilization or for sea stabilization. The Vector mode indica-
tion shows the stabilization mode in the true motion as [True-G] or [True-S].

Sea stabilization is a mode where own ship and all targets are referenced to the sea
using a compass heading and single-axis log water speed inputs in the true motion
mode. Ground stabilization is a mode where own ship and all targets are referenced
to the ground using the ground track or set and drift inputs. If the accuracy seems un-
satisfactory, enter set and drift corrections. Note that set and drift should not be used
when the radar is displaying AIS targets.

True vector
In the true motion mode, all fixed targets such as land, navigational marks and ships
at anchor remain stationary on the radar screen with vector length zero. But in the
presence of wind and/or current, the vectors appear on fixed targets representing the
reciprocal of set and drift affecting own ship unless set and drift values are properly
entered.

In the true vector mode, there are two types of stabilization: ground stabilization (True-
G) and sea stabilization (True-S). The stabilization mode is automatically selected ac-
cording to speed selection, as shown in the table below. Manual selection is available
with [Stabilization Mode] in the [SPD] page in the [Sensor Settings] menu.

Speed selection True vector mode

LOG(WT) True-S
LOG(WTC) True-G
LOG(BT) True-G
GPS(BT) True-G
REF(BT) True-G
MAN(WT) True-S
MAN(WTC) True-G
Relative vector
Relative vectors on targets that are not moving over the ground such as land, naviga-
tional marks and ships at anchor will represent the reciprocal of own ship's ground
track. A target whose vector passes through own ship is on a collision course. (Dotted
lines in the figure are for explanation only.)

Current
TT TT (Set and drift) TT
Buoy Buoy Buoy

Own Ship Own Ship Own Ship

AIS AIS AIS

True vectors in ground True vectors in sea Relative vectors

stabilization stabilization

3-13
3. TARGET TRACKING (TT)

3.9.2 Vector motion and length

Vectors may be displayed in true or relative motion. Vector time (or the length of vec-
tors) can be set between 30 seconds and 60 minutes.

The vector tip shows an estimated position of the target after the selected vector time
elapses. It can be valuable to extend the vector length to evaluate the risk of collision
with any target.

From the Control Unit

Vector motion: Push the VECTOR MODE key consecutively to select relative or true
vector mode. Your selection is shown in the Vector mode indication.

Vector length: Push the VECTOR TIME key consecutively to select vector time,
among. 30 seconds, 1 minute, 3 minutes, 5 minutes, 6 minutes, 10 minutes, 20 min-
utes, 30 minutes, 45 minutes and 60 minutes.

By trackball module
Vector motion: Click the vector motion indication at the right side of the screen to se-
lect relative or true vector mode.

Vector length: Click the vector time indication at the right side of the screen to select
time among 30 seconds, 1 minute, 3 minutes, 5 minutes, 6 minutes, 10 minutes, 20
minutes, 30 minutes, 45 minutes and 60 minutes. Or, spin the scrollwheel to select the
length from 30 seconds or 1 - 60 minutes, in one-minute intervals.

Vector length
Vector motion

3-14
 3. TARGET TRACKING (TT)

3.10 Past Position Display

The past position display shows equally time-spaced dots marking the past positions
of any targets being tracked.

If a target changes its speed, the spacing will be uneven. If it changes the course, its
plotted course will not be a straight line. See the illustration below for dot pattern and
ship status.

(a) Ship turning (b) Ship running (b) Ship (b) Ship increased
straight reduced speed speed

3.10.1 How to enable/disable the past position display, select past

position reference
Click the indications circled in the figure below to set the plot interval (or disable the
display) and the past position reference (true or relative).

Plot interval, past

position display
ON/OFF

Past position
reference

3.10.2 Past position points

You can show 5 or 10 past position points per tracked target. Right-click the past po-
sition indication then select [Past POSN Menu] to show that menu. Set [6 TT•AIS
PAST POSN POINTS] to [5] or [10].

3-15
3. TARGET TRACKING (TT)

3.11 How to Enter Set and Drift

Set, the direction in which a water current flows, can be manually entered in 0.1-de-
gree steps. Drift, the speed of the tide, can also be entered manually in 0.1 knot steps.

When course through water and speed through water are available, activate set and
drift to get course over ground and speed over ground.

Set and drift corrections are beneficial for increasing the accuracy of vectors and tar-
get data. Refer to the tide table on board the ship for setting information. These values
are applied to all targets. If stationary targets have vectors, set and drift values should
be adjusted until they lose vectors.
Note: For the IMO type, turn off the AIS function in order to enter set and drift.
To enter set and drift do the following:

1. Right-click the speed indication then select [OS Info Menu] to show the [Own Ship
Info] menu.
2. Select [2 SYSTEM SETTING] or [3 LOCAL SETTING] as appropriate.
3. Use the right and left arrow buttons to select the [SPD] page.

Set speed and

course of drift

4. Set [Stabilization Mode] to [Water].

5. Click the [Set Drift] box to show a checkmark in the box.
6. Put the cursor in the course input box to show the up and down arrows. Click the
arrows to enter the set.
7. Put the cursor in the drift input box to show the up and down arrows. Click the ar-
rows to enter the drift
8. Close the menu.
Note: Set and drift should be checked periodically for correctness.

3-16
 3. TARGET TRACKING (TT)

3.12 TT CPA/TCPA Alarm

The TT continuously monitors the predicted range at the Closest Point of Approach
(CPA) and predicted time to CPA (TCPA) of each TT. When the predicted CPA of any
TT becomes smaller than the preset CPA range and its predicted TCPA less than the
preset TCPA limit, the audio alarm sounds and the Alert 526 (ALF format: 191,1) "TT
CPA/TCPA" appears in the [Alert] box. In addition, the symbol of the offending TT is
red and flashes together with its vector.

This feature, when used correctly, helps prevent the risk of collision by alerting you to
threatening targets. It is important that the gain, sea clutter and rain clutter and other
radar controls are properly adjusted.

The accuracy of TT calculations is a function of several variables including target glint,

clutter conditions and signal-to-noise ratio. The design of the TT minimizes the effects
of these variables but you must be aware that such errors will produce inaccuracies in
the derived CPA and TCPA in particular during the initial tracking period.

CPA and TCPA settings must be set up properly taking into consideration the size,
tonnage, speed, turning performance and other characteristics of own ship.

The TT CPA/TCPA alarm should not be solely relied upon to warn you of collision sit-
uations. The operator should check all aids to navigation to monitor possible collision
situations.

3.12.1 How to set the CPA and TCPA limits

To set the CPA and TCPA ranges, do the following:

1. If the values for CPA and TCPA are blank, click [CPA/TCPA] to show them.

CPA setting
TCPA setting

2. Click the CPA indication to select desired CPA range (0.1-20 NM).
3. Click the TCPA indication to select desired TCPA time (1-60 minutes.).

3.12.2 How to enable, disable the TT CPA/TCPA alarm

The TT CPA/TCPA alert can be enabled or disabled from the TT/AIS box. Click the
indication shown below to enable or disable the TT CPA/TCPA alarm. The alarm is
disabled when the CPA and TCPA settings are not shown.

3-17
3. TARGET TRACKING (TT)

3.12.3 How to acknowledge the TT CPA/TCPA alarm

When the CPA or TCPA of a target is within the CPA and TCPA limits, the Alert 526
(ALF format: 191,1) "TT CPA/TCPA" appears in the [Alert] box and the audio alarm
sounds. To acknowledge the alarm and silence the buzzer, push the ALARM ACK
key on the Control Unit, or click the alert indication in the [Alert] box.

The alert in the [Alert] box and the flashing of the plotting symbol and vector continue
until you intentionally terminate tracking of the target or the dangerous situation is
gone.

3.13 TT Lost Target Alert

Tracked targets not detected in five consecutive scans become "lost targets." When
this occurs;

• A red X is put on the TT symbol (flashing) of the lost target. (The flashing stops after
the lost target alarm is acknowledged.)
• The audio alert sounds and the Alert 527 (ALF format: 193,1) "TT Lost" appears in
the [Alert] box.

3.13.1 How to enable, disable the TT lost target alert

The [Lost TGT] indication at the bottom-right position enables, disables the lost target
alert. Click the indication to select [OFF], [ALL] or [FILT] as appropriate.

[OFF]: Disable the alert.

[FILT]: Get the alert against the targets whose criteria meet the settings made in
section 3.13.2.
[ALL]: Get the alert against all lost targets.

Note: The [Lost TGT] setting is shared commonly between TT and AIS.

3-18
 3. TARGET TRACKING (TT)

3.13.2 How to set the TT lost target filter

If you are in an area where tracked targets are lost fre-
quently, you may want to disable the lost target alert
against certain tracked targets, by maximum range or
minimum speed.

1. Right-click the TT mode indication then select [TT

Menu] to show that menu.
2. Select [3 LOST FILTER MAX RNG].
3. Spin the scrollwheel to select [ON]. Select the
range setting then spin the scrollwheel to set the
range. Any TT lost targets beyond this range will
not trigger the TT lost target alarm.
4. Select [4 LOST FILTER MIN SPD].
5. Spin the scrollwheel to select [ON]. Select the
speed setting then spin the scrollwheel to set the
speed. Any TT lost targets slower than this setting will not trigger the TT lost target
alarm.
6. Close the menu.

3.14 Trial Maneuver

The trial maneuver feature simulates the effect of own ship's movement against all
tracked targets, without interrupting the updating of target information. It is available
for use with the TT and AIS functions. For more accurate results, use relative motion
and sea stabilization (water tracking).

3.14.1 Types of trial maneuvers

There are two types of trial maneuvers: static and dynamic.

Dynamic trial maneuver

A dynamic trial maneuver displays predicted positions of the tracked targets and own
ship. You enter own ship's intended speed and course with a certain "delay time." As-
suming that all tracked targets maintain their present speeds and courses, the targets'
and own ship's future movements are simulated in 0.5-second increments indicating
their predicted positions in 30-second intervals as illustrated below.

The delay time represents the time lag from the present time to the time when own
ship will actually start to change her speed and/or course. You should therefore take
into consideration own ship's maneuvering characteristics such as rudder delay, turn-
ing delay and acceleration delay. This is particularly important on large vessels. How
much the delay is set the situation starts immediately and ends in a minute.

In the example shown below, own ship will advance straight ahead (even after a ma-
neuver) for a delay time of 2:30 and alters speed and course until operator-specified
intended speed and course are achieved (position OS7 in this example).

3-19
3. TARGET TRACKING (TT)

Delay time = 2 m 30 s.

Current position

Static trial maneuver

The static trial maneuver shows the relationship between your ship and tracked tar-
gets at the completion of the trial maneuver.

By shortening and extending the trial time you can find the safe time to make a ma-
neuver. Thus, the static trial maneuver will be convenient when you wish to know the
maneuver result immediately.

Position of target B at end

of trial maneuver
Course and speed changes
completed; position where
course and speed are changed

Position of target A at end B

of trial maneuver
Delay time

Current
position

A
T

3-20
 3. TARGET TRACKING (TT)

3.14.2 How to do a trial maneuver

To do a trial maneuver:

1. Right click the DELAY setting in the [Trial] box

then select [Trial Maneuver Menu].
2. Select [1 TRIAL MANEUVER] then choose
[STATIC] or [DYNAMIC] as appropriate.
3. Select [2 SPEED RATE] then set the speed rate
with the scrollwheel.
4. Select [3 TURN RATE] then set the turn rate with
the scrollwheel.
Note: Two sets of trial speed and trial turn rate
combinations are provided. This is done to pro-
vide accurate trial maneuver results for various
ship's speeds and turn rates.
5. For the B-type radar, select [4 TGT DATA] then
select whether to use [ACTUAL] or [TRIAL] data.
(Skip this step if your radar is the IMO or A type.)
6. Click the [Close] button to close the menu.
7. Find the [Trial] box at the right side of the screen.

Trial time Trial ON/OFF

Trial course
Trial speed

Trial delay time

8. Right-click the Trial title bar, select [Trial Mode] then choose a trial mode, [Static]
or [Dynamic].
9. Click the Trial ON/OFF indication to show [ON].
10. Click the Trial course indication. Spin the scrollwheel to set the trial course.
11. Click the Trial speed indication. spin the scrollwheel or use the Control Unit to set
the trial speed.
12. Click the [DELAY] indication. Spin the scrollwheel to set the amount of delay. This
is the time after which own ship takes a new situation, not the time the simulation
begins. Change the delay time according to own ship loading condition, etc. Spin
the scrollwheel to select numeric; push the left button to set.
The time indication depends on trial mode:
Dynamic mode: The position of your ship and TTs is displayed every 30 seconds and
updating occurs every 0.5 seconds.
Static mode: The position of your ship and TTs when set course and speed are
reached are displayed. The progress time until the position is reached is indicated on
the display. The trial time can be changed from the Trial time indication. Put the cursor
in the Trial time indication and roll the scrollwheel. The position of targets at the end
of selected time is shown. Increase or decrease the time to get a safe maneuver.

3-21
3. TARGET TRACKING (TT)

When the cursor is removed from the box the original positions of your ship and TTs
are restored. If a maneuver is unsafe, change speed, course and delay until it is safe.

The trial maneuver takes place with the letter "T" displayed at the bottom of the screen.
The time appears at the top-right position on the display. If any TT is predicted to be
on a collision course with own ship (that is, the target ship comes within preset CPA/
TCPA limits), the target plotting symbol flashes. If this happens, change own ship's tri-
al speed, course or delay time to obtain a safe maneuver.

How to stop a trial maneuver

The method to stop a trial maneuver depends on the trial mode as follows:
Dynamic mode: The trial is terminated when 60 minutes is shown in the Trial time in-
dication.
Static mode: The trial is terminated when you terminate the trial maneuver manually.

To terminate the trial maneuver manually, click the Trial ON/OFF indication to show
[Off].

3.15 TT Simulation Mode

You can simulate the risk of collision by using the TT test and the trial maneuver to-
gether.

1. Execute the TT test as follows:

1) Open the menu then select [8 INITIAL SETTING] and [8 TT SIMULATION
MODE].
2) The confirmation message "Attention: Do you wish to start TT SIMULATION
MODE?" appears. Click the [OK] button to start the test.
2. The normal operation is suspended then three simulated targets appear on the
display.
The indication "S" appears at the bottom of the effective display area during the
simulation mode. The simulation may be terminated any time by going to the
STBY mode.
Three simulated targets move as the following table. The simulated target is au-
tomatically generated with the relative movement in the following table based on
own ship's movement at the start of simulation mode.
Note: If own ship moves after the start of simulation mode, the movement of the
simulated target is not matched with the values in the following table.
Range Bearing Speed Course CPA TCPA
Target A 3.0 NM 45.0° 20.0 kn 0.0° 2.0 NM -6.4 min
Target B 2.0 NM 120.0° 5.0 kn 120.0° 0.0 NM -24.0 min
Target C 7.0 NM 270.0° 100.0 kn 120.0° 3.5 NM 3.5 min

3-22
 3. TARGET TRACKING (TT)

A
C
B

3. Acquire the simulated targets after the TT test is performed. The tracking state
changes from unstable to stable and the vector appears. You can simulate the
movement of each function with changing true/relative vector, stabilization
through the water/over the ground, range or length of vector.
4. You can simulate the risk of collision by using the trial maneuver as follows:
1) Set the TT CPA/TCPA alarm. For example, set 0.5 nm for CPA, 30 min for
TCPA.
2) Execute the trial maneuver (see section 3.14). In the static mode, the move-
ments of own ship and the target after the time set as the trial time elapses are
displayed. If the target is dangerous after the time set as the trial time elapses,
its symbol is the one for the dangerous target. Adjust the trial course and trial
delay time so the target symbol does not become the dangerous symbol when
executing the trial maneuver.

3.16 TT Alerts
There are nine situations that cause the TT to trigger visual and audio alerts. To ac-
knowledge the audio alerts, push the ALARM ACK key, or click the [Alert] box.

Alert No. Message Category Description

ALR: 521 TT New Target Warning Tracked target entered the acquisition zone.
ALF: 192,1
ALR: 522 TT Auto ACQ 95% Caution The capacity for auto acquisition has reached
ALF: 10190,4 95%.
ALR: 523 TT Auto ACQ 100% Warning The capacity for auto acquisition has reached
ALF: 190,4 100% and no more target acquisition is pos-
sible. Cancel tracking on unnecessary tar-
gets.
ALR: 524 TT Man ACQ 95% Caution The capacity for manual acquisition has
ALF: 10190,5 reached 95%.
ALR: 525 TT Man ACQ 100% Warning The capacity for manual acquisition has
ALF: 190,5 reached 100% and no more target acquisition
is possible. Cancel tracking on unnecessary
targets.
ALR: 526 TT CPA/TCPA Alarm Tracked target on collision course. Take eva-
ALF: 191,1 sive action.
ALR: 527 TT Lost Warning Tracked target lost. Check target.
ALF: 193,1
ALR: 528 REF Target Lost Warning Tracked target used for speed input is lost. To
ALF: 193,2 continue using reference target for speed in-
put, select another tracked target.

3-23
3. TARGET TRACKING (TT)

3.17 Criteria for Selecting Targets for Tracking

The FURUNO TT video processor detects targets in midst of noise and discriminates
radar echoes on the basis of their size. Target whose echo measurements are greater
than those of the largest ship in range or tangential extent are usually land and are
displayed only as normal radar video. All smaller ship-sized echoes that are less than
this dimension are further analyzed and regarded as ships and displayed as small cir-
cles superimposed over the video echo.

When a target is first displayed, it is shown as having zero true speed but develops a
course vector as more information is collected. In accordance with the IMO require-
ments for TT, an indication of the motion trend should be available within 20 scans of
antenna and full vector accuracy within 60 scans. The FURUNO TT complies with
these requirements.

Echo detection (quantization)

The entire picture is converted to a digital from called "Quantized Video." A sweep
range is divided into small segments and each range element is "1" if there is radar
echo return above a threshold level, or "0" if there is no return.

The digital radar signal is then analyzed by a ship-sized echo discriminator. As the an-
tenna scans, if there are five consecutive radar pulses with 1's indicating an echo pres-
ence at the exact same range, a target "start" is initiated. Since receiver noise is
random, it is not three-bang correlated, and it is filtered out and not classified as an
echo.

The same is true of radar interference. Electronic circuits track both the closest and
most distant edges of the echo. At the end of the scanning of the echo, the discrimi-
nator indicates the measured maximum range extent and total angular extent sub-
tended by the echo. If the echo is larger than a ship-sized echo in range extent and/or
angular width, adjusted as a function of range, it is declared to be a land. This land
echo is not used by TT acquisition and tracking process. All smaller echoes are de-
clared to be ship sized and the middle of the leading edge is used to provide precise
range and bearing coordinates of each echo on every scan. This range/bearing data
is matched to previous data and analyzed from scan-to-scan for consistency. When it
is determined to be as consistent as a real target, automatic acquisition occurs and
tracking is initiated. Continued tracking and subsequent calculation develop the rela-
tive course and speed of the target.

Acquisition
A target that is hit by five consecutive radar pulses is judged to be a radar echo. Man-
ual acquisition is done by designating a detected echo with the trackball. Automatic
acquisition is done in the acquisition areas when a target is detected 5-7 times contin-
uously depending upon the congestion.

Tracking
The range and bearing of an echo are found from the relative distance of the target
from the radar antenna. The distance a tracked target moves between radar antenna
rotations is used to calculate the relative speed of the tracked target. However, be-
cause of calculation error, smoothing is applied to get stable target speed and course
data. When a target changes course, smoothing is reduced in order to quickly follow
target movement.

3-24
 3. TARGET TRACKING (TT)

Tracking is achieved when the target is clearly distinguishable on the display for 5 out
of 10 consecutive scans, whether acquired automatically or manually.

Required tracking facilities are available within 0.1-32 NM on range scales including
3, 6, 12 NM, full plotting information is available within one scan when the range scale
is changed. Targets not detected in nine consecutive scans become "lost targets."

The true course and speed of own ship are computed from own ship's gyro and speed
inputs, and the resulting course and speed of each tracked target is easily computed
by vector summing of the relative motion with own ship's course and speed. The re-
sulting true or relative vector is displayed for each of the TTs. This process is updated
continually for each target on every scan of the radar.

The REF point for tracked target calculation can be the radar antenna position or the
CCRP. For CCRP, the displayed value includes the distance between the CCRP and
the antenna position. Therefore, when switching the REF point, the range, bearing,
CPA and TCPA of the tracked targets change.

Qualitative description of tracking error

The FURUNO TT's accuracy complies with or exceeds IMO standards.

Own ship maneuvers

For slow turns there is no effect. For very high turning rates (greater than 150°/minute,
depending on gyro), then all tracked targets revert to full accuracy.

Other ship maneuvers

Target ship courses; lag 15 to 30 seconds at high relative speed, or 3 to 6 seconds at
low (near 0) relative speed. It is less accurate during a turn due to lag, but accuracy
recovers quickly.

3.18 Factors Affecting Target Tracking

Sea returns
If the radar anti-clutter control is adjusted properly, there is no serious effect because
distant wave clutter, not eliminated by this control, is filtered out by more than one
bang correlation and scan-to-scan matching of data.

Rain and snow

Rain clutter can be acquired and tracked as targets. Adjust the rain clutter control to
suppress the clutter. If it is heavy rain, switch to S-band if provided, or switch on the
interference rejector on the radar. If heavy clutter still exists, switch to manual acqui-
sition. Accuracy can be affected.

Low clouds
Usually no affect. If necessary, adjust the rain clutter control.

Non-synchronous emissions
No effect.

3-25
3. TARGET TRACKING (TT)

Low gain
Insufficient or low radar receiver gain will result in some targets not being acquired at
long distance. The TT display will be missing on one or more targets that could only
be visible if the radar sensitivity control (GAIN control) were increased.

The setting of the correct radar receiver gain is not critical but the target should be on
the radar PPI and be clearly visible and well defined.

Manual acquisition is done if a target is positively displayed more than once. Automat-
ic acquisition is done when the target is detected 5-7 times continuously.

Tracking continues if a return echo is received at least once in nine antenna rotations.
However, the fewer the return echoes the lower the accuracy. If no return echo is re-
ceived within nine antenna rotations the target is declared a lost target.

Second trace echoes

When the radar beam is super refracted, strong echoes may be received at such long
ranges that they appear on a different timebase sweep than the transmitted pulse.
This gives an incorrect range indication. Second- and third-trace echoes can be
tracked if they are consistent enough to meet acquisition and tracking criteria but tar-
get course and speed data will be in error.

Blind and shadow sectors

Radar shadow or blind areas caused by obstructions aboard the ship, for example,
funnels and masts, in the path of the radar beam can result in reduction of radar beam
intensity in that particular direction. This may eliminate the detection of some targets.
The TT system will lose track of targets shortly after they are lost on the radar picture
and if they remain in a blind zone. These targets will however be acquired and tracked
when they pass out of the blind zone and again present normal radar echo. The an-
gular width and bearing of any shadow sector should be determined for their influence
on the radar. In certain cases false echoes in the shadow sector cause the TT system
to acquire, track, and vector them. Shadow sectors should be avoided.

Indirect echoes
A target at close range is usually picked up directly, but it can also be received as re-
flection from a large, flat surface. This will result in the radar presenting two or more
echoes on the display, each at a different range. The TT system can acquire and track
a false echo if it is detected in five consecutive scans. Reduction in radar gain can
eliminate the multiple echoing but care should be taken as range detection also will be
reduced.

Radar interference
If interference is extreme due to another radar operating at close range, spiral "dotting"
and/or false targets may appear momentarily. The interference rejector can clear the
display.

Delay of sensor input

If the refresh rate of the gyrocompass signal is too slow, error in target bearing occurs
when own ship turns. To prevent this error, the refresh rate of the gyrocompass signal
must be as indicated in the System Configuration drawings.

3-26
4. AIS OPERATION
An AIS transponder can be connected to this radar to overlay AIS targets on the radar
display. The radar can store up to 2,000 AIS targets in its storage buffer. When this
buffer becomes full of AIS targets, the Alert 533 (ALF format: 190,2) "AIS Target Ca-
pacity 100%" is generated to alert you to full storage buffer. The storage buffer con-
tains automatic dead reckoning for all AIS targets, which is based on reported Speed
Over the Ground (SOG), Course Over the Ground (COG), Rate Of Turn (ROT) and
heading. The storage buffer also contains calculation of range, bearing, CPA, TCPA,
etc. The CPA and TCPA limits set for dangerous targets are common for TT and AIS
targets.
This radar can activate 500 AIS targets. The Alert 535 (ALF format: 190,1) "AIS Target
Activate 100%" is generated when 500 AIS targets are activated.
This radar can display a maximum of 1,000 AIS targets. The Alert 531 (ALF format:
190,3) "AIS Target Display 100%" is generated when 1,000 AIS targets, which in-
cludes both activated and sleeping targets, are displayed.

The frequency for update of AIS transponder-sent data depends on speed and course
of tracked AIS target. The table below shows the IMO standardized reporting rates for
the AIS transponder. Based on the table below, the radar defines which AIS targets
are in tracking or lost. When you acknowledge a lost target alert, the corresponding
AIS symbol will be removed from the display.

IMO
Type of Ship nominal reporting
interval
Class A: Navigation status is “anchor” or “not under command” or “moored” 3 min
or “aground”, and SOG < 3 kn
Class A: Navigation status is “anchor” or “not under command” or “moored” 10 s
or “aground”, and SOG  3kn
Class A: 0kn  SOG < 14kn 10 s
Class A: 14kn  SOG  23kn 6s
Class A: SOG > 23kn 2s
Class B: “CS” SOG < 2kn 3 min
Class B: “CS” SOG  2kn 30 s
Class B: “SO” 0 kn  SOG < 2kn 3 min
Class B: “SO” 2 kn  SOG < 14kn 30 s
Class B: “SO” 14 kn  SOG  23kn 15 s
Class B: “SO” SOG > 23kn 5s
Class A and Class B: no SOG available N/A
AIS SAR aircraft 10 s
AIS aid to navigation 3 min
AIS base station 10 s
AIS search and rescue transponder N/A
An AIS transponder "sees" all ships fitted with an AIS transponder belonging to either
a Class A or Class B AIS. Additionally, the AIS transponder receives messages from
ships and non-ships (AIS SAR aircraft, AIS aid to navigation, AIS base station, and
AIS search and rescue transmitter).

4-1
4. AIS OPERATION

There can be several hundreds or several thousands of AIS targets, and of those only
a few will be significant for your ship. To remove unnecessary AIS targets from the ra-
dar display, the feature "active and sleeping AIS targets" is available. Initially any new
AIS target received by an AIS transponder is not active (="sleeping"). Such sleeping
targets are shown with a small triangle. The operator can pick any AIS target and
change it from sleeping to active. Active AIS targets are shown with a large triangle
with speed vector, headline, ROT indicator, etc. Further, the operator can pick active
AIS targets and change their status to sleeping.

An indication of AIS target activated capacity limit is given well before it is reached.
When 95% of 500 targets are activated, the Alert 534 (ALF format: 10190,3) "AIS Tar-
get Activate 95%" appears. When 500 targets are activated, the Alert 535 (ALF format:
190,3) "AIS Target Activate 100%" appears.

An indication of AIS target display capacity limit is given well before it is reached.
When 95% of 1,000 targets are displayed, the Alert 530 (ALF format: 10190,1) "AIS
Target Display 95%" appears. When 1,000 targets are displayed, the Alert 531 (ALF
format: 190,3) "AIS Target Display 100%" appears.

An indication of AIS target processing capacity limit is given well before it is reached.
The Alert 533 (ALF format: 190,2) "AIS Target Capacity 100%" appears when 2,000
targets are in the storage buffer.

This radar generates AIS-related alerts. These are Alert 536 (ALF format: 191,2) "AIS
CPA/TCPA" and Alert 537 (ALF format: 193,3) "AIS Lost". Only active AIS targets gen-
erate alerts. The operator can activate or sleep AIS target alerts as desired. The fea-
ture "active and sleeping AIS targets" is very effective for focusing on only those AIS
targets that need supervision. This radar further eases the task of the operator by au-
tomatically changing non-active targets to active targets, if their CPA and TCPA are
within a preset limit.

4.1 How to Deactivate the AIS Function

Long-click the AIS status indication at the bottom-right position to display [FUNC OFF]
to deactivate the AIS function (sleep all AIS targets) and AIS messaging facility. To
activate AIS, push the left button again.

Note: You cannot enable AIS if any of the items listed below are active.
• Manual speed
• Manual set & drift
• Speed is calculated from reference targets

4-2
 4. AIS OPERATION

4.2 How to Show, Hide the AIS Display

Targets that are being tracked by an AIS transponder can
also be displayed on the display. Click the AIS mode indi-
cation to select [DISP OFF], [DISP FILT] or [DISP ALL].

[DISP OFF]: Turn off the AIS display. (Tracking continues

internally.)
[DISP FILT]: Filter AIS targets according to the settings of
the AIS target filter. See section 4.4.
[DISP ALL]: Display all AIS targets.

4.3 AIS Symbols

Symbol Default color Name Description
Green AIS tracked target past Mark past position.
position point
Green Sleeping AIS target Denote sleeping AIS symbol. (Lines are
thinner than Active AIS symbol.)
Green Activated AIS target Denote active AIS target, with vector for
course and speed. (Lines are thicker than
sleeping AIS symbol.) Color can be
changed with the menu.
Red (fixed) Activated target in AZ Unacknowledged active AIS target in ac-
(without acknowledg- quisition zone, with vector for course and
ment) speed. (Lines are thicker than sleeping AIS
symbol.)
Green Activated target in AZ Acknowledged active AIS target in acquisi-
(with acknowledgment) tion zone, with vector for course and
speed. (Lines are thicker than sleeping AIS
symbol.) Color can be changed with the
menu.
Green Activated target, true Active AIS target with symbol shown in true
scale symbol scale. Association AIS symbol or activate
AIS symbol is displayed within the ship’s
symbol when activated. This symbol disap-
pears when the size of the true scale sym-
bol is smaller than 3 mm on the display.
Blue AIS SART test Denote AIS SART (search and rescue ra-
dar transponder) test.
Red (fixed) AIS SART active Denote AIS SART (search and rescue ra-
dar transponder) active.
Red (fixed) Dangerous AIS target Target’s CPA and TCPA are within the
CPA and TCPA settings. Vector shown.
The symbol flashes until acknowledgment.
Green Association AIS target AIS and TT target declared as "association
target". AIS symbol and AIS data are used.

Red (fixed) Association AIS danger- AIS and TT target declared as "association
ous target target". AIS symbol and AIS data are used.
Target's CPA and TCPA are within limits
set.

4-3
4. AIS OPERATION

Symbol Default color Name Description

Green Heading-turn indicator Show target’s direction of turning.

Green SAR Aircraft Denote SAR aircraft.

Blue AIS base station Denote AIS base station.

BS

Green AIS select symbol Target selected to display its data.

Green SAR vessel SAR (search and rescue) vessel

Red (fixed) AIS lost symbol X is superimposed on the AIS target sym-
bol and is flashing.
Green Non HDG/COG sleeping Denote sleeping AIS symbol without HDG
AIS target and COG. Dashed line.
Green Non HDG/COG activated Denote active AIS symbol without HDG
AIS target and COG. Dashed line.
Note 1: The equipment continues to process AIS targets when the AIS feature is
switched off. When the AIS is again turned on, symbols are immediately displayed.
Note 2: AIS symbols are momentarily erased after the screen is redrawn when the
heading is changed from the head-up mode.
Note 3: When no AIS data is received, the Alert 380 (ALF format: 10380,131) "AIS
COM Error" appears in the [Alert] box. Check the AIS transponder.
Note 4: An AIS target is declared a lost target if it is not detected in five consecutive
reporting periods.
Note 5: Physical and virtual AIS AtoN symbols that may appear are listed in the table
on the following page.

4-4
 4. AIS OPERATION

AIS Physical AIS Virtual Default

Meaning
AtoN Symbol AtoN Symbol Color

Blue Basic shape

Blue RACON

Blue Emergency wreck mark

Blue North cardinal mark

Blue East cardinal mark

Blue South cardinal mark

Blue West cardinal mark

Blue Port hand mark

Blue Starboard hand mark

Blue Isolated danger

Blue Safe water

Blue Special mark

Line: Yellow* Off position (Displayed with yellow

Char: Yellow* line and yellow text)

Line: Blue Light fail or at reduced range

Char: Yellow* (Displayed with yellow text)

Line: Blue RACON error

Char: Yellow* (Displayed with yellow text)

Missing
Line: Yellow*
(Displayed with yellow dashed
Char: Yellow*
line and yellow text)

* Color not changeable.

4-5
4. AIS OPERATION

4.4 How to Filter AIS Targets

If the screen becomes cluttered with AIS targets, you can filter out unnecessary AIS
targets, from the [DISP FILTER] menu.

1. Right-click the AIS mode indication then click [AIS Menu] to show that menu.
2. Open the [5 DISP FILTER] menu.

3. At [1 SLEEPING CLASS A] - [5 VIRTUAL ATON], disable or enable tracking of

respective item as appropriate.
4. Select [6 MAX RANGE] and set the maximum range to display an AIS target. An
AIS target not within the range set here is not displayed.
5. Set the minimum ship speed for AIS targets, with [7 MIN SHIP SPEED]. Any AIS
target whose speed is slower than that set here will not be displayed.
6. Close the menu.
Note: This function is not available for an activated target.

4-6
 4. AIS OPERATION

4.5 How to Activate Targets

When you convert a sleeping target to an activated target, an activated target's course
and speed are shown with a vector. You can easily judge target movement by moni-
toring the vector.

4.5.1 How to activate specific target

From the Control Unit
Select the target with the cursor then press the ACQ ACT key.

By the trackball module

Click the AIS target symbol.

SOG (Speed Over the Ground) and COG

(Course Over the Ground) vector*1

*1
Vector shows STW (speed
through the water) and CTW
(course through the water) Turning direction (ROT)
when sea stabilized mode is
selected at the radar.
Heading line*2
*2
Line points in direction of
COG when there is no
heading data.

4.5.2 How to automatically activate targets

You can get automatic activation of a sleeping AIS target when its CPA/TCPA are
within a preset limit. The CPA/TCPA alarm must be active to use this feature.

How to set conditions for automatic activation of AIS targets

1. Right-click the AIS mode indication then click [AIS Menu] to show that menu.
2. Open the [4 CPA AUTO ACTIVATE] menu.
3. Set items 1 - 3, referring to the description below.
[1 MAX RANGE]: Set the maximum range to use. Any
AIS target at a distance greater than set here will not be
activated.
[2 MIN SHIP SPEED]: Set the minimum speed to use.
Any AIS target whose speed is slower than set here will
not be activated.
[3 EXCEPT CLASS B]: Select ON to exclude class B AIS
targets.
4. Close the menu.

4-7
4. AIS OPERATION

How to enable, disable automatic activation of AIS targets

Click the location circled in the figure below to select one of the following:
[AUTO OFF]: Disable automatic activation of AIS target by CPA.
[AUTO ACT FILT]: Activate AIS targets that fulfill the requirements set on the [CPA
AUTO ACTIVATE] menu.
[AUTO ACT ALL]: Activate all AIS targets within the CPA range set.

4.6 How to Sleep Targets

4.6.1 How to sleep an activated AIS target

You can "sleep" an activated AIS target as shown below when the screen becomes
filled with targets that might prevent important radar and AIS targets from being iden-
tified. The targets that have been activated automatically cannot be "slept."

From the Control Unit

Put the cursor on the AIS target to sleep then press the TARGET CANCEL key.

By the trackball module

Right-click the AIS target symbol to show the context-sensitive menu. Select [Target
Cancel] followed by [Any] or [AIS Only].

4.6.2 How to sleep all activated AIS targets

Sleep all activated targets from the menu
1. Open the menu then select [2 TT• AIS ]and [4 AIS].
2. Select [3 SLEEP ALL TGTS] then [Yes].
3. Close the menu.

Sleep all activated targets from the AIS box

Long-click the AIS status indication at the bottom-right position to display [FUNC OFF]
to deactivate the AIS function and sleep all AIS targets.

4-8
 4. AIS OPERATION

4.7 How to Display AIS Target Data

You can display an AIS target's data by selecting it on the display.

4.7.1 AIS pop-up information

The AIS pop-up shows abbreviated AIS data (COG, SOG, CPA
and TCPA and destination*) for the selected AIS target. Simply
put the cursor on the AIS target to show the pop-up. The pop-
up can be enabled or disabled with [AIS POP-UP INFO] in the
[TT•AIS SYMBOL] menu

* Not displayed in CHART for radar mode.

4.7.2 Basic AIS target data

From the Control Unit
1. Use the trackball to put the cursor on the activated AIS target
symbol you want to know its data.
2. Press the TARGET DATA key.
3. The selected target is marked with a broken square and AIS data
is shown in the AIS data box when the target is correctly selected.

By the trackball module

Click the activated AIS target symbol. The selected target is marked with a broken
square and AIS data is shown in the AIS data box when the target is correctly selected.

AIS no. (information

display order)
Vessel name FURUNO
Bearing
Heading
Range
Course over ground
Rate of turn
Speed over ground
CPA
TCPA
Bow crossing range
Bow crossing time
Navigation
Position status*

*: Where the selected AIS target is an aircraft, the

STATUS box shows the aircraft’s altitude.

Note 1: AIS is not available in dead reckoning when the radar type is selected to [IMO]
(on the [INSTALLATION] menu).

4-9
4. AIS OPERATION

Note 2: If the TCPA value is negative, this means that you have already passed the
closest point and the AIS target is going away from your ship.
Note 3: For the maximum displayable number of TT•AIS boxes, see section 3.8.1.

4.7.3 Expanded AIS data

The expanded AIS data display provides additional information about an AIS target,
including call sign, MMSI No., IMO No., etc. To display expanded AIS data, show the
basic data for a target, right-click the target data display then select [AIS Expanded
Data].

Title bar
Vessel name FURUNO

Call sign WG27CQ

Position

Type of
position
sensor
Position accuracy
(HIGH or LOW)

Navigation status

MMSI No. 2324433222

IMO No. 0023555552
Length of vessel
Width of vessel

Draught of vessel
Destination

ETA at destination
Version of AIS transponder

Association (On or Off)

Ship and cargo type

If data for an item is unknown, "missing" appears. In the example above, the name of
the position sensor is “missing”.

4-10
 4. AIS OPERATION

4.8 AIS CPA/TCPA Alarm

This radar calculates CPA and TCPA by using own ship and relative target positions.
An AIS dangerous target is one whose CPA and TCPA are within the range of the CPA
and TCPA limits set in the TT/AIS box. The AIS symbol of an AIS dangerous target is
red and flashing, and is announced with the Alert 536 (ALF format: 191,2) "AIS CPA/
TCPA”. After the alert is acknowledged the target symbol is displayed in red color.

To set the CPA and TCPA ranges, do the following:

1. If the CPA and TCPA settings are not shown, click [CPA/TCPA].
2. Click the CPA indication to select desired CPA range.
3. Click the TCPA indication to select desired TCPA setting.

CPA setting
TCPA setting

4.9 AIS Symbol Brilliance

1. Right-click the [BRILL] button on the InstantAccess bar™ then select [BRILL
menu].
2. Go to page 2, select [5 AIS SYMBOL] then spin the scrollwheel to adjust the bril-
liance.

㻝㻡

㻝㻡

㻝㻡

㻝㻡

㻝㻡

㻝㻡

㻝㻡

3. Close the menu.

4-11
4. AIS OPERATION

4.10 AIS Symbol Color

1. Right-click the AIS mode indication then click [Symbol Menu] to show that menu.

2. Select [1 SYMBOL COLOR] and desired color. (Red and yellow are not available
with the IMO type.)

4.11 AIS Lost Targets

An AIS target is declared a lost target when it fails to produce data for
intervals which are based on the table on page 4-1. When this occurs,
the target is marked with the lost target symbol (flashing), shown in
the right figure, the buzzer sounds (for activated targets only) and the
Alert 537 (ALF format: 193.3) "AIS Lost" appears.

To acknowledge a lost target, push the ALARM ACK key or click the [Alert] box.

Note: The AIS data transmission interval depends on target's speed. For example, the
data is transmitted every 10 seconds on the ship speed of 0 to 14 kn and every two
seconds on the ship speed of more than 23 knots. For details, see the owner's manual
of the AIS transponder.

4.11.1 How to enable, disable the AIS lost target alarm

The Lost TGT indication (at the bottom-right position)
enables, disables the lost target alarm. Click the indica-
tion to select [OFF], [FILT] or [ALL] as appropriate.
[OFF]: Disable the lost target alert.
[FILT]: Get the alert against the targets whose criteria
meet the settings made in section 4.11.2.
[ALL]: Get the alert against all lost targets.

Note: The [Lost TGT] setting is shared commonly between TT and AIS.

4-12
 4. AIS OPERATION

4.11.2 How to set the AIS lost target filter

If you are in an area where AIS targets often become lost, the lost target alarm may
activate frequently. In this case, you may want to specify which targets to classify as
lost targets, to prevent frequent triggering of the lost target alarm.

1. Right-click the AIS mode indication then click [AIS menu]

to show that menu.
2. Open the [6 LOST FILTER] menu.
3. Set items 1-3, referring to the description below.
[1 MAX RANGE]: Set the maximum range to use. Any
AIS target at a distance greater than set here will not trig-
ger the lost target alarm.
[2 MIN SHIP SPEED]: Set the minimum speed to use.
Any AIS target whose speed is slower than set here will
not trigger the lost target alarm.
[3 EXCEPT CLASS B]: Select ON to exclude class B AIS targets from the lost tar-
get alarm.
4. Close the menu.

4.12 How to Display AIS Target Past Positions

The past position display shows equally time-spaced dots marking past positions of
activated AIS targets. If a target changes its speed, the spacing will be uneven. If it
changes course, its plotted course will not be a straight line.
Below are sample past position displays.

(a) Ship turning (b) Ship running (c) Ship reduced (d) Ship increased
straight speed speed

4.12.1 How to enable/disable the Plot interval, past

past position display, select position display
ON/OFF
past position reference
Click the indications circled in the figure
below to set the plot interval (or disable
the display) and the past position refer-
ence (true or relative).

Past position
reference

4-13
4. AIS OPERATION

4.12.2 Past position points

You can show 5 or 10 past position points per AIS target. Right-click the past position
indication then click [Past POSN Menu] to show that menu. Set [6 TT•AIS PAST
POSN POINTS] to [5] or [10].

4.13 How to Display True or Relative Speed Vectors

AIS targets vector can be displayed relative to your ship's heading (relative) or with
reference to the North (True).

Vector time (or the length of vectors) and presentation mode can be set at the bottom-
right position on the screen. For further information, see section 3.9.

4.14 Association of TT and AIS Targets

An AIS-equipped ship is usually displayed by two symbols on the radar display. This
is because the AIS ship position is measured by a GPS navigator (L/L) whereas the
radar detects the same ship by PPI principle (range and bearing relative to own ship
radar antenna).

To avoid the presentation of two target symbols for the same physical target, use the
"association" function. If target data from both AIS and TT are available and if the as-
sociation criteria are fulfilled, either the AIS or TT symbol is presented according to the
association method selected.

Association will not happen between AIS and TT if the AIS target is sleeping or the AIS
target is lost.

All association settings, including ON/OFF, can also be controlled from the chart for
radar mode, with the [TT/AIS] page in the [Overlay/NAV Tools box]. All settings are
mutually shared.

4.14.1 How to select the association method

Click the location circled below to show "<" to select AIS symbol for associated target,
or ">" to select TT symbol for associated target. This setting overrides the correspond-
ing item on the [TT•AIS Menu]. To turn off association, click the location to remove the
arrow.

< >
MAN DISP ALL MAN DISP ALL

Note: You can also select the method by right-clicking the lo-
Association: OFF
cation. Click desired association method. Association: TT
Association: AIS
[Association Menu]

4-14
 4. AIS OPERATION

4.14.2 How to set the conditions for association

1. Open the menu then select the [2 TT•AIS] and [6 ASSOCIATION] menus.

2. Enter the association conditions, referring to the following:

[1 ASSOCIATION TGT]: Disable Association with [OFF], or select [AIS] or [TT].
[AIS] selects the AIS symbol for association target; [TT] selects the TT symbol for
the association target.
[2 GAP]: Range between AIS target and TT.
Setting range: 0.000-0.050(NM)
[3 RANGE]: Enter the range difference from own ship to AIS target and TT.
setting range: 0.000-0.100(NM)
[4 BEARING]: Enter the bearing difference from own ship to AIS target and TT.
Setting range: 0.0-9.9(°)
[5 SPEED]: Enter the speed difference between AIS target and TT.
Setting range: 0.0-6.0(kn)
[6 COURSE]: Enter the course difference between AIS target and TT.
Setting range: 0.0-25.0(°)
When the association criteria are met

• either the AIS or TT symbol is erased according to association made in

section 4.14.1.
• the Alert 560 (ALF format: 10560) "Association" appears in the [Alert] box.

4-15
4. AIS OPERATION

4.15 Voyage Data

Before you embark on a voyage, set your navigation status, ETA, destination, draught
and the number of crew, on the [VOYAGE DATA] menu.

1. Click the [OWN AIS] button on the InstantAccess bar™ to show the [VOYAGE
DATA] menu.

Display of [2 CARGO CATEGORY]

and [All ships of this type] is
dependant on the settings for the
connected AIS transponder.

2. Select [1 NAV STATUS] then use the scrollwheel to set the applicable two-digit
nav status code, referring to the table below.
No. Nav status No. Status
00 Underway using engine 08 Under way Sailing
01 At anchor 09 Reserved for high speed craft
02 Not under command 10 Reserved for wing in ground
03 Restricted Maneuverability 11 power-driven vessel pushing
ahead or towing alongside (re-
gional use)
04 Constrained by her draught 12 power-driven vessel towing
astern (regional use)
05 Moored 13 Reserved for future use
06 Aground 14 AIS SART (Active)
07 Engaged in fishing 15 Not Defined
3. Select [2 ETA] then use the scrollwheel to enter ETA: day (two digits), month (two
digits), year (four digits) and time (four digits).
4. Select [3 DESTINATION] then use the software keyboard to enter the name of
your destination, using a maximum of 20 characters.
5. Select [4 DRAUGHT] then use the scrollwheel to enter ship's draft (0.0 - 25.5 (m)).
6. On page 2, select [1 CREW] then use the scrollwheel to enter the number of crew
(0-8191).

4-16
 4. AIS OPERATION

7. Where required, spin the scrollwheel to enter the appropriate [CARGO CATEGO-
RY] referring to the table below.

No. Cargo Type No. Cargo Type

0 All ships of this type 5 Reserved for future use
1 Carrying DG, HS, or MP, IMO 6 Reserved for future use
hazard or pollutant category X
2 Carrying DG, HS, or MP, IMO 7 Reserved for future use
hazard or pollutant category Y
3 Carrying DG, HS, or MP, IMO 8 Reserved for future use
hazard or pollutant category Z
4 Carrying DG, HS, or MP, IMO 9 No Additional Information
hazard or pollutant category OS
8. Close the menu.

4.16 AIS Messages

You can send and receive messages via the VHF link, to a specified destination
(MMSI) or all AIS-equipped ships within communication range of your ship. Messages
can be sent to warn of safety of navigation, for example, an iceberg sighted. Routine
messages are also permitted. Short safety-related messages are only an additional
means to broadcast safety information. They do not remove the requirements of the
GMDSS.

4.16.1 How to create and transmit a new AIS message

You can create and send an AIS message as follows:

1. Right-click the AIS mode indication then click [AIS Menu]

to show that menu.
2. Open the [8 TRANSMIT MESSAGE] menu.
3. At [1 ADDRESS TYPE], select [ADDRESSED] to send
the message to a specific AIS-equipped ship, or [BROAD-
CAST] to send the message to all AIS-equipped ships
within VHF communication range. For [ADDRESSED],
enter MMSI of ship at [3 MMSI No.].
4. At [2 MESSAGE TYPE], select [SAFETY] for safety mes-
sage, or [BINARY] for routine message.

5. At [4 CHANNEL], select the channel over which to broad-

cast your message. The choices are [A/B], [A or B] or [A
and B].
6. Click [NEXT] to go to the next page.
7. Select [3 EDIT]. A text input box appears together with the
software keyboard. Use the software keyboard to enter
your message. The number of characters that may be en-
tered depends on message type, and the number of char-
acters available appears below the text box.
Safety message broadcast: 90 characters
Binary message broadcast: 86 characters

4-17
4. AIS OPERATION

Safety message addressed to MMSI: 85 characters

Binary message addressed to MMSI: 80 characters
8. To save the file, select [2 SAVE FILE].
9. To transmit the message, click [4 TRANSMIT MESSAGE]. You are asked if you
are sure to transmit the message. Click the [OK] button to transmit the message.
The Alert (ALF format: 10540,3) "542 AIS Transmitting" appears in the [Alert] box
while the message is being transmitted. If the message could not be transmitted, the
Alert 541 (ALF format: 10540,2) "AIS Message Transmit Error" appears.

4.16.2 How to transmit a saved AIS message

If you have saved some previously transmitted AIS messages, you can edit one and
send it as follows.

1. Right-click the AIS mode indication then click [AIS Menu] to show that menu.
2. Open the [8 TRANSMIT MESSAGE] menu.
3. Go to page 2 of the menu, select [1 OPEN FILE] then select the number of the
message to transmit.
4. Select [3 EDIT] to edit the message.
5. To save the message, select [2 SAVE FILE].
6. To transmit the message, select [4 TRANSMIT MESSAGE]. The confirmation
message "Attention: Do you wish to transmit AIS message?" appears. Click the
[OK] button to transmit the message.

4.16.3 How to display received AIS messages

When you receive an AIS message, the Alert 539 (ALF format: 10540,1) "AIS Mes-
sage Received" appears.

To display the message manually, click the AIS message button on the InstantAccess
bar™.

[AIS message]
button

How to get notification of AIS message reception with the [AIS message]
button
Right-click the AIS mode indication then click [AIS Menu] to show that menu. Go to
page 2 and set [1 AUTO DISP MESSAGE] to [ON]. When you receive an AIS mes-
sage, the [AIS message] button is displayed in orange.

4-18
 4. AIS OPERATION

AIS Received Messages list

Received AIS messages are stored in the AIS received message list. A maximum of
200 messages are saved over 50 pages for FURUNO 19-inch monitor unit, 34 pages
for FURUNO 23-inch monitor unit.

1. Right-click the AIS mode indication then click [AIS Menu] to show that menu.
2. Select [7 RECEIVED MESSAGES].

Title bar
Page no./total no. of pages
Close current window
1 10/APR/2012 08:21
ADDRESSED SAFETY
MMSI: 431060309
2 10/APR/2012 10:45
ADDRESSED BINARY
MMSI: 303056302

AIS message list

NAME: FURUNO Ship’s name and call sign

CALL: 098657334
<OSAKA MARTIS R41-5-
1>TEST:INFORMATRIOIN
SW 2M/S WEATHER Message content
RAINY VISIBILITY -5000M

3. Click an AIS message in the list to show its contents.

4. Click the Close window button to close the window.

4-19
4. AIS OPERATION

4.17 How to View Own Ship Data

Own ship’s static data (type of ship, call sign, MMSI, name and position of external
GPS antenna) can be viewed as follows:

1. Right-click the AIS mode indication then click [AIS Menu] to show the AIS menu.
2. Select [STATIC DATA].

External GPS antenna position

Type of ship

Ship length
A
Call sign

MMSI no. here

B C D External GPS
Ship name
antenna position

Ship width

3. Close the menu.

4-20
 4. AIS OPERATION

4.18 Other AIS Features

The [TT•AIS] menu additionally provides the features described below.

Page 1 Page 2

[2 ATON SYMBOL COLOR]: Select the ATON symbol color.

[3 AIS ROT TAG LIMIT]: The ROT marker appears on the heading line of an AIS tar-
get and points in the direction of the turn when the ship's rate of turn is greater than
that set here.

[1 AIS SCALED SYMBOL]: The AIS target symbol can be shown as a simple triangle
or a symbol scaled according to a vessels’ dimensions. Select [ON] to show the scaled
symbol.

Standard AIS
AIS symbol scaled symbol

4-21
4. AIS OPERATION

This page is intentionally left blank.

4-22
5. RADAR MAP AND TRACK

5.1 What is a Radar Map?

A radar map is a layer consisting of marks and lines overlaid on the radar display. A
map is intended for indicating safety-related areas and objects. Ten radar maps can
be made and each map can have a total of 4,000 lines and marks. The map data can
be saved to facilitate repeated use on a routine navigation area. The user can create
a radar map on-real time while using the radar for navigation or at leisure time at an-
chor or while the radar is not being used. Waypoints, events and user charts from the
chart can be shown or hidden on the radar map display.

The radar map does not affect any radar function.

5.2 Orientation Modes

Six orientation modes are available: North-up, Course-up, Head-up, STAB Head-up,
Stern-up and North-up TM. To select a mode, use the MODE key on the Control Unit
or click the [Range/Presentation mode] box.

Note: Chart data is not displayed in the head-up and STAB Head-up modes.

5.3 How to Show, Hide the Radar Map Display

Click the [MAP ON/OFF] button to display [MAP ON] or [MAP OFF] as appropriate.

[MAP ON/OFF]
button

5-1
5. RADAR MAP AND TRACK

5.4 How to Enter Radar Map Marks and Lines

Marks and lines can be inscribed in the radar mode. (Marks cannot be entered in the
chart radar mode.) These marks and lines can be displayed in red, green, blue, cyan,
magenta, yellow or white. (Some marks, lines and colors may not be available de-
pending on the specifications of your radar.)

The capacity for map storage is 10 maps/4,000 points per map. When you save 4,000
points to a map, the message "MARK FULL" replaces the mark icon in the [Mark] box
and you cannot save any more marks to that map. In this case save the marks/lines
to a different map file or erase some marks from the full map file in order to save the
mark.
The procedure below shows how to enter a mark, including mark selection, mark entry
method, and save location. You can skip steps in the procedure where it is not neces-
sary to complete the corresponding action.

1. Put the cursor on the mark shown in the [Mark] box at the bottom-left position on
the display.

Minimize button

Selected mark

Map file no.

2. Spin the scrollwheel to select a mark. The name of the mark appears to the right
of the mark.

Name of mark

3. Select mark color (B-type only), mark position, and where to save the mark as fol-
lows:
1) Right-click the [Mark] box to show the context-sensitive menu then click [Mark
Color].

2) Click the mark color desired.

3) At the context-sensitive menu, click [Mark
Position] to select the mark input method.
The choices are [CURSOR], [OWN SHIP]
and [L/L].
For L/L, the mark is inscribed at the L/L
position entered at [1 OWN SHIP MARK] on the [Map/Mark] menu.

5-2
 5. RADAR MAP AND TRACK

4) At the context-sensitive menu, click [MAP File] then click the map file number
where to save the mark.

4. For entry with the cursor, use the trackball to put the cursor on the location de-
sired. (You can see the range and bearing from own ship to the cursor location by
monitoring the Cursor position box.) Push the left button or the MARK key on the
Control Unit to inscribe the mark or line point.
Note: To continue entering the same mark or line under the same conditions, do the
following at the next time of entry.
Entry by cursor: Click the location where to put a mark.
Entry by ship's position, or manual input of latitude and longitude: Click the mark
icon.

5.5 How to Find Number of Map Points Used

You can show the number of points used in each radar map file.

Right-click the [Mark] box then select [Map•Mark Menu]. See [MARK POINTS] at the
bottom of the menu to see how many mark points have been used per map file. In the
example below 7 points out of 4,000 points have been used in Map 1.

Map no., no. of points used/total no.

of points

5-3
5. RADAR MAP AND TRACK

5.6 How to Select the Radar Map to Display

Right-click the [Mark] box to show the context-sensitive menu. Click [MAP File] and
then click the map no. you want to display.

5.7 How to Attach a Comment to a Radar Map, Find

Comment for a Map
How to attach a comment to a radar map
You can attach a comment to radar maps you have created, Edit map comment X
to help you distinguish your maps. Radar map file
MAP 1
Right-click the [Mark] box to show the context-sensitive Edit comment
menu then click [Edit Map Comment]. A text input box ap-
pears together with the software keyboard, as shown in the
right figure. Select the map no. with the [Radar map file]
drop-down list. Enter your comment in the text input box. The 53 up input
number of characters available appears below the box. Click
the [OK] button to finish.

How to find the comment for a map

Put the cursor on the map no. indication. The comment is
displayed to the right of the map no. In the example below
the comment is "Kobe".

Map no. Location of

comment

5-4
 5. RADAR MAP AND TRACK

5.8 How to Erase Radar Map Marks and Lines

A total of 4,000 marks and lines is allotted per map. When this amount is exceeded in
a map, no more map marks or lines may be entered into the map unless you erase
some unnecessary marks or lines.

5.8.1 How to erase individual radar map marks and lines

1. Put the cursor on the mark or line to erase then right click to show the context-
sensitive menu.

Target Cancel
Off Center
EBL Offset
Zoom Set
Area Select
Mark Delete
Mark Copy
Own Ship Offset
REF Mark
Cursor Size
Notes Detail
2. Click [Mark Delete] to enable erasure of marks, lines.
3. Click the mark or line to erase.

5.8.2 How to erase map marks and lines in an area

You can erase all marks and lines within an area as follows:

1. Right-click the display area to show the context-sensitive menu.

Target Cancel
Off Center
EBL Offset
Zoom Set
Area Select
Mark Delete
Mark Copy
Own Ship Offset
REF Mark
Cursor Size
Notes Detail
2. Click [Area Select].

5-5
5. RADAR MAP AND TRACK

3. Specify the area as follows:

1) Put the cursor on the start point and push the left button.
2) Drag the cursor diagonally to the end point and push the left button.

Start point

Marks within the area

are colored light blue End point

4. Right-click the display area to show the context-sensitive menu.

5. Click [Area Mark Delete] to delete the marks and lines in the area selected.

5.8.3 How to erase all radar map marks and lines in a map file
You can erase all radar map marks and lines in the map file currently displayed. Be
absolutely sure you want to erase the marks and lines - erased marks and lines cannot
be restored.
1. Right-click the [Mark] box, select [Map•Mark Menu] and [1 MARK SETTING].
2. Select [8 MAP MARK ALL DELETE]. The confirmation message "Attention: Do
you wish to delete all map mark?" appears. Click the [OK] button to erase all
marks and lines.
3. Close the menu.

5-6
 5. RADAR MAP AND TRACK

5.9 How to Copy Radar Map Marks and Lines

5.9.1 How to copy individual radar map marks and lines to another
map file
You can copy individual marks and lines from the currently displayed radar map to the
radar map file of your choice.

1. Right-click the display area to show the context-sensitive menu.

2. Click [Mark Copy] then click the map file no. where to copy the mark.

3. Put the (light-blue) cursor on the mark or line then click.

5.9.2 How to copy radar map marks and lines within an area to an-
other map file
You can copy radar map marks and lines within an area of the currently displayed ra-
dar map to the radar map file of your choice.

1. Right-click the display area to show the context-sensitive menu.

2. Click [Area Select].
3. Specify the area as follows.
1) Put the cursor on the start point and push the left button.
2) Drag the cursor diagonally to the end point and push the left button.
All marks and lines within the area selected are highlighted in blue.
4. Right click to show the context-sensitive menu.

5. Click [Area Mark Copy] then click the map file no. where to copy the marks and
lines.

5-7
5. RADAR MAP AND TRACK

5.9.3 How to copy all radar map marks and lines in a map file to an-
other map file
You can copy all radar map marks and lines in the currently displayed radar map to
the radar map file of your choice.

1. Display the map file of which to copy all its marks and lines. See section 5.6.
2. Right-click the [Mark] box then click [Map•Mark Menu].
3. Select [1 MARK SETTING].
4. Select [9 MAP MARK ALL COPY].

5. Select [1 COPY TO] then select where to copy the map marks and lines.
6. Select [2 ALL MARK COPY]. The confirmation message "Attention: Do you wish
to copy all map mark?" appears. Click the [OK] button to copy.
7. Close the menu.

5-8
 5. RADAR MAP AND TRACK

5.10 How to Export Radar Map

You can export a radar map to a folder in a USB flash memory.

1. Set the USB flash memory in the USB port on the Control Unit.
2. Open the menu then select the [5 MAP•MARK] and [1 MARK SETTING] menus.
3. Go to page 2 of the menu, select [1 MAP MARK MANAGE]. The confirmation
message appears. Note that [1 MAP MARK MANAGE] appears only when the ra-
dar is in standby.
Attention X
Do you wish to open
map convert window?
Cancel OK

4. Click the [OK] button to show the [Map Convert] dialog box.

Map Convert
Export Import

No. Comment Points

Map1 NO COMMENT 100/4000
Map2 NO COMMENT 100/4000
Map3 NO COMMENT 100/4000
Map4 NO COMMENT 100/4000
Map5 NO COMMENT 100/4000
Map6 NO COMMENT 100/4000
Map7 NO COMMENT 100/4000
Map8 NO COMMENT 100/4000
Map9 NO COMMENT 100/4000
Map10 NO COMMENT 100/4000
Export

Exit

5. Check [Export] at the top-left position of the dialog box.

6. Check the radar map(s) (Map1 to Map10) to export.
7. Click the [Export] button to show the [Save file] dialog box.
8. Select the USB flash memory as the destination to save then click the [Save] but-
ton. After the data export is completed, the message "x file(s) have exported suc-
cess." appears (x is the number of the radar map(s)).
9. Click the [OK] button.

5-9
5. RADAR MAP AND TRACK

5.11 How to Import Radar Map

You can import a radar map created on another equipment (FCR-2xx9, FAR-3000,
FAR-2xx7, etc.). Copy the radar maps to a folder in a USB flash memory.

1. Set the USB flash memory that contains the radar map(s) to import in the USB port
on the Control Unit.
2. Open the menu then select the [5 MAP•MARK] Attention X
and [1 MARK SETTING] menus. Do you wish to open
3. Go to page 2 of the menu, select [1 MAP MARK map convert window?

MANAGE]. The confirmation message appears. Cancel OK

4. Click the [OK] button to show the [Map Convert]

dialog box.
5. Check [Import] at the top-left position of the dialog box then click the [Select file to
import] button to show the [Select file] dialog box.
Select file

Volume select:

Lock in:
Space: Total

Name Size Modified

File Name:

File Type: Export File(*.mrk;*.MRK)

Cancel Open

6. Select the folder that contains the file to import then click the [Open] button to
show the [Map Convert] dialog box.
Map Convert
Export Import

Select file to import Points: 76

Import file: 2107000.MRK
No. Comment Points From To
Map1 NO COMMENT 0/4000
Map2 NO COMMENT 0/4000
Map3 NO COMMENT 0/4000
Map4 NO COMMENT 0/4000
Map5 NO COMMENT 0/4000
Map6 NO COMMENT 0/4000
Map7 NO COMMENT 0/4000
Map8 NO COMMENT 0/4000
Map9 NO COMMENT 0/4000
Map10 NO COMMENT 0/4000
Import

Exit

7. Check the radar map(s) (Map1 to Map10) to which the data created on another
equipment are imported.
8. Click the [Import] button to import the data to the radar map(s) selected at step 7.
Note: When importing a radar map created on another FAR-2xx7, the radar maps
marks and lines are converted. See the tables on pages 5-11 and 5-12.

5-10
 5. RADAR MAP AND TRACK

The list of the radar map marks and lines

The radar map marks and lines created on another FAR-2xx7 are converted to ones
on the FCR-2xx9 series as below.

Marks
FAR-2xx7 FCR-2xx9
IMO or A type B type
Symbol Color Name
Symbol Color Name Symbol Color Name
Red Buoy Red Buoy Red Buoy

Green Buoy Green Buoy Green Buoy

Red Buoy Red Buoy Red Buoy

Green Buoy Green Buoy Green Buoy

Red Buoy Red Buoy Red Buoy

Green Buoy Green Buoy Green Buoy

Red Buoy Red Buoy Red Buoy

Green Buoy Green Buoy Green Buoy

* Buoy Red Buoy * Buoy

* Buoy Red Buoy * Buoy

* Buoy Red Buoy * Buoy

* Buoy Red Buoy * Buoy

* Danger Purple Danger * Danger

* Danger Purple Danger * Danger

Purple Danger Purple Danger Purple Danger

Yellow-
* Mark Mark * Mark
orange
Yellow-
* Mark Mark * Mark
orange
Yellow-
* Mark Mark * Mark
orange
Yellow-
* Mark Mark * Mark
orange
Yellow-
* Mark Mark * Mark
orange
Yellow-
* Mark Mark * Mark
orange
Yellow-
* Mark Mark * Mark
orange
Yellow-
Other - - Mark * Mark
orange

*: The display color is selectable. See the Contrast table for the display colors below.

5-11
5. RADAR MAP AND TRACK

Lines
FAR-2xx7 FCR-2xx9
IMO or A type B type
Symbol Color Name
Symbol Color Name Symbol Color Name
Yellow-
* Mark Buoy * Mark
orange
Yellow-
* Mark Buoy * Mark
orange
* Nav Line Purple Buoy * Nav Line
* Coast Line White Buoy * Coast Line
Contour Contour
* Gray Buoy *
Line Line
Prohibited Prohibited Prohibited
* Purple *
Area Area Area
* Danger Purple Danger * Danger
Yellow-
* Line Buoy Line Mark * Line Buoy
orange
Yellow-
* Line Buoy Line Mark * Line Buoy
orange
Yellow-
* Line Mark Line Mark * Line Mark
orange
Yellow-
* Line Mark Line Mark * Line Mark
orange
Yellow-
Other - - Line Mark * Mark
orange

*: The display color is selectable. See the table below for details.

Contrast table for the display colors

Below is the contrast table for the display colors of the radar map marks and lines.

FAR-2xx7 FCR-2xx9
Red Red
Yellow Yellow
Green Green
Cyan Cyan
Magenta Magenta
Blue Blue
White White
Other Green

5-12
 5. RADAR MAP AND TRACK

5.12 How to Show, Hide Radar Map Features

There are times when you won't require all the map objects
you have entered in a radar map. You can show or hide the
ones you don't need as follows:

1. Right-click the [Mark] box then select [Map/Mark Menu]

and [2 RADAR MAP].
2. Turn objects on or off as appropriate.
3. Close the menu.

5.13 Track

5.13.1 How to set up ship's track

The track traces your ship's movement. This radar records track at the interval you set
on the [OWN TRACK] menu, and the recording interval determines the maximum re-
cording time. The longer the interval the longer the recording time, as shown in the
table below.

When the memory for track becomes full, the oldest track is deleted to make room for
the latest. For that reason you may want to adjust the recording interval so as to keep
the track on the display for a longer time.

Save Interval Max. Recording Time Save Interval Max. Recording Time
30 s 6 days 22 hr 40 min 3 min 41 days 16 hr
1 min 13 days 21 hr 20 min 6 min 83 days 8 hr
2 min 27 days 18 hr 40 min 15 min 208 days 5 hr
1. Open the menu then select the [6 CHART DISPLAY] and
[1 OWN TRACK] menus.
2. Select [1 DISP OWN TRACK].
3. Select [ON] to show your ship's track or [OFF] to hide the
track.
4. Select [2 OWN TRACK SOURCE].
5. Select the navigation sensor that is to feed the position
data to use to plot your ship's track, among [PRIMARY],
[SECONDARY] and [SYSTEM].
PRIMARY: Navigation sensor having first priority.
SECONDARY: Navigation sensor having second priori-
ty.
SYSTEM: Plot own ship's track using system-fed posi-
tion.
6. Select [3 SAVE INTERVAL].
7. Select how often to save your ship's track, among [30s], [1min], [2min], [3min],
[6min] and [15min]. [DRAW ONLY] draws the track but does not save it.
8. For the B-type radar, you can select the color for the track with [5 OWN TRACK
COLOR].
9. Close the menu.

5-13
5. RADAR MAP AND TRACK

5.13.2 How to erase track

The display may become full of track when, for example, your ship traces the same
route several times. In this case you may want to delete some or all of your track from
the display.

1. Open the menu then select the [6 CHART DISPLAY] and [1 OWN TRACK]
menus.
2. Select [4 DELETE OWN TRACK].
3. Select the color to delete (B-type only), or the percentage of track to delete among
[30%], [50%], [80%] and [ALL].
4. Close the menu.

5.14 Route Display

The route selected for navigation (in the chart mode) can be
shown on the radar display. You can show or hide the entire
route, and show or hide elements of the route (channel lim-
its, safety margin, leg marks and wheel over line).

1. Right-click the [Mark] box then select [Map•Mark Menu]

and [3 ROUTE].
2. Turn the route display on or off at [1 DISP ROUTE].
3. Turn the XTD limit, safety margin, leg marks and wheel
over line displays on or off at [2 SEL ROUTE OBJECT].

Safety
margin

㼃㻼㼀㻟

XTD
Wheel over limit
line*

WPT1 WPT2
124.8° 87.9°
Leg mark
0.8NM 1.2NM

* Wheel over line (WOL)

Direction of Direction of
movement WOL movement WOL

WOL for next section Vertical WOL for the current interval

Case 1: Normal Case 2: Angle for next section is narrow (Not 20 deg)
4. Close the menu.

5-14
 5. RADAR MAP AND TRACK

5.15 User Chart Display

The active user chart can be shown in the chart radar mode. See chapter 13 for a de-
scription of the user chart.

1. Right-click the [Mark] box then select [Map/Mark Menu] and [5 USER CHART].
2. Show or hide the user chart on the radar display with [1
DISP USER CHART].
3. Show or hide the user chart objects on the radar display
with [2 SEL USER CHART OBJECT].
4. Close the menu.

5-15
5. RADAR MAP AND TRACK

This page is intentionally left blank.

5-16
6. CHART OVERVIEW

6.1 Chart Screen Overview

The chart screen is divided into several areas, as illustrated below (The layout on your
screen may differ slightly depending on your monitor’s resolution).The chart screen
operational area has no limitations. That is, high latitudes (85° and higher) are correct-
ly displayed always*. The chart screen uses “cylindrical equidistant” projection for ar-
eas of high latitude and small chart scales. All other conditions use the “orthographic”
presentation.
Status
bar Cursor position box Sensor
information
box
Chart scale/presentation mode box Own ship
functions
box

Electronic chart area Route

Instant information
Access box
bar

Overlay/NAV
Tools box

Alert box

EBL1 box, EBL2 box Permanent warning box VRM1 box, VRM2 box

*: High altitudes are not supported in RADAR mode.

• The Status bar provides for selection of display mode, chart format, IMO chart display; one-click
restoration of IMO standard display, etc.
• The Sensor information box displays ship's speed, course and position and selects sensors.
• The Own ship functions box applies offset to the chart.
• The Route information box shows route and waypoint data, when a route is selected for naviga-
tion.
• The Overlay/NAV Tools box provides for setup of navigation-related functions.
• The Alert box shows operational and system alert messages.
• The VRM boxes measure the range to an object.
• The Permanent warning box displays chart-related warning messages.
• The EBL boxes measure the bearing to an object.
• The InstantAccess bar™ provides quick access to functions such as brilliance adjustment, dis-
play palette and the chart-related menu. The contents change according to the display mode se-
lected.
• The Chart scale/presentation mode box selects the chart scale and presentation mode.
• The Cursor position box shows the latitude and longitude position of the cursor and the TTG to
the cursor.
• The Electronic chart area shows the chart.
Note: If the display indications freeze, the buzzer sounds continuously. Restart the unit to restore
normal operation.

6-1
6. CHART OVERVIEW

6.1.1 Electronic chart area

This chart radar can use the following types of charts:

• S-57 (IHO)
• S-63 (IHO) (S-63 encrypted)
• C-MAP
The following information can also be displayed:

• Cursor (moved by trackball)

• Planned route
• EBL (Electronic Bearing Line) and VRM (Variable Range Marker
• Own ship symbol with speed vector
• TT-acquired target from radar
• AIS target

Electronic charts
The electronic navigational charts, ENC or C-MAP vector format, are displayed in the
electronic chart area.

The chart radar combines chart and navigational information. It should be noted that
modern navigation systems (e.g., differential GPS) may offer more accurate position-
ing than what was used to position some of the surveys from which the electronic nav-
igational chart was derived.

This chart radar is compatible with S57 release 3 ENC format charts. ENC charts are
converted to SENC for use with the chart radar.

When you open a chart, it is displayed with the default scale, called the compilation
scale. The details for the chart are displayed in the electronic chart area and these can
be modified. You can change the chart scale with the ZOOM IN and ZOOM OUT func-
tions, and the scale range is 1:1,000 - 1:70,000,000.

C-MAP vector format

The C-MAP charts require a contract with applicable provider. This unit supports three
types of C-MAP charts, ENC SERVICE, PROFESSIONAL+, and C-MAP ENC SER-
VICE. The C-MAP ENC SERVICE charts are compatible with IHO S-57 Ed. 3. ENC
data improves the safety of navigation. For details, contact C-MAP.
Note: Some eToken dongles from the FEA-2xx7 can be used with this system. These
are labeled "JeT FURUNO XXXXX". Contact your dealer for details.
This chart radar accepts the following C-MAP chart types: C-MAP ENC SERVICE, C-
MAP PROFESSIONAL+, C-MAP ENC+ SERVICE.

C-MAP ENC+ SERVICE charts comply with the IHO's (International Hydrographic Or-
ganization's) S-57 Edition 3 product specification. When used in the chart radar, the
ENC data improves the safety of navigation at sea.

6-2
 6. CHART OVERVIEW

What is ENC delivery?

ENCs can be distributed as ENC delivery or SENC (C-MAP) delivery. Both deliveries
can be used in this system.

In ENC delivery, charts are distributed directly from source like PRIMAR, IC-ENC,
JHA, etc. They are delivered onboard in ENC format (using S-57 and S-63) then the
charts are installed into the system.
In SENC delivery, charts are converted from ENC to SENC before delivery to onboard
and then installed into the system. A C-MAP delivery is SENC delivery.

Important notices
• If you are using both services (ENC and SENC deliveries) having the same chart
name installed into the system through both deliveries, priority of displaying the
chart is in ENC delivery.
• Chart updates for ENC delivery are only for charts of ENC delivery and chart up-
dates for SENC delivery is only for charts of SENC delivery. You have to keep
charts up-to-date separately.
• If you change from ENC delivery to SENC delivery, remove old charts from the sys-
tem before installing charts from new delivery.

6-3
6. CHART OVERVIEW

6.1.2 Status bar

The Status bar mainly provides for selection of display mode, chart type and IMO chart
display setting.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

NAVI

No. Button name Description

1 Display mode Selects the display mode: [RADAR], [CHART for RADAR], [AMS for RA-
DAR] or [CONNING for RADAR].
2 NAVI Selects the Voyage navigation mode.
3 CHARTS Goes to the Chart maintenance mode.
4 PLAN Selects the Voyage planning mode.
5 OTHERS Sets system in silent mode.
6 CLEAR RADAR Hides radar echoes and TT/AIS symbols. Available only when radar over-
lay is active, or when there is at least one TT/AIS symbol displayed.
7 CHART ONLY Shows only the chart, when left button is pressed and held down.
8 STD DISP Restores the IMO standard display instantly.
9 Chart priority No use.
10 Chart database Selects the pre-defined presentations of ENC content: IMO BASE, IMO
STD or IMO ALL. CUSTOM appears when the symbols selected or dese-
lected on the [Chart Display] menu do not match the preset conditions for
IMO BASE, IMO STD or IMO ALL.
11 Displays the operator's manual, chart program no. and system informa-
S N tion.

12 Settings Manages user profiles; opens the Settings menu.

13 Date • Displays the date.

• Selects the time to use, local or UTC.
• Sets the time difference between local and UTC (to use local time).
14 Time Displays the time, local or UTC.
15 Working • Rotates clockwise if the system is working properly. If it is not spinning
Indicator the system is not working. Shortly after it stops spinning the buzzer
sounds. Reset the power to restore normal operation.
R
• If the primary display mode is specified during the installation, the first
letter of the mode name appears at the center of the working indicator
E C as follows: C: Conning, E: ECDIS, R: Radar. The letter can be clicked
to return to the primary display mode.
How to operate the buttons on the Status bar
The Status bar has two types of controls: toggle button and drop-down list button. You
operate the buttons with the trackball module.

Button type Operating procedure

Mode button
A mode button selects the chart operating mode (see
section 6.3). The background color of a mode button is
light-blue when its chart operating mode is enabled; gray
when disabled. The [NAVI] button is an example of a OFF Click ON
(gray) button. (light-blue)
mode button.

6-4
 6. CHART OVERVIEW

Button type Operating procedure

Drop-down list button
A drop-down list button provides a list from which to se-
lect an option related to the label on the button. The
[Chart Database] button is an example of a drop-down list
button. See the right figure. A drop-down list button has a Click
list status indicator (a triangle) whose position changes button.
according to list status.

List closed List opened

6-5
6. CHART OVERVIEW

6.1.3 InstantAccess bar™

The InstantAccess bar™ runs vertically along the left edge of the screen. The bar con-
tains all the operating functions related to the selected chart operating mode (Voyage
planning, Voyage navigation and Chart maintenance). The bar is divided into two sec-
tions, upper and lower. The buttons in the lower section are common to all modes. A
button with a triangle mark at its bottom right corner indicates a button with multiple
functions.

[NAVI] button [CHARTS] button [PLAN] button

activated activated activated

Voyage navigation Chart maintenance Voyage planning

mode bar mode bar mode bar

6-6
 6. CHART OVERVIEW

Button name Description

Voyage navigation mode bar
 Minimize the InstantAccess bar™. To restore the maxi-
mized bar, click anywhere on the bar.
Click
arrow

Click
anywhere
on the bar

Voyage [Route]: Selects/deselects routes, and moves route to Voyage planning mode (for
editing).
[User Chart]: Selects/deselects user chart for monitoring.
[Monitor INFO]: Shows the [Monitor Information] dialog box.
[Stop Monitor]: Stops monitoring of route, user chart.
[Instant Track]: Creates a temporary track to return to or make a temporary detour
from the monitored course.
Processes AIS Safety and Navtex messages. If you have un-
read Navtex or Safety messages, the icon changes as shown S S/N

right; "N" for unread Navtex, "S" for unread Safety, "S/N" for
unread Safety and Navtex.
Manual Update Shows the menu for manual update of chart objects.
Mini Conning Shows or hides the mini conning display.
Chart maintenance mode bar
 Minimizes the InstantAccess bar™.
AUTO Import Loads charts automatically.
Manage Charts Deletes charts; installs (loads) charts manually.
Cell Status Finds cell status.
License Enters license information.
Public Key Shows the current public key. The public key changes each time a new one is
installed.
System Functions for chart synchronization.
[Sync Config]: Selects the ECDIS units to synchronize.
[Sync Status]: Checks synchronization status.
[Reconvert]: Reconverts outdated SENC charts.
Voyage planning mode bar
 Minimizes the InstantAccess bar™.
Planning Creates and edits routes and user charts.
Report Displays route and user chart reports.
Guide Box Shows or hides the guide box, which provides range and bearing measurement
between waypoints when creating a route.
Note: Range and bearing between waypoints can be calculated using either
[Rhumbline] or [Great Circle]. Select the appropriate method from the [Guide Box]
drop-down list in the [Geometry] section of the [NAV TOOLS] menu.

6-7
6. CHART OVERVIEW

Button name Description

Manage Data Manages routes and user charts.
[Route]: Imports, exports, deletes routes.
[User Chart]: Deletes user charts.
[Data Import]: Imports route, user chart created with FEA-2x07 ECDIS.
Common bar
Chart INFO Provides chart information.
[Chart Legend]: Shows chart legend, with your vessel at the center, in the Voyage
navigation mode.
[Viewing Dates]: Sets Display date and Update Review dates.
[Chart 1]: Displays an overview of ECDIS chart symbols.
DISP [SET]: Shows the [Basic Setting] menu, [Chart Display] menu, [Symbol Display]
menu, [Chart Alert] dialog box.
[TWO DISP]: Splits the screen in two, vertically or horizontally, in the Voyage nav-
igation mode.
[NtoM]: Shows or hides the Notices to Mariners (NtoM).
: Shows or hides the software keyboard.

Log Displays Update log (ENC, C-MAP), Event log* (user event, POSN event), NAV
log (Voyage, Details, Chart Usage), Target log (Danger Target), and Route Trans-
fer log.
*: Voyage navigation and Voyage planning modes.
Palette
Selects a color palette, day, dusk or night.

• Adjusts the brilliance of the monitor.

BRILL
• Adjusts the backlighting for the control unit. (CHART for RADAR mode)

MOB Inscribes the MOB (ManOverBoard) mark.

Capture
Takes a screenshot.

Restores previous condition in route and user chart creation.

UNDO

6-8
 6. CHART OVERVIEW

How to operate the buttons on the InstantAccess bar™

The InstantAccess bar™ has four types of buttons: toggle button, drop-down list but-
ton, slider bar button, and specialty button. (The [MOB], [Capture] and [UNDO] buttons
are specialty buttons that provide a single-action function.) The buttons can be oper-
ated with the trackball module or the InstantAccess knob. This section shows you
how to operate the buttons with the InstantAccess knob.

Toggle button Drop-down list button Slider bar button

[Palette] button

OFF ON
(gray) (light-blue)
Palette
choices

1. Push the InstantAccess knob to enable its use with the InstantAccess bar™.
2. Rotate the InstantAccess knob to select a button. The background color of the
button selected is light blue.
3. Do one of the following depending on button type.
• Toggle button: Push the knob to select setting.
• Drop-down list button or slider bar: Rotate the knob to select an item or ad-
just the slider bar. Push the knob to confirm your selection or setting.
Note 1: You can use the ESC key to go back one step in the current operating
sequence.
Note 2: The InstantAccess knob can only adjust the slider bar on the
InstantAccess bar™.

6.1.4 Sensor information box

Sensor information box displays the sensor data. When the user-selected sensor fails,
the system automatically selects another sensor. When this occurs, the color of the
sensor name changes according to the sensor status. For details, see section 1.11.

6-9
6. CHART OVERVIEW

6.1.5 Own ship functions box

The own ship functions box shows information about own ship, enables offset and TM
reset.
[Offset] button
[WGS84] button ENC info
appears here.

TM/CU status

• [Offset] button: See section 16.8.1.

• [WGS 84] button: Convert position data between
datum; go to selected position on the current
chart. Click the button to display the dialog box
shown in the right figure. To convert a position
from one datum to another, select the datum
source at the [Source] pull-down list and enter po-
sition. Select the datum to convert to at the [Con-
verted] pull-down list then click the button. The
position on the chart selected is shown below the
[Converted] pull-down list. To go to a position,
click a [Go To] button.
• ENC info: ENC chart info appears here.
No indication: ENC chart is currently displayed.
"Non-ENC data": Non-official ENC material, in
yellow characters. See section 7.19.
• TM/CU status:
"TM/CU Reset": True motion reset is active. (Chart is stationary and own ship
moves on the chart.)
"TM Reset off": When dragging the chart; true motion is OFF. To restart true motion,
click the indication.
"Ship off screen": Ship is out of the display area.

6-10
 6. CHART OVERVIEW

6.1.6 Route information box

Asterisks appear in data locations when no route
is selected for navigation.
• [Route]: Name of monitored route. cc_import_03
• [Plan Speed]: Planned speed to approach "To 20.0
WPT". 337.5
• [Plan Course]: Planned course between previ-
332.9
ous WPT and "To WPT".
• [Course to Steer]: Calculated set course to fol- 185.0
low the monitored route, including off track, drift 0.9
and gyro error compensation.
• [XTD Limit]: Planned width of channel to ap- 36
proach "To WPT". 0.50
• [XTD]: Perpendicular distance the ship is from 00:05:38
the intended track. The off track figure can be 0.50
shown in meters or nautical miles. Click this 000.0
box, then select [Off Track] and unit desired, or
open the menu and select desired unit with [unit 37
of “Off Track”] in the [Route Information] menu. 112.1
• [To WPT]: The waypoint that the ship is ap-
proaching.
• [DIST to WOP] (Wheel Over Point): Distance to
the point where rudder order for course change
at "To WPT" is given.
• [Time to Go]: Time to go to WOP (hh:mm:ss).
• [Turn RAD]: Planned turning radius at "To
WPT".
• [ROT]: Calculated rate of turn that is based on
current speed and planned turning radius.
• [Next WPT]: The WPT following the "To WPT".
• [Next Course]: Next course (in degrees).

Course to steer

WOL (Wheel Over Line) WOL

Course to steer: 110°

Course to steer: 120°

Planned course: 90° Planned course: 90°

Current

No current Current present

6-11
6. CHART OVERVIEW

6.1.7 Overlay/NAV Tools box

The [Overlay/NAV Tools] box sets up
the following objects and consists of Page name Minimize button
the following pages.
• TT•AIS Page
• Echo*1 selection
• Parallel index lines buttons
• Range rings
• Predictor (predicts ship’s future
movements)
• Under the keel clearance graphic
• Anchor watch
• Look-ahead
• Curved EBL*2
See chapter 15 for information about
objects other than TT•AIS.

*1: Available only when the Echo page is enabled at installation. Not available for B
types.

*2: Available only when a EC-3000 with TCS functionality is connected to the same
network.

6.1.8 Alert box

The [Alert] box shows operational and system
alert messages, with alert ID no. and alert mes-
sage. See chapter 20.

6.1.9 Permanent warning box

The permanent warning box
displays chart-related warning
messages. Click the arrow to
show details. Click the arrow Click arrow to
again to minimize the box. show details.

6.1.10 EBL, VRM boxes

The EBL measures the bearing to an object, and the VRM measures the range to an
object. See section 6.10.

6-12
 6. CHART OVERVIEW

6.1.11 North mark

The north mark appears at the top left of the Chart for Radar display, is North
always visible, and points in the northerly direction. At high latitudes
where north is not in a set direction, the north mark appears with the
text "at own ship" or "at center" below the mark to show the reference
point.
North mark
• "at own ship": Shown when your vessel is displayed on-screen.
North is shown with your vessel as the reference point.
• "at center": Shown when your vessel is not displayed on-screen. North is shown
with the center of the screen as the reference point.

6.1.12 Context-sensitive menus

Context-sensitive menus are available at the locations shown below. Right-click the
applicable area then select the appropriate item from the menu. The availability of the
context-sensitive menu depends on the mode in use, as shown in the table below.

Cursor info display

Sensor
selection
Chart scale

Route selection,
route information
Electronic chart area

TT/AIS
page

EBL reference VRM reference Alert list, Alert log

Mode and availability

Item Functions
NAVI CHARTS PLAN
Chart scale Drop-down list of chart scales. Yes Yes Yes
Cursor info display Switch cursor displays. Yes Yes Yes
Sensor selection Select sensors. Yes Yes Yes
Route selection, Select /unselect route for monitor- Yes Yes Yes
route information ing*; Move to plan*; Select user chart (Off track (Off track
for monitoring*; Monitor INFO box*; only) only)
Stop route monitoring*; Off Track
TT, AIS page Access TT, AIS functions. Yes Yes Yes
Alert list, Alert log Open alert list, alert log. Yes Yes Yes
VRM reference Select VRM reference; offset (head- Yes Yes Yes
ing or north).

6-13
6. CHART OVERVIEW

Mode and availability

Item Functions
NAVI CHARTS PLAN
EBL reference Select EBL reference; offset (head- Yes Yes Yes
ing or north).
Electronic chart area Own ship mark (or cursor position*) Yes No Yes*
to screen center; object info; chart
legend; manual update*; divider,
hide MOB, [Message] dialog box.
* NAVI mode only

6.1.13 How to enter alphanumeric data

On some screens it is necessary to enter alphanumeric data. The data can be input
two ways: software keyboard or trackball.

Alphanumeric data entry from the software keyboard

A software keyboard is also available for entry of alphanumeric data. Do as follows to
use the software keyboard. Display the keyboard before opening menus.

1. On the InstantAccess bar™, press the [DISP], [ ] and [ON] buttons to show
the software keyboard. The [BS], [Enter], [], [],[ ], [] and [Space] on the key-
board function the same as those keys on the keyboard of the Control Unit.

2. To switch between the alphabet keyboard and symbols keyboard, click the [!$&]
key.

Alphabet keyboard Symbols keyboard

3. Click the input box.

4. Click appropriate keys and finally click the [Enter] key.
To erase the software keyboard, click the X button at the top right corner of the key-
board.

6-14
 6. CHART OVERVIEW

Alphanumeric data entry with the trackball module

The trackball module can also be used to enter alphanumeric data.

1. Put the cursor in the input box. Up and down arrows

appear at the right side of the box.
2. Enter data by one of the methods shown below.
• Spin the scrollwheel to set data. Upward to decrease the value; downward to
increase the value.
• Click  to increase the value;  to decrease the value.

How to enter latitude and longitude data with the trackball module
The trackball module can also be used to enter latitude and longitude data.

1. Put the cursor in the input box. A selection cursor (light-

Selection cursor
blue) appears.
2. Enter data by spinning the scrollwheel. Upward to de-
crease the value; downward to increase the value.
3. To switch coordinate between N and S and vice versa,
put the cursor at the right edge of the input box. Dual ar-
rows appear
4. Click to switch the coordinates. The method to switch E to W and vice versa is the
same.

6.2 How to Select a Display Mode

Click the display mode button at the far left side of the Status bar then click [RADAR],
[CHART for RADAR], or [CONNING for RADAR] to select a display mode.

Display mode button

6-15
6. CHART OVERVIEW

6.3 How to Select the Chart Operating Mode

The chart display has three chart operating modes: Voyage navigation, Chart mainte-
nance and Voyage planning. Select a mode from the Status bar with the [NAVI],
[CHARTS] and [PLAN] buttons. The background of the button of the active mode is
light-blue.

For Voyage navigation For Voyage planning

mode mode

For Chart maintenance

mode
Note 1: When switching between the Voyage navigation and Chart maintenance
modes it may take several minutes to read the chart when using C-MAP charts or
there are many charts installed.
Note 2: If the equipment accepts no key operation after switching to the Chart main-
tenance mode, reset the power.

6.4 How to Select the Chart Scale

When you open a chart it is displayed with the default scale, called the compilation
scale. To change the chart scale, do one of the procedures shown below. The scale
range is 1:1,000 to 1:70,000,000.

• Click the chart scale selection buttons in the Chart scale/presentation mode box.
• Right-click anywhere inside the Chart scale/presentation mode to show a drop-
down list of chart scales.
• Put the cursor anywhere on the chart and spin the scrollwheel.

Chart scale indication

Chart scale
Chart related selection buttons
message

The table below lists the chart related messages and their meanings.

Message Meaning
Display Not Real Time* Displayed date is not the current date.
Non-ENC data ENC non-compatible chart in use.
Larger scale ENC available Larger scale available at current position (TM reset
ON) or cursor location (TM reset OFF).
Overscale Scale too large.
RM(OFF) Relative motion turned off when the chart is scrolled
or the trackball is operated.
*: Shown as "Display Not Real Time: display is based on viewing date range from
(start of date range) to (end of date range)" when the permanent warning dialog is
maximized.

6-16
 6. CHART OVERVIEW

6.5 How to Select the Presentation Mode

The presentation mode depends on the chart operating mode, as shown in the table
below.

Voyage navigation mode Voyage planning mode

North up TM Yes Yes*2
North up RM Yes No
Course up TM Yes Yes*2
Course up RM Yes No
Route up TM*1 No Yes*2
Route up RM*1 Yes No
Head up RM Yes No
*1
When monitoring a route.
*2
Motion mode (TM) is not shown. For example, “North up”.

To select a presentation mode, click the presentation mode indication to cycle through
the presentation mode choices or click the triangle to show the drop-down list of pre-
sentation modes.

Click to show drop-down list of

presentation mode choices

Presentation mode

Presentation modes
North up: North (0 degrees) is at the top of the display.

Course up: The course is put at the top of the screen the moment it is selected.

Route up: The planned course is put at the top of the screen, in route monitoring.
When route monitoring is canceled, the course up presentation mode is automatically
selected.

Head-up: Heading is put at the top of the display.

TM (True Motion): Own ship mark follows ship’s movement. The chart is fixed.
RM (Relative Motion): Own ship mark is put at the screen center and is fixed. The
chart moves relative to own ship movement.

6-17
6. CHART OVERVIEW

6.6 Cursor Position Box

The Cursor position box shows

• Cursor position in latitude and longitude

• Time to go to the cursor position
• The bearing (True or Relative) and range to the cursor position, or x-y coordinates
of cursor position. Click the bearing and range indication or x-y coordinates indica-
tion to switch the indication, in the sequence shown below.

Cursor position, Time to go

to cursor position
Bearing(T) and range to cursor position

Bearing(R) and range to cursor position

x-y coordinates of cursor position

6.7 The Silent Mode

The silent mode, which requires a pass- Click [OTHERS],
SILENT [SILENT].
word to activate, deactivates the audio
alarms from the chart system. Use this
mode when the chart system is not re-
quired, like in a harbor. To go to the
standby mode, first click the [OTHERS]
button on the Status bar in the [CHART
for RADAR] mode then click [SILENT].
Have the holder of the password enter the
password then click the [OK] button. Enter password;
click [OK] button.
To return to normal operation, click [Back
to Normal Mode].

Note: The silent mode is automatically re-

leased when switching the operating
mode (radar/chart radar/conning). Click to return to normal operation.

6-18
 6. CHART OVERVIEW

6.8 True Motion Reset

In the true motion mode, the chart is stationary and own ship moves on the screen.
With TM reset active, own ship moves until it reaches the true motion reset border-
line(s), then the chart is redrawn and own ship jumps back to an opposite position on
screen based on its course. (This resetting can also be done manually by clicking the
[TM/CU Reset] button.) When the TM reset function is active, "TM/CU Reset" appears
at the right side of the display.

TM reset borderline setting

(Ring does not appear on the display.)

OWN SHIP

TM
Reset
OWN SHIP

How to enable, disable automatic TM reset

To enable automatic TM reset, click the [TM Reset off] indication at the right side of
the display to show [TM/CU Reset].

Click

When the TM reset is disabled, change the chart scale with the scrollwheel and scroll
the chat by drag and drop. The own ship functions box shows [TM Reset off]. When
own ship moves off the screen the box shows [Ship off screen]. The TM reset is acti-
vated manually by clicking the [Ship off screen] button.

How to set the true motion reset borderline

You can set the limit for TM reset (in percentage) on the [Basic Setting] page. See
section 8.2.2.

6-19
6. CHART OVERVIEW

6.9 How to Control Route and User Charts in Voyage

Navigation and Voyage Planning Modes
Click for Voyage navigation mode Click for Voyage planning mode

Functions in Voyage navigation mode Functions in Voyage planning mode

Click the appropriate chart mode button [NAVI] or [PLAN] at the top of the display to
go to respective mode. For the Voyage navigation mode, click the [Voyage] button
then click the button corresponding to the action to take. For the Voyage planning
mode, click the [Planning] button followed by the [Voyage] button to select a route, or
[User Chart] button to select a user chart.

Voyage navigation mode functions

[Route]: This button has three functions:
• [Select]: Selects the route to monitor.
• [Unselect]: Deselects monitored route.
• [Move to Plan]: Moves monitored route to Voyage planning mode (for editing).
[Instant Track]: Creates a temporary track to return to or make a temporary detour from
the monitored course.
[User Chart]: This button has one function.
• [Select/Unselect]: Selects and unselects user charts from monitoring regardless of
route being monitored.
[Monitor INFO]: Opens the Monitor Information dialog box, to view monitored route,
linked user chart and monitoring user chart information.
[Stop Monitor]: Stops monitoring a route and user charts.
Voyage planning mode functions
[Route]: Shows the [Route Plan] dialog box to create or edit a route.
[User Chart]: Shows the [User Chart] dialog box to create or edit a user chart.

6-20
 6. CHART OVERVIEW

6.10 How to Use the VRM and EBL

The VRM measures the range to an object and the EBL measures the bearing to an
object. There are two each of VRMs and EBLs. The lengths of the dashes on the EBL2
and VRM2 are longer than those of the EBL1 and VRM1 to distinguish them. The color
of the VRMs and EBLs is orange.

VRM1
EBL2

VRM2

EBL1

T T

EBL On/Off VRM no. VRM On/Off

EBL no.

240.8° T

EBL bearing VRM range

EBL reference

6.10.1 How to hide/show an EBL, VRM

Control Unit: Press the EBL or VRM key to hide or show respective marker.
Trackball module: Click the arrow on an EBL or VRM box to hide the respective
marker. To redisplay the marker, click the minimized box.

6.10.2 How to measure the range and bearing

Range: Put the cursor on the VRM then drag the cursor until the VRM is on the inner
edge of the object.
Bearing: Put the cursor on the EBL then drag the cursor until the EBL bisects the ob-
ject.

6.10.3 How to select bearing reference

The EBL bearing reference can be true or relative. Click the EBL reference indication
to display T (True) or R (Relative).

6-21
6. CHART OVERVIEW

6.10.4 EBL, VRM functions available with the context-sensitive menu

The EBLs and VRMs have additional functions that are accessed from the context-
sensitive menu. Right-click any VRM or EBL box to show the context-sensitive menu.

Function Description
[Centered] Centers the origin of the EBL and VRM on the current position.
[Ground] Anchors the EBL and VRM to ground; neither the EBL or VRM move
with ship's movement.
[Offset HDG]

Select
[Offset
HDG].

Drag and drop EBL, VRM When vessel changes course, the
on desired location. EBL, VRM move so that the range (L)
to their centers stays fixed.

[Offset North]

Select
[Offset
North].

Drag and drop EBL, VRM The EBL, VRM move to keep the
on desired location. angle from North to the center of the
EBL, VRM, even if the vessel
changes course. The distance to the
center of the EBL, VRM is fixed.

6-22
 6. CHART OVERVIEW

6.10.5 How to select the calculation method for EBL and VRM
The bearing for EBL and range for VRM can be calculated using either Rhumbline or
Great Circle. To select the calculation method, do the following:

1. Open the menu then select [NAV Tools] and [Geometry]. The [Geometry] settings
page appears.

2. Click the triangle at [EBL/VRM] to show the drop-down options.

3. Select [Rhumbline] or [Great Circle] as appropriate.
4. Click [Save] to apply the changes, then click [Close] to close the menu.

6-23
6. CHART OVERVIEW

6.11 Split Screen

You can split the screen in two, horizontally or vertically, in the [CHART for RADAR]
mode, Voyage navigation display.

6.11.1 How to activate, deactivate the split screen

To activate the split screen or return to the
full screen, click the [DISP] and [TWO NtoM
DISP] buttons on the InstantAccess bar™
to show the choices for screen division.
Click the screen division desired. Full screen

The example below shows the vertical split

Vertical split
screen. The active display can be switched screen
by clicking an [ACTIVE] button at the top of
the display. The dividing line between the Horizontal split
screen
main and sub views cannot be moved.

Click ACTIVE button to

switch active display.

MAIN SUB
VIEW VIEW

Dividing line

6.11.2 Function availability

Viewable Operable
Item (CHART for RADAR mode)
Main Sub Main Sub
AIS target Yes Yes Yes Yes
TT Yes Yes Yes Yes
EBL, VRM Yes Yes Yes Yes
Parallel index lines Yes Yes Yes Yes
Divider Yes Yes Yes No
Range rings Yes Yes Yes No
Anchor watch Yes Yes Yes No
Danger highlight Yes Yes Yes No
Chart display Yes Yes Yes No

6-24
 6. CHART OVERVIEW

6.11.3 Split screen usage characteristics

• If the sub view is not displayed correctly, restore the full screen display then try to ac-
tivate the split screen again.
• The display may not be updated when switching to the Voyage planning mode. If this
occurs, switch to the Voyage navigation mode, restore the split screen display then re-
turn to the Voyage planning mode.
• The own ship mark may not appear at the screen center when releasing the split
screen display. If this occurs, click the indication "TM/CU Reset" at the top right posi-
tion on the screen to show the own ship mark at the screen center.
• The TM reset feature only works on the active display. To return the own ship mark to
the screen center, click the indication [TM/CU Reset] at the top right position on the
screen.
• The sub view can use a location and chart scale different from the main view.
• The chart scale related messages (overscale, larger ENC available, etc.), which ap-
pear beneath the chart scale indication, show only on the main view.

6.12 Datum

6.12.1 General
Datum is a mathematical model of the earth based on which a sea chart is produced.
If the datum of a position sensor and that of a sea chart are different, a transformation
has to be made somewhere in the system. Not doing so can result in errors of several
sea miles. The difference between two datum is never constant, but depends on po-
sition. This means that the difference between WGS-84 and local datum, generally
used in paper charts, is not generally valid with electronic sea charts.

6.12.2 Paper charts

Datum used in paper charts have been traditionally national datum for historical rea-
sons. Many paper charts do not have a marked datum, therefore compatibility with
electronic charts may be complicated. In some paper charts, the correction terms are
printed in lieu of datum, for correction of the WGS-84 system satellite locations. The
correction terms are usable but only with the paper chart in question.

6.12.3 Electronic sea charts

The ENC vector material has to be produced by a National Hydrographic Office in the
WGS-84 datum.

6.12.4 Positioning devices and datum

In early days of electronic positioning devices, datum received little attention because
the commonly used systems utilized special charts (like Decca charts). Later on, data
output was added to these systems, but still no attention was paid to datum and the
position errors were considered as an inaccuracy of the system. With the spread of
the GPS, however, datum has become better known. An accurate position is of no val-
ue if co-ordinates are in a wrong datum. GPS satellites utilize the WGS-84 datum.

6-25
6. CHART OVERVIEW

6.12.5 Chart radar and datum

The chart radar uses ENC material, produced to standards using WGS-84 datum. Po-
sitioning devices connected to the chart radar must work in the WGS-84 datum. IMO
requires that the chart must give an alert if the datum of a positioning device is not the
WGS-84.

6.13 How to Select Sensor Settings

Sensor settings can also be selected in the chart for radar mode. Settings are mutually
changed between the radar and chart for radar modes.

This chart radar system accepts navigation data input two ways: [System] or [Local].
[System] shares sensor data among multiple chart radars in network. Sensor priority
is also commonly shared among the chart radar. [Local] selects a sensor outside the
network.

1. Right-click anywhere in the Sensor infor-

mation box to show the context-sensitive
menu.
2. Click [Local] or [System].

Note: Sensor system can also be selected

from the menu. Open the menu and click
[System/Local Select] on the [Sensor]
menu. Click the circle next to [System Sen- Open MENU
sor] or [Local Sensor] then click the [Save]
button.

6-26
 6. CHART OVERVIEW

6.14 How to Enter Ship Speed

Speed can also be entered in the chart for radar mode. Settings are mutually changed
between the radar and chart for radar modes.

The speed can be entered from a log (STW) or GPS (SOG), or manually on the menu.
Note that FURUNO GPS Navigator GP-150 provides both COG and SOG.

1. Right-click anywhere in the Sensor information

box to show the context-sensitive menu.
2. Click [Open MENU].
3. Click [System Sensor Settings] or [Local Sen-
sor Settings].
4. Click the [SPD] tab.

Open MENU

Check for automatic speed input Speed sensor list

ation PRIM

GPS
tion

or
speed

[SPD] page, system sensor

Check for automatic speed input Speed sensor list

Stabilization
mode PRIM

LOG/GPS
selection
Check for
manual speed
input
Check to use
radar as
source for
speed and
course Set course and speed of drift

[SPD] page, local sensor

6-27
6. CHART OVERVIEW

5. For automatic input, follow the procedure below. For manual input, go to
step 6.
1) Check [Sensors].
2) Set the priority for the speed sensors in case of Local sensor. Click the triangle
on the Priority1 line to select the sensor to be the Priority1 sensor. Do the
same for the Priority2. Only one sensor can be Priority1; all others are priority
2. If a speed sensor is changed from Priority2 to Priority1, then that sensor pre-
viously selected to Priority1 is then automatically selected to Priority2 state.
3) Check [LOG] or [GPS] at [Sensor Type].
4) Select [Bottom] or [Water] at [Stabilization Mode]. Select [Bottom] if GPS is the
source of speed data, or [Water] if a speed log is the source of speed data.
5) Go to step 7.
6. For manual input, set the stabilization mode for [Water] and check [Manual]. En-
ter the speed using the scrollwheel, the software keyboard or the keyboard on the
Control Unit.
Note: For set and drift, see page 16-3.
7. Click the [Save] button to save settings then click the [Close] button to close the
menu.

Notes on speed input

• Be sure not to select a LOG option when a speed log is not connected. If the log
signal is lost, the GPS sensor is used. In the event of GPS loss, the SPD is shown
as "**.* kn".
• The SPD is shown as "**.* kn", and the label "LOG" is erased if no log signal is pres-
ent for a certain amount of time. The timeout varies according to ship.
• If communication with a sensor is lost or interrupted, the system changes to the next
available sensor automatically. For example, if the sensor type is set to [LOG] and
the speed log signal is interrupted or lost, the system can switch to a GPS sensor.
In this case, the "LOG" indication appears in yellow color.
• A single-axis water log cannot measure speed when the wind is coming from the
leeway direction.

6-28
 6. CHART OVERVIEW

6.15 How to Enter Heading

Heading can also be entered in the chart for radar mode. Settings are mutually
changed between the radar and chart for radar modes.

Note: When the vessel is in high latitudes (over 85°), data from the gyrocompass is
not used. The internal filter data is used for heading calculation. In this case, the head-
ing source in the sensor information box appears as "FILT". However, high altitudes
are not supported in RADAR mode.
Heading can be entered manually or automatically.

1. Right-click anywhere in the Sensor informa-

tion box to show the context-sensitive menu.
2. Click [Open MENU].
3. Click [System Sensor Settings] or [Local
Sensor Settings].
4. Click the [HDG] tab.

PRIM:
Check for
automatic input
Sensor
list

Check for
manual input*

*: This is not available with the [System Sensor Settings] menu.

This is not shown on IMO type.
[HDG] page, system sensor

PRIM:
Check for
automatic input
Sensor
list The indication
for the second
Check for gyro appears
manual input* even when
only one
*: This is not shown gyrocompass
on IMO type. is connected.

[HDG] page, local sensor

6-29
6. CHART OVERVIEW

5. For automatic input, follow the procedure below. For manual input, go to
step 6.
1) Check [Sensors].
2) For local system settings, set the priority for each sensor connected, referring
to section 6.14.
3) Go to step 7.
Note: For the local sensor, an offset can be applied to the gyro reading if it is
wrong. Check [Gyro Correction], then spin the scrollwheel to set the offset.
6. For manual input, check [Manual]. Enter the heading using the scrollwheel, the
software keyboard or the keyboard on the Control Unit.
7. Click the [Save] button to save settings then click the [Close] button to close the
menu.

6.16 Set up Before Departure

6.16.1 Updates before departure

Update S57 chart material
Update your S57 chart material before embarking on a new voyage. See section 7.20.

Display date and update review dates for S57 charts and manual updates
Note: It is very important that you set the Display and Update Review dates for charts
as the current date.
There may be features that require chart viewing dates or seasonal dates in charts.
Accordingly, if you have not set Display date and Update Review dates as the current
date, there is a possibility that you can get a wrong presentation or some feature may
be absent. See section 9.2.

Create or update user chart, Notes

If necessary, create a new user chart and Notes or modify existing ones. See
chapter 13.

Chart alert calculation

Set chart alert areas suitable for your coming voyage, on the [Look-ahead] page in the
[Overlay/NAV Tools] box. See section 11.2.

6-30
 6. CHART OVERVIEW

6.16.2 Create or update a route

Create a new route or modify an existing one. See chapter 12.

Check your route against chart alerts

Before you sail your route, you should always check your route against chart alerts.
This is important because your S57 charts and manual updates may contain chart
viewing dates information. You can check chart alerts from the [Check Results] page
on the [Route Plan] dialog box.

The following information is stored with the monitoring route plan:

• Conditions for chart alerts during route monitoring, which includes safety contour
and other chart alerts, on the [Alert Parameters] page of the [Route Plan] dialog box.

Check Status: Checked

• Name of the user chart to be used during route monitoring together with this planned
route, on the [User Chart] page of the [Route Plan] dialog box.

• Name of the Notes to be used during route monitoring together with this planned
route, on the [User Chart] dialog box (click the [Planning] button then click the [User
Chart] button).

Paste Copy Delete

6-31
6. CHART OVERVIEW

Recalculate timetable and ETA values

Timetable and ETA values can be recalculated from the [Optimize] page in the [Route
Plan] dialog box. Minimally set ETD to equal departure time, and set optimization val-
ues.

6.16.3 How to check and prepare the route, user chart to monitor
Select the route to monitor, view linked user charts
Select a route for the voyage: In the Voyage navigation mode, click the [Voyage],
[Route] and [Select] buttons, or right-click the route indication in the [Route Informa-
tion] box (right edge of screen) then select [Select Route]. See chapter 14.

The [Monitor Information] dialog box appears, showing the [Waypoints] tab.

Note: A route cannot be opened if its planned settings are different from its navigation
settings. The reason is given on the [Select Route] dialog box. In this case, open the
route in the Voyage planning mode and click the [Check Route] button, on the [Alert
Parameters] page. Adjust the route as necessary.
The To WPT can be selected, however WPT 01 cannot be selected.

Check ETA
WPT: 3
Distance: 0.00NM
Plan: 10:42 05 Jun 2016
Actual: 10:25 05 Jun 2016
To Localtime
Off Plan:
SPD Calculation:
10 25 05 Jun 2016
Start Calculate
Suggested SPD: 0.0kn

To see all the user charts linked to the route, click the [Linked User Chart] tab to show
the names of all the user charts linked to the route. Click a user chart to view its con-
tents.

6-32
 6. CHART OVERVIEW

Check ETA
WPT: 3
Distance: 0.00NM
Plan: 10:42 05 Jun 2016
Actual: 10:25 05 Jun 2016
To Localtime
Off Plan:
SPD Calculation:
10 25 05 Jun 2016
Start Calculate
Suggested SPD: 0.0kn

Select confirm conditions of the route plan

Check the setting on the [Chart Alert] dialog box; click the [DISP], [SET] and [Chart
Alert] buttons to show that dialog box.

6-33
6. CHART OVERVIEW

Select the user chart(s) to monitor

A user chart can be monitored without linking it to a route. You can select a user chart
two ways.

• Click the [Voyage], [User Chart] and [Select/Unselect] buttons on the InstantAccess
bar™ to open the [Select Monitor User Chart] dialog box.
• In the Voyage navigation mode, right click anywhere in the Route information box
(right side of screen) to show the [Select Monitor User Chart] dialog box.
Check the chart(s) to use in the [Stored User Chart] window, then click the [<<] and
[Open] buttons.

The [Monitor Information] dialog box automatically appears and the user chart(s) se-
lected are displayed in the [Monitoring User Chart] tab. Click a user chart to view its
contents.

Check ETA
WPT: 3
Distance: 0.00NM
Plan: 10:42 05 Jun 2016
Actual: 10:25 05 Jun 2016
To Localtime
Off Plan:
SPD Calculation:
10 25 05 Jun 2016
Start Calculate
Suggested SPD: 0.0kn

6-34
 6. CHART OVERVIEW

6.16.4 Check configuration of navigation sensors

You can check the configuration of your navigation sensors.

Check speed settings ([SPD] page)

Open the menu and click the [SPD] tab in the [System Sensor Settings] page or [Local
Sensor Settings] page of the [Sensor] menu. The user can select navigation sensors
for use in navigation and view their current values.

PRIM

[SPD] page, system sensor

PRIM

[SPD] page, local sensor

Checkbox status shows whether the sensor is used for integrated navigation or not. If
there is no value shown for a sensor, it indicates that the sensor is not valid. Note that
the content of these pages depends on the sensors that are in use on the ship.

Select the available dual logs.

Note that manual speed should only be used in an emergency, when no other speed
reference is available. Remember that position sensors are also available as speed
sources. If no dual log is available, check [Reference SPD] (local sensor page) to use
a reference target from the radar as the source for speed and course.

6-35
6. CHART OVERVIEW

Check position sensors ([POSN] page)

Open the menu and click the [POSN] tab in the [System Sensor Settings] page or [Lo-
cal Sensor Settings] page of the [Sensor] menu. The [PRIM] and [Second] labels indi-
cate the type of the position sensor. (In the figure below the [PRIM] label shows
GPS1.) [PRIM] and [Second] indicate sensor status and priority.

PRIM
LAT:
LON:

LAT:
LON:

“Second” appears even when only one

position-fixing equipment is connected.

Only one sensor can be primary while the others can be secondary or off position. Af-
ter a sensor is turned off, its status is changed to [Second] (Secondary) state. When
a position sensor state is changed to [PRIM] (Primary) and another sensor was [PRIM]
(Primary), the sensor formerly [PRIM] (Primary) becomes [Second] (Secondary).

Select the "Primary" navigation sensor as the sensor that is considered to be most ac-
curate and reliable. Set all other navigation sensors as "Secondary".

6.16.5 How to reset odometer and trip meter

To reset the odometer and/or trip meter do as follows:

1. Open the menu and select the [Voyage] menu from the [NAV Log] menu in the
[Log] menu.

2. Click one of the following buttons.

[Reset All]: Reset both the odometer and the trip meter for both "Water" and "Bot-
tom".
[Reset Trip]: Reset the trip distance for both "Water" and "Bottom".
3. Click the [Close] button to finish.

6-36
7. HOW TO MANAGE CHARTS
This chapter mainly shows you how to install the public keys, licenses and charts,
manually update chart objects, and synchronize charts. All chart-related operations
begin from the Chart maintenance mode, which you access by clicking the [CHARTS]
button on the Status bar.

Note 1: Charts, routes and user charts are shared with other FMD-3xx0, FCR-2xx9 and
FAR-3xx0 units, via LAN. Data is shared automatically; no operation is required.
Note 2: Chart processing (installation, deletion, etc.) may take several minutes depend-
ing on the number of charts to be processed.
Note 3: If, when attempting to install charts, nothing appears on the display at the start
of the procedure, reset the power and try again.
Note 4: If installation of AVCS charts stops, the message "Chart installation has
stopped. Run the installation again. Installation will continue from the chart not yet in-
stalled." appears. This does not indicate completion of the installation. Restart the in-
stallation. The installation resumes from the chart not yet installed.
This message may also appear when installing C-MAP ENC SERVICE, C-MAP PRO-
FESSIONAL+ C-MAP ENC+ SERVICE charts if the user does not confirm completion
of the installation within approx. one hour. (Installation window remains on the screen.)
However, this is not an indication of failed installation.
Note 5: Do not install AVCS and C-MAP DL charts at the same time. This can cause
errors in the map files and can result in failure to obtain chart data from C-MAP.
Note 6: When installing the AVCS LargeMedia, the message "No connection to dongle"
may appear in the [Result] window at the completion of the installation. If this occurs,
reinstall the media.

7.1 How to Install Public Keys for ENC Charts

Public keys authenticate the source and integrity of the ENC chart materials used in
this chart system. Before you install a new ENC chart, confirm that the corresponding
public key is installed.

Generally, there are two types of public keys: IHO (file name: IHO.PUB), Primar (file
name: PRIMAR.pub)

1. Set the medium (DVD, USB flash memory, etc.) that contains the public key. (The
IHO public key is preinstalled.)
2. Get into the Chart maintenance mode then click the [Public Key] button on the
InstantAccess bar™.

3. Click the [Load New Key] button to show the [Open file] dialog box.
4. Find the .pub file then click the [Open] button. The [Select Public Key] dialog box
reappears.

7-1
7. HOW TO MANAGE CHARTS

5. Click the [Display Content] button on the [Select Public Key] dialog box to show
the display contents.

6. To accept the contents, click the [Activate] button on the [Select Public Key] dialog
box.

7.2 How to Install ENC Licenses, Charts

Install your ENC licenses and charts, in that order.

7.2.1 How to install an ENC license

Automatic installation
1. Insert the medium (DVD, USB flash memory, etc.) that contains the ENC license.
2. Get into the Chart maintenance mode then click the [License] button on the
InstantAccess bar™ to show the [Licenses] dialog box.
3. Click the [Import Licenses] button.

7-2
 7. HOW TO MANAGE CHARTS

4. Find the license (permit.txt) then click the [OK] button to install the license.
The [Licenses] dialog box then shows cell name, date of expiration, data server
name and subscription type of the license.

5. Click the [Close] button to finish.

Manual installation
If you do not have the medium which has your ENC license, you can enter the license
number manually.

1. Click the [CHARTS] button on the Status bar to go the Chart maintenance mode,
then click the [License] button on the InstantAccess bar™.
2. Click the [Input Manually] button to show the [Input License Manually] box.

3. Select the type [ENC/ARCS] at the bottom of the screen.

4. Enter the license number(s) then click the [OK] button.

7.2.2 How to install ENC charts

When you install charts from a medium, the system first loads a catalog, which stores
certain information into your SSD such as cell IDs, their position, and edition number,
from the install medium. Then, the system asks which charts you want to install from
the chosen medium. After building the catalog, you can view the contents of it by click-
ing the [Cell Status] button on the InstantAccess bar™.

Note 1: Do not click the [Cancel] button during the installation of a chart. If you get an
error message, try to install the charts again.
Note 2: When any chart is installed, all checked routes are reverted to unchecked sta-
tus. Use the [Check Route] button on the [Alert Parameters] page to re-check routes
before starting any voyage.
1. Set the medium that contains the ENC charts.
2. Get into the Chart maintenance mode then click the [AUTO Load] button on the
InstantAccess bar™. The confirmation message "Attention: This process takes
time to complete, and the operation speed of the system will decline. Do you wish

7-3
7. HOW TO MANAGE CHARTS

to continue?" appears. Click the [OK] button to continue. A message informs you
that the system is searching the medium (in the figure below the medium is a
DVD) for chart data.

The results of the search are displayed, an example of which is shown below. To
cancel the installation, click the [Cancel] button.

3. Click the [OK] button to install the charts. The [Install chart data] window appears
and shows the percentage of completion, with digital and analog indications.

C1210011 ENC 01 Jun 2012 Unissued

To show details during the installation, click the [Show detail] button.

To close the [Message] window, click the [Hide detail] button.

7-4
 7. HOW TO MANAGE CHARTS

4. When the installation is completed, information about the installation appears in

the [Result] window. Click the [Confirm] button to finish.

5. If applicable, set the next sequential medium then repeat steps 2-4 to install the
next database.
6. After all necessary charts are installed, reset the power.
Note 1: When many charts are installed, the chart system checks for error in the in-
stalled chart data at the next power up. This is not an indication of malfunction.
Note 2: Previous versions of charts cannot be displayed if installed after installing the
latest versions.

7.3 How to Delete ENC Licenses

1. Get into the Chart maintenance mode.
2. Click the [License] button on the InstantAccess bar™.
3. Click the [ENC] tab as appropriate to show a list of licenses.

4. Put a checkmark next to the license(s) to delete.

5. Click the [Delete Licenses] button to delete the license(s) selected.

7-5
7. HOW TO MANAGE CHARTS

7.4 How to Read ENC Chart Manufacturer Info

You can find out if your installed ENC charts are official or unofficial, with the [Producer
Code] button in the [Licenses] dialog box. The following functions use this feature.

• [Filter] window (see section 7.14) can show or hide Official:

official or unofficial charts. Official Unofficial

• Chart judgment is shown for unofficial charts on the

[Check Results] of the [Route Plan] dialog box (see paragraph 12.4.5) if the corre-
sponding alert check is active.
1. In the Chart maintenance mode, click the [License] button to show the [Licenses]
dialog box.
2. Click the [ENC] tab.
3. Click the [Producer Code] button.

4. Select the judgment information file then click the [Open] button.

7.5 How to Install C-MAP Charts

Synchronize chart data before you install C-MAP charts, grouping the chart radar units
to synchronize, otherwise the chart data cannot be shared. See the procedure in
paragraph 7.21.1 for how to synchronize chart data. If C-MAP charts are not synchro-
nized after installation, delete all C-MAP charts, and do the above procedure again.

7.5.1 How to register the eToken

The eToken is a hardware mechanism (installed inside the processor unit) used for
password authentication. Registration of the eToken is required only once, before you
install the C-MAP database.

1. Get into the Chart maintenance mode then click the [License] button on the
InstantAccess bar™ to show the [License] dialog box.

7-6
 7. HOW TO MANAGE CHARTS

2. Click the [C-MAP] tab to the show the [Licenses] dialog box for C-MAP.

3. Click the [C-MAP Setup] button.

4. The confirmation message "Attention: C-MAP eToken will be initialized. Do you
wish to continue?" appears. Click the [OK] button to continue and register the eTo-
ken.
Note 1: "CMAP: No connection to eToken" disappears from the Permanent warning
box after completion of the registration.
Note 2: You can show your C-MAP system ID by clicking the [C-MAP SystemID] but-
ton on the [Licenses] dialog box for C-MAP.

7.5.2 How to install the C-MAP database

When you install the C-MAP database from a medium, all data is saved to the SSD.

Note 1: To synchronize chart data between multiple units (FMD-3x00, FAR-3xx0 or

FCR-2xx9), group the units (see section 7.21.1) you wish to synchronize before you
install the charts. If the group setting is done after chart installation, the units will not
synchronize. If, after setting the group and installing the charts, the charts are not syn-
chronized, delete, then reinstall the chart.
Note 2: The installation of a chart cannot be cancelled while it is in progress. If you get
an error message, try to install the charts again.
Note 3: The C-MAP database in the units selected for synchronization are synchro-
nized at the successful completion of the database installation.
1. Insert the medium that contains the C-MAP database.
2. Get into the Chart maintenance mode then click the [AUTO Load] button on the
InstantAccess bar™.
3. The [Install chart data] window appears and shows the percentage of completion,
with digital and analog indications.

7-7
7. HOW TO MANAGE CHARTS

To show details during the installation, click the [Show detail] button.

To close the [Message] window, click the [Hide detail] button.

4. When the installation is completed, information about the chart database installed
appears in the [Result] window. Click the [Confirm] button to finish.
Result

5. If applicable, set the next sequential medium and repeat steps 2-3 to install the
next databases.
6. After all databases are installed, reset the power.
Note 1: If, after installation, C-MAP Pro+ charts do not appear, delete all correspond-
ing charts and then reinstall them.
Note 2: Synchronization is not done for charts which could not be installed success-
fully. Reinstall failed charts.

7.5.3 How to install C-MAP licenses

A C-MAP license should be installed using the automatic installation method shown
below. If the automatic installation fails, try the manual installation method.

Automatic installation
1. Set the medium (DVD, USB flash memory, etc.) that contains the C-MAP license.
2. Get into the Chart maintenance mode then click the [License] button on the
InstantAccess bar™.
3. Click the [Import Licenses] button.
4. Select the medium that contains the license then click the [Open] button.
5. Click the [OK] button to install the license.

7-8
 7. HOW TO MANAGE CHARTS

6. Click the [Close] button to finish.

7. Reset the power.

Manual installation
1. Click the [CHARTS] button on the Status bar to go the Chart maintenance mode,
then click the [License] button on the InstantAccess bar™.
2. Click the [Input Manually] button to show the [Input License Manually] box.

3. Select the type [C-MAP] at the bottom of the window.

4. Enter the [Database name] and [Collection name] information as shown in the ta-
ble below. Enter the names exactly as shown to ensure correct installation.
Database name Collection name
Chart type Name to enter Enter the contracted zone number according to chart
PROFESSIONAL+: Professional+ type as follows:
ENC SERVICE: ENC Professional/Professional+: Enter "Zone *"
ENC+ SERVICE: ENC+ (without quotations)
Ex. Zone 1
ENC/ENC+: Enter "Zone * ENC"
(without quotations)
Ex. Zone 1 ENC
* = Zone no.
5. Enter the license (max. 16 characters) in the bottommost window.
6. Click the [OK] button to install the license.
7. Reset the power.

7-9
7. HOW TO MANAGE CHARTS

7.5.4 How to generate and order an update file

To update the C-MAP chart database, you have to generate an update file, and e-mail
the file directly to C-MAP. The update file defines coverage of charts you can display
on your chart system.

1. Connect a USB flash memory to the USB port on the Control Unit.
2. Get into the Chart maintenance mode then click the [License] button on the
InstantAccess bar™.
3. Click the [C-MAP] tab to show the [Licenses] dialog box for C-MAP.
4. From the [E-mail Size] drop-down list, select the size of the update file. The choic-
es are [100KB], [200KB], [300KB], [400KB], [500KB], [750KB], [1MB], [2MB],
[3MB], [4MB], [10MB], [Unlimited]. This is the size of the data file in an e-mail. The
file may be sent in pieces depending of the size selected.
5. Click the [Order Update File] button. A file name (C-MAP system ID and chart
type) is automatically created, with the extension .ord.

6. Select the USB flash memory.

7. Click the [Save] button to save the order file to the USB flash memory.
8. Send the order file to [email protected].
Within a few minutes you will receive a file that includes the terms for using the chart
service and the chart updates. Save the file to a USB flash memory and apply it as
shown in the next section.

7.5.5 How to apply the update file

1. Insert the USB flash memory that contains the update file (.ans extension) into the
USB port on the Control Unit.
2. Get into the Chart maintenance mode then click the [License] button on the
InstantAccess bar™.
3. Click the [C-MAP] tab to show the [Licenses] dialog box for C-MAP.
4. Click the [Update from File] button.
5. Find the update file on the USB flash memory then click the [Open] button.

7-10
 7. HOW TO MANAGE CHARTS

7.5.6 How to check license status

You can check the status of your chart licenses with the following procedure. The chart
database and respective licenses must be installed before you check the status.

1. Get into the Chart maintenance mode then click the [License] button on the
InstantAccess bar™.
2. Click the [C-MAP] tab to show the C-MAP license dialog.
3. Click the [Check Signature] button at the right-side of the dialog.
The results appear in the window as "Ok" or "Not Ok". Where the results appears
as "Not Ok", consult your local dealer.
4. Click the [OK] button to close the results window.

7.6 How to Delete a C-MAP Database

If you are going to delete all C-MAP databases, turn off chart synchronization (see
section 7.21) and delete the databases from each unit.

1. Get into the Chart maintenance mode then click the [License] button on the
InstantAccess bar™.
2. Click the [C-MAP] tab to show the [Licenses] dialog box for C-MAP.
3. Select the database to delete with the [Database] pull-down list.
4. Click the [Delete Database] button.
5. Reset the power.

7.7 How to Install C-MAP DL (Dynamic Licensing)

Charts
Register the eToken if it has not already been registered. See section 7.5.1.

7.7.1 How to generate and order an update file

To update the C-MAP chart database, you have to create an update file and e-mail the
file directly to C-MAP. The update file defines coverage of charts you can display on
your chart system.
1. Connect a USB flash memory to the USB port on the Control Unit.
2. Get into the Chart maintenance mode then click the [License] button on the
InstantAccess bar™.
3. Click the [C-MAP] tab to show the [Licenses] dialog box for C-MAP.
4. From the [E-mail Size] drop-down list, select the size of the update file. The choic-
es are [100KB], [200KB], [300KB], [400KB], [500KB], [750KB], [1MB], [2MB],
[3MB], [4MB], [10MB], [Unlimited]. This is the size of the data file in an e-mail. The
file may be sent in pieces depending of the size selected.
5. Click the [Order Update File] button. A file name (C-MAP system ID and chart
type) is automatically created, with the extension .ord.
6. Select the USB flash memory.
7. Click the [Save] button to save the order file to the USB flash memory.

7-11
7. HOW TO MANAGE CHARTS

8. Send the order file to [email protected].

Within a few minutes you will receive a file that includes the terms for using the chart
service and the chart updates. Save the file to a USB flash memory and apply it as
shown in the next section.

7.7.2 How to apply the update file

1. Insert the USB flash memory that contains the update file (.ans extension) into the
USB port on the Control Unit.
2. Get into the Chart maintenance mode then click the [License] button on the
InstantAccess bar™.
3. Click the [C-MAP] tab to show the [Licenses] dialog box for C-MAP.
4. Click the [Update from File] button.
5. Find the update file on the USB flash memory then click the [Open] button.
Note: If the .ans file does not update the status of all shared C-MAP DL charts, reset
the power of all units.

7.7.3 How to enable and set up the C-MAP DL

1. Get into the Chart maintenance mode then click the [License] button on the
InstantAccess bar™.
2. Click the [C-MAP DL] tab to show the [Licenses] dialog box for C-MAP DL.

License Name Database Expiry Date Reported

C1210011 ENC 25 May 2016 Unissued

3. Check [Enable Dynamic License] to enable the dynamic licensing.

You now have access to all the charts contained within the selected subscription
zones - both already licensed charts and new charts.

Settings, indications on the Licenses dialog box for C-MAP DL

• Set your annual credit limit with [Credit Limit]. A permanent warning is given if your
credit goes below this value. A new chart cannot be enabled if it causes the credit
to go below this value.
• [Credit Rest] shows the amount of credit remaining and is updated each time you
receive a confirmation answer for your request via e-mail.
• [Next Report Date] is the date when the next report should be sent to C-MAP. If
charts are not reported before the mandatory report date, access to all non-reported
charts is discontinued and can be resumed only after the confirmation answer al-
lowing use of the charts is received via e-mail.
• [Confirmation Date] is the date when you receive the confirmation answer for your
request via e-mail.

7-12
 7. HOW TO MANAGE CHARTS

• [Confirm before open new chart], if checked, a confirmation window asks for confir-
mation before opening charts that require issuing a new license. A chart denied is
added to the list of protected charts, so the confirmation request will not be repeated
for that chart. Those charts cannot be opened until they are removed from the list
of protected charts.
• [Protected], if checked, shows the protected charts in the cell list. To remove a chart
from protection, select it then click the [Release] button. Then, when an attempt is
made to open that chart, the confirmation window appears. Note that multiple con-
firmation windows open when releasing multiple charts from protection.

7.8 How to Export a List of Charts

Get into the Chart maintenance mode, click the [Manage Charts] button on the
InstantAccess bar™ to show the [Manage Charts] dialog box. Check the charts to add
to the list. Click the [Export List] button to export the checked charts to a USB flash
memory, in .txt format.

7.9 How to Export a List of Specific Licenses

You can export a list of your ENC or C-MAP (excluding C-MAP DL) licenses to a USB
flash memory, in .txt format.

1. Set a USB flash memory in the USB port on the Control Unit.
2. Get into the Chart maintenance mode then click the [License] button.
3. Click the [ENC] or [C-MAP] tab.
4. Click the [Export List] button.
5. Change the file name at [File Name] if desired.
6. Select the USB flash memory then click the [Save] button.
7. Click the [OK] button to finish.

7.10 How to Show the ENC Permit

1. Get into the Chart maintenance mode then click the [License] button.
2. Click the [ENC] tab.
3. Click the [ENC User Permit] button to show the ENC permit.

4. Click the [OK] button to finish.

7-13
7. HOW TO MANAGE CHARTS

7.11 How to Backup, Restore Licenses

You can make backup copies of your ENC, ARCS and AVCS (AIO) licenses and save
them to a USB flash memory. If re-installation of the licenses becomes necessary, you
can reinstall them from the USB flash memory. The backup and restore functions are
not available with C-MAP charts.

To backup licenses:
1. Insert a USB flash memory into the USB port on the Control Unit.
2. Get into the Chart maintenance mode then click the [License] button on the
InstantAccess bar™ to show the [Licenses] dialog box.
3. Click the [Backup Licenses] button.
4. Select the USB flash memory then select the folder in which to save the licenses,
then click the [OK] button.
The license files (ENCpermit.dat, ARCSpermit.dat) are saved in the selected fold-
er.
5. Click the [OK] button.

To restore licenses:
1. Insert the USB flash memory that has the licenses into the USB port on the Control
Unit.
2. Get into the Chart maintenance mode then click the [License] button on the
InstantAccess bar™ to show the [Licenses] dialog box.
3. Click the [Restore Licenses] button.
4. Select the USB flash memory then select the folder in which licenses are saved,
then click the [OK] button.
5. Click the [OK] button.

7-14
 7. HOW TO MANAGE CHARTS

7.12 How to View Permit Expiration Date

Permits are used to control the right to use chart data in this chart system. A permit is
connected to the edition of a chart. Permits are issued in two different types:

• Subscription permit: This type of permit includes updates for subsequent 3, 6, 9

or 12 months.
• One-Off permit: This type of permit includes only updates up to the issue date of
the permit.
The expiry date of a permit controls the installation of Base charts and their updates
to the chart. The system will warn you when you are installing charts or updates that
are issued less than 30 days before the expiration date of a permit. If a permit has ex-
pired, it is impossible to install a chart or its update that was issued after the expiration
date of the permit. The user has a right to view a chart forever, except C-MAP charts
that have viewing periods which end two months after the expiry date of the license.
If the charts are not updated regularly it will not complete the requirements for having
up-to-date charts. To view the permit status of a chart, click the [License] button on the
InstantAccess bar™ and then click the applicable "chart" tab ([ENC], [C-MAP] or [C-
MAP DL]).

The example below shows the status of ENC charts. The expiration date of each cell
appears in the [Expires] window.

Subscription warnings for RENC

If you have at least one subscription-type permit, the system will automatically warn
you about the expiration date of your subscription license, in the Permanent warning
box.

Note: If you change service provider for some reason, it is recommended that you
remove all the charts from this chart system before installing new charts of new ser-
vice provider.

7-15
7. HOW TO MANAGE CHARTS

7.13 How to Display Install/Update History

You can see a history of chart installations and updates. On the InstantAccess bar™,
click the [Log] and [Update Log] buttons followed by the [ENC] or [C-MAP] button. The
example below shows the install/update history for ENC charts.

You can filter the log with [Period Covered (UTC)]. Enter the period to display then
click the [Set Period] button. Click the [Clear Period] button to display all entries. The
[Refresh] button updates the list. [Print Text] prints hard copy of the history.

The [Find] button searches required text string as follows:

1. Click the [Find] button to show the [Find text] box.

Input box
Find
Enter text in box and
[Find] button appears.
2. Click the input box then enter the text to search.
3. Select the search direction with the [up] or [down] radio button.
4. Click the [Find] button. The first matching text is highlighted in yellow at the top of
the screen.
5. To continue the search click the [Find] button. To cancel the search, click the
[Cancel] button.

7-16
 7. HOW TO MANAGE CHARTS

7.14 Catalog of Chart Cells

A catalog is used to view graphical coverage of the charts stored in your SSD. Avail-
able charts are displayed using their limits of charts. Note that sometimes the real cov-
erage of the charts may be considerably less than the declared limits of it.

To display the catalog, get into the Chart maintenance mode then click the [Manage
Charts] button on the InstantAccess bar™. The [Filter] window lets you select what to
display. Check or uncheck items as appropriate.

Filter
window

13 14

1) [Chart Type]
[ENC]: Display ENC charts.
[ARCS]: Display ARCS charts (no use).
[C-MAP]: Display C-MAP charts.
2) [Availability]
Display available or unavailable charts.
3) [License]
[Valid]: Cell with valid license.
[Missing/Expired]: Cell with missing or expired license.
[Valid] + [Missing/Expired]: Display cell regardless of license.
Uncheck both: Hide all cells.
4) [Dynamic License]
Display DL or non-DL C-MAP charts.

7-17
7. HOW TO MANAGE CHARTS

5) [C-MAP Collections]
A collection is a pre-defined dataset, the contents of which can be defined by zone,
individual chart or any of those combinations. Applicable to C-MAP charts also.
6) [Official]
Display official or unofficial charts.
7) [Up-to-date]
Display charts which are or are not up to date.
8) [Purpose]
Display chart according to its purpose - [Overview], [General], [Coastal], [NtoM],
[Approach], [Harbour], [Berthing].
9) [Group]
See the next section for how to group charts.
10) [Route]
Show route or waypoints (you can also set the waypoint(s) as a start point or des-
tination point) within a route.
11) Chart boundary boxes
Define the area covered by a chart and are color-coded according license and per-
mit status.
12) [Line Color Legend]
The line color legend provides information about license validity.
Color Message
Green Chart is up-to-date.
Yellow Permit expired.
Orange Chart is not up-to-date
Purple Permit available, chart not installed.
Magenta Permit not available.
Blue Chart’s status is unknown.
Gray Chart is withdrawn or corrupted.
13) [Set Default]
Restore the filter window to default settings.
14) [Apply]
Apply the changes made to the filter box and show the new settings on the chart.
This button is only available after a change is made.

7-18
 7. HOW TO MANAGE CHARTS

7.14.1 How to group chart cells

You can define groups of like-format chart cells. This means you can collect related
charts, for example, all cells that cover a route from Liverpool to New York or all cells
available from a National Hydrographic Office.

You can make a group and define charts from the [Edit Group] dialog box.

How to make a new group of chart cells

1. In the Chart maintenance mode, click the [Manage Charts] button on the
InstantAccess bar™.
2. Click the [Edit] button in the [Filter] window to show the [Edit Group] dialog box.

Group Name:

3. Click the [New] button.

4. In the [Outside Group] window, click the box to the left of the chart cell you want
to add to the group to show a checkmark. (A context-sensitive menu with [Select
All] and [Deselect All] functions is available by right-clicking the box to the left of
[Name], in either window.)
5. After you have selected the cells to add to the group, click the [<<] button to move
the names of the selected cells to the [Inside Group] window. If you want to re-
move a chart from the group, select it then click the [>>] button.
6. Click the [Save] button.
7. Enter a name for the group, using the keyboard on the Control Unit or software
keyboard, then click the [OK] button.
8. Click the [Close] button to finish.

How to edit a group of chart cells

You can edit a group of chart cells from a group as follows:

1. In the Chart maintenance mode, click the [Manage Charts] button on the
InstantAccess bar™ to show the [Filter] window.
2. Click the [Edit] button.
3. Select the name of the group with the pull-down list at the item [Group Name].
4. In the [Inside Group] window, click the box to the left of the chart cell you want to
remove from the group to show a checkmark. (A context-sensitive menu with [Se-
lect All] and [Deselect All] functions is available by right-clicking the box to the left
of [Name].)
5. After you have selected the charts to remove to the group, click the [>>] button to
remove the selected charts cells from the group.
6. Click the [Save] button.
7. Click the [Close] button to finish.

7-19
7. HOW TO MANAGE CHARTS

How to delete a group of chart cells

You can delete group of chart cells as follows:

1. In the Chart maintenance mode, click the [Manage Charts] button on the
InstantAccess bar™ to show the [Filter] window.
2. Click the [Edit] button.
3. Select the name of the group with the pull-down list at the item [Group Name].
4. Click the [Remove] button.
5. Click the [OK] button.
6. Click the [Close] button to finish.

How to select the group to view

1. In the Chart maintenance mode, click the [Manage Charts] button on the
InstantAccess bar™ to show the [Filter] window.
2. Select the group to view from the pull-down list at [Group].
3. Click the [Close] button to finish.

7.14.2 How to view status of chart cells

The [Cell Status] dialog box shows the status of the chart cells stored in the system.
To show this dialog box, get into the Chart maintenance mode then click the [Cell Sta-
tus] button on the InstantAccess bar™.

• [Type]: Type of chart cell, ENC or C-MAP.

• [Chart Name]: Chart name
• [Data Server]: The name of the data server where the chart was downloaded from.
• [Edition/Issue Date]: Edition no. and issued date of the chart cell.
• [Update: Num/Date]: No. and date of the update of the chart cell.
• [Updated]: The update status for the selected cell. "up to date" is shown for cells that
are up-to-date, "not up to date" is shown for cells that are not up-to-date, "with-
drawn" is shown if a cell is canceled, "unknown" is shown if the cell is not delivered
as part of a data service and "broken" is shown if the cell is corrupted.
• [Status]:
• [up to date]: Cell is up-to-date.
• [not up to date]: Cell is not up-to-date.
• [not installed]: Cell is not installed.

7-20
 7. HOW TO MANAGE CHARTS

• [withdrawn]: Cell has been canceled.

• [unknown]: Cell is not delivered as part of a data server service (ex. unencrypted
ENC).
• [broken]: Cell is corrupted.

7.15 How to Open Charts

In the Chart maintenance mode, click the [Manage Charts] button on the
InstantAccess bar™ to display the dialog box shown below. Select the chart to open
then click the [Open Chart] button.

7.16 How to Print Chart List, Cell Status List

7.16.1 How to print the chart list

1. In the Chart maintenance mode, click the [Manage Charts] button on the
InstantAccess bar™ to show the [Manage Charts] dialog box.
2. Check the charts to print.
3. On the [Filter] window, check the information to print.

7-21
7. HOW TO MANAGE CHARTS

4. Click the [Print List] button to print. (If you have selected more than 30 charts, the
message "The number of page is 1. Do you want to continue?." appears. Click the
[OK] button to continue, or the [Cancel] button to escape.)

Example

Description of chart list printout

Item Description
[Ship Name] Name of ship
[IMO Number] Ship’s IMO number
[Call Sign] Ship’s call sign
[MMSI Number] Ship’s MMSI number
[Printing Date] Date list printed
[Data Location] Location of charts; normally [Internal].
[Filter] Settings of the items in the [Filter] window.
[Status Summary] [yes]: charts with yes status/total number of charts
[no]: charts with no status/total number of charts

7.16.2 How to show the cell status list

1. In the Chart maintenance mode, click the [Cell Status] button on the
InstantAccess bar™ to show the [Cell Status] dialog box.
2. On the [Filter] window, check the information to show.
3. Click the [Create Report] button to generate the report. A report for all cells shown
in the [Cell Status] dialog appears.
Note: If there are no cells shown in the [Cell Status] dialog box, the [Create Re-
port] button is not available.

7-22
 7. HOW TO MANAGE CHARTS

Example
4. To print the report, click the [Print Text] button.

Description of cell status printout

Item Description
[Ship Name] Name of ship
[IMO Number] Ship’s IMO number
[Call Sign] Ship’s call sign
[MMSI Number] Ship’s MMSI number
[Printing Date] Date list printed
[Content] Settings of the items in the [Filter] window.
[Full]: A full list of charts, based on the filter settings.
[Filtered for Route Plan]: Where a route is selected at the filter set-
tings, this indication appears with the route name.
[Status Summary] [up to date]: charts with "up to date" status/total number of charts
[not up to date]: charts with "not up to date" status/total number of
charts
[withdrawn]: charts with "withdrawn" status/total number of charts
[unknown]: charts with "unknown" status/total number of charts
[other]: charts with "other" status/total number of charts

7.17 How to Delete Charts

If you are going to delete all charts, turn off chart synchronization (see section 7.21)
and delete charts from each unit.

1. Click the [Manage Charts] button to show the [Manage Charts] dialog box.
2. Click the block to the left of the chart to remove, a checkmark appears. A context-
sensitive menu with [Select All] and [Deselect All] functions is available by right-
clicking the block to the left of [Type].
3. Click the [Delete Charts] button to delete the charts selected.
4. Reset the power.

7-23
7. HOW TO MANAGE CHARTS

7.18 How to Show Publishers Notes for ENC Charts

You should read the text file associated with each catalog, which you can view when
installing a chart from a medium. Click the [Note] button in the [Manage Charts] dialog
box. You can print a hard copy with the [Print Text] button.

7-24
 7. HOW TO MANAGE CHARTS

7.19 How to Find the Chart Type

The electronic chart system can display more than one ENC chart cell at a time. This
feature is called multi-cell display. If one ENC chart cell does not cover the whole dis-
play, the system opens more ENC chart cells for display, if appropriate cells for the
displayed area are available. The Own ship functions box shows information about
ENC chart cells displayed on the electronic chart display area. When automatic TM
reset is active, the information is displayed with reference to your ship's position. If TM
reset is OFF, the information is displayed with reference to current cursor position.

ENC info
appears here.

Chart type indication

No indication (Official ENC chart)
“Non-ENC data” (Unofficial ENC chart, indication in yellow)
“ENC data available” (Currently, RNC chart is in use, but
ENC material is available. Indication shown in yellow.)

7.20 How to Update ENC, C-MAP Charts Manually

Manual update may include deleting an already existing object, modifying a position
or other characteristics of an already existing object or inserting of a new object. In this
system, manual updates are stored in a common database.

Mariners cannot permanently remove any of the official objects from the chart display.
If a mariner needs to make obsolete any official objects which were entered manually,
he “deletes” them, using a diagonal “strike-through” line. Then, in practice, the deleted
objects are still visible, but the strike-through line on the object indicates it is a deleted
object.

However, a mariner can remove objects that he has manually inserted himself.

Note that the manual updates have no automatic connection to any automatic update
received later for charts. If a manual update itself became obsolete, because the offi-
cial chart has been updated to include the update defined as a manual update, the
mariner must himself delete the obsolete manual update in question.

The system records complete usage of manual updates. All deletions, modifications
and insertions are recorded and time stamped. If the mariner wishes to see what kind
of manual updates he had in the past, for example, two weeks ago, he uses Update
History to specify the relevant date range. For information on how to set Display date
and Update Review dates, see section 9.2.4.

Note 1: Do not manually update charts while charts are being synchronized. Wait until
synchronization is completed.
Note 2: When any chart is updated, all checked routes are reverted to unchecked sta-
tus. Use the [Check Route] button on the [Alert Parameters] page to re-check routes
before starting any voyage.

7-25
7. HOW TO MANAGE CHARTS

7.20.1 How to insert update symbols

A manual update symbol can be added as shown in the procedure below.

Note 1: If the system freezes when updating the drawing type [Area], reset the power.
Note 2: An update symbol that straddles the international date line cannot be edited.
In this case, insert the same symbol on each side of the line.
Note 3: Do not do manual updating during chart synchronizing. Do the updating after
the completion of synchronizing or do the updating where the chart is installed.
1. Go to the Voyage navigation mode.
2. Click the [Manual Update] button on the InstantAccess bar™ to open the [Manual
Update] dialog box.
3. Click the [Planning] tab.

4. Click the [Add] button.

Note: This window can also be shown from the con-
text-sensitive menu. Right-click the display area then
select [Manual Update] and [Add New].
5. Use the [Drawing Type] pull-down list to select draw-
ing type: [Point], [Line] or [Area].
6. Click desired object.
7. Put the cursor on the location where to insert the
symbol then left click. The [Manual Update] dialog
box shows:
- [Object]
- [Drawing Type]

8. You can add a comment related to a manual update object in the [Annotation] box.

7-26
 7. HOW TO MANAGE CHARTS

9. To add textual information to an attribute, select the attribute from the [Attributes]
window then add text in the [Edit Attribute’s Value] window.
The [Date end] factory default is set to three months from the date of insertion and
applies to all chart items. You can adjust the dates here.
10. Click the [Commit] button to add all selected objects to the chart.
Note 1: If there is no textual information entered in the [Annotations] window, a con-
firmation message appears when you click the [Confirm] button. Check that the infor-
mation is correct and click [Yes] or [No] as appropriate.
Note 2: A manual update object is displayed until the display until date entered for it
has passed. If the object remains on the screen after the display until date, do some
operation on the screen to refresh the screen to erase the object.

7.20.2 How to copy objects from an official chart and insert them
You can copy objects from an official chart and insert them as a manual update with
the following procedure:

1. Right-click the object you wish to copy to show the context-sensitive menu, the
click [Manual Update] and [Copy From Chart]. The Copy Chart dialog box ap-
pears.

2. Click the object to copy, then click [Copy]. The object is copied to the [Manual Up-
date] dialog box.
3. Referring to step 8 and step 9 in section 7.20.1, edit the object as required.
4. Click the [Commit] button to add the object to the chart.
Note: If there is no textual information entered in the [Annotations] window, a con-
firmation message appears when you click the [Confirm] button. Check that the
information is correct and click [Yes] or [No] as appropriate.

7.20.3 How to ignore chart objects

Manually entered update symbols cannot be deleted until the display until date arrives
or is changed. However, you can mark the symbol to indicate that it can be ignored.
1. Put the cursor on the symbol then right-click to show the context-sensitive menu.
2. Select [Manual Update] and [Delete]. Deleted symbol is
The symbol is marked with a diagonal line. marked with a
diagonal line

7-27
7. HOW TO MANAGE CHARTS

7.20.4 How to delete (hide) a chart object

You can hide a manually inserted chart object by doing the following:

1. Referring to step 1 and step 2 of section 7.20.1, show the [Manual Update] dialog
box.
2. Click the [List] tab.
3. Click the object to hide, then click the [Remove] button. The selected item is hid-
den from the chart display.

7.20.5 How to modify existing update symbols

The position, display until date and description of an update symbol can be modified.
A symbol that is marked as “deleted” cannot be modified.

1. Follow steps 1-2 in paragraph 7.20.1 to display the [Manual Update] dialog box.
2. Click the [List] tab.

3. Select the object to modify then click the [Modify] button. The [Planning] dialog
box appears.
4. Modify the object referring to steps 8-9 in paragraph 7.20.1.
Note: The annotation for all modified objects is reset to blank when the Modify but-
ton is clicked. Check and re-input the annotations as necessary.
5. Click the [Commit] button. A confirmation dialog appears. Click [Yes] or [No] as
appropriate.

7.20.6 How to review a chart object

You can review a chart object in order to see the object before any changes were
made. To review an object, do the following:

1. Follow steps 1-2 in paragraph 7.20.1 to display the [Manual Update] dialog box.
2. Click the [List] tab.
3. Select the object to review then click the [Review] button.
Manually updated objects appear with a thick line,
Objects under review
as shown in the figure to the right.
appear with a thick
Objects under review appear in the [Manual Update] line attached.
dialog box with the status "Review x" (x indicates the
state at which you are viewing the reviewed object). The object appears in a pre-
modified state, and with each press of the [Review] button, one modification is “re-
verted”.

7-28
 7. HOW TO MANAGE CHARTS

7.21 How to Synchronize Chart Data

This section shows you how to synchronize chart data between FMD-3xx0, FCR-2xx9
and FAR-3xx0 units, so that all units share the same chart data. Synchronization can
be done automatically or manually (see paragraph 7.21.2), however all units selected
for synchronization must be powered to complete the synchronization. Synchroniza-
tion includes the following actions:

• Synchronize public keys

• Synchronize chart permits and licenses
• Synchronize chart data
• Synchronize manual updates
Note 1: Before synchronizing chart data, confirm that all units selected for synchroni-
zation are powered. (Do not turn off a unit during synchronizing.) If a unit is turned off
during the synchronizing, do the following on the unit which contains the medium:
• Open the [Sync Status] dialog box then click the [Disable Sync] button to disable
synchronization. Power all units registered for synchronization, then click the [Urge
Sync] button on the [Sync Status] dialog box on the unit containing the media to
forcibly synchronize.
• Make a group of all the units currently powered, referring to paragraph 7.21.1, and
register the group with [Grouped with This Unit]. Reset the power on all units select-
ed for synchronization.

Note 2: C-MAP charts are not automatically synchronized. C-MAP charts are only
synchronized immediately after installing or updating the C-MAP database. If the sys-
tem has several FCRs or FMDs, make a group of associated units before you install
C-MAP charts.

7.21.1 How to select the units to synchronize

Do as follows to select the units to synchronize.

1. Get into the Chart maintenance mode. On the InstantAccess bar™, click [System]
followed by [Sync Config] to show the [Sync Config] dialog box.

CRA002
CRA003
CRA004

[Grouped with This Unit]: This window shows the units currently selected for syn-
chronization.
[Not Synchronize with This Unit]: This windows shows the units not selected for
synchronization.
2. To select a unit for synchronization: Put a checkmark next to the unit’s name
in the [Not Synchronize with This Unit] window then click the [<<] button. That

7-29
7. HOW TO MANAGE CHARTS

unit’s name is moved to the [Grouped with This Unit] window.

To deselect a unit from synchronization: Put a checkmark next to the unit’s
name in the [Grouped with This Unit] window then click the [>>] button. That unit’s
name is moved to the [Not Synchronize with This Unit] window.
To deselect all units, click the [Reset All] button.
3. Click the [Save] button to finish.
4. Restart the power on applicable units to apply synchronization configuration
changes.

7.21.2 How to check synchronization status

You can check chart synchronization status on the [Sync Status] dialog box. Chart
synchronization operations also are available from this dialog box. Normally, chart
synchronization is done automatically, according to the sync settings on the [Sync
Config] dialog box. Use the [Sync Status] dialog box to manually synchronize chart
data when there is network failure, for example.

Get into the Chart maintenance mode. On the InstantAccess bar™, click [System] fol-
lowed by [Sync Status] to show the [Sync Status] dialog box.

[Current Status]: Displays current synchronization status. The table below shows all
the synchronization status messages.

Sync status Meaning

[disabled] Synchronization is disabled.
[must receive] This chart radar will receive chart data from another FMD-3xx0,
FCR-2xx9 or FAR-3xx0 series.
[must send] This chart radar will send chart data to another FMD-3xx0, FCR-
2xx9 or FAR-3xx0 series.
[none] No synchronization task ready.
[Update] button: Click this button to update [Current Status].

[Enable Sync] button: Enables synchronization. The confirmation message "Attention:

Do you want to enable sync?" appears. Click the [OK] button to enable synchroniza-
tion. Synchronization is always enabled when chart radar starts. A progress bar indi-
cates progress in synchronization. The bar is erased within five minutes after
completion of synchronization.

[Disable Sync] button: Disables synchronization function temporarily. Use this feature
to enable chart administration in case of network failure, for example. The confirmation
message "Attention: Do you want to disable sync?" appears. Click the [OK] button to
temporarily disable synchronization.

7-30
 7. HOW TO MANAGE CHARTS

Note 1: In normal operation do not disable synchronization. If you accidentally disable

synchronization, try to synchronize by clicking the [Enable Sync] button. If that does
not work, reset the power of all units selected for synchronization then click the [Urge
Sync] button to synchronize.
Note 2: With synchronization disabled, the message "Synchronization disabled" may
appear twice when installing a license. This does not affect installation of a license.
[Urge Sync] button: Does immediate synchronization. The confirmation message "At-
tention: Chart data in other units will be overwritten by this unit. Do you wish to contin-
ue?" appears. Click the [OK] button to synchronize. If synchronization is not
successful, restart applicable units and try again.

[Reset Status] button: Reset synchronization status to recover from synchronization

status conflict. The confirmation message "Attention: Do you want to reset sync sta-
tus? This unit may be synchronized from the other unit." appears. Click the [OK] button
to reset.

7.21.3 Manual updates and synchronization

If you are synchronizing multiple units (FMD-3x00, FCR-2xx9 or FAR-3xx0) while
manual updating is being done on one of the units, the message "File not found" may
appear, meaning the manual update data was deleted. If this occurs, follow the pro-
cedure below to synchronize the FAR-3xx0 units. The procedure uses CRA001 and
CRA002 as an example.

1. At the CRA001, get into the Chart maintenance mode, then click [System] and
[Sync Config] on the InstantAccess bar™.
2. Add CRA002 to [Grouped with This Unit] then click the [Save] button.
3. Reset the power on the CRA001 and CRA002.
4. At the CRA001, get into the Chart maintenance mode, then click the [System] and
[Sync Status] buttons on InstantAccess bar™ to show the [Sync Status] dialog
box.
5. Click the [Urge Sync] button to synchronize charts between CRA001 and
CRA002.
6. To confirm synchronization, do as follows:
1) At the CRA001, get into the Voyage navigation mode, then click the [Manual
Update] button on the InstantAccess bar™ to open the [Manual Update] dialog
box.
2) Click the [Planning] tab followed by the [Add] button.
3) Insert an object at the CRA001.
4) At the CRA002, move the cursor or change the chart scale. Confirm that the
chart is updated.

7-31
7. HOW TO MANAGE CHARTS

7.22 How to Reconvert All SENC Charts

If you unintentionally installed outdated SENC charts, you can reconvert those charts
to the latest SENC charts. Click the [System] and [Reconvert] buttons on the
InstantAccess bar™ to reconvert all your SENC charts.

Note: All manual updates are removed in the reconversion.

7-32
8. HOW TO CONTROL CHART
OBJECTS
This chapter provides the information necessary for controlling chart features.

8.1 How to Browse Your Charts

You can view your charts using different positions and different scales. The basic tools
for browsing charts are the RANGE key, chart offcenter, and scroll.

RANGE - and RANGE + change the chart scale. (The scrollwheel also can change
the chart scale. Spin to change.) If true motion reset is active, ZOOM IN and ZOOM
OUT keep the relative position of your ship with respect to the display. If true motion
reset is off, ZOOM IN and ZOOM OUT keep the relative position pointed by the cursor
with respect to the display. The system automatically selects next larger or smaller
scale. If a chart with larger compilation scale is available at your current viewing posi-
tion, the message "Larger scale ENC available" appears.

The own ship position can be easily relocated to the screen center in the Navigation
voyage and Navigation planning modes. Further, in the Navigation voyage mode, the
own ship position can be put at the cursor position.

To move the own ship mark to the screen center, put the cursor in the chart area
and right-click [Ship on center]. To move the own ship mark to a location, right-click
the position on the chart where to put the own ship mark then right-click [Ship off cen-
ter]. ([Ship off center] is not available in the Voyage planning mode.)

To scroll your chart, simply drag and drop.

8.2 How to Control Visibility of Chart Objects

The [Chart Display] menu has several pages of chart features that you may show or
hide as appropriate. To display this menu, click the [DISP], [SET] and [Chart DISP]
buttons on the InstantAccess bar™.

8.2.1 How to set value for shallow contour, safety depth, safety con-
tour and deep contour
You can set values for shallow contour, safety depth, safety contour and deep contour,
on the [Chart Alert] dialog box (sequence: [DISP], [SET], [Chart Alert]). Colors used
for depth presentation on the electronic chart are controlled by setting values for shal-
low contour, safety depth, safety contour and deep contour. Soundings on the elec-
tronic chart, which are equal to or less than the value of safety depth, are highlighted.
See the illustrations on the next page for multi-color presentation and two-color pre-
sentation. Selection of multi- and two-color presentations can be done with [Four
Shades] on the [General] page of the [Chart Display] menu ([DISP][Chart Dis-
play][General]). Check the box for multicolor; uncheck the box for two color.

Note: The shallow contour cannot be set higher than the safety contour.

8-1
8. HOW TO CONTROL CHART OBJECTS

MULTI-COLOR presentation

Chart zero

Shallow contour
Safety contour (input value)
Safety contour (exisiting in ENC)

Deep contour

Non-navigable area Navigable area

In the multi-color presentation four colors are used for depths. If the value entered as
the safety contour does not exist in the electronic chart, the system automatically se-
lects the next available deeper depth contour as the safety contour. For example, the
input value is 8 m, but there is no 8 m depth contour in the electronic chart. Then, the
system automatically selects the next available deeper depth contour (10 m) as the
safety contour. The depth contour value of 10 m is used as the safety contour in the
electronic chart.

Shallow contour shows visual color change inside an unsafe water area. An unsafe
water area is all areas shallower than the safety contour. Set the value for the shallow
contour less than the value of the safety contour.

TWO-COLOR presentation

Chart zero

Shallow contour
Safety contour (input value)
Safety contour (exisiting in ENC)

Deep contour

Non-navigable area Navigable area

In the two-color presentation, unsafe water is shown in blue and safe water is shown
in white. The safety contour is used to qualify unsafe water (depth shallower than safe-
ty contour) and safe water (depths deeper than safety contour).

If the value entered as the safety contour does not exist in the electronic chart, the sys-
tem automatically selects the next deeper available depth contour as the safety con-
tour, the same as with the multi-color presentation.

8-2
 8. HOW TO CONTROL CHART OBJECTS

8.2.2 Basic Setting menu

To display this menu, click [DISP], [SET] and [Basic Setting] on the InstantAccess
bar™.

[Light Popup]: Show or hide light sectors informa-

Light sector center
tion. [ON] provides light sector information (includ-
ing length of arc of visibility) when the cursor is put
on a light or light sector.
Light house info

[Attributes Display]: Set how to show attributes in a Pick Report. The options are:
• [Text Box]

• [List]

[TM Reset]: In the true motion mode, own ship moves until it reaches the true motion
reset borderline (set here), and then it jumps back to an opposite position on screen
based on its course. Set the limit for TM reset (in percentage). For example, "80" resets
the position when the own ship marker is at a location which is 80% of the range.

8-3
8. HOW TO CONTROL CHART OBJECTS

8.2.3 Chart Display menu

To access the [Chart Display] menu and its pages, click [DISP], [SET] and [Chart　
DISP] on the InstantAccess bar™. then select [General], [Standard], [Other], [Text], or
[NtoM] page as appropriate.

To access the [Chart Display] menu and its pages, click [DISP], [SET] and [Chart
DISP] on the InstantAccess bar™ then select [General], [Standard], [Other], [Text], or
[NtoM] page as appropriate.

General page
This page turns chart features on (checkbox checked) or off.

Symbol: Determines how to display chart symbols.

- Paper Chart: Symbols displayed the same as the conventional paper chart symbols
- Simplified: Symbols displayed in simplified style, and the sea is displayed in color.

Boundaries: Determines how to show boundary lines of chart objects.

- Plain: Boundary line shown with solid and dashed lines.
- Symbolized: Symbol is attached to the line according to the purpose of the line.

Scale MIN: Set the minimum chart scale to display chart objects. When the chart scale
is lower than set here, the chart objects will not be displayed.

8-4
 8. HOW TO CONTROL CHART OBJECTS

Highlight Date Dependent: Put a highlight mark on the

chart object which carries a date dependent attribute.

Highlight INFO, Highlight Document: Put a highlight Highlight mark

mark on a chart object that has information or document (date dependent)
attribute.
Highlight mark
(document)

Standard page
The [Standard] page contains chart features defined by IMO that comprise a standard
display.

Other page
The [Standard] page contains chart features not contained in IMO standard display.

Text page
Show or hide text information on the chart.

NtoM page
Show or hide the Notice to Mariners data.

Note: To use the “pick report” feature, which provides information for cursor-chosen
chart feature, the associated chart feature must be turned on from the [General],
[Standard], [Other], [Text], or [NtoM] page.

8-5
8. HOW TO CONTROL CHART OBJECTS

8.2.4 Display base

A subset of chart features is called the “display base”. As required by IMO, these fea-
tures cannot be made invisible. To get the display base, click the [STD DISP] button
on the status bar.

The display base consists of the following chart features:

• Coastline (high water)

• Own ship's safety contour, which is selected by the user
• Indication of isolated underwater dangers of depths less than the safety contour that
lie within the safe waters defined by the safety contour
• Indication of isolated dangers that lie within the safe water defined by the safety con-
tour such as bridges, overhead wires, etc., and including buoys and beacons wheth-
er or not these are being used as aids to navigation.
• Traffic routine systems
• Scale, range, orientation and operating mode
• Units of depth and height

8.3 How to Control Visibility of Symbols, Features

Control of symbols and features is divided into five pages in the [Symbol Display]
menu, which you can access by clicking the [DISP], [SET] and [Symbol DISP] buttons
on the InstantAccess bar™.
[General] page: Controls own ship and target related items.
[Tracking] page: Controls past tracks and some other features.
[Route] page: Controls planned and monitored route.
[Mariner] page: Controls user charts.
[Targets] page: Controls TT and AIS targets.

The user can define settings for chart details that are displayed over the chart area.

8.3.1 General page

[Ship, AIS Outlines]

[Ship Outlines]: Select [OFF] or [ON] to show minimized or scaled symbol, respective-
ly.
[AIS Outlines]: Select [OFF] or [ON] to show AIS targets in same size or scaled sym-
bol, respectively.

8-6
 8. HOW TO CONTROL CHART OBJECTS

[True outlines shown if]: If the length or width of the own ship mark is greater than 3
mm, the own ship mark is shown with the true scale symbol. Select [Length] or [Beam
width].

The right illustration in the figure below shows own ship mark and AIS targets with
scaled symbols. The left illustrations shows own ship mark and AIS targets with point
symbol. AIS targets are displayed as true scale symbol if the displayed chart scale is
larger than set with "Outlines" limit (length>3 mm) on the [General] page in the [Sym-
bol Display] menu and your own ship are displayed as true symbol scale if the size of
the true scale symbol is larger than 3 mm on the chart display.

[Velocity Vectors]
[Ship Vectors]: Show or hide own ship vector.
[Target Vectors]: Show or hide target vectors.
[Style]: Select the vector style. The [std ECDIS] vector is a speed-referenced vector
symbol. [Conventional] is a simplified symbol.
[Time Increments]: Check to show ticks of velocity vector. This controls both own ship
and targets ticks. If ticks are too tightly spaced, they will be automatically removed
from the display, until spacing between ticks is sufficient to distinguish them separate-
ly. This depends on display scale and speed of vessel and target.
[Path Predictor]: Check to show the path predictor. The path predictor is a single
dashed line originating at the CCRP and drawn at a length to represent the distance
and path own ship will travel over the ground in the user-selected time interval for own
ship speed vector.
[Radar Antenna]: Check to mark position of radar antenna (with "x”).

8-7
8. HOW TO CONTROL CHART OBJECTS

8.3.2 Tracking page

[Own Ship Past Tracks]

[CCRP]: Check to plot CCRP position.
[Primary]: Check to plot own ship's past track with position fed from sensor with high-
est priority.
[Secondary]: Check to plot own ship's past track with position fed from sensor with
second highest priority.
[Pivot]: Check to plot own ship's track with own ship’s pivot position as reference.
[Style]: Select time stamp position for past track (indicated by [Tick] or [Point]).
[Length]: Select length of past track.
[Labels]: Select label interval.

[Events]
Events marks are based on the [Voyage] log records.

[User Events]: Display event symbols on the chart. User events are recorded by click-
ing [Log], [Event Log] and [User Event] on the InstantAccess bar™.
[Auto Events]: Display automatically entered event symbols, where the system has re-
corded an event based on conditions you have set. Auto events are recorded every 1-
4 hours.
[Position Events]: Display the latitude and longitude of an event, recorded by clicking
[Log], [Event Log] and [POSN Event] on the InstantAccess bar™.

Note 1: A MOB event is visible always.

Note 2: You can select the period of time to display event marks, from the [Show] list
box. [Newer than 12 hours], [Newer than 24 hours], [Newer than 1 week], [Newer than
2 weeks], [Newer than 1 month], [Newer than 3 months], or [All].

8-8
 8. HOW TO CONTROL CHART OBJECTS

8.3.3 Route page

The [Route] page selects the route parts of the monitored and planned routes to show
on the chart.

[XTD Limit]: The distance from the

centerline to one side of the nav lane.
[Safety Margin]: The distance from
one side of the channel limit to the
safety margin distance.
[Leg Marks]: Indications of waypoint
no. and range and bearing to next
waypoint. ([True]: Reference to
North; [Relative]: Reference to head-
ing)
[Wheel Over Line]: The location
where the ship turns toward new
course.

Safety
margin

㼃㻼㼀㻟

XTD
Wheel over limit
line*

WPT1 WPT2
124.8° 87.9°
Leg mark
0.8NM 1.2NM

* Wheel over line (WOL)

Direction of Direction of
movement WOL movement WOL

WOL for next section Vertical WOL for the current interval

Case 1: Normal Case 2: Angle for next section is narrow (Not 20 deg)

8-9
8. HOW TO CONTROL CHART OBJECTS

8.3.4 Mariner page

[User chart]
[Labels]: Check to show labels on user charts.
[Lines]: Check to show lines on user charts.
[Clearing Lines]: Check to show clearing lines (for marking dangerous areas) on user
charts.
[Tidals]: Check to show symbols and tidals on user charts.
[Areas]: Check to show areas on the user charts.
[Circles]: Check to show circles on user charts.
[Density]: Set the degree of transparency for the user chart objects. Color fill for the
areas can be selected as transparent from 25%, 50%, 75% and as [No color fill]. If [No
color fill] is selected, only the boundaries of the areas are visible.
[Display user chart symbol name]: Check to display the name entered for a user chart
symbol in the [Name] column of the [User Chart] dialog box. Effective for the circle and
area symbols only. Names are shown in both the Voyage planning and Voyage navi-
gation modes. See the figure below for examples.

Reef
Wreck

Name as entered in [Name] column.

[NAVTEX]: Available only when a Navtex receiver is enabled at installation. Check to

put the Navtex symbol ( MSI ) at the coordinates received in a Navtex message. De-
pending on the information received, the symbols appears as shown in the figure on
the following page.

8-10
 8. HOW TO CONTROL CHART OBJECTS

Point(s) Circle(s) Area(s)

Line(s)

Right-click the MSI mark to show the context-sensitive menu, Ship off center
then click [NAVTEX MSG] to show the [NAVTEX] page of the Pick Report
Chart Legend
Message dialog box (see section 17.2.1).
Manual Update
New Divider
8.3.5 Targets page NAVTEX MSG

[Color]: Select color of target (TT and AIS, common) from the list box.[AtoN Symbol Col-
or]: Select the color for AtoN symbols.
[TT Size]: Select symbol size for tracked targets, [Standard] or [Small].
[AIS ROT TAG Limit]: ROT (°/min.), limit to display AIS target with curved speed vector.
(Source of ROT must be ROT gyro on target vessel.)
[TT Label]: Show or hide the TT label (target no.).
[AIS Label]: Show or hide the AIS label (ship’s name).
[TT Pop-up INFO]: Show or hide the TT pop-up, which is shown by placing the cursor
on a TT.
[AIS Pop-up INFO]: Show or hide the AIS pop-up, which is shown by placing the cursor
on an AIS target.
TT pop-up info TT(04) AIS pop-up info AIS_CLASS...
COG: 235.0°T COG: 324.0°T
SOG: 6.1kn SOG: 8.1kn
CPA: 0.23NM CPA: 0.12NM
TCPA: -10:18 TCPA: -19:18

[Past Position]
[TT/AIS Points]: Select the number of TT/AIS past position points to display.
[Style]: Select style of presentation of target's past position.

8-11
8. HOW TO CONTROL CHART OBJECTS

8.4 Control of Predefined IMO Chart Display Set-

tings
There are three sets of predefined chart display settings that can be used to display
charts with certain chart features. The predefined chart display settings are

• [IMO BASE]
• [IMO STD] (STANDARD)
• [IMO ALL]
When the chart settings are changed. the following settings changes are also applied
to each page of the [Chart Display] menu.

[Chart Display] menu

IMO Base IMO Standard IMO All
[General] page All items are un- All items are un- All items are un-
checked. checked. checked.
[Standard] page All items are un- All items are All items are
checked. checked. checked.
[Other] page All items are un- All items are un- All items are
checked. checked. checked.
[Text] page All items are un- All items are un- All items are un-
checked. checked. checked.
[NtoM] page All items are All items are All items are
checked. checked. checked.
You can change the chart display setting in use [Chart database] button
with the [Chart database] button on the Status
bar.

8-12
9. VECTOR (S57) CHARTS
Theoretically a chart can be coded for use on a computer as a vector chart. Vector-
coded charts are coded using a variety of techniques. One technique is called S57ed3
and it has been chosen by IMO as the only alternative for SOLAS compliant electronic
charts. If an S57ed3-coded chart is published by a government-authorized Hydro-
graphic Office, then it is called "ENC". You can read more about ENC and related legal
issues in this chapter. Hereafter, all references to vector chart material are referred to
as "S57 charts" regardless of their source.

Sometimes you may wish to manually add Notices to Mariners or Navtex warnings into
your S57 charts. This is called "manual updates". Also, manual updates are valid for
all scales so that you don't need to repeat them for charts published in different scales
from the same area.

9.1 Introduction to S57 Charts

An ENC chart is encrypted to prevent unauthorized use so the user needs a permit to
view the ENC. This permit could be entered manually from the Control Unit, loaded
from a USB flash memory.

Any new ENC must be loaded into the system. Some parts of the charts may be date
dependent, i.e., they are visible after a set date or they are visible only for a limited
period, etc. In the electronic chart system, you control all date-dependent objects with
Display date and Update Review dates (see section 9.2.2 for how to set these dates).
In the paper chart world, the Preliminary and Temporary Notices to Mariners represent
the date dependency described above for S57 charts.

An important part of ENCs are the updates. Hydrographic Offices can issue two kinds
of updates:

1. Incremental updates, which are small additions to original base cells.

2. Reissues and new editions, which are complete replacements of previous base
cells and their updates.
All updates are date stamped and they may also contain date-dependent parts. You
control usage of updates in the electronic chart system from Display date and Update
Review dates. Using Display date and Update Review dates, you can view your charts
correctly drawn on any date in the past or in the future.

Chart material will be stored in media such as DVD ROMs, CD ROMs and USB flash
memory or electronically through from LAN (Local Area Network) in which it could
have arrived in DVD ROMs, CD ROMs or USB flash memories. Such material can
contain only basic cells, cells and updates or only updates. The electronic chart sys-
tem contains as standard the software required to access a medium.

Each S57 chart may contain additional links to textual descriptions or pictures, besides
the chart itself. Typically additional textual descriptions and pictures contain important
sailing directions, tidal tables and other traditional paper chart features that do not
have any other method to be included into the S57 chart. This system copies these
textual descriptions and pictures into its SSD so the user may cursor-pick them for
viewing purposes.

9-1
9. VECTOR (S57) CHARTS

9.1.1 Definitions of terms

Cell A cell is a geographical area containing ENC data and it is the smallest di-
vision of ENC data. Each cell has a separate unique name. Hydrographic
Offices divide their responsibility area by the cells that they publish.
S57 chart A database, standardized as to content, structure and format, is issued for
use with this system without any authority of government-authorized Hydro-
graphic Office.
ENC A database, standardized as to content, structure and format, is issued for
use with this system on the authority of government-authorized Hydro-
graphic Offices. The ENC contains all the chart information necessary for
safe navigation and may contain supplementary information in addition to
that contained in the paper chart (e.g., sailing directions) that may be con-
sidered necessary for safe navigation. The name of the coding standard for
ENC is S57ed3.
SENC A database resulting from the transformation of the ENC by the system for
appropriate use, updates to the ENC by appropriate means, and other data
added by the mariner. It is this database that is actually accessed by the
system for display and other navigational functions. The SENC may also
contain information from other sources.

9.1.2 Chart legend for S57 charts

The chart legend provides various data about the chart currently displayed. To find
info for current position, turn on TM reset, then click the [Chart INFO] button on the
InstantAccess bar™ followed by the [Chart Legend] button, in the Voyage navigation
mode. To find info for a specific location, put the cursor on the location then right-click
and select [Chart Legend]. Click the [Close] button to close the display.

This system is capable of showing more than one S57 chart at a time. This feature is
called the multi-chart display. If one S57 chart does not cover the whole display, the
system will open more S57 chart cells for display, if appropriate cells for the displayed
area are available. The chart legend shows information about S57 charts displayed on
the electronic chart display area.

[Name]: Name of chart.

[Type]: Type of chart.
[Edition]: Edition number of the chart.
[Edition Date]: Date the edition was published.
[Update Number]: Update number.
[Update Date]: Date of update.
[Compilation Scale]: The scale of the original paper chart is shown here.

9-2
 9. VECTOR (S57) CHARTS

[Projection]: Projection of current chart.

[Horizontal Datum]: Horizontal datum used with current chart.
[Sounding Datum]: Datum used to create sounding data.
[Vertical Datum]: Vertical datum used with current chart.
[Units of Depth]: Unit of depth used with current chart.
[Units of Height]: Unit of measurement used to measure height of objects above sea
level.
[Magnetic Variation]: Amount of magnetic variation. A positive value indicates a
change in an easterly direction and a negative value indicates a change in a westerly
direction.
[Quality Indication]: Quantitative estimate of the accuracy of chart features, given by
the chart producer.

9.1.3 Permanent warnings for S57 charts

Permanent warnings help you keep the installed S57 charts up-to-date and these are
shown at the bottom of the screen. Permanent warnings appear if the system detects
a condition that may cause a chart to be not up-to-date.

Message Meaning, Remedy

Display Not Real Time Display date is not the current date. Set
Display date and Update Review date to
the current date.
No connection to dongle The dongle is not inserted or not recog-
nized. Insert the dongle to erase the mes-
sage.
Not up to date (SSE 27): XXXXXXXX At least one chart is not up to date. Load
(Chart name appears at location of Xs.) updated material.
Permit expired (SSE 25): XXXXXXXX You have an expired permit for a chart. Re-
(Chart name appears at location of Xs.) move the chart or renew subscription for
the permit.
Note: The system can assist in keeping RENC-received charts up-to-date. For charts
that have been loaded from sources other than an RENC, the system is unable to
know the exact up-to-date situation.

9-3
9. VECTOR (S57) CHARTS

9.2 Chart Viewing Dates and Seasonal Features of

the S57 Chart

9.2.1 Introduction
S57 charts contain date-dependent features. Updating in general, including reissues,
new editions and updates, creates date dependency. In addition to the obvious date
dependency, some features of the S57 charts create additional date dependency.
These features include "Date Start", "Date End", "Seasonal date start" and "Seasonal
date end". Hydrographic Offices use these features to publish Temporary and Prelim-
inary Notices to Mariners, as their paper chart equivalent updates are called. "Season-
al date start" and "Seasonal date end" are used for seasonal chart features such as
summer-only sea marks, seasonal yacht race areas, etc.

You can efficiently use chart viewing date dependency in order to use the valid data
for any given date applicable for your navigation or planning purposes. For example,
you can check for existence of changes and restrictions weeks before they became
valid. Date dependency is a part of the new electronic method to keep your chart up-
to-date and valid for your intended use. Normally you should set Display date and Up-
date Review once per week to keep your chart up-to-date.

9.2.2 How to set Display date and Update Review dates

Click the [Chart INFO] and [Viewing Dates] button on the InstantAccess bar™ to show
the [Viewing Date] dialog box. Set desired dates then click the [Close] button.

9.2.3 About chart viewing date dependency of S57 standard

How the issue date of updates changes the visibility of the changes
Study the example below to understand the behavior of updates relative to date.

Update 3
Update 2
Update 1
Base cell

Date
1 2 3 4

9-4
 9. VECTOR (S57) CHARTS

The figure above shows how updates are dependent Chart viewing dates set in Dis-
play/Update Review date settings by user. Actions 1 to 4 are as follows:

1. Base cell including three updates is converted into SENC. Display Date is set as
current date of the system.
2. The date in which update 1 was issued. [Display Date] must be set to correct date
in order to see the chart with update 1.
3. The date in which update 2 was issued. [Display Date] must be set to correct date
in order to see the chart with update 1 and update 2.
4. The date in which update 3 was issued. [Display Date] must be set to correct date
in order to see the chart with update 1, update 2 and update 3.
Note 1: In order to display charts with correct updated situation, always use current
date during your voyage. If your voyage lasts more than one week, set current date at
least once per week during your voyage.
Note 2: In order to display charts with correct updated situation during route planning,
always use planned date of each waypoint to check your plan.

9.2.4 How to approve and highlight S57 chart updates

You can highlight updated data by setting a date (or date period) and creating a report.

1. On the InstantAccess bar™, click the [Chart INFO] and [Viewing Dates] button.
The [Viewing Date] dialog box appears.
2. In the [Update Review] column, check the [Date Range] box. The [Start Date] and
[End Date] buttons become active and selectable.

Date buttons active

and selectable
Object Report
button

3. Click the [Start Date] button to show the [Set date] dialog box.
4. Select the start date, then click [OK].
5. Click the [End Date] button to show the [Set date] dialog box.
6. Select the end date, then click [OK].
7. Click [Object Report]. The [Object Update Review] dialog appears.

9-5
9. VECTOR (S57) CHARTS

8. Select the items to highlight, then click the [View] button.

Items selected here appear with an orange highlight mark.
9. To remove highlights, set the [Update Review] column of the [Viewing Dates] di-
alog box to [OFF].
10. Click the [Close] button on the [Viewing Dates] dialog box to close the dialog box-
es.

9.3 Symbology Used in S57 Charts

You can familiarize yourself with the symbology used by browsing IHO Chart 1, which
is included in this system. Note that it behaves as any S57 chart and it follows your
selections. See section 8.2.

1. Click the [Chart INFO] and [Chart 1] buttons on the InstantAccess bar™ to show
to the [ECDIS Chart 1] menu, shown below.
2. Click a chart feature to show detailed information about the feature. Click [Over-
view] to show a compilation of all features, shown below.

New symbols
Color diagram

[ECDIS Chart 1] menu

9.3.1 Presentation library used for S57 chart features

The system uses the official IHO presentation library to draw S57 charts. The presen-
tation library is replaceable, but this feature is only intended to be used by a qualified
technician and type approval authorities.

When this manual was published the official presentation library was "pslb04_0.dai",
known as "Official IHO presentation library for system Ed 4".

9-6
 9. VECTOR (S57) CHARTS

9.4 How to Find Information About S57 Chart

Objects
The ability to cursor-pick an object to find additional information about the object is an
important function of the system. However, an unprocessed cursor pick, which does
not discriminate or interpret and merely dumps on the interface panel all the informa-
tion available at that point on the display, will normally result in pages of unsorted and
barely intelligible attribute information.

Do the following to find information about a chart object.

1. Get into the Voyage navigation mode or Voyage planning mode then right-click an
object to show the context-sensitive menu.
Ship off center
Pick Report
Chart Legend
Manual Update
New Divider
2. Click [Pick Report] to show the [Select Object] dialog box.

Note: The [Include Danger Objects] check box appears when there is at least one
dangerous object. To show dangerous objects in the [Select Object] dialog box,
check this box (after the box is check it becomes unselectable).
3. Click the object for which you want to know its details then click the [Select] button.
Note: Objects selected from the Select Object dialog box are highlighted in or-
ange color and are shown with a broken box( ).

Depending on the item selected,

these indications may be hidden.

• [Description] window: Click an attribute to view its description in this box.

• [All INFO]: Check the [All INFO] box to show all information in the [Attributes]
window. (The [All INFO] box becomes unselectable when checked.)
• [Connected Object]: Objects which are connected to the selected object are
shown in the drop-down list. Select an object from the list to show its details.

9-7
9. VECTOR (S57) CHARTS

Note 1: If another window is active, the preview window may be partially obscured
by that window. Move the window to display the entire preview.
Note 2: The [Attributes] window of the [Chart Object] dialog box changes accord-
ing to the settings for [Attributes Display] in the [Basic Settings] menu (see
section 8.2.2).

9.5 Admiralty Information Overlay (AIO)

The Admiralty Information Overlay includes all Admiralty Temporary and Preliminary
Notices to Mariners (T&P NMs) and provides additional navigationally significant in-
formation from UKHO's ENC validation programme. The AIO is displayed as a single
layer on top of the basic ENC and is available free of charge as part of the Admiralty
S57 Chart Service and within Admiralty Value Added Resellers' services.

The AIO has been developed to ensure mariners can simply view the information they
need - in addition to the standard chart - to navigate safely and compliantly. By clearly
showing where important Temporary or Preliminary changes may impact a voyage,
the Admiralty Information Overlay will give seafarers the same consistent picture of
the maritime environment on their charts as they have always had.

The AIO license is free of charge for AVCS license holders.

9.5.1 Installation
Installation is the same as that for the ENC chart. See section 7.2.

9.5.2 How to display the AIO

Click the [DISP], [NtoM] and [ALL] buttons to show the AIO. To hide the AIO, click the
[DISP], [NtoM] and [OFF] buttons.

The area(s) that contain temporary or preliminary changes are marked with a hatched
red rectangle.

9-8
 9. VECTOR (S57) CHARTS

9.5.3 Catalog of AIO cells

A catalog of AIO cells is maintained in the [Manage Charts] dialog box. To show this
box, get into the Chart maintenance mode then click the [Manage Charts] button on
the InstantAccess bar™. The AIO cell is GB800001.

9.5.4 How to find AIO chart object information

Do the following to find chart object information contained in the AIO.

1. Right click a red hatched area in the chart area, then select [Pick Report] to show
the [Select Object] dialog box.

9-9
9. VECTOR (S57) CHARTS

2. Click [Preliminary Notice] in the dialog box to show the [Chart object] dialog box.

The [Chart object] dialog box shows the following information:

• Cell (name)
• Drawing type (Preliminary Notice, Temporary Notice)
• Category (AIO)
• Positional accuracy
• Quality of position
• The preview box provides a scaled-down image of the area selected. Click the im-
age to enlarge it.
• The [Attribute] window shows the attributes for the AIO area selected. To find infor-
mation about an attribute, click it to show its information in the [Description] box.
Information: Description of area (for example, danger area).
Object name: Object name (number)
Textual description: Full text of the Notice to Mariners (NtoM)
ENC affected: ENC affected by the NtoM
Included in updates: Date this item was updated ([Preliminary Notice] items only)
• [All INFO] checkbox: Check the box to show [Source indication] at the bottom of the
[Attribute] window. (The [All INFO] box becomes unselectable when checked.)
Note: The [Attributes] window of the [Chart Object] dialog box changes according to
the settings for [Attributes Display] in the [Basic Settings] menu (see section 8.2.2).

9-10
 9. VECTOR (S57) CHARTS

9.5.5 How to select the information to display

Select what type of notices to display as follows:

1. Click the [DISP], [SET] and [Chart DISP] buttons on the InstantAccess bar™.
2. Click the [NtoM] tab.

3. In the [AIO] window, check or uncheck items as appropriate.

4. Click the [Save] button to save settings then click the [Close] button to close the
menu.

9-11
9. VECTOR (S57) CHARTS

This page is intentionally left blank.

9-12
10. C-MAP BY JEPESSEN CHARTS
Your chart system has the capability of using and displaying the latest C-MAP world-
wide vector chart database. These charts are fully compliant with the latest IHO S-57
3.1 specifications.

In order to prepare the system for use with the C-MAP database, there are a number
of things that must be done.

The descriptions in this chapter apply to C-MAP charts. CM-93/2 charts are not sup-
ported.)

10.1 How to Register the System at C-MAP

Your system has the capability to use the C-MAP database. To do so an gemalco eTo-
ken (supplied by C-MAP) must be connected to the system. The eToken provides the
system with a unique System ID that enables C-MAP to issue correct licenses. The
actual System ID can be found on the eToken itself, on the back of the installation CD
box or on a sticker placed on the equipment. This ID must be provided on all chart or-
ders, by e-mail ([email protected]).

10.2 How to Order Charts

A chart order may be sent together with system registration as described above. It is
essential that the required information be sent to C-MAP when ordering charts for a
system. C-MAP issues order forms specifying the information that is required, and
contains vital information that will allows C-MAP to monitor and maintain your licenses
throughout the lifetime of the system.

For details on how to order charts see the C-MAP official website (http://www.c-
map.com/).

10.3 How to Apply for Licenses

Once the order has been received at C-MAP, a license will be generated and trans-
mitted back to the operator. This may be in the form of a single alphanumerical string
(16 characters), or in the form of a file called PASSWORD.USR. Once this license has
been received it should be input using the License Administrator software designed
and supplied by the chart manufacturer. There are two types of licenses, purchase
and subscription. Purchase licenses are valid indefinitely while subscription licenses
need to be renewed every 12 months from the start of the subscription. Failure to re-
new a subscription will result in the charts becoming unavailable.

10-1
10. C-MAP BY JEPESSEN CHARTS

10.4 Troubleshooting
If you are having problems installing your software or charts please check the follow-
ing before contacting C-MAP:

• Check that the charts are available, with the chart management function.
• Check that the license is correctly installed, with the license function.
Contact Information: For information please call you're nearest C-MAP Office or con-
tact C-MAP. E-mail: [email protected]

10.5 Chart Subscription Services

10.5.1 C-MAP services

The C-MAP DL service is an ENC service available on DVD or online, in C-MAP SENC
format. The C-MAP DL service ensures immediate access to ENC licenses whenever
they are needed. ENC licenses available in seconds automatically via online C-MAP
service providers. Cost is controlled via pre-set budgets and spending limits, giving
shipowners a true "pay-as-you-go" service. For further details about C-MAP DL, con-
tact a C-MAP provider.

Note: PC and internet connection with e-mail are required to use the C-MAP DL. Fur-
ther, it is necessary to access C-MAP approx. once every two weeks.

10.5.2 What is ENC delivery?

ENCs can be distributed as ENC delivery or SENC delivery. Both deliveries can be
used in this system.

In ENC delivery, charts are distributed directly from source like PRIMAR, IC-ENC,
JHA, etc. They are delivered onboard in ENC format (using S-57 and S-63) then
charts are loaded into the system.

In SENC delivery, charts are converted from ENC to SENC before delivery to onboard
and loading to the system. A CM-ENC delivery is SENC delivery.

Important notices
• If you are using both services (ENC and SENC deliveries) having the same chart
name loaded into the system through both deliveries, priority of displaying the chart
is in ENC delivery.
• Chart updates for ENC delivery are only for charts of ENC delivery and chart up-
dates for SENC delivery is only for charts of SENC delivery. You have to keep
charts up-to-date separately.
• If you change from ENC delivery to SENC delivery, remove old charts from the sys-
tem before loading charts from new delivery.

10-2
 10. C-MAP BY JEPESSEN CHARTS

10.6 Chart Display

10.6.1 Introduction
The two type of C-MAP charts can be displayed together. These charts have the pri-
ority order shown below.

1) CM- ENC
2) C-MAP PROFESSIONAL+
If both types of navigational purpose charts are available for an area, priority is as
shown above. In areas where CM-ENC is not available CM PROFESSIONAL+ charts
are displayed.

The chart legend provides various data about the chart currently displayed. To find
info use one of the following methods:

• For current position: Click the [TM/CU Reset] button while in the Voyage navigation
mode then click the [Chart INFO] button on the InstantAccess bar™ followed by the
[Chart Legend] button.
• For a specific location: Put the cursor on the location then right-click and select [Chart
Legend]. Click the [Close] button to close the display.
This system is capable of showing more than one chart at a time. This feature is called
the multi-chart display. If one chart does not cover the whole display, the system will
open more chart cells for display, if appropriate cells for the displayed area are avail-
able. The chart legend shows information about charts displayed on the electronic
chart display area.
Chart Legend

[Name]: Name of chart.

[Type]: Type of chart.
[Edition]: Edition number of the chart.
[Edition Date]: Date the edition was published.
[Update Number]: Update number.
[Update Date]: Date of update.
[Compilation Scale]: The scale of the original paper chart is shown here.
[Projection]: Projection of current chart.
[Horizontal Datum]: Horizontal datum used with current chart.
[Sounding Datum]: Datum used to create sounding data.
[Vertical Datum]: Vertical datum used with current chart.
[Units of Depth]: Unit of depth used with current chart.
[Units of Height]: Unit of measurement to measure height of objects above sea level.
[Magnetic Variation]: Amount of magnetic variation. Positive values indicate a change
in an easterly direction and negative values indicate a change in a westerly direction.
[Quality Indication]: Quantitative estimate of the accuracy of chart features, given by
the chart producer.

10-3
10. C-MAP BY JEPESSEN CHARTS

10.7 Permanent Warnings

Permanent warnings help you keep the C-MAP up-to-date and these are shown at the
bottom of the screen. Permanent warnings appear if the system detects a condition
that may cause a chart to be not up-to-date.

Message Meaning, Remedy

C-MAP: Database not up to date Database is not up to date. Update the data base.
C-MAP: Dynamic license reporting over- The time for the “Next Report Date” has passed. This
due occurs once every 12 hours if the condition continues.
Get into the Chart maintenance mode then click the
[License] button. Click the [C-MAP] tab then the [Order
Update File] button.
C-MAP: Dynamic licensing credit limit You have exceeded the allotted credit limit. Raise
credit limit.
C-MAP: No connection to eToken eToken dongle is not connected (inside the Processor
Unit) or the eToken has not been initialized. If the don-
gle is connected, open the [License] dialog box, click
the [C-MAP] tab, then click the [C-MAP Setup] and
[OK] buttons to initialize the eToken.
C-MAP: permits have expired You have an expired permit for a chart. Remove the
chart or renew subscription for the permit.
No connection to dongle. Dongle not connected. Connect dongle.
Permit expired (SSE 25): XXXXXXXX You have an expired permit for a chart. Remove the
(Chart name replaces Xs.) chart or renew subscription for the permit.

10-4
 10. C-MAP BY JEPESSEN CHARTS

10.8 Notice to Mariners (NM)

The NM has been developed to ensure mariners can simply view the information they
need - in addition to the standard chart - to navigate safely and compliantly. By clearly
showing where important Temporary or Preliminary changes may impact a voyage,
the NM will give seafarers the same consistent picture of the maritime environment on
their charts as they have always had.

The display and operation methods for NM is essentially the same as AIO. See
section 9.5 for details.

How to select the NM information to display

Select what type of notices to display as follows:

1. Click the [DISP], [SET] and [Chart DISP] buttons on the InstantAccess bar™.
2. Click the [NtoM] tab.

3. In the [C-MAP] window, check the items to display.

4. Click the [Save] button to save settings then click the [Close] button to close the
menu.

10-5
10. C-MAP BY JEPESSEN CHARTS

This page is intentionally left blank.

10-6
11. CHART ALERTS
The chart radar can detect areas where the depth is less than the safety contour or
detect an area where a specified condition exists. If prediction of own ship movement
goes across a safety contour or an area where a specified condition exists, the system
does the following:

• Highlights alarm level alert objects in red (route checked in route planning, and
route navigation)
• Highlights warning and caution level alert objects in yellow (route checked in route
planning, and route navigation)
• Provides visual alerts in the [Alert] box for alarm, warning and caution level alert ob-
jects (route navigation)
• Sounds an aural alarm for alarm or warning alert objects (route navigation)

Alarm level chart

Warning/caution level object highlighted
chart object highlighted in red color
in yellow color

For this function, the chart radar utilizes the chart database (S57 charts) stored on the
SSD in SENC format. Note that the chart radar calculates dangerous areas using
the largest scale chart available, which may not be the visualized chart.

You can select objects that are included for calculation of danger area (for example,
restricted areas). A dialog box lists the various areas that activate danger warnings.

You can also define your own safe area by creating a user chart area. The system can
utilize these areas when calculating chart alerts.

 The system can check the following for you:

• Predicted movement area of own ship
• Planned route with an easy to use locator function to find dangerous areas
 The system will highlight the following for you
• Dangerous areas inside predicted movement area of the own ship
• Dangerous areas inside your monitored route
• Dangerous areas inside your planned route

11-1
11. CHART ALERTS

11.1 Chart Alerts

Official S57 chart material contains depth contours that can be used for calculation of
chart alerts. A chart database also includes different types of objects that the operator
can use for chart alerts. The procedure for setting chart alerts is outlined below.

1. Select suitable safety contour for your own ship. See paragraph 11.1.1 for how to
set the safety contour.
2. In the Voyage planning mode, define a new route or select an existing one. Make
a chart alert calculation of the route if there are indications of danger areas in the
route. Modify your route if necessary and do the chart alert calculation again. To
modify an existing route see section 12.5.
3. Select route as monitored route.
4. Set the look-ahead area for your own ship (see section 11.2).
The system is now ready for chart alert calculation of monitored route and estimated
own ship position.

11.1.1 How to set safety contour

Select safety contour suitable for the own ship.
1. Click the [DISP], [SET] and [Chart Alert] buttons on the InstantAccess bar™ to
show the [Chart Alert] page.

2. Enter desired depth at [Safety Contour] then click the [Save] button.
A depth contour is created on the chart according to the safety contour value entered.
Note: If the chart does not contain chosen depth contour, the system will automatically
select next deeper contour.

11-2
 11. CHART ALERTS

11.1.2 Chart object related settings

When using the Look-ahead function or monitoring a route, you can set up the method
in which to report chart alerts and also show/hide chart alerts.

1. Click the [DISP], [SET] and [Chart Alert] buttons on the InstantAccess bar™ to
show the [Chart Alert] page.

Check to show alerts ,

uncheck to hide alerts

2. Click a letter indication to select the type of alert, warning or caution, to receive for
the given chart object. [Safety Contours] is fixed to “A” (Alarm).
W: Warning, visual and aural alerts
C: Caution, visual alert only
• W: Warning, visual and aural alerts
• C: Caution, visual alert only
• No display (OFF): No alert notification. Available with objects other than [No
Vector Chart].
3. Click the box to the right of the letter indication to show a check mark and show
the alert. Click the box again to remove the check in the box and hide the alert.
Checked alerts are highlight5ed according to priority:
• A (Alarm): Red color highlight
• W (Warning) and C (Caution): Yellow color highlight
4. Click the [Save] button to finish.
Note: C-MAP PROFFESIONAL+ charts may take several minutes to identify danger
areas.

List of areas
There are areas that the chart radar detects and provides the audible alert and/or vi-
sual alert if the estimated own ship position, or planned or monitored route, crosses
the area defined on the [Chart Alert] page. You can select from the following areas:

• Safety Contour • Caution Area • No Vector Chart

• Navigational Hazard • Offshore Production Area • Too Many Dangers
• Areas To Be Avoided • Military Practice Area • UKC Limit
• User Chart Danger • Seaplane Landing Area • Sounding UKC Limit
• Traffic Separation Zone • Submarine Transit Lane • Non-official ENC
• Inshore Traffic Zone • Anchorage Area • Not Up-to-date
• Restricted Area • Marine Farm/Aqua Culture • Permit Expired
• PSSA Area

11-3
11. CHART ALERTS

11.2 How to Activate Own Ship Check

Calculation of own ship predicted movement area is done using a check area (two
places) about own ship position. Set the check area as follows:

1. Select the [Look-ahead] page from the [Overlay/

NAV Tools] box.
2. Referring to the figure below, set the ahead time
or distance and ahead width. Also, set the
"Around" figures: port, starboard, bow and stern
check distance.
The reference point is the conning position
(CCRP).
Both areas are shown as a thin black line one
screen.

Width
Ahead: Sets an area with a length
Course based on own speed (Time) or
distance (DIST) ahead of your ship.
The [Width] setting is applied to
either [Time] or [DIST], depending on
Heading
your selection. The area set here is
always oriented based on your
course (COG).
Distance
Around: Sets a fixed area around
your ship. This area moves with your
ship, in relation to your current
heading (HDG).
Bow

Stern

Port
Starboard
3. To select the objects to use in chart alerts, click the [Chart Alert] button and see
section 8.1.2.
4. Click the [Apply] button to affect the changes.
When an object set from the [Chart Alert] menu enters a set area, an alert is generated
in the following manner:

• Alarm or Warning level alerts: Alert message and aural alert are generated.
• Caution level alerts: Alert message is generated (no aural alert).
Objects or areas that generate an alert are shown in the following manner. (Alarms:
red highlight, Warnings/Cautions: yellow outline)

• Individual objects: The object is highlighted in red or outlined in yellow.

• Area objects: If the area object is larger than the look-ahead area, the look-ahead
area is highlighted in red or outlined in yellow. If the area object is smaller than
the look-ahead area, the area object is highlighted in red or outlined in yellow.

11-4
 11. CHART ALERTS

11.3 Route Planning

The system will calculate chart alerts using user-defined channel limit for routes. Dan-
ger areas are shown highlighted if safety contour or user-chosen chart alert areas are
crossed by the planned route. For more information on route planning, see chapter 12.

Note: If your voyage is going to take a long time or you are planning it much earlier
than it is to take place, use the Display date and Update Review dates corresponding
to the dates you are going to sail (see section 9.2.2).

11.3.1 Chart alerts for route planning

You can generate a list of chart alerts that are crossed by the planned route. This can
be done as follows:

1. Enter safety contour you want to use.

2. Plan a route; define waypoints and other necessary information. See chapter 12
for route planning.
3. Select dangerous objects to be monitored during route monitoring, on the [Alert
Parameters] page in the [Route Plan] dialog box, shown below. Click the box be-
low each object to show or hide the check mark.
When the route is checked, alert objects with a check mark which have their alert
activated are highlighted on the chart display. Alert objects with no check mark are
not highlighted.

4. Click the [Check Route] button to generate a list of chart alerts. The results appear
on the [Check Results] page.

The figure above shows the alerts to be monitored. If there are alerts included in
the planned route, check alerts leg by leg, or check alerts by using category of
alert.

11-5
11. CHART ALERTS

Note: When alerts are unchecked at step 3 in the above procedure, one or more
of the following messages appear in the permanent warning box.
• [Safety Contour] unchecked: "Indication of crossing safety contour if Off. (in
planning)"
• [Navigational Hazard] unchecked: "Indication of navigational hazards is Off. (in
planning)"
• Other alerts unchecked: "Indication of some prohibited areas or areas with spe-
cial conditions is Off. (in planning)"

11-6
12. ROUTES

12.1 Route Planning Overview

A route plan defines the navigation plan from starting point to the final destination. The
plan includes:

A route plan defines the navigation plan from starting point to the final destination. The
plan includes:
• Route name
• Name, latitude and longitude of each waypoint
• Radius of turn circle at each waypoint
• Safe channel limits
• Chart alarm calculation based on channel limits against chart database and user chart
danger
• UKC calculation
• Deadband width, nominal deadband width used for the chart operating modes with
moderate accuracy and economical sailing behavior
• Minimum and maximum speed for each leg
• The navigation method (rhumb line, great circle)
• Fuel saving
• ETD from each waypoint
• ETA to each waypoint
• Ship and environmental condition affecting the ship speed calculation
• Name of the user chart to use during route navigation together with the planned route
• Name of the Notes to use during route navigation together with this planned route, in
the user chart dialog box
Using the above-mentioned data, the system calculates speed, course and length for
each leg, ETAs for each waypoint, fuel consumption and WOP. It also calculates safe
water areas based on user-defined channel limits. The calculated data is displayed in
tabular form, which can be printed as a documented route plan and also stored in a
file for later use.

Main functions of route planning are:

• Define waypoints
• Define turnings for each waypoint
• Define channel limits for each leg (a leg is the line connected between two waypoints).
The channel limits are used to detect chart alerts when you are planning or monitoring
your route.
• Define the speed for each leg
• Calculation for ETD and ETA
• Calculation for most economical sailing
Note 1: If you have small scale chart(s) on display having the whole eastern/western
(0-180°E/0-180°W) hemisphere and a part of the other hemisphere on display, there
is a limitation to display a route. To avoid this, set chart center so that the whole east-
ern/western hemisphere is not on the display. A maximum of five routes can be edited
simultaneously.
Note 2: If a planned route's Safety Margin or Channel Limit contains excessive land
masses, the chart radar may freeze during a route check. If this occurs, reset the chart
radar, then adjust the Channel Limit and Safety Margin settings in the Route Plan di-
alog box's Waypoints so that land mass is not included in the route.

12-1
12. ROUTES

12.2 Main Menu for Route Planning

The main parameters for the route planning are:

• Latitude and longitude of the waypoint

• Channel limits to the waypoint
• Turning radius of the waypoint
• Maximum speed limit and planned speed for each leg
There are two phases for a route: Route Plan and Route Monitor. Route plan is used
for planning the route and route monitor is used to control a route for monitoring.

To complete route planning, do the following.

1. Create a new route or select an existing one. See section 12.4.

2. Modify your route if necessary. See section 12.5.
3. Make chart alert (safe water) calculation. See section 12.4.5.
4. Optimize your route. See section 12.8.

12.3 How Route Data is Synced

Route data can be shared between this ECDIS and other like units (FMD-3x00, FCR-
2xx9, FAR-3xx0), through the LAN. Turn on all units beforehand to enable syncing.
The unit first powered becomes the master unit (sync source), and the route data is
automatically synced by the sync source. The unit selected as the sync source de-
pends on the number of units connected, as shown in the table below. If the power of
the initial sync source is turned off, the 2nd unit turned on becomes the sync source.

Number of units
ECDIS Chart Radar Sync source
(FMD-3x00) (FCR-2xx9, FAR-3xx0)
One unit One unit The unit (ECDIS or chart radar) first
powered be-comes the sync source
and syncs route data.
Two or more units More than one unit The ECDIS unit (No. 1 ECDIS or No.
2 ECDIS) first powered syncs route
data (a chart radar cannot be the
sync source). However, if a “Planning
ECDIS” is used, the Planning ECDIS
syncs the route data. (Planning EC-
DIS usage/no usage is set at installa-
tion.)
Be aware that if a unit is turned off, some route data may be deleted. The steps below
illustrate this using ECD001 and ECD002.

1) CD002 is off; ECD001 is powered and a route is created at ECD001.(Sync source:

ECD001)
2) The power to ECD001 is turned off. ECD002 was turned off at step 1, therefore the
created route is not delivered to ECD002.
3) ECD002 and ECD001 are powered in that order. (Sync source: ECD002)Because
the sync source became ECD002, the route created at step 1 is deleted.

12-2
 12. ROUTES

12.4 How to Create a New Route

To make a complete route for a voyage, do the following:

1. Click the [PLAN] button on the Status bar to activate the Voyage planning mode.
2. On the InstantAccess bar™, click the [Planning] button followed by the [Route]
button to open the [Route Plan] dialog box.
3. Click the [New] button.

Note: When accessing the database is failed after pressing the [New] button, the
message "Database access failure occurred. You can make a route but cannot
save it." appears. Contact your dealer in this case.
4. Use the cursor to select a position for the first waypoint then push the left mouse
button. A waypoint mark appears on the position selected, and the latitude and
longitude of the position, etc. are entered into the [Route Plan] dialog box. After
entering a waypoint, edit Name, Steering mode* ([Rhumbline] or [Greatcircle]),
Radius*, XTD limit*, Plan SPD*, SPD Max*, Margin* and Local Time* as appropri-
ate in the [Route Plan] dialog box, using the keyboard on the Control Unit or the
software keyboard. (*: Editable for waypoint 2 and thereafter only.)
For how edit the details, see section 1.23.3 and section 1.23.4.
Note 1: A guide box that shows the range and bearing between waypoints as you
drag the cursor is available. You can show or hide the box with the [Guide Box]
button on the InstantAccess bar™. Click the button to show its background color
in light-blue and display the guide box.

Guide box

12-3
12. ROUTES

Note 2: The bearing and range of the waypoint can be ad-

justed as shown below.
1) In the [Route Plan] dialog box, right click the bearing or
the distance of the waypoint to change.
2) Select [Adjust Position] to show the [Adjust Waypoint]
context menu shown right.
3) Enter value at [Direction] or [Distance], then click the
[OK] button.

5. Repeat step 4 to enter other waypoints.

6. After you enter the final waypoint, right-click the display area to show the context-
sensitive menu then select [Finish].
7. Click the [Save] button. Enter a name (max. 63 alphanumeric characters) for the
route, using the keyboard on the Control Unit or the software keyboard. Click the
[OK] button to finish.
8. Use the [Alert Parameters] page to define the safety contour and other specified
conditions for checking the route. Click a "block" under a check item to highlight
the areas. Also, input value for [Draught/m]. A parameter for [Draught/m] can also
be assigned globally to all legs from the context-sensitive menu. See
section 12.4.4 for how to use the [Alert Parameters] page.
9. Use the [Check Route] button on the [Alert Parameters] page to detect areas
where the depth is less than the safety contour or where specified conditions exist.
The results appear on the [Check Results] page. This system can examine chart
database against planned route to make a list of alerts where a route crosses a
safety contour or specified areas used in chart alerts.
10. Use the [User Chart] page to link, de-link a user chart(s) with the route. See
section 12.4.2.
11. Use the [Optimize] page to enter parameters for route optimization.See
section 12.4.3.

How to use the Undo feature

The Undo feature, available when creating a route and a user chart, can be accessed
from the [UNDO] button on the InstantAccess bar™. In route creation the feature is
used with waypoint and text input as follows:

Waypoint input: Delete last-entered waypoint.

Text input: Erase last-entered character or character string.

12-4
 12. ROUTES

12.4.1 How to use the Waypoints page

The following fields and boxes can be found in the [Waypoints] page. Scroll the list
rightward to see hidden items.

[WPT]: Each waypoint has a number. [XTD Limit/m]: For [Symmetrical] selected
[Name]: You can name each waypoint. at the radio button, define channel limit for
[Latitude]: WPTs latitude coordinate is dis- each leg. For [Asymmetrical] selected, de-
played in WGS-84 datum. fine channel limit for port, starboard side
[Longitude]: WPTs longitude coordinate is for each leg at [XTD Port/m] or [XTD
displayed in WGS-84 datum. STBD/m] respectively.
[Leg/°]: Bearing of leg (True: reference to [Plan SPD]: Define planned speed to use
North) with a leg.
[Leg/NM]: Length of leg (nm). Edit the indi- [SPD Max]: Define maximum speed to use
cation of leg to show as follows; with a leg.
1) Right-click the column title [Leg/NM]. [Margin/m]: Define extension for channel
2) Select the contents to show. to be checked against selected alerts.
• [Each]: Shows the distance of each [PL 1/m, PL 2/m]: One or two sets of par-
leg. allel lines, colored orange, can be drawn
• [Total]: Shows the total cumulative on a route. Set the distance (in meters) to
distance from leg to leg. offset the lines from the route,
• [Remain]: Shows the distance re- from -99999 to 99999. Parallel lines allow
maining from leg to leg. the navigator to maintain a given distance
Note: These settings are reflected to away from hazards. See the illustration be-
[Leg/NM] in the [Waypoints] page of low.
the [Monitor Information] dialog box. [XTD LIM]: Define channel limits.
[STR Mode]: Define steering mode for • [Symmetrical]: Define channel limit for
each leg - rhumb line or great circle. Click each leg.
to select [Rhumbline] or [Greatcircle]. • [Asymmetrical]: Define channel limit for
[RAD/NM]: Define turning radius for each port, starboard side for each leg, at [CH
waypoint. To change a radius, put the cur- Port/m], [CH STBD/m], respectively.
sor in this column to show up and down ar- [Local Time]: Define the local time at
rows. Click the arrows to set the radius. which the waypoint is passed.

WPT1

WPT2

Parallel Line for Leg 1

Parallel Line for Leg 2 WPT3

12-5
12. ROUTES

Note: You can select the route information data to display on the
[Waypoints] page with the context-sensitive menu. Right-click
an item from [WPT] to [PL 2/m] then select [Edit Columns] to
show the context-sensitive menu. Check or uncheck items as
appropriate then click the [OK] button.

12.4.2 How to use the User Chart page

The [User Chart] page lets you link user charts to routes. To link a user chart, click the
box to the left of the user chart name in the [Stored User Chart] list to show a check-
mark. Click the [<<] button to copy that name to the [Linked User Chart] list. To de-link
a user chart, click the box to the left of the user chart name in the [Linked User Chart]
list then click the [>>] button to erase the name. The contents of each user chart are
shown in the [Contents] window.

[Linked User Chart]: List of user charts linked with selected route.
[Stored User Chart]: List of stored user charts.
[<<] button: Link a stored used chart. Check the chart in the [Stored User Chart] list
then click this button. The user chart name is then copied to the [Linked User Chart]
list.
[>>] button: Click to remove selected (checkmarked) user chart from the [Linked User
Chart] list.
[Contents]: Lists the objects saved to the user chart selected.

12-6
 12. ROUTES

12.4.3 How to use the Optimize page

After all waypoints are inserted and you have made safe water calculation, you can
optimize your route, on the [Optimize] page. If not selected, then optimization will be
done automatically with max. speed. If you want do optimization with a specific strat-
egy, see section 12.8 for how to optimize a route.

[Type]: Select optimization strategy: maximum speed, time table, maximum profit, or
minimum cost.
[Set ETD]: Set date, time and waypoint to start from.
[Parameters]: Set the parameters for optimization, speed limit and income (max prof-
it).
[Edit Cost Parameters] button: Enter fuel consumption figures. See section 21.3.
[Set ETA]: For the type [Time table], set the date and time that you want to arrive at
the waypoint selected.
[Optimized Speed/ETA]: The optimized speed for the date and time entered at [Set
ETA] appears here, after clicking the [Calculate] button.
[Calculate] button: Click to calculate optimization.
[Apply to Route] button: Apply the calculations on the [Optimize] page to the route.

12.4.4 How to use the Alert Parameters page

The [Alert Parameters] page sets the alert conditions to use when checking a route.
Put a “W” for an item to highlight on the chart. ([Safety Contour] is fixed to “A” (Alarm).
If you do not require the highlight display for an item, put a “C” for that object. The rel-
evant alerts (Alarm, Warning, Caution) are shown in the [Check Results] page.

You can select the safety contour and chart alerts used to check the safety of the
route. This allows you to check the safety with conditions different from those selected
n for system use. This is useful when making a route for different loading or sailing
conditions.

12-7
12. ROUTES

Check a box to highlight the

appropriate chart alert area.

Item Description Item Description

Check type Check how to apply the alerts, Offshore Offshore production area
to every leg or individual leg. Production Area
(Only [Draught] can be applied
to every leg.)
Safety Set the safety contour (in me- Military Practice Military practice area
Contour ters). Area
UKC Limit Under keel clearance limit. Seaplane Seaplane landing area
Landing Area
Date (UTC) A chart may have date-depen- Submarine Submarine transit lane
dent features. Enter the actual Transit Lane
data of embarkation to know
date-dependent features.
Leg Leg number Anchorage Area Anchorage area
Draught/m Ship’s draught MarineFarm Marine farm aquaculture
Aquaculture
Safety Con- Safety contour PSSA Area Particularly Sensitive Sea Area
tour
Navigation- Navigational hazards No Vector Chart No vector chart for area.
al Hazard
Areas to be Areas to be avoided Too Many Dan- Too many dangerous areas/ob-
Avoided gers jects.
User Chart User chart danger area UKC Limit
Danger
Traffic Traffic separation zone Sounding UKC Particularly Sensitive Sea Area
Separation Limit
Zone
Inshore Inshore traffic zone Non-official ENC No official ENC data
Traffic Zone
Restricted Restricted area Not Up-to-date Chart not up to date.
Area
Caution Caution area Permit Expired Permit for chart has expired.
Area
Context sensitive menus
A context-sensitive menu for setting the draught is available on the [Alert Parameters]
page. Right-click [Draught/m] to show the menu. [Set "ALL" setting to all legs] applies
the draught value of [Check type: All Legs] to all legs. [Clear setting] restores previous
settings for each leg.

Set “ALL” setting to all legs

Clear setting

12-8
 12. ROUTES

12.4.5 How to use the Check Results page

The [Check Results] page allows you to make safe water calculation for your route.
Click the [Check Route] button to do the check. After the button is operated, the alert
type and latitude and longitude position of the alert appear for applicable legs on the
route.

Note 1: In order to display charts with correct updated situation, always use current
date during your voyage. If your voyage lasts more than one week, set current date at
least once per week during your voyage.
Note 2: A route check can take longer with C-MAP charts. Wait until the completion
of the check.
Note 3: When a chart is installed or updated, use the [Check Route] button on the
[Alert Parameters] page to re-check all routes before starting any voyage. If a route
which has not been checked is selected for a voyage, the error message "Route check
is not done in PLAN mode." appears at the bottom of the monitor page.

12.5 How to Modify an Existing Route

12.5.1 How to change waypoint position

To change position of a waypoint you have the following choices:

• Drag and drop waypoint using the left button.

• Enter latitude and longitude on the [Waypoints] page in the [Route Plan] dialog box.

How to drag and drop waypoint to new position

1. Put the cursor on the route waypoint to move then push the right button to show
the context-sensitive menu.
2. Select [Edit].
3. Press and hold down the left button while rolling the trackball to move the cursor
to a desired position. Release the button when the cursor is at the desired posi-
tion. Right-click the display area to show the context-sensitive menu then select
[Finish].

How to change latitude and longitude from the Waypoints page

1. Show the [Waypoints] page.
2. Put the cursor on the digit to change in the Latitude or Longitude field.
3. Enter position from the Control Unit’s keyboard, or spin the scrollwheel.

12-9
12. ROUTES

12.5.2 How to change other waypoint data

Other data of a waypoint, such as name, steering mode, turning radius, min/max
speed, can be edited from the [Waypoints] page. Select the route to edit and open the
[Waypoints] page. Put the cursor on a desired field and spin the scrollwheel to change
data. (Push the left button to change steering mode.)

12.5.3 How to add a new waypoint at the end of a route

How to add a new waypoint at the end of a route from the electronic chart
area
1. Put the cursor on the current last waypoint of the route.
2. Right-click the display area to show the context-sensitive menu then click [Edit].
3. Put the cursor to the new location for the last waypoint then push the left button.
4. Right-click, then click [Finish].

How to add a new waypoint at the end of a route from the Waypoints page
Open the [Waypoints] page then right-click the last waypoint. Select [Insert after].
A waypoint is added at the end of the list. Edit the Latitude, Longitude, etc. as neces-
sary.

12.5.4 How to insert a waypoint

How to insert a waypoint between waypoints from the electronic chart area
1. Put the cursor anywhere on the route where you want to insert a waypoint.
2. Right-click to show the context-sensitive menu then click [Edit].
3. Put the cursor on the leg where you want to insert a waypoint.
4. Right-click, then click [Insert WPT].
5. Right-click, then click [Finish].

How to insert a waypoint from the Waypoints page

Open the [Waypoints] page then right-click the waypoint to process. Select [Insert Af-
ter] or [Insert Before] as appropriate. A waypoint is added after or before the waypoint
selected. Edit the Latitude, Longitude, etc. as necessary.

12.5.5 How to delete a waypoint

How to delete a waypoint from the electronic chart area
Put the cursor on the waypoint to delete. Push the right button to show the context-
sensitive menu then select [Edit] followed by [Delete WPT].

How to delete a waypoint from the Waypoints page

Open the [Waypoints] page. Right-click the waypoint you want to delete then select
[Delete WPT].

12-10
 12. ROUTES

12.5.6 Geometry check of route

When you add a new waypoint, modify a waypoint or change other waypoint data, the
message "Impossible turn at WPT" may appear in red and the following items may
also appear in red.

• Turn radius or planned speed for the respective waypoint

• Latitude/longitude for the next waypoint
It means that the geometry of route makes it impossible for the ship to sail along a cer-
tain leg. Typically it is enough if you do the following, on the [Waypoints] page.

• Decrease the radius of turn of the waypoint or one of its neighbors.

• Increase the radius of turn of the waypoint or one of its neighbors.
• Change lat/lon position of the waypoint or one of its neighbors.
Note: If the above-mentioned remedies do not remove the "Impossible turn at WPT"
indication, try changing the planned speed.

12.6 SAR Operations

The SAR feature facilitates search and rescue operations for MOB.

To use the SAR feature, get into the Voyage planning mode then do the following:
1. Click the [Planning] and [Route] buttons on the InstantAccess bar™ to show the
[Route Plan] dialog box then click the [SAR] button.

2. Enter your start point. To enter current position, click

the [Ship Position] button. (The start point can also
be entered directly on the screen. Put the cursor on
the start point, right-click the chart to show the con-
text-sensitive menu shown right then click [Set start
point].)
3. Enter your ship's speed and turn radius, current UTC date and time.
4. At [Search Point], enter the estimated position of the object to search. (The search
point can also be entered directly on the screen. Put the cursor on the search
point, right-click the chart to show the context-sensitive menu shown at step 2
then click [Set search point].
5. Enter drift speed, drift direction, and the UTC date and time of the estimated po-
sition.

12-11
12. ROUTES

6. At the [Search Setting] window, select and set the search type, referring to the ta-
ble on the next page.

Search
Options Sample pattern
type
[Expand-
WPT7
ing square]
Start Leg 90.00° 6
Length
5 WPT3

90°
1 2 WPT4 WPT8
[Direction]: Set the direction to start
90.00° WPT2
the search, [Clockwise] or [Anti- WPT6
3
clockwise]. 4 Search
Pattern
90.00°
[Search Pattern Heading]: See the Heading

right figure.
WPT5
[Start Leg Length]: Enter the start
leg length. WPT1 Start Point
[Number of Legs]: Enter the num-
ber of legs to use.
Starting at the probable location of
the target, the search vessels ex-
pand outward in concentric
squares.
[Parallel
WPT13
tracks] Le
g6
/6
WPT10
Le
g5
WPT9 /6
Le
g4
WPT6 /6 WPT12
Le
g3
/6
WPT5 Le
g2 WPT11
/6
Search WPT8
Pattern
WPT7
[Direction]: Select the direction to Heading
(North ref.) WPT2 Le WPT4
g1
start the search, [Clockwise] or [An- S
Letart L
/6
Track space
ticlockwise]. ng eg
th
WPT3
WPT1
[Search Pattern Heading]: See the Start Point
right figure.
[Start Leg Length]: Enter the start
leg length.
[Track Space]: Enter the length of
the short legs in the route.
[Number of Legs]: Enter the num-
ber of legs to use.
The parallel tracks pattern is usual-
ly the first pattern used in undertak-
ing a search operation, since it
assumes that the object to be
searched.

12-12
 12. ROUTES

Search
Options Sample pattern
type
[Sector
Search Pattern Heading
search]
WPT6 WPT3

radearch
ius
S
Sector #2 Sector #1
WPT9 60°
WPT4
[Direction]: Select the direction to WPT5 WPT2
start the search, [Clockwise] or [An-
ticlockwise].
[Search Pattern Heading]: See the Sector #3
right figure. WPT8
WPT7
[Search Radius]: Enter the search WPT1 Start Point
radius (in NM).
[Number of Sectors]: Enter the
number of sectors to use.
The sector search is used when the
position of the body is known accu-
rately and the search has to be
done over a small area. It is normal-
ly carried out in the area, where the
casualty or the object has been
sighted.
7. Click the [OK] button. The [Route Plan] dialog box appears and the system draws
the search and rescue route on the screen according to the search and rescue
settings.
8. To follow the route, click the [Exchange to MONIT] button.
Note: To monitor the route the following conditions must be met:
• The route must have at least two waypoints.
• The route must have no impossible turns.
• The route must have been checked.

9. To save the route, click the [Save] button and enter a name for the route, using
the keyboard on the Control Unit or the software keyboard.
If necessary you can drag waypoints to new position, like with an ordinary route.

12-13
12. ROUTES

12.7 Route Bank

The route bank stores all the routes you have created. To show the route bank, in the
Voyage planning mode, select [Planning], [Plan] to show [Route Plan] dialog box, then
click the [Route Bank] button.

Route name Date created or modified

Total no. of waypoints 177.50NM Total distance of route

Position of start waypoint Position of final waypoint

In the Voyage planning mode, the waypoints of a route can be inserted into the route
currently selected.
1. Show the dialog box shown above.
2. Select the route for which you want to copy its waypoint(s) in the active route. For
example, select Route2.
3. Click the [Open] button.

Route1
Route2

4. At [Insert Position], select where you want to insert waypoints into the active route,
[Before] or [After] the waypoint selected in the next step. The [Reset] button re-
stores the route to the original condition.
5. In the left-hand column set the cursor on the waypoint where to insert waypoints
from the inactive route.
6. At the right-hand column, select the waypoint(s) to add to the active route. A con-
text-sensitive menu is available by right-clicking [WPT] in the inactive route. The
options available are [Select All], [Deselect All] and [Reverse] (reverse the order
of the waypoints in the inactive route).

12-14
 12. ROUTES

7. Click the [<<] button to insert the waypoint(s) from the inactive route to the active
route. In the example below, WPT1 of the inactive route is inserted at the end of
the active route, becoming its waypoint 5.

Route1
Route2

8. Click the [OK] button to finish.

12.8 Route Optimization

12.8.1 Available route optimization strategies

After all waypoints are inserted, the route is optimized from the [Optimize] page in the
[Route Plan] dialog box. If no optimization strategy is selected, the optimization is
done with "max. speed," defined in ship parameters. Optimization calculates all pa-
rameters for route steering (course and distance between two waypoints, maneuver-
ing start point, WOP, etc.). There are four methods for optimization:

[MAX speed]: This calculation uses the maximum speed defined in the ship parame-
ters and multiplies by all reduction factors (weather, ice, fouling, etc.) together with
speed limits given for each waypoint to generate ETA. ETA may be entered, however
it is calculated with user-entered ETD and speed limit.

[Time table]: Calculates the speed required in order to arrive at destination at required
ETA. Maximum speed is never exceeded. The user enters ETD and ETA to calculate
speed to use. If, the user-entered ETA is earlier than that found with the Max. Speed
calculation, the Max. speed -calculated ETA will be indicated below the Time Table
ETA calculation figure. The calculated speed is shown on the [Route Information] box
as [Plan Speed].

[MAX profit]: Based on ETD, this calculation takes in account the fuel cost and the
fixed cost of the ship and calculates the most profitable speed (highest profit per time
unit).

[MIN cost]: Based on ETD, this calculation takes in account the fuel cost and the fixed
cost of the ship and calculates the speed that gives the minimum total cost. You need
to set [Cost Parameters] beforehand to use this feature.

12-15
12. ROUTES

12.8.2 How to optimize a route

You can define Estimated Time of Departure (ETD), desired number of waypoints and
Estimated Time of Arrival (ETA) on the [Optimize] page in the [Route Plan] dialog box
to optimize your route.

1. Click the [Optimize] tab to open the [Optimize] page.

2. At [Type], click the drop-down list to select desired optimization strategy, referring
to paragraph 12.8.1 "Available route optimization strategies".
3. Do the following:
1) At the [Set ETD] window, enter starting WPT and
date and time of departure. To enter the date, click
the gray box to the right of the [Date (UTC):] indi-
cation. The [Set date] window, shown right, ap-
pears. Click the applicable date in the calendar if
you are going to depart during the current month,
or click the applicable arrow on the month/year
button to select a different date. Click the [OK] but-
ton to save the ETA and close the window.
2) At the [Waypoints] window in the [Route Plan] di-
alog box, enter the maximum speed to use. For the Type [MAX profit], enter
[Income] value.
If necessary, click the [Edit Cost Parameters] button to enter fuel consumption
values.

12-16
 12. ROUTES

3) For [Time table], the [Set ETA] window appears. Set the ETA to use for each
waypoint. To enter the Time and Date, click the [Date] window to show the [Set
date] window. Click the appropriate date. The date entered appears in the [Set
ETA] window.

4. Click the [Calculate] button to calculate optimal route. The [Optimized Speed/ETA]
dialog box shows the results of the calculation.

5. To apply the information to the route, click the [Apply to Route] button.
6. To save all optimization settings, click the [Save] button.
Note that the ETA used in route reports is the first-entered ETA.

12.8.3 How to plan a speed profile

A speed profile is defined by general max. speed and optimization types. These val-
ues are given while planning a route. You can define speed limit and optimize type in
the [Optimize] page of the [Route Plan] dialog box and in the [Waypoints] page you
can give planned and max. speed for each leg. The table below demonstrate how dif-
ferent optimize types and speed limits influence speed.

WPT MIN cost MAX profit Time table MAX speed

1 4.8 10.9 10.0 10
2 4.8 12.9 15.0 15
3 4.8 12.9 16.2 20
4 4.8 12.9 16.2 20
5 6.0 12.9 15.0 15
6 6.0 12.9 16.2 20
7 4.8 12.9 16.2 20
8 4.8 12.9 16.2 20
9 6.0 12.9 16.2 17
10 4.8 8.0 8.0 8

12-17
12. ROUTES

12.9 How to Import Routes

12.9.1 How to import FMD-3x00, FCR-2xx9, FAR-3xx0 route data

You can import a route created on another FMD-3x00, FCR-2xx9, FAR-3xx0.

1. Set the USB flash memory that contains the route data to import in the USB port
on the Control Unit.

2. Click the [ ] button on the Status bar and select [Settings]. The confirmation
message appears.
3. Click the [OK] button.
4. Click the [File Import] tab.

Import file: 201310011155939.zip

Select data to import:
Setting data
Route/User chart
Playback data

5. Click the [Select file to import] button to select the file to import.
6. Check the data to import, at [Select data to import].
7. Click the [Import] button.

12.9.2 How to import FEA-2x07 route data

Routes created at an ECDIS FEA-2x07 can easily be imported to this ECDIS. Copy
the routes to a folder in a USB flash memory then follow this procedure. Note that FEA-
2x05-created routes cannot be imported.

1. Set the USB flash memory to the

USB port on the Control Unit.
2. Activate the Voyage planning mode.
3. On the InstantAccess bar™, click the
[Manage Data], [Data Import] and
[Route] buttons to show the [SELECT
DIRECTORY] dialog box.
4. Select the folder that contains the
route(s) to be imported then click the
[OK] button.
5. Check the route(s) to import then
click the [Import] button.

12-18
 12. ROUTES

12.9.3 How to import RTZ, CSV, ASCII format route data

1. Set the USB flash memory to the USB port on the Control Unit.

0.92NM


RTZ

2. Activate the Voyage planning mode.

3. On the InstantAccess bar™, click the [Manage Data], [Route] and [Route Data
Management] buttons to show the [Route Data Management] dialog box.
4. At the drop-down list, select the import format. The choices are
[RTZ]: route data, XML format
[FEA-2x07]: route data, ECDIS FEA-2x07 format
[CSV Position]: waypoint position data, CSV format
[ASCII WPT Name Position]: waypoint name, position order, ASCII format
[ASCII Full]: all route data, ASCII format
[ASCII Full (Support Asymmetrical XTD Limit]: asymmetrical channel limit sup-
port, ASCII format
[CSV Route Sheet]: route data, CSV format
[RTE Format]: route data, RTE format
5. Click the [Import] button.
6. Select the file to import then click the [Open] button.
7. Click the [Close] button to close the dialog box.

12-19
12. ROUTES

12.10 How to Export Route Data

12.10.1 How to export FAR-3xx0 route data

You can export route data to share the data with other FMD-3x00, FCR-2xx9 or FAR-
3xx0 units.

1. Set a USB flash memory in the USB port on the Control Unit.

2. Click the [ ] button on the Status bar and select [Settings]. The confirmation
message appears.
3. Click the [OK] button.
4. Click the [File Export] tab.

Playback data

5. At [Select data to export], check only [Route/User chart].

6. Click the [Export] button to save the data to the USB flash memory.

12.10.2 How to export route data in RTZ, CSV, ASCII format

1. Set the USB flash memory to the USB
port on the Control Unit.
2. Activate the Voyage planning mode.
3. On the InstantAccess bar™, click the
[Manage Data], [Route] and [Route
Data Management] buttons to show the
[Route Data Management] dialog box.
4. At the drop-down list, select the import
format. The choices are 0.92NM
[RTZ]: route data, XML format 

[CSV Position]: waypoint position data,

CSV format RTZ
[ASCII WPT Name Position]: waypoint
name, position order, ASCII format
[ASCII Full]: all route data, ASCII format
[ASCII Full (Support Asymmetrical XTD Limit]: Asymmetrical channel limit sup-
port, ASCII format
Note: When route transfer is enabled [Route transfer (LAN)] appears in the drop-
down list, but is not selectable (see section 12.13).
5. Check the route(s) to export then click the [Export] button.

12-20
 12. ROUTES

6. Select the destination to save the exported data.

7. Click the [OK] button.
8. Click the [Close] button to close the dialog box.

12.11 How to Delete Routes

1. Click the [PLAN] button on the Status bar to get into the Planning navigation
mode.
2. Click the [Manage Data] button on the InstantAccess bar™ followed by the
[Route] button.

0.92NM


RTZ

3. Put a checkmark in the check box to the left of the route name.
4. Click the [Delete] button. The confirmation message appears.
5. Click the [OK] button.
6. Click the [Close] button to close the dialog box.

12-21
12. ROUTES

12.12 How to Transfer Routes

The route transfer feature lets you send and receive route data (RRT sentence)
among the units connected in the LAN. Information about transmitted and received
route data is stored in the route transfer log (see section 19.6). Turn on the route trans-
fer by following the procedure below.

1. Open the menu, then click [Shared] and [Route Transfer] to show the following di-
alog box.

2. Click the [Func OFF] button to change the label of the button to [Func ON]
3. Use the radio buttons to select what to do when receiving route data whose name
currently exists.
[Reject]: Reject the received data. A dialog appears to inform you that the data
was rejected.
[Overwrite]: Overwrite route data with the received data.
[Ask every time]: The [Route Transfer] dialog box appears with each received
route. Select [Reject] or [Use Later] as appropriate.
4. Click the Save button to save your settings, then click the close button to finish
and close the window.
With route transfer selected to ON, the option [Route Transfer (LAN)] is added to
the drop down list box in the [Route Data Management ]dialog box.

12-22
 12. ROUTES

How to select the route data to transfer

1. Click the PLAN button on the Status bar to get into the Voyage planning mode.
2. On the InstantAccess bar™, click [Manage Data] and [Route] to show the [Route
Data Management] dialog box.
3. Put a checkmark in the checkbox corresponding to the route data to send.
4. Click the [Export] button to send the route data selected at step 3.

12.13 Reports
This chart radar generates reports for waypoints in the selected route. If connected to
a printer, reports can be printed by clicking the [Print Text] button. Text in reports can
be searched with the [Find] button.

To generate a report, do the following:

1. Click the [Plan] button to go to the Voyage planning mode.

2. Click the [Report] button followed by the [Route] button. Click applicable “report”
button.

The following dialog box appears.

177.50NM

3. Select the appropriate route then click the [Open] button to show the selected re-
port. See the next several pages for examples.

12-23
12. ROUTES

WPT table report

The WPT report contains the following information:

• Route name
• Date of report
• Waypoint no.
• Length of waypoint
• Distance remaining in route
• Position in latitude and longitude
• Planned courses and steering methods (RL (RhumbLine), GC (GreatCircle))
• Turning radius
• Planned speeds
• Estimated times of arrival (ETA)
• ETD from waypoint 1 (start point)
• ETA to waypoint “x” (final waypoint)
• Total length of route
• Estimated time required to run route using planned speeds and courses

12-24
 12. ROUTES

Full WPT report

You can generate a full waypoint report for the route selected. The report includes the
following for each waypoint.

• Route name
• Date of report
• Waypoint no.
• Position in latitude and longitude
• Planned radius
• XTD (Channel) limit (If set individually, port and starboard channel limits are sepa-
rated with a diagonal.)
• Planned speed
• Planned course
• ETA
• Time difference from UTC
• Steering mode (rhumb line or great circle) to each waypoint
• ROT
• Margin for XTD (Channel) limit
• Speed Max
• Leg length
• Time used

12-25
12. ROUTES

Passage plan report

The passage plan report generates waypoint information for each waypoint in the
route selected.

• Route name
• Date of report
• Waypoint no.
• Position in latitude and longitude
• Length
• Cumulative length
• Planned course
• Steering method (RL or GC)
• Name of waypoint

12-26
13. USER CHARTS

13.1 Introduction
User charts are overlays that the user creates to indicate safety-related objects and
areas. They can be displayed on both the radar display and the electronic chart. These
charts are intended for pointing out safety-related items like position of important nav-
igation marks, safe area for the ship, etc. User charts areas can be used to activate
alerts and indications based on user-defined danger symbols, lines and areas. When
route or own ship estimated position is going to cross a user chart symbol, line or area
that is defined as a dangerous one, an alert or indication is generated by the system.
See the chapter on chart alerts.

A user chart consists of various objects (points, lines, text, symbols, etc.). The maxi-
mum number of points per user chart is 300 (a circle is one point, a rectangle is four
points). You may link up to five user charts to a route, for a max. of 1,500 user chart
points per route.

The user chart is displayed on the radar display and its position and shape is based
on the ship's actual position. When own ship is moving in the area covered by the user
chart, the elements of the user chart are superimposed on the radar, with a maximum
of 80 of the nearest elements displayed.

13.1.1 Objects of user charts

Below is a description of the objects used in a user chart.

• Tidal: There are two types of tidals, current and predicted.

• Line: You can define four different types of lines. Lines can be used in chart alert
calculation and/or display on the radar:
• Navigation lines: Displayed on both the radar display and the chart display. Nav-
igation lines are reference lines for coast line.
• Coast line: Displayed on both the radar and the chart display. Coastal line is usu-
ally a well-defined (by chart digitizer) multi-segment line showing the coastline.
The user is able to create this type of line in case there is no suitable chart avail-
able over desired area in S57 format.
• Depth contour: Displayed on both the radar and chart display. Depth line shows
the chosen depth levels. The user is able to create this type of line in case there
is no suitable chart available over desired area in or S57 format.
• Route line: Displayed on both the radar display and the chart display. Route lines
are zones for anchoring, traffic separation lines, etc.
• Clearing line: A clearing line is used to define a line which a vessel can sail to avoid
navigational hazards. A clearing line can be of the NMT (Not More Than) or NLT
(Not Less Than) type. Displayed on the chart display only.
• Area: The operator can define closed areas, which the system can use to detect
safe water areas. If route or estimated ship position is going to cross the area, the
system generates a warning to the user. These areas can be used to specify safe

13-1
13. USER CHARTS

areas as defined by the master or by the policy of the ship's owner. They are always
available regardless of the type of chart material used.
• Circle: The operator can define an area with a circle, which can define a location to
avoid. If route or estimated ship position is going to cross the area, the system gen-
erates a warning to the user. These areas can be used to specify safe areas as de-
fined by the master or by the policy of the ship's owner. They are always available
regardless of the type of chart material used.
• Label: There are two types of labels: point and label. A "point" (i) is mainly used to
denote position of objects, such as buoys, light houses, fixed targets, wrecks, etc.
Points can be used in chart alert calculation. A "label" provides user-entered text to
show on the display.

13.2 How User Charts are Synced

User chart data can be shared between this ECDIS and other like units (FMD-3x00,
FCR-2xx9 or FAR-3xx0), through the LAN. Turn on all units beforehand to enable
syncing. The unit first powered becomes the master unit (sync source), and the user
chart data are automatically synced by the sync source. The unit selected as the sync
source depends on the number of units connected, as shown in the table below. If the
power of the initial sync source is turned off, the 2nd unit turned on becomes the sync
source.

Number of units
ECDIS Chart Radar Sync source
(FMD-3x00) (FCR-2xx9, FAR-3xx0)
One unit One unit The unit (ECDIS or chart radar) first
powered be-comes the sync source
and syncs user chart data.
Two or more units More than one unit The ECDIS unit (No. 1 ECDIS or No. 2
ECDIS) first powered syncs user chart
data (a chart radar can-not be the sync
source). However, if a “Planning EC-
DIS” is used, the Planning ECDIS
syncs the route data. (Planning ECDIS
usage/no usage is set at installation.)
Be aware that if a unit is turned off, some user chart data may be deleted. The steps
below illustrate this using ECD001 and ECD002.

1) ECD002 is off; ECD001 is powered and a user chart is created at ECD001.(Sync

source: ECD001)
2) The power to ECD001 is turned off. ECD002 was turned off at step 1, therefore the
user chart is not delivered to ECD002.
3) ECD002 and ECD001 are powered in that order. (Sync source: ECD002)Because
the sync source became ECD002, the user chart created at step 1 is deleted.

13-2
 13. USER CHARTS

13.3 How to Create a User Chart

You can create and modify a user chart in the Voyage planning mode.

To make a complete user chart, do the following:

1. Click the [PLAN] button on the Status bar to go to the Voyage planning mode.
2. Click the [Planning] and [User Chart] buttons on the InstantAccess bar™ to show
the user chart palette and the [User Chart] dialog box.
3. Click the [New] button on the [User Chart] dialog box to create a new chart.

Tidal Area

Line Circle

Clearing
Label
line
4. Click the desired object (button) on the palette.The [Tidal], [Line], [Clearing line]
and [Label] buttons have multiple choices. Right-click the respective button to
show a context sensitive menu. The choices available for each object are shown
below.
Tidal: Current, Predicted
Line: Coast, Nav, Route, Depth
Clearing line: NMT (Not More Than), NLT (Not Less Than)
Label: Label, Point
5. Put the cursor on the location to insert the object then push the left button. See
the figure below for how to construct lines, areas and circles. For the “Tidal” object,
you can set Orientation, Strength and Time from the dialog box. With the “Label”
object you can enter text and show that text on the screen.
Note: An object can also be put at the center of the screen. Do steps 1-4 in this
procedure. On the [User Chart] dialog box, right-click the box to the left of [Object]
then select [Add Object] from the pop-up menu.

13-3
13. USER CHARTS

(3) Click (1) Click

(2) Click
(4) Right-click;
select [Finish].
(2) Drag cursor;
(1) Click click to set.

1) Put cursor where to locate center of circle

then click.
2) Drag cursor to set radius; click to set.
How to create a line How to create a circle

(1) Click

(2) Click

(4) Right-click;
select [Finish].
(3) Click

How to create an area

6. When you insert an object, the following is done in the [User Chart] dialog box:
- Name of the object button appears in the [Object] window
- Latitude and longitude position of the object is displayed
- Total object count is updated
7. To enter a name for the object click the appropriate location in the [Name] window
then use the software keyboard on the Control Unit to enter a name.
Note: The name entered for circles and areas can be shown inside the area or
circle on the screen. For details, see page 8-10.
8. To show the object on the radar display, click the corresponding box in the [Radar]
window to show a checkmark in the box.
For the label, line, clearing line, area and circle, click the corresponding box in
the [Danger] window to use or don't use the object in chart alert calculation. Show
a red checkmark to use the object in chart alert calculation.
For the area, circle and line, you can add Notes as shown below. See the de-
scription and figure below for a description of Notes.
1) Enter the text for the Notes in the [Description] box.
2) Click the box in the [Notes] window of the [User Chart] dialog box to set the
message indication.
• [E] (entering): Shows the message when the own ship enters into the ob-
jects (area or circle). For line setting, shows the message when the own ship
reaches range that is defined in the [Range of notes] menu, from the posi-
tion of setting in the [Notes].
• [P] (passing): Shows the message when the own ship runs over 10 NM in
the objects (area or circle).
• Empty: Shows nothing.

13-4
 13. USER CHARTS

3) At the [Range of notes] (shown only for line) input box, enter the distance from
the Notes position at which to display the Notes.
Note: You cannot select both [Danger] and [Notes] for these symbols; select
either [Danger] or [Notes].

What are Notes?

“Notes” provide, in the Voyage navigation mode, messages for the operator
relative to your vessel’s position. When own ship is x miles from an area or cir-
cle chart object, a message appears in the [Monitor Note] dialog box. The mes-
sage appears for a line (set in [Range of notes]) when own ship is within x
miles of the line or x miles after passing the line.

Location of
Notes
i
Notes
range
setting

Own Position
The pop-up window at right
appears when own ship
approaches a user chart object
within the range set.
Example shown for “E” setting
(approaching object).
9. To continue entering the same symbol, click a new location on the screen and do
step 3. To enter a different symbol, do steps 3 and 4.
10. After you have entered all necessary objects, click the [Save] button.
Note: If the [Save] button is not shown, update the user chart to show the button.
11. The [Save user chart] window appears. Enter a name for the user chart and com-
ments then click the [Save] button.
The figure on the next page shows a user chart and the corresponding entries in the
[User Chart] dialog box.

13-5
13. USER CHARTS

• The Line with the name "Coast" is a coastline.

• The Circle has the Notes "E" which means the message set in the [Description] box
when the own ship enters the circle will be shown.
• The Tidal marks line marks a tidal (current).
• The Area has Radar and Danger checked. This means the area is shown on the radar
display and is used in chart alert calculation.
• The Label with the name "Point No. 1" is a point label and is also shown on the radar
display.
• The Label with the name "Wreck" is a common label and has Danger checked; it is
used in chart alert calculation.

CIRCLE

LI
N
E
(C
TIDAL

oa
st
)
LABEL (Point)

LABEL (Label)
AREA

How to use the Undo feature

The Undo feature, available when creating a route and a user chart, can be accessed
from the [UNDO] button on the InstantAccess bar™, use double-click, or the context-
sensitive menu. In user chart creation the feature is used with object and text input as
follows:

Tidal, Circle, Current, Label: Delete last-entered object.

Area, Line: Erase last-entered point. For [Area], the area must have at least four
points. And for a [Line], there must be at least three points.
Text input: Erase last-entered character or character string.

13-6
 13. USER CHARTS

13.4 How to Edit Objects on a User Chart

User chart object locations and names can be edited using the procedure below.

1. Referring to step 1 and step 2 in section 13.3, show the [User Chart] dialog box.
2. Click [Select] to show the [Select User Chart] di-
alog box.
3. Select the chart with objects to edit, then click
[OK]. The selected chart’s objects appear in the
[User Chart] dialog box. The chart objects also
appear on the currently displayed chart.
4. Edit the chart object information as required. You
can also edit the objects on the chart display.

How to move objects

Drag and drop the object. For circles, polygons,
etc, click the outer line of the area to drag and
drop.

How to change corner points in lines and areas

Drag and
drop point to
new location

Drag and
drop point to
new location

How to change corner point on a line How to change corner point in an area

How to delete points in lines and areas

Place the cursor on the point to delete, right-click to show the context menu, then
select [Delete]. The point is removed and the object is redrawn.

How to insert a corner point on a line or area

Put the cursor on the location where to insert a corner point, right-click the display
area to show the context-sensitive menu then select [Insert].
Note: You can also insert a point from the [User Chart] dialog box with the follow-
ing procedure.
1) Select the line or area from the [User Chart] dialog box.
2) At the bottom-right of the User Chart dialog, where the Latitude/Longitude ap-
pears, right-click the location for the new point. The context menu appears.
3) Click [Insert Before] or [Insert After] as required to insert a new point.
4) Adjust the latitude and longitude for the new point as required.

5. Click [Save] to save the changes and close the [User Chart] dialog box.

13-7
13. USER CHARTS

13.5 How to Delete Objects from a User Chart

You can delete objects from a user chart with the following procedure.

1. Referring to step 1 and step 2 in section 13.3, show the [User Chart] dialog box.
2. Click [Select] to show the [Select User Chart] dialog box.
3. Select the chart with objects to delete, then click [OK]. The selected chart’s ob-
jects appear in the [User Chart] dialog box. The chart objects also appear on the
currently displayed chart.
4. Click the box to the left of the object to delete. A check mark appears. You can
select multiple objects in this manner.
5. Click the [Delete] button to remove the marked object(s).
Note: You can also delete an object from the context menu. Right-click the object
to delete to show the context menu, then select [Delete].
6. Click [Save] to save the changes and close the [User Chart] dialog box.

13.6 How to Copy User Chart Objects

You can copy user chart objects from one chart (the “origin” chart), then paste them
onto a different user chart (“destination” chart) with the following procedure.

1. Referring to step 1 and step 2 in section 13.3, show the [User Chart] dialog box.
2. Click [Select] to show the [Select User Chart] dialog box.
3. Select the “origin” chart, then click [OK].
4. Repeat step 2 and step 3 to select the “destination” chart.
5. On the [Select User Chart] dialog box, click the tab for the “origin” chart.
6. Check the box(es) for the object(s) you want to copy.
7. Click the [Copy] button.
8. On the [Select User Chart] dialog box, click the tab for the “destination” chart.
9. Click [Paste]. The objects selected at step 6 are copied to the chart.
10. Click [Save] to save the changes and close the [User Chart] dialog box.

13-8
 13. USER CHARTS

13.7 How to Select the User Chart Objects to Display

User charts can be displayed on the electronic chart. Open the [Mariner] page in the
[Symbol Display] menu and check the user chart items to display. Select the degree
of transparency for the objects with [Density].

Note: Alpha blending technology is used for transparency effects.

13.8 How to Import User Chart Data

13.8.1 How to import user chart data from other units

You can import user chart data from other units (FMD-3x00, FCR-2xx9 or FAR-3xx0)
with the following procedure. For FEA-2x07 user charts, see section 13.8.2.

1. Set the USB flash memory to the USB port on the Control Unit.

2. Click the button on the InstantAccess bar™, then select [Settings]. A confir-
mation pop up window appears.
3. Click OK to show the [Settings] menu.
4. Click the [File Import] tab, then click the [Select file to import] button. The open file
dialog box appears.

5. Select the file to import, then click the [Open] button. The open file dialog closes.

13-9
13. USER CHARTS

6. Click the box to the left of [Route/User chart] in the "Select data to import:" section
of the [File Import] tab.
7. Click [Import].

13.8.2 How to import a user chart created with ECDIS FEA-2x07

User charts created at the ECDIS FEA-2x07 can easily be imported to this ECDIS.
Copy the user charts to a folder (see chapter 17 in the operator’s manual of the FEA-
2x07) in a USB flash memory then do as follows. Note that FEA-2x05 created user
charts cannot be imported.

1. Set the USB flash memory to the USB port on the Control Unit.
2. Activate the Voyage planning mode.
3. Click the [Manage Data], [Data Import] and [User Chart] buttons to show the [SE-
LECT DIRECTORY] dialog box.

USB Flash 04.04.2013 19:23

4. Select the folder that contains the user chart(s) to be imported then click the [OK]
button.

User Chart Data Import from legacy ECDIS

5. Check the user chart(s) to import then click the [Import] button.

13-10
 13. USER CHARTS

13.8.3 How to import RTZ format user charts

1. Set the USB flash memory to the USB port on the Control Unit.
2. Click the [PLAN] button on the Status bar to go to the Voyage planning mode.
3. Click the [Manage Data] button on the InstantAccess bar™ followed by the [User
Chart] button. The [User Chart Data Management] dialog box appears.
4. Click [Import]. The [SELECT DIRECTORY] pop up window appears.
5. Select the folder that contains the user chart(s) to be imported then click the [OK]
button.
6. Check the user chart(s) to import then click the [Import] button.
7. Click [Close].

13.9 How to Export User Chart Data

You can save user chart data to a USB flash memory and share the data with other
units (FMD-3x00, FCR-2xx9 or FAR-3xx0).

13.9.1 How to export user chart data created on the FMD-3x00

1. Set the USB flash memory to the USB port on the Control Unit.

2. Click the button on the InstantAccess bar™, then select [Settings]. A confir-
mation pop up window appears.
3. Click OK to show the [Settings] menu.
4. Click the [File Export] tab.

5. Check [Route/User chart], then click the [Export] button.

13.9.2 How to export RTZ format user chart data

1. Set the USB flash memory to the USB port on the Control Unit.
2. Click the [PLAN] button on the Status bar to go to the Voyage planning mode.
3. Click the [Manage Data] button on the InstantAccess bar™ followed by the [User
Chart] button. The [User Chart Data Management] dialog box appears.
4. Check the user charts to export.
5. Click the [Export] button. The [SELECT DIRECTORY] pop up window appears.
6. Select the destination folder then click the [OK] button.
7. Click [Close].

13-11
13. USER CHARTS

13.10 How to Delete User Charts

1. Click the [PLAN] button on the Status bar to get into the Planning navigation
mode.
2. Click the [Manage Data] button on the InstantAccess bar™ followed by the [User
Chart] button.

3. Check the user chart(s) to delete.

4. Click the [Delete] button.

13.11 User Chart Reports

1. Click the [Plan] button to go to the Voyage planning mode.
2. Click the [Report] button followed by the [User Chart] button to show the [Select
User Chart] dialog box.

3. Select the appropriate user chart then click the [OK] button to show the selected
report. See the next several pages for examples of reports.

13-12
 13. USER CHARTS

Full report
The full report contains information about each tidal, line, clearing line, area, circle and
label in the user chart selected. Check or uncheck the boxes at the top of the display
to select the report(s) to display.
Check the report(s) to display.

Tidal report
A tidal report provides:

• Position of the tidal

• Type of tidal (current or predicted)
• Speed and direction of the tidal
• Time of the tidal

13-13
13. USER CHARTS

Line report
A line report provides:

• Line name
• Latitude and longitude position of each point on the line
• Where a check mark is input in the column for [Radar], [Danger] or [Notes] on the [Us-
er Chart] dialog box, "On Radar", "Danger" or "Has Notes" appears in the report.

Clearing line
The Clearing line report shows the name and position of clearing lines entered on the
chosen user chart selected.

• "On radar" is shown if the area is shown on the radar overlay.

• "Danger" is shown when a check mark is input in the column for [Danger] on the [User
Chart] dialog box

Area report
An area report provides:

• Area no. and area name

• The latitude and longitude position of each point of the area
• The description of the area
• Where a check mark is input in the column for [Radar], [Danger] or [Notes] on the [Us-
er Chart] dialog box, "On Radar", "Danger" or "Has Notes" appears in the report.

13-14
 13. USER CHARTS

Circle report
The circle report provides:

• The position and radius of circles drawn on a user chart.

• Where a check mark is input in the column for [Danger] or [Notes] on the [User Chart]
dialog box, "Danger" or "Has Notes" appears in the report.

Label report
A label report provides:

• Latitude and longitude position of each label

• Name of each label
• Where a check mark is input in the column for [Danger] or [Notes] on the [User Chart]
dialog box, "Danger" or "Has Notes" appears in the report.

13-15
13. USER CHARTS

13.12 How to Select the User Chart(s) to Use in Route

Monitoring
Do the procedure below to monitor a user chart without linking it to a route. Click the
[NAVI] button on the Status bar then do as shown below.

1. Click the [Voyage], [User Chart] and [Select/Unselect] buttons on the

InstantAccess bar™ to open the [Select Monitor User Chart] dialog box. The [Se-
lect Monitor User Chart] can also be selected by right clicking anywhere inside the
[Route] information box (right side of screen) and then clicking [Monitor User
Chart].

2. Check the chart(s) to use in the [Stored User Chart] window, then click the [<<]
and [Open] buttons. The [Monitor Information] dialog box automatically appears,
and shows the user charts selected for use in route monitoring. Click a user chart
name to see details, in the [Contents] window.

Check ETA
WPT: 3
Distance: 0.00NM
Plan: 10:42 05 Jun 2016
Actual: 10:25 05 Jun 2016
To Localtime
Off Plan:
SPD Calculation:
10 25 05 Jun 2016
Start Calculate
Suggested SPD: 0.0kn

How to cancel use of a user chart during route monitoring

To cancel only a user chart during route monitoring, get into the Voyage navigation
mode, then click the [Voyage], [User Chart], [Select/Unselect] buttons on the Instant-
Access bar™ to show the [Select Monitor User Chart] dialog box. From the [Selected
User Chart] list, select the user chart(s) to cancel, then click the [>>], and [Open] but-
tons.

To cancel both route and user chart in route monitoring, get into the Voyage navigation
mode, then click the [Voyage] and [Stop Monitor] buttons on the InstantAccess bar™.

13-16
14. HOW TO MONITOR ROUTES
Route monitor is a means for permanent monitoring of the ship's behavior relative to
the monitored route. The [Monitor Information] box displays the data on the ship's po-
sition relative to the monitored route. The monitored route consists of the following in-
formation, displayed in the electronic chart area:

• The route is displayed with red dots.

• The limits of channels of each leg are displayed with solid red lines. These limits are
used to detect chart alerts when you are monitoring the route. See chapter 11 for
how to set those limits.
• Each leg has information about planned speed, shown in the [Monitor Information]
dialog box.
• Each leg has information about planned course to steer.
Note: In order to display charts with correctly updated situation, always use current
date as Update Review and Display date during your voyage. If your voyage lasts
more than one week, set current date at least once per week during your voyage. See
section 9.2 for how to set those dates.

14.1 How to Start Route Monitoring

Method 1: InstantAccess bar™
In the Voyage navigation mode, click the [Voyage], [Route] and [Select] buttons on the
InstantAccess bar™. Click a route then click the [Open] button.

177.50NM

14-1
14. HOW TO MONITOR ROUTES

Method 2: Selection from the Route information box

Right-click the [Route Information] box to show the context-sensitive menu, then se-
lect [Select Route] to show the [Select Route] dialog box. Select a route then click the
[Open] button.

177.50 NM

Red box indicates

detailed information
available in larger scale.

Chart alert area

(warning)

Waypoint

14-2
 14. HOW TO MONITOR ROUTES

About monitoring routes

 When you select a route for monitoring, the messages shown below appear, on the
[Select Route] dialog box or in a message window, when a route cannot be opened
for monitoring.
• "Impossible turn at waypoint XX" (XX=waypoint no.). Geometry of the route makes
it impossible for the ship to accomplish a turn. Modify the route to make the turn
possible.
• "Unchecked / Check condition differs". The route has not been checked. Check the
route, on the [Alert Parameters] page.
• "Monitored in the NAVI mode". The route is currently being monitored.
• "More than one WPT needed". The route has only one waypoint. Add more way-
points to the route.
• "Route monitoring cannot be started. Please check ship’s position and conditions."
Click the [OK] button to close the message. Check ship’s position and conditions
of the route.
 If you have small-scale chart(s) on display that have the whole eastern/western (0-
180°E/0-180°W) hemisphere and a part of the other hemisphere on display, there is
a limitation to display a route. To avoid this, set chart center so that the whole eastern/
western hemisphere is not on the screen.
 The route check which occurs after selecting a route can take longer with C-MAP
charts. Wait until the completion of the check.
 If, in the radar mode, route monitoring is stopped, the Alert 691 (ALF format: 10800,1)
"RM Stop - Exceed Max XTE", 692 (ALF format: 10800,2) "RM Stop - Disconnect
Sensors", or 693 (ALF format: 10800,3) "RM Stop - Other Causes" appears. If this oc-
curs, switch to the Chart for Radar mode. The "Monitoring Failed" pop-up window ap-
pears. Click the OK button. Find the reason why route monitoring was stopped and
then restart route monitoring.
 Route monitoring is temporarily stopped (route is grayed out) and an alert appears
when the signal for position, speed or heading is lost. To restore route monitoring,
change the sensor system from System to Local (from the Sensor Information box),
manually enter the lost data, check [Set Drift], then switch to the DR mode.
 Route data is sent to the radar at the start of route monitoring or when the ship transits
a waypoint. If a route is not displayed on the radar, stop then restart monitoring at the
radar chart. A route is erased from the radar when route monitoring is stopped or the
radar chart is restarted. To redisplay the route, stop then restart monitoring at the ra-
dar chart.
 When chart alerts are unchecked while planning a route (see section 11.1.2) and
route monitoring is activated, a message appears in the permanent warning box.
• [Safety Contour] unchecked: "Indication of crossing safety contour if Off. (in moni-
toring)"
• [Areas to be Avoided] unchecked: "Indication of navigational hazards is Off. (in
monitoring)"
• Other alerts unchecked: "Indication of some prohibited areas or areas with special
conditions is Off. (in monitoring)"

14.2 How to Stop Route Monitoring (Manual, Auto)

You can stop route monitoring in two ways:

• In the Voyage navigation mode, click the [Voyage] and [Stop Monitor] buttons.
Route monitoring is also stopped automatically.
• In the Voyage navigation mode, click the [Voyage], [Route] and [Unselect] buttons.

14-3
14. HOW TO MONITOR ROUTES

When alert 691 (ALF format: 10800,1), 692 (ALF format: 10800,2) or 693 (ALF format:
10800,3) occurs, route monitoring is stopped automatically. See the Troubleshooting
table in section 25.5 for details.

14.3 How to Select What Parts of a Route to Display

You can specify what parts of the moni-
tored route to display. Click the [DISP],
[SET] and [Symbol DISP] buttons on the In-
stantAccess bar™. Click the [Route] tab.

14.4 How to View Waypoint Information

Click the [Voyage] and [Monitor INFO] buttons on the InstantAccess bar™ to show the
[Monitor Information] dialog box. Click the [Waypoints] tab to show waypoint informa-
tion.

* Scroll list horizontally to

view items shown in the
right figure.

No. Item Description

1 [To WPT], [GO] The system selects a next waypoint automatically. Check that the To way-
button point is the desired one. The system will automatically advance to a next
waypoint when you pass the To waypoint. The default [To WPT] is WPT2.
If you desire a different one, select it here and the click the [GO] button.
[Distance] Distance from current position to selected waypoint.
[Departure] The time the route was selected for monitoring.
[Actual Average The average speed over the ground, measured every 30 seconds.
SPD]
2 Waypoint list The waypoint list provides for each waypoint WPT no., name, latitude and
longitude position, ETA, plan speed, bearing and distance to leg*, steering
mode ([Rhumbline] or [Greatcircle]), radius, XTD limit, speed max, margin
and local time.
*: The bearing to a leg and the display method for leg distance can be
changed. For details, see paragraph 12.4.1. Can be changed. See
"Leg/NM" on page 12-5.

14-4
 14. HOW TO MONITOR ROUTES

3 [Check ETA] Parameters for checking ETA. The arrow to the left of [Check ETA] col-
window lapse or display the [Waypoints], [Linked User Chart] and [Check Results
]tabs.
[WPT], Select a WPT to find the distance to that waypoint from current position.
[Distance]
[Plan] The planned ETA to the selected waypoint.
[Actual] The actual ETA to the selected waypoint, if current speed is maintained.
[To Localtime] Switch between UTC and local time for ETA. For local time, the settings
used in the creation of the route are used for the ETA calculation. See
section 12.4.1.
[Off Plan] The time difference between planned ETA and calculated ETA to final
WPT, when different. The indication is prefixed with "-" if earlier than
planned; "+" if later than planned.
[SPD Calcula- Enter speed and ETA (time and date) to find the speed to use to arrive by
tion] the ETA.
[Start Calculate] Click to start calculation. The button label changes to [Stop Calculate].
button
[Suggested The system calculates suggested speed so that ETA to the WPT selected
SPD] would be same as planned ETA if type of optimization was "Time table".
4 [Total WPTs] The total number of waypoints in the route.
[Total Distance] The total distance of the route.

14.5 How to View User Chart Information Linked Mon-

itoring Route
1. In monitoring route mode, click the [Voyage] and [Monitor INFO] buttons on the
InstantAccess bar™ to show the [Monitor Information] dialog box.
2. Click the [Linked User Chart] tab.

Check ETA
WPT: 3
Distance: 0.00NM
Plan: 10:42 05 Jun 2016
Actual: 10:25 05 Jun 2016
To Localtime
Off Plan:
SPD Calculation:
10 25 05 Jun 2016
Start Calculate
Suggested SPD: 0.0kn

The [Linked User Chart] list shows all the user charts linked with the monitored route
and their contents. Click a user chart name to show the contents of the chart in the
[Contents] window. For the [Check ETA] window, see the preceding page.

14-5
14. HOW TO MONITOR ROUTES

14.6 How to View User Chart Object Information in

Route Monitoring
In route monitoring, you can cursor pick user chart objects to show their information.
Put the cursor on the user chart symbol to show the pop-up menu. Select [User Chart
INFO] from the pop-up menu. Below are some examples of user chart info.

Userchart
User chartINFO:
INFO:Circle
Circle User
User chart
chart INFO:
INFO: Line
Line User chart
User chart INFO:
INFO: Area
Area

14.7 How to Change Monitored Route to Planned

Route
The monitored route can be transferred to the Voyage planning mode. This is useful
when you don't need the route for monitoring but want to edit it. To transfer the moni-
tored route, click the [Voyage], [Route] and [Move to Plan] buttons on the InstantAc-
cess bar™.

Up to five planned routes can be shown on the display. If you try to display another
route, the route list appears. Deselect a route in order to transfer the monitored route
to the Voyage planning mode.

Note: When the monitored route is changed to a planned route, using the [Move to
Plan] function, the operating mode changes from the Navigation voyage mode to the
Voyage planning mode.

14-6
 14. HOW TO MONITOR ROUTES

14.8 How to Use Instant Track to Return to or Deviate

from Monitored Route
The instant track feature provides a temporary track, consisting of four waypoints, to
return to or deviate from the monitored route. Correct data from navigation sensors is
essential to this function.

There are two instant track modes: [Safe Off Track] and [Back to Track].
[Safe Off Track]: This mode provides a track from the monitored route to a safe loca-
tion to avoid collision or the like.
[Back to Track]: This mode creates a track to follow to return to the monitored route
when the vessel goes outside the channel limits.

The mode is automatically selected according to whether a monitored route is active

or not and the amount of off course. Further, if a monitored route is active while follow-
ing the instant track route, the instant track mode can be changed manually.

Manual mode
Condition Mode
switching
Neither monitored route nor instant track route active.* [Safe Off Track] No
• Both monitored route and instant track route are active.* [Safe Off Track] Yes
• The absolute value of off track is within the channel limit setting.
• Both monitored route and instant track route are active.* [Back to Track] Yes
• The absolute value of off track is outside the channel limit set-
ting.
* An additional instant track route can continuously be created and monitored while
monitoring the instant track route.
The parameters for the track (channel limit, turn radius, etc.) can be set on the [Instant
Track] page. See section 21.4.

14.8.1 Safe off track mode

If it becomes necessary to deviate from the monitored route; for example, to avoid col-
lision, use the [Safe Off Track] mode to create an instant track to a safe location. An
instant track can be created without a monitored route.

1. When the monitored route is active, Click here to show drop

click the [Voyage] and [Instant Track] down list to select mode.
on the InstantAccess bar™ to show the
[Instant Track] dialog box. The mes-
sage "Please click a destination." ap-
pears on the [Planning] page.
Note 1: If a monitored route is active,
the [Back to Track] mode can also be
selected.
Note 2: If a monitored instant track
route is already active, an instant track
When monitored route is active
mode different from the currently active
one can be selected.
2. Click a destination. The location is marked with an orange circle and arrow. The
message "Please click a point to decide an angle." appears in the [Instant Track]
dialog box. The location must be within 50 NM of current position.

14-7
14. HOW TO MONITOR ROUTES

3. Roll the trackball to select the angle of approach to the destination then click.

Current position
Monitored route
T1
T2

WPT2 T3 Instant track

WPT2 T4
(orange)
Instant track
Destination waypoints
(orange)

1 Click destination point . 2 Click a location to set desired angle of approach.

A circle and arrow appear. Instant track is drawn.

The system uses ship position, speed, angle of approach to create an instant track
route. The track is also checked for hazardous objects and the like against the chart
alerts.

During the calculation, the [Instant Track] dialog box shows "Checking" in the [Status]
field. If, after completion of the calculation, the track is suitable, the message "OK" re-
places "Checking". The track and its waypoints, labeled [T1] - [T4], are colored or-
ange. The track is saved to the database as "InstantTrack_XXX" (XXX=001 - 400).

If clicking the [Clear] button while or after creating the track, the track is erased from
the screen.

If there is a problem with the track, an error message appears and the track is erased
from the screen. See section 14.8.3 for all the instant track messages and their mean-
ings.

To return to the monitored route, click a waypoint on a leg of the route to create an
instant track route to use to return to the monitored route.

14.8.2 Back to track mode

When the vessel goes off track, the Alert 172 (ALF format: 172) "Off Track Alarm" ap-
pears in the [Alert] box. To create an instant track to return to the monitored route, use
the [Back to Track] mode as follows:

1. When the monitored route is active, Click here to show drop

click [Voyage] and [Instant Track] on down list to select mode.
the InstantAccess bar™ to show the
[Instant Track] dialog box. The mes-
sage "Please click a WPT on Leg." ap-
pears on the [Planning] page.
Note 1: If a monitored route is active,
the [Safe Off Track] mode can also be
selected.
Note 2: If a monitored instant track
route is already active, an instant track
mode different from the currently active When monitored route is active
one can be selected. Further, a com-
pletely new instant track route to the original monitored route can be created.

14-8
 14. HOW TO MONITOR ROUTES

2. Click a leg or a waypoint on the monitored route. The location must be within 50
NM of current position.
Monitored route
Current position

T1
WPT2 T2
WPT2

T3

 
Click a leg on monitored route. Instant track
(orange) Instant track
waypoints
Point of return to route (orange)

The system uses ship position, speed and final waypoint to create a track. The track
is also checked for hazardous objects and the like against the chart alerts.
During the calculation, the [Instant Track] dialog box shows "Checking" in the [Status]
field. If, after completion of the calculation, the track is suitable, the message "OK" re-
places "Checking". The track and its waypoints, labeled [T1] - [T3], are colored or-
ange. The track is saved to the database as "InstantTrack_XXX" (XXX=001 - 400).

If clicking the [Clear] button while or after creating the track, the track is erased from
the screen.

If there is a problem with the track, an error message appears and the track is erased
from the screen. See section 14.8.3 for all the instant track messages and their mean-
ings.

14-9
14. HOW TO MONITOR ROUTES

14.8.3 Instant track messages

The table below shows all the instant track messages and their meanings.

(1) (4)
(2) (1)

(3)

Message Meaning Color

(1) Instant Track mode
"Back to Track" Back to track mode White
"Safe Off Track" Safe off track mode White
(2) Check result, error message
"Could not create the Track." The track could not be created. Yellow
"Too far destination from own ship." Selected destination is 50 NM or more from cur- Yellow
rent position.
"ROT data is not inputted correctly" No ROT data input, or data is incorrect. Cannot Yellow
create instant track.
"Checking..." Checking route. Red
"OK" Instant track checked and is suitable to follow. Green
"NG" Instant track check failed. Red
"Check error." Route check error. Red
"Instant Track is expired." Route monitor timeout. Red
"Too many WPTs in monitoring More than 190 waypoints are in the monitored Red
route." route. (Instant track cannot be created.)
(3) User operation message
"Please click a destination." Select a destination in the [Safe Off Track] White
mode.
"Please click a point to decide an Set the angle of approach in the [Safe Off Track] White
angle." mode.
"Please click a WPT on leg." Click a waypoint on a leg in the [Back to Track] White
mode
(4) Name of instant track route
InstantTrack_XXX Name of monitored instant track route White
(XXX: 001 - 400)

14-10
 14. HOW TO MONITOR ROUTES

14.8.4 Instant track details

You can see the location and alert type found in an
instant track by clicking the [Details] button on the
[Planning] page in the [Instant Track] dialog box.

Note: If the Status is not [OK], an alert (alarm or

warning priority, depending on set-ting) appears in
the Alert box.

14.8.5 How to monitor, stop monitoring an

instant track route
How to monitor an instant track route
If the route check results is "OK", click the [Monitor] button on the [Planning] page in
the [Instant Track] dialog box to start monitoring the instant track route. Click the but-
ton before the time remaining counts to zero, otherwise the instant track will be can-
celed, followed by the message "Instant Track is expired." After the [Monitor] button is
clicked the [Monitoring] page is opened. The [Monitoring] page shows the name of the
instant track and the instant track mode.

Click the
[Monitor]
button.

The vessel follows the instant track route in the same method as a monitored route,
which is grayed out to indicate it is inactive. For the instant track route connected to a
monitored route, the previous instant track route is also grayed out to show it is inac-
tive. Any additional instant track routes are erased.

To close the [Instant Track] dialog box, click the [Close] button. (The system continues
monitoring the instant track route.)

The following occurs when sensor data is lost while using the instant track function.

Monitoring
Result
condition
Instant track route • An instant track route under creation is deleted. No route can be created.
monitoring. • The [Stop] button is pushed or the instant track route is followed until its com-
pletion.
• After the instant track route is completed, an error message appears and the
[Instant Track] dialog box closes.
No monitored An instant track route under creation is deleted.
route
Monitored route After the route is completed, an error message appears and the [Instant Track]
active dialog box closes.

14-11
14. HOW TO MONITOR ROUTES

Note: If there is no original route (safe off-track mode only) or the original route is not
checked, the message "Not checked against ENC chart" appears in the permanent
warning box.

How to stop monitoring an instant track route

Click the [Stop] button on the [Monitoring] page
in the [Instant Track] dialog box to stop monitor-
ing the instant track route. The system returns to
monitoring the monitored route and the [Plan-
ning] page of the [Instant Track] dialog box
opens.

For the [Back to Track] mode, the instant track

mode is canceled when the vessel returns to the
monitored route. The instant track is grayed out
to show that is inactive.

14-12
 14. HOW TO MONITOR ROUTES

14.8.6 How to change a monitored route when following an instant

track route (safe off track mode only)
Do the following to change a monitored route while following an instant track route.

1. While monitoring an instant track route,

click the [Original Route] button on the
[Monitoring] page in the [Instant Track] dia-
log box to show the [Select Route] dialog
box. Check [Planned Route] to show a list of
planned routes, or check [Instant Track] to
show a list of instant track routes.
2. Select the route to use. The original route or 177.50 NM

the instant track route currently in use can-

not be selected.
3. Click the [Open] button to close the dialog
box. The vessel starts following the newly
selected route.
When an instant track route is completed, the vessel starts following the route selected
at step 2.

14.8.7 Button label and unit state

The label on the button at the position circled in the figure below changes according
to the state of the instant track.

Instant track state Button label

Creating [Monitoring]
Monitoring [Stop]
Return to original route after [Reset] (Instant track route is erased - another instant
back to track mode track route can be created.)

14-13
14. HOW TO MONITOR ROUTES

14.9 How to Share Route During Route Monitoring

With multiple EC-3000 units, you can share the route monitored on the master EC-
3000 unit with other units (FMD-3x00, FCR-2xx9 or FAR-3xx0).

Follow the procedure below to enabling the route sharing feature.

1. Open the menu, select [Monitoring] from the [Shared] menu to show the [Setting]
dialog box.

CRA001
CRA002

2. Right click the equipment ID of the unit to show the pop-up menu. Select [MAS-
TER], [BACKUP], [SYNC] or [CLEAR] as appropriate.
[MASTER]: Assigns selected unit as the master unit. One unit must be assigned
as the master unit.
[BACKUP]: When route monitoring starts on the master, the route and its informa-
tion are displayed on the backup.
[SYNC]: Selected unit receives and displays the route data output from the mas-
ter, and monitors the route displayed on the master.
[CLEAR]: Removes the selected unit from route monitoring sharing.
Note: To restore the original setting for units, click the [Status] column, then select
[Reset].
3. Click the [Save] button to save settings, then click the [Close] button to finish.

14-14
15. NAVIGATION TOOLS
This chapter presents the various navigation tools available with the system. With the
exception of the divider, the tools listed below are in the [Overlay/NAV Tools] box.

• TT/AIS (see chapters 3 and 4) • Predictor

• Echo*1 • Anchor watch
• Parallel index lines • Under keel clearance
• Look-ahead • Curved EBL*2
• Range rings • Divider
*1: Shown only when the [Echo] page is enabled at installation. Not available for B
types.

*2: Shown only when a EC-3000 with TCS functionality is connected to the network.

15.1 How to Access the NAV Tools in the Overlay/

NAV Tools Box
The [Overlay/NAV Tools] box is located at bottom-right position on the screen. There
are two methods to access the NAV Tools.

• Click the page selection buttons to show the desired page.

• Right-click the Overlay/NAV Tools box to show the context-
sensitive menu, then click the desired page.

TT/AIS display Page name Minimize button

settings

Page
selection
buttons

Click this button to

open the TT/AIS
display settings
menu. For details on
TT/AIS settings, see
chapter 18.

[Overlay/NAV Tools] box ([CheckArea] page)

15-1
15. NAVIGATION TOOLS

15.2 Radar Overlay

If the Echo page is enabled at installation, you can show the radar echoes “overlaid”
on the chart (Voyage navigation mode only).

Note: For B type radars, the [Echo] page is not available.

Radar
echo

This ECDIS has many features to support exact match in scale and orientation of the
chart and radar echo image. Exact match of the radar echo image and chart is an es-
sential security feature. If the radar echo image and the chart display match, then the
mariner can rely on what he sees and the mariner also gets a very good confirmation
that his navigation sensors (such as gyro and position receivers) operate properly and
accurately. However, if the mariner is unable to achieve exact match, it is a very strong
indication that something is wrong and he should not rely on what he sees.
Selected scale of displayed chart also defines scale of radar overlay. When you
change the chart scale, the scale of the radar overlay is automatically changed. The
table below shows the standard scale and equivalent radar range.

Radar Standard Radar Standard

range (nm) scale range (nm) scale
0.25 1:4,000 6 1:90,000
0.5 1:8,000 12 1:180,000
0.75 1:12,000 24 1:350,000
1.5 1:22,000 48 1:700,000
3 1:45,000 96 1:1,500,000

15-2
 15. NAVIGATION TOOLS

15.2.1 How to show the radar overlay

Radar echoes can be output to the ECDIS and shown on its display. Like details on
S57 charts, the radar overlay can be displayed or removed from the chart display. The
transparency of the echo display can be set from the [Echo] page in the [Overlay/NAV
Tools] box. To activate and setup the radar overlay, do the following:

1. With the system in [RADAR] mode, begin radar transmission.

Note: While the system is preparing for radar transmission, the radar overlay is
not shown on the chart display.
2. Switch the system to [CHART for RADAR]
mode, then select the [Echo] page from the
[Overlay/NAV Tools] box.
3. Click the [ON/OFF] button at [Display] to show
[ON] (radar overlay ON) to activate the overlay.
"Status: OK" appears under [Antenna] if the ra-
dar signal is being received. "Status: No Data"
is displayed if there is no radar signal.
Note: The radar display, TT symbols and AIS OK
symbols can also be hidden by clicking
[CLEAR RADAR] on the Status bar.

4. [Echo Level] adjusts the sensitivity of the radar picture. To adjust, put the cursor
on the slider bar and roll the scrollwheel.
5. [Density] controls the "see through" behavior of the radar overlay. [100%] overlays
the radar echo on the chart without modification. "75%" displays radar echoes
faintly, and "25%" displays radar echoes somewhat faintly. It is recommended to
use 25% or 50% when navigating narrow channels, so as not to conceal land-
masses.
6. Click the [Antenna] drop-down list to select the radar that is to feed radar echoes.

15.2.2 Error Between Radar Echo Image and Chart

There are several reasons why the radar echo image and chart display do not match
exactly. The mismatch is a combination of several reasons and removing one reason
doesn't solve the mismatch perfectly. There is a fundamental difference between the
radar echo image and corresponding chart feature. The radar echo is a reflection from
the real life target and the actual position of the real life target is the front edge of the
radar echo. Therefore, the radar echo should start from the chart feature and exist as
far as the radar pulse length goes.

How to compensate for bearing error

Bearing error occurs in the following instances:

• Gyro error
• Inaccurate chart
• Improper installation parameters (radar overlay bearing offset)

15-3
15. NAVIGATION TOOLS

How to compensate for position error

Position is caused by the following:

• Inaccurate position
• Position offset
• Inaccurate chart
• Improper installation parameters (conning position offset, position receiver antenna
offset, radar overlay range offset)

15.2.3 Error Sources for Radar Echo Image and TT Mismatch

There are several reasons why the radar echo image and tracked target symbols do
not match exactly.

1. Different gyro value at radar overlay and at ECDIS.

2. Improper installation parameters (radar overlay bearing offset, radar overlay
range offset, conning position offset).
The example below shows how different gyro value set at radar overlay and at ECDIS
affect the display of the ECDIS.

Different gyro value at Equal gyro value at

radar and ECDIS radar and ECDIS

15-4
 15. NAVIGATION TOOLS

15.3 Parallel Index (PI) Lines

The parallel index lines are useful for keeping a con-
stant distance between own ship and a coastline or
a partner ship when navigating. There are six sets
of PI lines (PI-P6) and you can turn them on or off
individually. Select the PI line to process with the
[Display] pull-down list then click the [ON] or [OFF]
button as appropriate. One, two, three or six lines
can be shown - the actual number of lines shown
depends on the line interval.

Only one set can be shown.

15.3.1 How to activate, deactivate PI lines

Select the PI line(s) set to activate or deactivate with the [Display] drop-down list. Ac-
tivate or deactivate the set selected with the [ON], [OFF] button.

The [Func. ON], [Func. OFF] button globally activates, deactivates all PI lines selected
to [ON].

15.3.2 PI line bearing reference

PI line bearing reference may be relative to own ship’s heading (Relative) or refer-
enced to North (True). Select [True] or [REL].

15.3.3 Number of PI lines to display

The maximum number of PI lines to display may be selected from 1, 2, 3 or 6 lines as
below. The actual number of lines visible may be less depending on line interval. Se-
lect the number of lines to display at [Index Lines].

15.3.4 PI line mode

The PI line mode can be set for parallel (0-degrees) or perpendicular (90-degrees).
Select [Parallel] or [Perpendicular] at [Mode].

15-5
15. NAVIGATION TOOLS

15.3.5 How to adjust PI line orientation, PI line interval

There are two ways to adjust PI line orientation and PI line interval: through the menu
and on the screen.

How to adjust PI line orientation, PI line interval from the menu

1. Set the orientation with [Bearing].
2. Set the line interval with [Distance].

How to adjust PI line orientation, PI line interval on the screen

Adjust orientation:
Adjust interval:
Put cursor on PI line
Put cursor on any PI line
bisecting own ship
other than the one
marker then drag cursor.
bisecting own ship
marker then drag cursor.

How to adjust orientation and interval, multiple PI lines

Adjust orientation:
Put cursor anywhere
on PI line (other than
own ship marker) then
drag cursor.
Adjust interval:
Put cursor on own
ship mark then
drag cursor.

How to adjust orientation and interval, single PI line

15.3.6 How to reset the PI lines

You can automatically return PI lines to default orientation, 0-degrees for parallel ori-
entation, 90-degrees for perpendicular orientation. This is faster than doing it manual-
ly. Click the [Reset] button to reset the parallel lines.

15-6
 15. NAVIGATION TOOLS

15.3.7 How to adjust PI line length

You can adjust the forward and backward lengths of a PI line when [Index Lines] is set
to 1.

1. Open the MENU and select [NAV Tools] and [PI Lines].

2. If not already displayed, click the [ON/OFF] button to display the PI line whose
length you want to adjust.
3. Click the value in [Forward] and [Backward] columns to adjust their lengths, refer-
ring to the illustration below.

PI line

Adjust the
forward length.
Adjust the
backward length.
4. Click the [Save] button to finish.

15.4 Look-ahead
Look-ahead sets the area ahead and around own ship for which to check for safe nav-
igation. See section 11.2 for how to activate own ship check.

15-7
15. NAVIGATION TOOLS

15.5 Ring
The range rings are the concentric set of rings on the chart display. They provide an
estimation of the range to an object. You can turn them on or off from the [Ring] page.

Range
ring

The interval between rings changes with the chart scale as shown in the table below.

Chart scale Ring interval (nm) Chart scale Ring interval (nm)
1:1,000 0.025 1:100,000 2.0
1:2,000 0.05 1:200,000 4.0
1:5,000 0.10 1:500,000 8.0
1:10,000 0.25 1:1,000,000 16.0
1:20,000 0.5 1:2,000,000 20.0
1:50,000 1.0
How to select the range calculation method
The range calculation method for the EBL and VRM can be selected to Rhumbline or
Great Circle. Do as follows to select a calculation method.

1. Open the menu, then select [NAV Tools] and [Geometry] to show the [Geometry]
page.

2. Select [Rhumbline] or [Great Circle] with the drop down list box for [Rings].
3. Click the [Save] button to save the setting, then click the close button to finish.

15-8
 15. NAVIGATION TOOLS

15.6 Predictor
The predictor is a tool for estimating your ship's future positions and behavior. The on-
screen predictor graphic consists of three pieces of your ship, drawn in true scale to
successive future positions. The position of the third symbol will be your approximate
position at the end of the time interval selected. The predictor is calculated using cur-
rent speed and rate of turn. Docking speed components (transversal bow speed,
transversal stern speed, transversal center speed and rate of turn) are assumed to be
stable during the prediction period. The predictor can be used in every steering-state,
including manual steering.

To activate and set the Predictor, show the [Predictor] page. Turn the display on or off
with [Display]. Set the time (30, 60, 90, 120, 150, 180 seconds), with [Time].

Movement of
predictor
(three pieces)

The Predictor is updated every three seconds internally and the status of the predictor
is shown with [Status] as shown in the table below.

Indication Status
OK Speed is suitable, in accordance with esti-
mation of ship’s dynamics.
Not Enough Speed Speed is too low, in accordance with esti-
mation of ship’s dynamics.
Not Available. Reset Filter May Restore. Calculation not possible, in accordance
with estimation of ship’s dynamics.
Note: The ship speed must be 0.5 kn or higher. The predictor may not be displayed
or may not work properly if the speed is lower than that value.

15-9
15. NAVIGATION TOOLS

15.7 Anchor Watch

The anchor watch feature checks to see if your ship is drifting when it should be at rest.
The anchor mark appears at the location of your ship’s anchor. You can adjust the lo-
cation for the anchor (see section 22.13).

Alarm radius

Anchor mark

Own ship mark

To set the anchor watch:

1. Select the [Anchor Watch] page.
2. Set the alarm radius (in nautical miles) with [Drag Circle].
3. Drop the anchor then click the [Drop Anchor] button.
The anchor mark and alarm radius circle appear. You can adjust the location of
the anchor mark and the alarm radius by drag and dropping them.
Note: A latitude and longitude position can be set as the anchor watch position.
Put a checkmark in the box below the [Drop Anchor] button to show the latitude
and longitude input boxes. Enter latitude and longitude then click the [Drop An-
chor] button.
4. Click the [Start Anchor Watch] button to start the anchor watch.
If your vessel travels more than the distance set here, the corresponding caution is
generated.

If your ship drifts more than the anchor watch setting, the Alert 495 (ALF format:
10802) “Anchor Watch Setting” appears. The alert is escalated from warning level to
alarm level if the alert is not acknowledged within two minutes. Also, if your vessel re-
turns to within the tolerable radius, the alert is status is automatically changed to rec-
tified.

To continue to use the anchor watch, click the [Clear Anchor] button to set the alarm
about your current position. To stop the anchor watch, click the [Stop Anchor Watch]
button. The caution is not generated even if your ship drifts more than the distance set
with [Drag Circle]. Also, if the anchor watch alert is active and the [Stop Anchor Watch]
button is clicked, the alert is also acknowledged and rectified.

15-10
 15. NAVIGATION TOOLS

15.8 UKC (Under Keel Clearance)

15.8.1 UKC overview

UKC is the distance between the deepest point of the vessel's hull and the seabed.
The Actual UKC feature continuously checks the ship's draught setting (UKC), and ac-
tual depth.

When a look-ahead area is set and the depth within the set area gets shallower than
the UKC, the Alert 30173 “UKC Limit” is generated. Further, if the actual depth (calcu-
lated from the transducer) is shallower than the UKC, the Alert 30644 "Actual UKC
Limit" is generated.

If the current depth is less than the echo alarm setting the Alert 30801 “Depth Limit”
also is generated. Depth data is required to use the UKC and Echo Alarm functions.

UKC takes into account the amount of hull subsidence (Squat Effect). The evaluation
criteria for Alert 10173 “UKC Limit” and Alert 30644 "Actual UKC Limit" are not based
solely on the distance from the keel to the seabed, under keel clearance or draught.

Note 1: When conducting a route check, UKC is calculated based on the planned
speed for each leg.
Note 2: The sensor value shown is the depth to the transducer. Convert the value to
the distance to the keel.

Sea surface

Draft

Under keel clearance (UKC) Distance from keel

to seabed

Echo alarm setting

Seabed

15-11
15. NAVIGATION TOOLS

15.8.2 How to set UKC

1. Select the [UKC] page from the [Overlay/NAV
Tools] box.
2. Use [Echo Alarm Limit] to set the distance for
the echo alarm. To activate the alarm, click the
[ON/OFF] button to show [ON].
3. At [UKC Limit], set ship's UKC limit. To activate
the UKC feature, click the [ON/OFF] button to
show [ON].
4. Use [Current Draught] to set your ship's draft.
Be sure to change the setting whenever the
draft changes.
5. Use [Type] to set the shape of your ship's hull
to show on the [UKC] window, [V-shape] or [Concave]. See the figure in
section 15.8.2.
6. Click the [Apply] button.

15.8.3 UKC window

The UKC window provides a visual graphic of the relationship between UKC, draft and
current depth. The window can be shown or hidden as desired and located anywhere
within the electronic chart area. To show the window, click [Show UKC Window] on
the [UKC] page. To move the window, drag and drop.

100.2m 100.2m

V-shape hull presentation Concave hull presentation

15-12
 15. NAVIGATION TOOLS

15.9 Curved EBL

The [Curved EBL] function shows the planned steering radius. You can use this func-
tion to determine the best location to begin a turn. You can also use the [Curved EBL]
function to determine whether a turn is conduct as planned.

To show/hide the [Curved EBL], click the [ON]/[OFF] button on the [Curved EBL] page
of the [Overly/NAV Tools] box.

Note: This function is only available when a EC-3000 with TCS functionality is con-
nected to the network.

XTD limit Curved EBL

Steering line

OS mark

WPT1

15-13
15. NAVIGATION TOOLS

15.10 Divider
The divider performs the following calculations:

• Range and bearing between two points

• TTG between two points
• Total TTG from start to end
• Total distance from start to end
The divider is available in the Voyage navigation and Voyage planning modes. Only
one divider can be displayed. The divider is neither saved nor shared among other
units (FMD-3x00, FCR-2xx9 or FAR-3xx0).

15.10.1 How to use the divider

Do as shown below to use the divider.

Right-click
starting point Divider appears.
00.00
00.00

Select [New
Divider]


00:32 Drag circle to

00:32 next point
5.9NM

5.0NM
051.2°
- TTG to point
- Total TTG 2.6NM
00:00 - Total distance 00.00
055.1°
00:00 00.00
Distance and bearing
between points
Starting point

How to delete points

Point(s) can be deleted. Put the cursor on a point, right click, then select [Delete Points] from
the pop-up menu. The point(s) deleted depends on the point selected.
End point Intermediate point

Connecting
Delete points are
intermediate deleted.
Delete end point point

15-14
 15. NAVIGATION TOOLS

You can also drag from an intermediate point to make another point.

00:13
2.75NM
00:26 00:13 11.63NM 358.6°
22.60NM 00:26 261.1°
22.60NM
11.63NM
170.6° 11.63NM
Drag here. 170.6°

00:13 00:13
00:13 00:13
10.57NM 10.57NM
10.97NM 10.97NM°
213.6° 213.6°
00:00 00:00
00:00   00:00 

Note: If you drag a point to the edge of the displayed area, the chart scrolls in that
direction.

15.10.2 Usage characteristics, limitations

• The distance between points is shown to the hundredths decimal place up to 100
NM and to the tenths decimal place thereafter.
• A maximum of 50 points can be inserted, and the maximum measurable distance
between two points is 240.0 NM.
• The TTG value is rounded to the nearest decimal place. Therefore, the displayed
total TTG may not equal the sum of all the TTGs.
• The TTG is measurable to 99:00. If the TTG is higher, the TTG indication is
">99:00".
• The ship’s speed must be at least 0.5 kn to calculate TTG.
• The divider cannot be used in latitudes higher than 85°.
• In the split screen display, the divider is viewable on both the main and sub views,
but is operable only on the main view.

15.10.3 How to deactivate and erase the divider

Get into the Voyage navigation or Voyage planning mode then right-click the screen
to show the context-sensitive menu. Select [Clear Divider].

Ship on center
Pick Report
Chart Legend
Manual Update
Clear Divider

15-15
15. NAVIGATION TOOLS

15.10.4 How to select the calculation method for the divider

The range calculation method for the divider can be selected to Rhumbline or Great
Circle. Do as follows to select a calculation method.

1. Open the menu, then select [NAV Tools] and [Geometry] to show the [Geometry]
page.

2. Select [Rhumbline] or [Great Circle] with the drop down list box for [Divider].
3. Click the [Save] button to save the setting, then click the close button to finish.

15-16
16. NAVIGATION SENSORS

16.1 CCRS
This chart radar employs a Consistent Common Reference System (CCRS) for the ac-
quisition, processing, storage and distribution of sensor information. The CCRS en-
sures that all parts of the system uses the same source and values, e.g., speed
through water, heading, etc. The illustration below shows the CCRS diagram.

Processor Unit Processor Unit

CCRS CCRS

SENSOR
CCRS ADAPTER

Sensors

The CCRS process NMEA0183 and IEC 61162-1 sentences. No other types of data
(video signals, etc.) are processed.

Check for validity, legitimacy

The system checks received sentences for validity and legitimacy.

Validity check: A sentence’s checksum, status (A/V), Mode indicator and setting val-
ues are checked. (If checksum error is found, the sentence is disaffirmed.
Legitimacy check: The range and accuracy of a sentence is checked.)
If the check for both is OK a valid flag results. If either is invalid, the invalid flag is given.

Types of CCRS
There are two types of CCRS: System and Local. The System CCRS integrates all
navigation devices. In the Local CCRS each navigation device operates independent-
ly.

Representative sensors
If the system has multiple like sensors, the CCRS selects the representative sensor.
Generally, the system uses common representative sensors; however, independent
representative sensors (local representative sensors) can also be used.

16-1
16. NAVIGATION SENSORS

16.2 How to Select Navigation Sensors

The operator can select navigation sensors to use for navigation and view their current
values on the applicable page in the [System Sensor Setting] and [Local Sensor Set-
ting] menus. To access these menus, right-click the Sensor information, datum box
then click [Select Sensor] followed by [Setting].

The descriptions in this section show the sensor menus in the radar mode. The sensor
menus in the chart mode mirror those in the radar mode, although the layout is differ-
ent. Any change made in a sensor menu is reflected to the companion sensor menu,
to synchronize the data between the modes.

16.2.1 Sensors menu description

[HDG] page (Local Sensor)
[Sensors]: Select the heading sensor to use.
[Analog Gyro]: No use.
[Manual]: Set heading manually when there is no head-
ing sensor available. (Not shown on IMO type.)
[Gyro Correction]: Set correction manually for the head-
ing value. (Not available with the [System Sensor Set-
ting] menu.)

Gyro Correction

16-2
 16. NAVIGATION SENSORS

[SPD] page (System Sensor)

[Stabilization Mode]: Select the water stabilization
mode: Select [Bottom] for ground stabilization, or select
[Water] for sea stabilization.
[Sensor Type]: Select [GPS] in case of a GPS naviga-
tor, or [LOG] for speed log.
[Data Source]: Check [Sensors] to use a sensor in the
[Sensors] list, or click [Manual] to enter speed manually.
Use [Manual] when no speed source is available.
[Manual]: Input speed manually. Check [Water] in [Sta-
bilization Mode] and deactivate the AIS function to en-
able entry.
[Reference SPD]: Check to use radar as the source for
speed and course. (Only available with the Local Sen-
sor Setting and checking [Bottom] in [Stabilization
Mode].)
[Set Drift]: Check the [Set Drift] checkbox to manually
set speed and course of drift. Note that you can select
manual drift only if you check [Water] in [Stabilization
Mode].

Angle = Difference between heading and COG

Spd = Speed component of the drift vector
Cse = Course component of the drift vector

Vector defined by (SOG and COG) is equal to vector sum of vectors defined by (SPD
and HDG) and (set and drift).

North
cse
SOG
HDG
COG spd
SPD
SPD: water speed
HDG heading of ship
SOG: speed over ground
gle COG: course over ground
an spd: speed of drift
cse: course of drift
angle: difference between HDG and COG

16-3
16. NAVIGATION SENSORS

[COG/SOG] page
Select the source (GPS receiver) for speed over the
ground and course over the ground.

[POSN] (Position) page

The sensor label (here, GPS001, GPS002) indicates
the name of the sensor.

[Data Source]: Check [Sensors] to use a sensor in the

[Sensors] list, or click [DR] to enter position manually.
When the position source is changed based on priori-
ties and signal validity to another position source, then
you get the Alert 472 (ALF format: 10602,1) "Position
Source Change".

[DR]: Check [DR] when no position source is available.

16-4
 16. NAVIGATION SENSORS

[Other Sensor] page

To show the [Other Sensors] page, open the menu and select [Other Sensor Settings]
in the chart mode.

1.9 012.1°

130.7m Mid: 130.8m Aft: 130.8m

037.3° 3.2kn

[Wind]: Select wind unit, wind reference, and wind source. See section 16.9.
[Depth Below Trans]: Depth from hull at bow and aft to bottom. A depth alert value may
be entered to alert you when the depth is within the value set.
[Temperature]: Water surface temperature.
[Water Current]: Tide at own ship’s position.

16-5
16. NAVIGATION SENSORS

16.3 Source of Position

The figure below shows how source for position is chosen. The position sensors have
either primary or secondary as input for their calculation. DGPS position sensors are
considered more accurate than other position sensors.

The latitude and longitude position is shown at the top-right position on the chart radar
display, and in the example below the position source is DGPS. Other indications that
may be displayed in the position area are as follows:

• [DR]: Shown in yellow when position source is dead reckoning.

• [DGPS], [GPS]: Name of position source.

Position sensor Valid data exists

selected as
high priority

No valid data exists

Position sensor Valid data exists Position

selected as used by
low priority this system

No valid data exists

Backup
Selected
dead
reckoning

If the system changes the source of position because of lost sensor data, the system
immediately generates the Alert 472 (ALF format: 10602,1) "Position Source
Change".

16-6
 16. NAVIGATION SENSORS

16.4 Primary and Secondary Positions of Own Ship

This system displays position in one of four methods

• CCRP position: CCRP

• Primary position: Position generated by position source chosen as highest priority.
• Secondary position: Position generated by position source chosen as 2nd highest
priority.
• Pivot position: Ship’s pivot point position.
The position source for primary position of own ship is chosen as Primary on the
[POSN] page of the [Sensor] menu.

The position source for secondary position of own ship is chosen as Secondary on the
[POSN] page of the [Sensor] menu. Secondary position of own ship is not available as
latitude/longitude value for the user.

Position sensor
Valid data exists
selected as
Secondary

Position sensor Secondary

No valid data selected as position of
Valid data exists
priority lower than own ship
Secondary used by
this system

No valid data Secondary

position of own
ship is not valid

System, primary and secondary positions of your ship

may be plotted on the chart radar display with the past
tracks feature. You can control their visibility, etc. from
the [Tracking] page of the [Symbol Display] menu,
shown in the right figure. In this example, past tracks
are plotted using the primary position-fixing equip-
ment.

16-7
16. NAVIGATION SENSORS

16.5 Source of Navigation Data

The figure below shows how various sources of navigation data are chosen. "SOG,
COG" is speed over the ground and course over the ground, respectively. "SPD" is
speed through the water.”Drift” is the difference between speed through the water and
speed over ground.

Heading used by the system is shown at the top-right position on the chart radar dis-
play. In the example shown below, heading is received from a gyrocompass and it is
shown without additional text, meaning the value is referenced to true North.

Heading sensor
Selected
selected as
high priority Heading
used by
No valid this
data exists Heading sensor Valid data exists system
selected as low
priority

No valid
data exists Alert 450 (ALF format: 10601,10)
GPS1
“Heading Sensor Not Available”

SOG/COG used by the system is shown at the top-right position on the chart radar
display. In the example below, COG and SOG are from chosen position sensors and
this is indicated with the text "GPS*" or "LOG*" (* is the number of sensors).

COG/SOG from Valid data exists

position sensor
SOG/COG
used by
No valid COG/SOG this system
calculated from Valid data exists
data exists
speed log

16-8
 16. NAVIGATION SENSORS

Speed used by the system is shown at the top-right position on the chart radar dis-
play.The figure below shows the source of water speed is used for drift calculation.

Water Stabilization Selected and Manual

Manual speed Speed
Mode Selected Manual set drift exists
+ used by
speed Manual set drift this
system
Selected and no manual set
Not selected drift exists

Selected and
Manual set drift
LOG exists Manual speed
(Water speed) +
Manual set drift

Selected and No manual set

drift exists
No valid data exists

LOG Selected
(Ground speed)

No valid data exists

Selected
GPS

Not selected

Bottom Stabilization
Mode Selected Reference SPD Selected
(local only)

Alert related to SOG, COG, speed and heading components

It is possible that the operator has not chosen any speed or heading sensors, or that
the chosen sensors do not have any valid values. This kind of a situation is critical for
the system, because it cannot even perform dead reckoning.

When no heading source is available, the system generates the Alert 450 (ALF format:
10601,9) "Heading Sensor Not Available."

When no speed source is available, the system generates the Alert 453 (ALF format:
10601,10) "SDME Sensor Not Available." When no COG/SOG data is available, the
system generates the Alert 279 (ALF format: 10601,6) "COG/SOG Not Available."

16-9
16. NAVIGATION SENSORS

16.6 Switching of Sensor and Indication

When a sensor cannot be used because of some problem, the system automatically
switches the sensor. When this occurs the name of the newly selected sensor appears
in yellow.

GYRO1 GYRO1
LOG
BT

Speed sensor
changed

16.7 Filter Status

The system incorporates a filter that receives raw sensor data, checks sensor integrity
and processes multiple sensor data to produce a continuous estimate of ship’s posi-
tion and motion.

By default, the filter uses data from all available sensors for filtering and integrity mon-
itoring. The exception is heading data; only the selected heading device affects the
output of the filter, but other heading sensors (including magnetic compasses) are
used for integrity monitoring.

Sensors may be excluded manually or automatically. An excluded sensor participates

in neither integrity monitoring or filtering. The filter automatically excludes a sensor
from use if the sensor fails the first level of integrity check (for example, if a sudden
jump is detected). If the actual integrity check fails for some reason and the filter is able
to identify the faulty sensor, the faulty sensor is automatically excluded.

Sensor integrity is determined by: (1) monitoring the statistical accuracy of each sen-
sor independently and analyzing the input values and using the information of the type
of sensor, and (2) monitoring the difference between pairs of sensors. The system
checks heading, rate of turn, position, COG/SOG and CTW/STW data for integrity, in
accordance with INS regulations (IEC-61924-2). The result is either [Passed], [Low
Accuracy], [Doubtful], [Failed], [Excluded] or [Not Available].

16-10
 16. NAVIGATION SENSORS

The integrity check result appears in the following locations:

• [Local Sensor Setting] and [System Sensor Setting] menus. The figure below shows
the result for the heading sensor GYRO1.

PRIM:GYRO1
GYRO1

Passed

Integrity
GYRO2 check
2.1°
Passed
result

Passed

Chart for Radar mode Radar mode

• [Filter Status] page in the [Other Sensor Setting] menu. See the next page.
Note: Depending on settings selected at installation, the integrity check result colors
can be changed.
[Passed]: Data is available for comparison and data is normal.
[Low Accuracy]: Data signal strength is low, but data is normal.
[Doubtful]: Data is not available for comparison, but data is normal.
[Failed]: Data is available (or not available) for comparison and data is abnormal.
[Excluded]: Value is greatly changed.
[Not Available]: Sentence is abnormal or improper.
For heading data, If there is only one gyro, the judgment is "Doubtful" when the ship
is stopped because there is no COG for comparison. When the ship begins to move,
the judgment is changed to "Passed" because there is COG for comparison.

The methods of integrity monitoring are outlined in the table below.

Sensor Comparison
Position • Comparison with other position sensors.
• Comparison with dead reckoning position.
Heading • Comparison with other heading sensors.
• Comparison with a COG sensor (used only if other heading sen-
sors are not available and if COG is high enough).
Speed over the • Comparison with other SOG sensors.
ground • Comparison with water speed sensors is a secondary option (used
only if other SOG sensors are not available).
Speed through • Comparison with other STW sensors.
the water • Comparison with STW sensors is a secondary option (used only if
other STW sensors are not available).
Rate of turn • Comparison with other rate of turn sensors.
The status and integrity of all sensors can be monitored from the [Filter Status] page
in the [Other Sensor Settings] menu. Sensors can also be unselected and the filter re-
set from this page.

16-11
16. NAVIGATION SENSORS

Passed
Passed
Passed
Passed
Doubtful
Passed
Passed

The [Status] column indicates sensor status as follows:

• [Selected] (sensor selected for use in filter)

• [Unselected] (sensor not used in filter)
• [Not Available] (no sensor information)
• [Excluded] (automatically excluded sensor)
The [Integrity] column indicates sensor integrity as either [Passed], [Low Accuracy] or
[Failed]. The integrity evaluation is [Doubtful] when there are no other sensors to com-
pare with.

The [Comparisons] column shows the sensors compared and the integrity evaluation
of compared sensors in parentheses. Using the illustration above as an example,
SOG/COG data fed from GP0002 is compared with the sensors GP0001 and VD0001.
The integrity evaluation for the compared sensors is [Passed].

To unselect a sensor manually, select the sensor from the drop-down list at the bot-
tom left corner of the page, click the [Unselect] button then click the [Save] button. [Un-
selected] appears in the [Status] column. To reselect an unselected sensor, select the
sensor from the drop-down list, click the [Select] button. [Selected] appears in the [Sta-
tus] column

The [Reset Filter] button functions to recover from sensor failure. When the button is
operated:

• Automatically excluded sensors are re-included.

• All data history is erased.
• Output values are re-estimated using new data.
• Integrity monitoring is restarted using new data.
Note 1: The filter can also be reset from the context-sensitive menu. Right-click any-
where in the Sensor information box to show the context-sensitive menu then select
[Filter Reset].
Note 2: When the filter is reset for this system, all networked equipment’s filters are
reset.

16-12
 16. NAVIGATION SENSORS

16.8 Position Alignment

The position alignment feature functions to fine tune ship's position by using radar
echo target and chart material.

If position alignment is in use, the Alert 640 (ALF format: 10803) "Chart Align: Over 30
Min." is generated every 30 minutes to remind the user to align position. The alert is
automatically erased in 10 seconds.

Note: This feature is effective with the chart radar unit whose data source for FILT is
assigned the highest priority.

16.8.1 How to align position

If the radar echo targets' symbols are not positioned correctly on the chart, there is ei-
ther position error or gyro error or some combination of these errors.

Position may be aligned on the chart radar

display by moving own ship position or by
moving radar target position. To align posi-
tion, get into the Voyage navigation mode,
click the [Offset] button at the top-right position on the screen. (You are asked if you
want to align position; click the [Yes] button to proceed.) Put the cursor on the correct
position then click. The amount of offset, in bearing and range, appears to the right the
[Offset] button.

The latitude and longitude position indication is shown in yellow characters when the
position align feature is active.

16.8.2 How to cancel position alignment

Click the [Offset] button to cancel the position offset.

16.9 Wind Sensor

The chart radar can display and output wind data in the following three formats:
Apparent: Windmeter-measured wind speed and direction.
Wind angle reference: Heading
North: True wind angle, true wind speed
Wind angle reference: True North
Theoretical: True wind angle, true wind speed
Wind angle reference: Heading

The illustration below shows wind speed and direction with given ship data.
The wind values are as shown below.

Ship information:
COG: 60°
SOG: 8.7 kn
Heading: 45°

16-13
16. NAVIGATION SENSORS

Wind angle Wind speed

Apparent: 345° 10 kn
North: 330° 5 kn
Theoretical: 285° 5 kn

Wind Angle
(Apparent: 345°)
North
Wind from NNW (330°) Wind speed
(Apparent: 10 kn)

Apparent Wind

Heading

True Wind
Ship's Speed
(SOG: 8.7 kn)
Wind Speed
(North/Theoretical: 5.0 kn)
Wind Angle Angle (reference North)
(Theoretical: 285°)

Wind Angle
(North: 330°)

Apparent, North (true wind referenced to North), Theoretical (true wind referenced to
heading) may be selected from the [Other Sensor Settings] menu. If the wind indica-
tion is not accurate; for example, the wind is blowing from the North but the wind di-
rection displays otherwise, check if the format is Theoretical. If it is, switch to another
format.

16-14
 16. NAVIGATION SENSORS

Wind reference
(APPARENT, NORTH, THEORETICAL)

1.9 012.1°

130.7m Mid: 130.8m Aft: 130.8m

20.1°C

037.3° 3.2kn

Source of Wind data䠖

((T)HEORETICAL and (R)EL, (T)HEORETICAL, (T)RUE)

16.10 Depth Sensor

The depth output from a depth sensor (for example, echo sounder) is shown on the
[Other Sensor] page in the [Other Sensor Settings] menu.

The content of the [Other Sensor] page depends on sensors connected.

In this example there are three transducers (bow, mid and aft) installed.

1.9 012.1°

130.7m Mid: 130.8m Aft: 130.8m

037.3° 3.2kn

The system displays depth value as depth below the transducer. If required, you can
get an alert when the measured depth is less than the "Echo Alarm Limit" setting at
the [UKC] page in the [Overlay/NAV Tools] box. The system generates the Alert 485
(ALF format: 10801) "Depth Limit".

16-15
16. NAVIGATION SENSORS

This page is intentionally left blank.

16-16
17. AIS SAFETY, NAVTEX
MESSAGES

17.1 AIS Safety Messages

You can send and receive messages via the VHF link, to a specified destination
(MMSI) or all AIS-equipped ships within communication range of your ship. Messages
can be sent to warn of safety of navigation, for example, an iceberg sighted. Routine
messages are also permitted. Short safety-related messages are only an additional
means to broadcast safety information. They do not remove the requirements of the
GMDSS.

17.1.1 How to send an AIS safety message

Note: If you are using the Trackball Control Unit
RCU-026, display the software keyboard ([DISP]
button, [ ], [ON] on the InstantAccess bar™)
before starting this procedure.
1. In the Voyage navigation mode, click the
[MSG] and [Safety MSG] buttons on the In-
stantAccess bar™ to show the [Message] dialog box.
MMSI of receiver Type of message
(MMSI or “Broadcast”) (Binary, Safety)
MMSI of sender Status of message
Date received (Read, Unread)

17-1
17. AIS SAFETY, NAVTEX MESSAGES

2. Click the [New] button.

3. At [Send to], select where to send the message. Se-
lect [Broadcast] to send the message to all AIS-
equipped ships within communication range, or se-
lect [MMSI] and enter the MMSI of the ship where to
send the message.
4. At [Type], select the type of message, [Safety] or [Bi-
nary] (routine).
5. At [Channel], select the channel to use to send the
message.
6. At [Description], enter the text of your message. The
no. of characters available depends on the type of
message.
Safety message broadcast: 90 characters
Binary message broadcast: 86 characters
Safety message addressed to MMSI: 85 characters
Binary message addressed to MMSI: 80 characters
7. Click the [Send] button to send the message.

17.1.2 How to display received and sent AIS safety messages

When an AIS message is received, the Alert 539 (ALF format: 10540,1) "AIS Message
Received" appears. Do the following to view the message.

1. In Voyage navigation mode, click the [MSG] and [Safety MSG] buttons on the In-
stantAccess bar™.
2. Click the [Receive Box] or [Send Box] button as appropriate.
3. Click a message to view its contents.

WELCOME TO FURUNO

17-2
 17. AIS SAFETY, NAVTEX MESSAGES

17.1.3 How to delete received and sent AIS safety messages

Note: A large amount of messages may take some time to delete.

How to delete a received or sent message

1. Click the [Receive Box] or [Send Box] as appropriate.
2. Click the box that is before the date to show a check mark. (All messages can be
checked or unchecked with the context-sensitive menu. Right-click the box to the
left of "Date" then select [Check All] or [Uncheck All] as applicable.)
3. Click the [Delete] button.

How to delete received or sent messages permanently

1. Click the [Trash Box] button.
2. Click the box that is before the date to show a check mark. (All messages can be
checked or unchecked with the context-sensitive menu. Right-click the box to the
left of "Date" then select [Check All] or [Uncheck All] as applicable.)
3. Click the [Delete] button.

17.2 Navtex Messages

Navtex (Navigational Telex) is an international automated medium frequency direct-
printing service for delivery of navigational and meteorological warnings and fore-
casts, as well as urgent marine safety information to ships.
Navtex messages can be received and read.

The [Receive Box] can store up to 500 messages. When the [Receive Box] is full and
a new message is received, the system automatically deletes messages, in order,
from the oldest message.

Note: If the message "Database access failure occurred. NAVTEX messages cannot
be received." appears, your Navtex database may be corrupted. Consult your dealer
for advice.

17-3
17. AIS SAFETY, NAVTEX MESSAGES

17.2.1 How to receive Navtex messages

To display a received NAVTEX message, do the following:

1. In Voyage navigation mode, click the [MSG] and [NAVTEX MSG] buttons on the
InstantAccess bar™.
2. Click the message to view. The text of the message appears in the [Description]
box.
Message protection Date Frequency/ Type of
status: received Message ID message
P = Protected
Blank = Un-protected

Message
status:
Read or
Unread

Selection
column Where coordinates
are included in the
message, the
latitude and
Where the longitude are
selected message displayed here.
has a date range, The chart is also
the dates are appropriately
displayed here. marked with the
MSI marker.

• You can filter the displayed messages.

To filter by date: Enter the date range for displayed messages in the [Date
Range(UTC)] input area. To clear the filter, click the [Clear] button. Check the
Filter by Date box to activate the filter.
To filter by distance: Check the [Filter by Distance] box to activate the [Dis-
tance from Own Ship] input area. Enter the appropriate distance (setting range:
1 to 100 NM).
• To protect a message, or remove
the protection, click the protection
status column for the message.
When removing protection, the
confirmation window shown below
appears. Select [Yes] or [No] as
appropriate.
Note: You can protect up to 50
messages. When you try to protect more than 50 messages, the message
shown below appears.

17-4
 17. AIS SAFETY, NAVTEX MESSAGES

• You can check the settings for the Navtex receiver (if connected). Click the [Re-
ceiver] button to show the settings.

17.2.2 How to delete received Navtex messages

Note: A large amount of messages may take some time to delete.

How to delete received Navtex messages

1. Click the [MSG] and [NAVTEX MSG] buttons on the InstantAccess bar™.
2. Click the [Receive Box] button.
3. Click the selection column (indicated in the figure at section 17.2.1) to show a
checkmark in the box. (All messages can be checked or unchecked with the con-
text-sensitive menu. Right-click the box to the left of "P" then select [Select All] or
[Deselect All] as applicable.)
4. Click the [Delete] button. The selected message is sent to the [Trash Box]. The
[Trash Box] can hold up to 200 messages.
Note: If a protected message is se-
lected for deletion, the confirmation
message shown to the right ap-
pears. Click [Yes] to delete the pro-
tected message or [No] to cancel
deletion.

How to deleted received Navtex messages permanently

1. Click the [MSG] and [NAVTEX MSG] buttons on the InstantAccess bar™.
2. Click the [Trash Box] button.
3. Click the selection column (indicated in the figure at section 17.2.1) to show a
checkmark in the box. (All messages can be checked or unchecked with the con-
text-sensitive menu. Right-click the box to the left of "P" then select [Select All] or
[Deselect All] as applicable.)
4. Click the [Delete] button.

17-5
17. AIS SAFETY, NAVTEX MESSAGES

This page is intentionally left blank.

17-6
18. TT AND AIS DISPLAYS
Tracked targets and AIS targets can be overlaid on the chart. Only the differences be-
tween the radar and chart TT and AIS displays are described here.

The data of received radar-tracked targets must have reference to ground. If the data
does not meet that criteria, target vectors are not shown and the indications COG and
SOG in the TT info data box show [missing].

18.1 TT Display

18.1.1 TT symbols
Refer to section 3.7.1.

18.1.2 TT symbol color and size

Do the following to select TT symbol color and size. Note that the color of the AIS sym-
bol is also changed.

1. Click the [DISP], [SET] and [Symbol DISP] buttons on the InstantAccess bar™ to
show the [Symbol Display] menu.
2. Click the [Targets] tab.

3. Select the color among, green, blue, black, magenta and brown, with the [Color]
pull-down list.
4. Select the size from standard or small, with the [TT Size] pull-down list.

18-1
18. TT AND AIS DISPLAYS

18.1.3 How to display tracked target data

Control Unit: Put the cursor on a target then push the TARGET DATA key.
Trackball module: Click the target for which you want to show its data.

Title bar (1/2)

Scroll buttons*
TT No.

Bearing

Range

Course over ground

Speed over ground
CPA

TCPA
Bow crossing range
Bow crossing time

*: Scroll buttons appear only when there is

more than one TT target’s data displayed.

To erase data from a data box, click the close () button.

The basic target data display for a TT consists of the following information:
• Target's number. Target numbering starts from "01". When a target is erased the
number will not be reused until the power is re-set or more than 100 targets are ac-
quired.
• Bearing (BRG) and distance (RNG) of the target from own ship
• True speed (SOG) and true course (COG) of the target
• CPA and TCPA. A negative TCPA value means that you have already passed the
closest point and the TT is going away from own ship.
• Bow Crossing Range (BCR) and Bow Crossing Time (BCT)

18-2
 18. TT AND AIS DISPLAYS

18.1.4 Past position point attributes

You can define past position point attributes for tracked targets by points and style.

1. Click the [DISP], [SET] and [Symbol DISP] buttons on the InstantAccess bar™ to
show the [Symbol Display] menu.
2. Click the [Targets] tab.

3. At [TT Points], select the number of points to show.

4. At [Style], select the style for the past position points. The choices are [Points] and
[Points and Dots].

18.1.5 How to set the TT lost target filter

If you are in a congested area the lost target alert may sound against many AIS tar-
gets. In this case, you can prevent the alarm from sounding against TT that are be-
yond a certain range and/or smaller than a specific length.

1. Open the MENU and select [TT/AIS] and [Setting] then click the [Setting.2] tab.

2. In the [TT Lost Target Filter] window, set the maximum range to track a target.
[MAX Range]: The maximum range at which to track a lost target. A tracked target
not within this range is not tracked.
3. Click the [ON/OFF] button to show ON or OFF as appropriate.

18.1.6 TT recording functions

Tracked target information is saved to the [Danger Targets] log. See section 19.5.

18-3
18. TT AND AIS DISPLAYS

18.2 AIS Display

18.2.1 AIS symbols

Refer to section 4.3.

18.2.2 Voyage data

Before you embark on a voyage, set your navigation status, ETA, destination, draught
and the number of persons onboard, on the [Voyage Data] page in the [NAV Status]
menu. The data entered here is reflected to the AIS transponder.

1. Open the MENU then click both [NAV Status] in the [TT/AIS] menu and the [Voy-
age Data] tab.

Carrying DG, HS, or MP, IMO hazard or pollutant category Display according to
connected AIS transponder

2. Click the [Navigational Status] drop-down list then select your navigational status,
from the list below.
• Underway using engine • Reserved for high speed craft
• At anchor • Reserved for wing in ground
• Not under command • Power driven vessel towing astern (regional use)
• Restricted maneuverability • Power driven vessel pushing ahead or towing along-
• Constrained by her draught side (regional use)
• Moored • Reserved for future use
• Aground • AIS-SART (active)
• Engaged in fishing • Not defined
• Under way sailing
3. Enter the number of persons onboard (0-8191) at [Persons].
4. Enter ship's draught (0.0 - 25.5 (m)) at [MAX Draught].
5. Enter your ETA at [ETA].
[Day]: two digits; [Month]: Three-character abbreviation; [Year]: Four digits
6. Enter your destination at [Destination], using a maximum of 20 characters.
7. Use the [Cargo Type] pull-down menu to specify the type of cargo your vessel is
carrying.
• All ships of this type
• Carrying DG, HS, or MP, IMO hazard or pollutant category X
• Carrying DG, HS, or MP, IMO hazard or pollutant category Y
• Carrying DG, HS, or MP, IMO hazard or pollutant category Z
• Carrying DG, HS, or MP, IMO hazard or pollutant category OS
• Reserved for future use (x4)
• No additional information
8. Click the [Save] button to save the settings.

18-4
 18. TT AND AIS DISPLAYS

18.2.3 How to filter AIS targets

1. Right-click [AIS] on the [TT/AIS] page in the [NAV Tools/Overlay box], select [Set-
ting] and open the [Setting.1] page.

Note: You can also access the [Setting.1] page with one of the following methods:
• From the main menu, select [TT/AIS], [Settings] and [Setting.1].
• Click the TT/AIS settings radio button (indicated in the figure below) from the
Overlay/NAV Tools box. (The radio button is not available when the TT/AIS
page is displayed.)

Click this button.

2. In the [AIS DISP Filter] window, set each item referring to the description below.
• Click the buttons of [Sleeping Class A] and [Sleeping Class B] to show [OFF] or
[ON] to hide or show those targets.
• Click the button of [Base Station] to show [OFF] or [ON] to hide or show AIS
base stations.
• Click the button of [Physical AtoN] to show [OFF] or [ON] to hide or show Phys-
ical AtoN targets.
• Click the button of [Virtual AtoN] to show [OFF] or [ON] to hide or show Virtual
AtoN targets.
• Set the maximum range with [MAX Range]. Any target beyond the range set
here will not be displayed.
• Set the ship speed for AIS targets, with [MIN Ship Speed]. Any AIS target
whose speed is lower than that set here will not be displayed.
3. Click the [Save] button to save settings. Click the [Close] button to close the dialog
box.
Note: AIS and tracked target viewing limitations are as follows:
AIS and tracked targets are displayed on top of chart 1:1,000,001 for S57 charts.

18-5
18. TT AND AIS DISPLAYS

18.2.4 How to set conditions for automatic activation of sleeping tar-

gets
The AIS target automatic activation feature is turned on or off from the [TT/AIS] page
in the [Overlay/NAV Tools] box. Set the conditions for automatic activation as shown
below. The CPA/TCPA alarm must be active to get automatic activation of AIS targets.

Right-click [AIS] on the [TT/AIS] page in the [NAV Tools/Overlay box], select [Setting]
and open the [Setting.1] page.

18.2.5 How to sleep all activated targets

You can sleep all activated targets. Right-click [AIS] on the [TT/AIS ]page in the [NAV
Tools/Overlay box], select [Setting] and open the [Setting.1] page. Click the button to
the right of [Sleep All Targets] then click the [Set] button.

18-6
 18. TT AND AIS DISPLAYS

18.2.6 How to set the AIS lost target filter

You can select what AIS targets to exclude from the AIS lost target alert, on the [Set-
ting.2] page in the [TT/AIS] menu.

[MAX Range]: Set the max. range at which a target must be to be declared a lost tar-
get.
[MIN Ship Speed]: A tracked target whose speed is slower than set here does not trig-
ger the lost target alarm.
[Except Class B]: Exclude class B AIS targets from the AIS lost target alert.

18.2.7 How to display AIS target data

Normal data
Put the cursor on an activated target then push the left button.

Title bar (1/2)

Normal/Expand
button
MMSI Scroll buttons*1
Vessel name Close button

Bearing Heading
Range
Course over ground Rate of turn
Speed over ground
CPA
NAV status: * Navigation status*2
TCPA
Underway
Bow cross range using
Bow cross time engine
Position

*1: Scroll buttons appear only when there is more than one AIS target’s data displayed.
*2: [Altitude] appears when the selected target is an AIS SART airfcaft.

18-7
18. TT AND AIS DISPLAYS

Expanded data
Put the cursor on a desired AIS target then push the left button. Click the [Expand] but-
ton (level of detail) on the [AIS Info] box to show expanded AIS data.

Title bar
“Level of detail”
button
MMSI
Scroll buttons*1
Vessel name Close button

Bearing Heading
Range
Course over ground Rate of turn
Speed over ground
CPA NAV status:
TCPA Underway
Bow cross range using
Bow cross time engine
Position
Navigation status*2

Position sensor
Position sensor accuracy
(HIGH, LOW)
Call sign
IMO No.
Length
Width
Draught
Destination

ETA
AIS version no.
Ship & Cargo type

Association condition

*1: Scroll buttons appear when there are multiple AIS targets.
*2: Where the selected AIS target is an aircraft, the STATUS box
shows the aircraft’s altitude.

18-8
 18. TT AND AIS DISPLAYS

18.2.8 How to display own ship data

You can see own ship's data on the [Own Ship] page in the [NAV Status] menu. Open
the menu then click both [NAV Status] in the [TT/AIS] menu and the [Own Ship] tab.

MMSI: 457804356 Length(LOA): 223.2 m

Name: FURUNO Voyager
Width: 31.8 m

Call Sign: JZ5890312 Ref Bow: 3.3 m

Type: 0
Description: All ships of this type Ref Port: 2.8 m

18.3 Association
An AIS-equipped ship is usually displayed by two symbols on the chart for radar dis-
play. This is because the AIS ship position is measured by a GPS navigator (L/L)
whereas the radar detects the same ship by PPI principle (range and bearing relative
to own ship radar antenna).

To avoid the presentation of two target symbols for the same physical target, use the
“association” function. If target data from both AIS and TT are available and if the as-
sociation criteria are fulfilled, either the AIS or TT symbol is presented according to the
association method selected.

Association will not happen between AIS and TT if the AIS target is sleeping or the AIS
target is lost.
All association settings, including ON/OFF, can also be controlled from the radar
mode, with the [TT/AIS] setting box (see section 4.14). All settings are mutually
shared.

18.3.1 How to select association method

Click the location circled below to show "<" to select AIS symbol for associated target,
or ">" to select TT symbol for associated target. This setting overrides the correspond-
ing item on the [TT/AIS] menu. To turn off association, click the location to remove the
arrow.

< >

18-9
18. TT AND AIS DISPLAYS

Note: You can also select the method by right-clicking the loca-
Association: OFF
tion. Click desired association method. Association: TT
Association: AIS
18.3.2 How to set the conditions for association
To set the criteria for association, right-click [AIS] on the [TT/AIS] page in the [NAV
Tools/Overlay] box, select [Setting] and open the [Setting.2] page. For setting details,
see section 4.14.2.

18-10
19. RECORDING FUNCTIONS
The chart radar records various voyage-related items like movement and position of
own ship and dangerous radar targets (from Radar). These items are recorded in the
following logs:

Update log: Records the install and update history for the ENC, ARCS and C-MAP charts
(see section 7.13).
Event log: Records user events and position events.
NAV log: Records entire voyage (i.e., a sailing of a route from first point to the last, also
MOB data), details (position, speed and course every minute), chart usage
(information on charts used for display).
Target log: Records dangerous TT, AIS.
Alert log: Records alerts generated by the system (see section 20.6).
Route transfer log: Records sent and received route-related communications.

19.1 How to Record User, Position Events

This equipment can save/show a maximum of 2,000 events.

19.1.1 User events

A user event is a comment about an event
(weather, etc.). You can show user events on the
chart area. Open the [Tracking] page of the
[Symbol Display] menu show or hide the events.

To record a user event:

1. Get into the Navigational or Voyage planning
mode then click the [Log], [Event Log] and
[User Event] buttons on the InstantAccess
bar™ to show the [Record User Event] win-
dow.
2. Enter a comment. Click the [OK] button to finish and close the text box.
An event marker ( ) appears at your position and the event is recorded to the [Voy-
age] log.

To view the comment entered for an event,

put the cursor on the event then left click to
show the [Event Information] window.

Note: The [Event Information] window is

shown with the [CHART for RADAR]
mode.
The window shows the name of the event ([UserEvent]), time and date of entry, lati-
tude and longitude position of the event and comment. Note that the comment can be
edited from this window. Edit the comment then click the [OK] button to save.

19-1
19. RECORDING FUNCTIONS

19.1.2 Position events

The operator may manually save positions to the [Event] log by position or LOP (Line
of Position):

To record a position, do as follows:

1. Get into the Navigational or Voyage planning mode then click the [Log], [Event
Log] and [POSN Event] buttons on the InstantAccess bar™ to show the [Position
Event] dialog box.

2. At the list box at the top of the dialog box, select position type.
[Manual]: Manual input of ship’s position. Go to step 4.
[LOP]: Latitude and longitude position of a fixed object at ship's position. Go to
step 5.
[Position]: Ship’s position fed from navigator selected. Go to step 3.
3. For [Position], click the [Log] button.

Ship’s position fed from

navigator selected Selected navigator

The position event mark appears at the ship’s position. The position is recorded
to the [Voyage] log.
Time of entry 1044

DGPS1

Navigator selected
Position event mark

19-2
 19. RECORDING FUNCTIONS

4. For [Manual], manually enter position, enter a comment if required, then click the
[Log] button.

Enter position manually. Enter comment

here if required.

The position event mark appears at the manual input position. The position is re-
corded to the [Voyage] log.
Time of entry 1044

DGPS1

Navigator selected
Position event mark
5. For [LOP], see the description below.

Position fixes defined by Line of Position (LOP)

A plotted line on which a vessel is located, determined by observation or measure-
ment of the range or bearing to an aid to navigation or other charted element. Two or
more simultaneous observations can be combined to produce an estimate of the
ship's current position. If the position is based on only two observations, it is an "esti-
mated position" (EP); otherwise it is called a fix. A maximum of 6 observations can be
entered to obtain a fix.

Basic operation: Coordinates of the aid to navigation can be entered into dialog box-
es or they can be selected graphically on the chart. Click on a charted object (beacon,
light, buoy etc.). Description of the object appears above coordinate boxes.

Default values for bearing and range are approximated from ship's current position in-
formation. The time of observation is stopped when the object is selected (or when the
[Add] button is clicked). Click the [Add] box to include the observation in the fix com-
putation. The counter shows "new/1", at the input of the second observation. The word
"new" indicates that the observation currently displayed is not yet included in the fix
computation, and it appears as a dashed line or ring on the chart. The added obser-
vations can be edited or deleted after selecting them at the counter. When at least two
measurements are entered, the EP or fix is computed and the coordinates are shown
in the top part of the dialog.To show a position symbol on the chart, click the [Log] but-
ton. In the case of an EP, the letters EP are shown on the right side of the coordinates.
If a valid position estimate cannot be obtained, a message is displayed under the co-
ordinates. This may happen, for example, if the lines / circles have multiple crossings
that are far apart, or if two lines are nearly parallel or don't intersect at all. The accu-
racy limit (estimated standard error) is 1.0 NM. If the estimate is valid, the [Log] box
can be clicked to record the current position estimate in the [Voyage] log. Discrepancy
between LOP result and ship position is also recorded in the log (this information may
be viewed by Info query on the position event symbol on the chart - which is displayed
if position event display is on in chart display settings).

19-3
19. RECORDING FUNCTIONS

Time transfer: If the observations are not simultaneous, they should be transferred to
a common time. Transferring is based on dead reckoning of ship movement. If a po-
sition line (or ring) is transferred, the letters TPL are shown beside its timestamp on
the chart. The method of transfer may be selected in the bottom of the dialog. [Trans-
fer to latest] transfers the measurements as if they were all made at the time of the
newest measurement. [Continuous transfer] transfers all measurements to real time.
[Transfer off] can be used to check where the measurement origins are. The position
estimate and the record function follow the same logic, which means that Transfer off
shows a position that has no relevance and Transfer to latest sends an old position to
the [Voyage] log (timestamp in the log does not match the position).

If you are satisfied with the position shown in the latitude and longitude fields, then
click the [Log] button to save the position observation to the Voyage log. If you wish
you can also enter latitude and longitude values manually.

Timeouts: The observations cannot be used long after they were made because dead
reckoning is inaccurate.

Click the [Log] button to put a position event at the LOP-calculated position. The po-
sition is recorded to the [Voyage] log.

Time of entry 1044

Accuracy of position EP LOP
EP: Low accuracy
DR: High accuracy Position event
mark

How to find position event information

You can find information about a position event by putting the cursor on the event
mark then left click. The [Event Position] window shows event type (position event),
time of entry, event position, name of sensor ([Position] only), comment (automatic for
[LOP] and [Position]; user-entered comment* for [Manual]), and position line data
([LOP] only).
*Comment cannot be changed from this window.

Note: The [Event Information] window is shown with the [CHART for RADAR] mode.

Position event: Position

Position event: Manual Position event: LOP

19-4
 19. RECORDING FUNCTIONS

19.2 Details Log

The [Details] log contains voyage information, recorded once per minute.

• Date of entry
• Time of entry
• Source: No. of unit which generated log
• Type: Type of position data
• Auto: Automatic input of position
• Latitude, Longitude, S.SRC: Position as output by selected sensor and sensor used
as the data source.
• Align/NM, Align/°T: Range, bearing offset, if used
• SOG/kn, COG/°T, S.SRC: Speed over the ground, Course over the ground and sensor
used as the data source.
• HDG/°T, S.SRC: Heading and sensor used as the data source.
• CORR/°T: Gyro correction value, if used.

How to view the Details log

Click the [Log], [NAV Log] and [Detail] buttons on the InstantAccess bar™.

• To show the logs of a specific period, enter the period to show with [Period Cov-
ered (UTC)] then click the [Set Period] button. Use the [Clear Period] button to display
all logs. Log entries outside the set period become gray and the entries inside the set
period remain visible. To show log entries which are not visible, spin the scrollwheel
upward to scroll up the log, downward to scroll down the log.
• To refresh the log, click the [Refresh] button.
• To search the log, do as follows:
1) Click the [Find] button to show the [Find Input box
text] box.
2) Click the input box then enter the text to
search.
3) Select the search direction with the up or
down radio button.
4) Click the [Find] button. The first matching Find
text is highlighted in yellow at the top of
the screen.
Input text in box and
5) To continue the search click the [Find] [Find] button appears.
button. To cancel the search, click the
[Cancel] button.
• To print the log, click the [Print Text] button. Select print-
ing format then click the [Print] button. [Spread Portrait]
prints two pages of data on one page.
• To show track for the period selected, click the [Show
Track] button. Use the [Hide Track] button to erase the
track.
• To export the log, click the [Export File] button. The file is
named
DetailsLogYYYYMMDDhhmmss.csv.

19-5
19. RECORDING FUNCTIONS

19.3 Voyage Log

The [Voyage] log records all voyage-related data of the past three months. Recorded
events are:

• Date: Date of entry

• Time: Time of entry
• Type: Log entry types
• Auto: Automatic entry of ship position, in 1 to 4 hr intervals, set by operator.
• Ship: Logged if the amount of change in speed or course equals or is greater than
the set values.
• MOB: MOB position, entered with [MOB] button.
• User: Operator-entered position. The information entered in the [Description] box
is logged.
• Posdev: Record user-entered position event. The[ Description] window shows au-
tomatically entered data (Position, LOP) or manually entered comment (Manual).
Automatically entered data (Position: data source, LOP: see below.
The latitude and longitude position and bearing (or distance) of a maximum of
three objects are automatically recorded to each log entry. An object whose posi-
tion accuracy is low is not recorded. If an object has both a bearing and distance,
separate entries are made.

L/L position, bearing of object (no.1)

• Latitude, Longitude: Position as output by selected sensor and sensor used as the
data source.
• SOG/kn, COG/°T, S.SRC: Speed over the ground, course over the ground. and their
source
• HDG/°T, S.SRC: Heading and its source
• CORR/°T: Offset bearing, if used
• Wind/kn Wind/°T: Wind speed and angle
• Dist/NM: Navigation distance
• Depth/m: Depth in meters
• Description: Show recorded contents, for [User], [PosDev] above.
If desired items other than [Posdev] can be edited. Click an item to show the [Edit
Description] box. Edit the description as required then click the [OK] button.

19-6
 19. RECORDING FUNCTIONS

How to view the Voyage log

To open the Voyage log, click the [Log], [NAV Log] and [Voyage] buttons on the In-
stantAccess bar™.

LO
OG1
LO
OG1
OG1
OG

Export
p File

• To show the logs of a specific period, enter the period to show with [Period Cov-
ered (UTC)] then click the [Set Period] button. Use the [Clear Period] button to dis-
play all logs. Log entries outside the set period become gray and the entries inside
the set period remain visible. To show log entries which are not visible, spin the
scrollwheel upward to scroll up the log, downward to scroll down the log.
• To refresh the log, click the [Refresh] button.
• To search the log, do as follows:
1) Click the [Find] button to show the [Find text] box.
2) Click the input box then enter the text to search.
3) Select the search direction with the up or down radio button.
4) Click the [Find] button. The first matching text is highlighted in yellow at the top
of the screen.
5) To continue the search click the [Find] button. To cancel the search, click the
[Cancel] button.
• To print the log, click the [Print Text] button. Select print-
ing format then click the [Print] button. [Spread Portrait]
prints two pages of data on one page.
• To show track for the period selected, click the [Show
Track] button. Use the [Hide Track] button to erase the
track.
• To export the log, click the [Export File] button. The file is
named
VoyageLogYYYYMMDDhhmmss.csv.

19-7
19. RECORDING FUNCTIONS

19.3.1 How to set conditions of logging

The operator can set the conditions for automatic voyage logging (logging interval on-
ly). When the following conditions are met, data is stored into the Voyage log.

• Speed (or course) change is equal to the set value.

• The logging interval time has elapsed.
To set the conditions of logging, do as follows:

1. Open the menu and select [Log],

[NAV Log] and [Voyage] to show
the [NAV Log] dialog box.
2. Set desired limit for log interval.
Setting range: 1 to 4 hr, 1 hr inter-
val
When your speed or course changes
by the amount set here, an entry is
made in the [Voyage] log, at the inter-
val selected.

19.4 Chart Usage Log

The [Chart Usage] log stores which charts were used in chart alerts. To open the log,
click [Log], [NAV Log] and [Chart Usage] on the InstantAccess bar™. The following
information is recorded in the chart usage log:

• Date and time chart was displayed • Display scale

• Chart ID • Compilation scale
• Center position of display (Lat, Lon) • The latest update included to chart
• Chart source • Chart base
• Chart edition

19-8
 19. RECORDING FUNCTIONS

• To show the logs of a specific period, enter the period to show with [Period Cov-
ered (UTC)] then click the [Set Period] button. Use the [Clear Period] button to dis-
play all logs. Log entries outside the set period become gray and the entries inside
the set period remain visible. To show log entries which are not visible, spin the
scrollwheel upward to scroll up the log, downward to scroll down the log.
• To refresh the log, click the [Refresh] button.
• To search the log, do as follows:
1) Click the [Find] button to show the [Find text] box.
2) Click the input box then enter the text to search.
3) Select the search direction with the up or down radio button.
4) Click the [Find] button. The first matching text is highlighted in yellow at the top
of the screen.
5) To continue the search click the [Find] button. To cancel the search, click the
[Cancel] button.
• To print the log, click the [Print Text] button.

19.5 Danger Targets Log

The [Danger Targets] log stores information about dangerous targets that are re-
ceived from a radar (TTs) and/or targets that are received from an AIS transponder
(AIS targets).

If a TT or AIS target is within the set CPA (Closest Point of Approach) and TCPA (Time
to CPA), information of all TTs (including non-dangerous targets) are recorded into the
danger target log. This data is as follows:

• Date: Date of entry

• Time: Time of entry
• Source: Unit which generated log
• Type: Type of dangerous target
• Target ID: When [Type] is [TT] - Dangerous target’s number.
When [Type] is [AIS] - MMSI number
• Latitude and Longitude: Latitude and longitude position of dangerous target
• SPD/kn: Speed of dangerous target
• CRS/°T: Course of dangerous target
• HDG/°T: Heading of dangerous target
• CPA/NM, TCPA/min: CPA and TCPA of dangerous target

19-9
19. RECORDING FUNCTIONS

How to view the danger targets log

To open the [Danger Targets] log, click the [Log], [Target Log] and [Danger Target]
buttons on the InstantAccess bar™.

2016-05-12 13:55:59 ECD001 TT 01 35°38.164’N 139°49.842’E 15.1 193.3 N/A 1.3

2016
201
2 0 6 05
05 08
08 13 53 42 ECD0
C 0 01
CD00 AIS
S 00000
00 000100
10033 35°°57 770
35 770’N
’N 139°°49 732
139 732’E
’E 12 1 200 6 N/A
N/
/A 11

• To show the logs of a specific period, enter the period to show with [Period Cov-
ered (UTC)] then click the [Set Period] button. Use the [Clear Period] button to dis-
play all logs. Log entries outside the set period become gray and the entries inside
the set period remain visible. To show log entries which are not visible, spin the
scrollwheel upward to scroll up the log, downward to scroll down the log.
• To refresh the log, click the [Refresh] button.
• To search the log, do as follows:
1) Click the [Find] button to show the [Find text] box.
2) Click the input box then enter the text to search.
3) Select the search direction, with the up or down radio button.
4) Click the [Find] button. Matching text is highlighted in yellow at the top of the
screen.
5) To continue the search click the [Find] button. To cancel the search, click the
[Cancel] button.
• To print the log, click the [Print Text] button.
• To export the log, click the [Export File] button. The file
is namedDangerTargetLogYYYYMMDDhhmmss.csv.

19-10
 19. RECORDING FUNCTIONS

19.6 Route Transfer Log

The [Route Transfer] log keeps a tab of sent and received route-related communica-
tions. When one or more of the following conditions are met, an entry is made in the
[Route Transfer] log.

• RRT sentence is sent from this system.

• RRT sentence is received by this system.
• A sent RRT sentence is not acknowledged by an external device.
The log data includes the following:

• Date: Date of entry

• Time: Time of entry
• Communication Type: Send, Receive or No Response
• Source: UID of route related communication
• Destination: UID of destination of route related communication
• Detail: Content of transfer
• Transfer Type: Type of communication - Monitor route, Plan route, or Query
• Transfer Name: Name of transferred route
• Transfer Version: Transferred route’s version
• Current WPT: Current waypoint
• Transfer Status: Current transfer status of the transferred route
• Application Status: Current status of the transfer application

How to view the route transfer log

On the InstantAccess bar™, click the [Log], [Target Log] and [Route TRANS Log] but-
tons

• To show the logs of a specific period, enter the period to show with [Period Cov-
ered (UTC)] then click the [Set Period] button. Use the [Clear Period] button to dis-
play all logs. Log entries outside the set period become gray and the entries inside
the set period remain visible. To show log entries which are not visible, spin upward
to scroll up the log, downward to scroll down the log.
• To refresh the log, click the [Refresh] button.
• To search the log, do as follows:
1) Click the [Find] button to show the [Find text] box.
2) Click the input box then enter the text to search.
3) Select the search direction with the up or down radio button.

19-11
19. RECORDING FUNCTIONS

4) Click the [Find] button. Matching text is highlighted in yellow at the top of the
screen.
5) To continue the search click the [Find] button. To cancel the search, click the
[Cancel] button.
• To print the log, click the [Print Text] button. Select the printing format then click
the [Print] button.
• To export the log, click the [Export File] button. The file is namedRouteTransferL-
ogYYYYMMDDhhmmss.csv.

19-12
20. ALERTS

20.1 What is an Alert?

“Alert” is a generic name for a notice to any unusual or potentially dangerous situation
generated within the system.

Alerts are classified according to priority and category.

Alert priority
There are four alert priorities: emergency*, alarm, warning and caution.
* Generated when this radar is connected to an AMS.

Emergency: Immediate danger to human life or to the ship and its machinery exists
and that immediate action must be taken. Emergency alerts are handled the same
as an alarm.

Alarm: Situations or conditions which require immediate attention, decision and (if
necessary) action by the bridge team to avoid any kind of hazardous situation and to
maintain the safe navigation of the ship.

Warning: Conditions or situations which require immediate attention for precautionary

reasons, to make the bridge team aware of conditions which are not immediately haz-
ardous, but may become so.
Caution: Awareness of a condition which continues to require attention out of the or-
dinary consideration of the situation or of given information.

Alert category
An alert is further classified by category, A, B or C, according to its degree of severity
or source.

Category Description
A Category A alerts include alerts indicating
• Danger of collision
• Danger of grounding
B Category B alerts are alerts where no additional information for decision
support is necessary. Category B alerts are all alerts not falling under
category A.
C Engine-related alert

20-1
20. ALERTS

20.2 Alert Box

When an alert is generated, the related alert message and alert state icon appear in
the [Alert] box, which is at the bottom right corner on the screen. An audible alarm is
additionally generated for alarms and warnings.

In addition to the alert message and alert state icon, the [Alert] box has the buzzer stop
button and provides access to the [Alert List] and [Alert Log].

Alert state
171
Buzzer stop button
icon Crossing Safety C. (Click to stop
buzzer temporarily.)

Alert message Alert List/Alert Log button

(Number and name of alert) (Right-click to select [Alert List Window]
or [Alert Log Window].)

Alert state icon: The state of an alert is shown with an icon. See page 20-4.

Alert message: The number and name of all active alerts appear in the message ar-
ea, with the alert of the highest priority on top always. The color of both the message
and the background change according to alert priority and alert state. See the table on
the next page.
An alert can be acknowledged from the [Alert] box or [Alert List]. An alert remains in
the [Alert] box and [Alert List] until it is acknowledged and rectified. See section 20.5.

Alert List/Alert Log button: Right-click to select [Alert List Window] or [Alert Log Win-
dow]. The background color of the button is light blue when the list or log is open. See
sections 20.5 and 20.6 for a description of the list and log.
Buzzer stop button: Click to temporarily silence the buzzer, which sounds against
alarms and warnings. See page 20-5.

20-2
 20. ALERTS

Alert message display format

Priority of
Alert indication Alert state Display state
alert
Emergency, - Not acknowledged/Not Black characters on red
171 Alarm rectified. background.
Crossing Safety C. OR
- Not acknowledged/ Flashing interval
Displayed Rectified. • 0.5 s, 0.5 s (Not rectified)
alternately • 3 s, 1 s (Rectified)

171 Red characters on gray

Crossing Safety C. background.
Emergency, Acknowledged/Not recti- Red characters on gray
171 Alarm fied. background.
! Crossing Safety C.

Warning - Not acknowledged/Not Black characters on yellow-

084 rectified. orange background.
Processor Unit F... OR
Not acknowledged/Rec- Flashing interval
Displayed tified. • 0.5 s, 0.5 s (Not rectified)
alternately • 3 s, 1 s (Rectified)

084
Processor Unit F... Yellow-orange characters
on gray background.
Warning Acknowledged/Not recti- Yellow-orange characters
084 fied. on gray background.
Processor Unit F...

Caution Not rectified. Yellow characters on gray

362 background.
Wind Sensor 3 Co...

Emergency, Acknowledged/Recti- No display.

Alarm, fied.
Warning

Caution Rectified. No display.

20-3
20. ALERTS

Alert state icons

The table shows the icons used to indicate the various alert states for the alarm, warn-
ing and caution alerts.

Icon Alert state Icon description

Alert priority: Alarm
1 Not acknowledged/Not rectified Red triangle with black loudspeaker in
center of triangle. Flashing every 0.5 s.
2 Not acknowledged/Not rectified, Red triangle with crossed out black loud-
Buzzer temporarily silenced speaker in center of triangle. Flashing ev-
ery 0.5 s.
3 Acknowledged/Not rectified Red triangle with black exclamation point
in center of triangle.

4 Active - responsibility trans- Red triangle. Right arrow at center. Pre-

ferred alarm sented together with alert text.

5 Not acknowledged/Rectified Red triangle with black check mark in cen-

ter of triangle. The icon flashes 3 s, goes
off 1 s, repeats the sequence.
Alert priority: Warning
6 Not acknowledged/Not rectified Yellow-orange circle with black loud-
speaker in center of circle. Flashing every
0.5 s.
7 Not acknowledged/Not rectified, Yellow-orange circle with crossed out
Buzzer temporarily silenced black loudspeaker in center of circle.
Flashing every 0.5 s.
8 Acknowledged/Not rectified Yellow-orange circle with black exclama-
tion point in center of circle.

9 Active - responsibility trans- Yellow-orange circle. Right arrow at cen-

ferred warning ter. Presented together with alert text.

10 Not acknowledged/Rectified Yellow-orange circle with black check

mark in center of circle. The icon flashes 3
s, goes off
1 s, repeats the sequence.
Alert priority: Caution
11 Caution Steadily displayed yellow square with
black exclamation point in center of
square.
Other icons
12 Aggregation Plus sign. Presented together with the icon
numbers 1 - 11.

13 Acknowledge not allowed for Red triangle. Cross in center of triangle.

alarm Presented together with icon numbers 1, 2
and 5.
14 Acknowledge not allowed for Yellow-orange circle. Cross in center of
warning circle. Presented together with icon num-
bers 6, 7 and 10.

20-4
 20. ALERTS

Buzzer stop button

The color of both the background and the icon change according to alert state.

Button state Description

No alert generated. The background is gray and the icon is grayed out.

An alarm or warning is being acknowledged. The background is gray and the icon
is white.

Button clicked to silence buzzer temporarily. The background is light-blue and the
icon is black.

20.3 How to Temporarily Silence the Buzzer for an

Emergency, Alarm or Warning
When the buzzer for an emergency, alarm or warning sounds, you can temporarily si-
lence it by doing one of the following:

• In the [Alert] box, click the buzzer stop button.

• In the [Alert List], click either the alert name or the [Silence] button.
The buzzer is stopped and the alert state changes. An alert message remains in the
[Alert] box and [Alert List] until acknowledged and rectified.

20.4 How to Acknowledge an Emergency, Alarm or

Warning
When an alarm or warning is generated, the buzzer sounds and the name of the alert
appears and flashes in the [Alert] box and [Alert List].

To acknowledge the alert, do one of the following:

• Press the ALARM ACK key.

• In the [Alert] box, click the unacknowledged alert.
• In the [Alert List], click either the alert name or the [ACK] button.
After acknowledgement, the buzzer and the flashing for the alert message are stopped
and the priority of the alert changes as shown in the table below. The alert message
remains on the display until rectified.

Priority no. Priority of alert Alert state

High 1 Emergency, Alarm Not acknowledged/Not rectified
2 Warning Not acknowledged/Not rectified
3 Emergency, Alarm Not acknowledged/Rectified
4 Warning Not acknowledged/Rectified
5 Emergency, Alarm Acknowledged/Not rectified
6 Warning Acknowledged/Not rectified
Low 7 Caution Not rectified

20-5
20. ALERTS

Category of alert and place of alert acknowledgement

The place of alert acknowledgement depends on the category of the alert.

Place of alert
Category Where the alert is generated
acknowledgement
A Equipment that generated the alert. Equipment that generated the alert.
B Equipment and AMS* (Alert Management Equipment that generated the alert or AMS.
System) *No use
C IAS (Integrated Automation System) gen- –
erated engine-related alert

20.5 Alert List

The [Alert List] displays all active alerts, with unacknowledged alerts at the top, in pri-
ority order. The ZDA sentence is required to display the time in the list.

Note: The [Alert List] cannot be opened while the radar is transmitting.
The log shows the following information for each alert:
• Alert no. • Time (UTC) alert was acknowledged
• Alert text • Details about the alert selected
• Source of alert • Quantity of unacknowledged alerts*
• Time (UTC) alert was generated *: Chart mode only.
Alert list in radar mode
To show the alert list in radar mode, right-click the [Alert List/Alert Log] button in the
Alert box, click [Alert List/Alert Log] then click the [Alert List] tab.

Filter

ACK ALL button Silence buzzer Alert details

Page selection buttons
Click to select page.
Available only when
multiple pages exist.
No.1 Chart R .. ► : Show next page
No.1 Chart R ..
No.1 Chart R ..
►| : Jump to last page
No.1 Chart R .. ◄ : Show previous page
No.1 Chart R .. Time |◄ : Jump to first page
No.1 Chart R .. ACKed
No.1 Chart R ..
Alert text No.1 Chart R ..

Alert no. Source Time

generated

Alert info icon

20-6
 20. ALERTS

The background color of an unacknowledged alarm is red and flashing and unac-
knowledged warning is yellow-orange and flashing. An acknowledged alert is dis-
played steadily, in red for alarm and yellow-orange for warning. A caution is displayed
steadily in yellow.

The [Filter] checkboxes at the top of the window let you select what alerts to view.
Check or uncheck the boxes to show or hide the corresponding alerts.

To find details about an alert, click the applicable alert icon, the alert details appear in
the [Detail] box at the top of the window. The box shows the reason for the alert, how
to handle the alert, etc.

An individual alarm or warning can be acknowledged by clicking it.

The [Silence] button silences the buzzer.

Alert list in chart mode

To show the alert list in radar mode, right-click the [Alert List/Alert Log] button in the
Alert box, click [Alert List].

ACK the uppermost

unacknowledged alert
Silence buzzer
Alert details
Page selection buttons
Click to select page.
Available only when
multiple pages exist.
► : Show next page
Time
ACKed ►| : Jump to last page
◄ : Show previous page
|◄ : Jump to first page
Alert text
Number of un-ACKed alerts
Time When all alerts are
Alert info icon Source generated acknowledged, this
indication appears as
“UnACK: 0”.

Alert no.

The background color of an unacknowledged alarm is red and flashing and unac-
knowledged warning is yellow-orange and flashing. An acknowledged alert is dis-
played steadily, in red for alarm and yellow-orange for warning. A caution is displayed
steadily in yellow.

The Status section has three columns. Icons appear in the columns as follows:

• Left column: Emergency, Alarm, Warning and Caution icons (numbers 1 to 11 in the
table at "Alert state icons" on page 20-4).
• Middle column: Emergency, Alarm and Warning icons (numbers 13 and 14 in the
table at "Alert state icons" on page 20-4).

20-7
20. ALERTS

• Right column: Aggregate icon (number 12 in the table at "Alert state

icons" on page 20-4).
The [Filter] checkboxes at the top of the window let you select what alerts to view.
Check or uncheck the boxes to show or hide the corresponding alerts.

To find details about an alert, click the applicable alert, the alert details appear in the
[Detail] box at the top of the window. The box shows the reason for the alert, how to
handle the alert, etc.

An individual alarm or warning can be acknowledged by clicking it.

The [Silence] button silences the buzzer.

How the alert list is updated after acknowledgement, rectification

When you acknowledge an alert, its display method on the [Alert] list changes accord-
ing to alert category and alert state. Acknowledged and rectified alerts are immediately
removed from the list.

Alert Display after Display after

No. Alert state
priority acknowledgement rectification
1 Emergency, Not acknowledged/Not rectified 5 2
2 Alarm Not acknowledged/Rectified 8 –
3 Warning Not acknowledged/Not rectified 6 4
4 Not acknowledged/Rectified 9 –
5 Emergency, Acknowledged/Not rectified – 8
Alarm
6 Warning Acknowledged/Not rectified – 9
7 Caution Not rectified – 10
8 Emergency, Acknowledged/Rectified – –
Alarm
9 Warning Acknowledged/Rectified – –
10 Caution Rectified – –

20-8
 20. ALERTS

20.6 Alert Log

The [Alert] log stores and displays the latest 10,000 alerts.

Note: The [Alert Log] cannot be opened while the radar is transmitting.
The log shows the following information for each alert:
• Priority of alert (Emergency, Alarm, • Time (UTC) alert was acknowledged
Warning, Caution) • Time (UTC) alert was rectified
• Category of alert (A, B or C) • Time (UTC) alert was silenced*1
1
• Alert no., alert instance* • Time (UTC) alert was transferred to AMS*1
• Alert name
• Details for selected alert*2
• Source of alert
• Time (UTC) alert occurred *1: Chart for Radar mode only
*2: Radar mode or Chart for Radar mode
only
Alert log in radar mode
To show the alert log in radar mode, right-click the [Alert List/Alert Log] button in the
Alert box, click [Alert List/Alert Log] then click the [Alert Log] tab.

Priority Category
filter filter

Page selection buttons

Category
Click to select page.
Available only when
Alert text Occured
time multiple pages exist.
► : Show next page
Priority ►| : Jump to last page
◄ : Show previous page
Source |◄ : Jump to first page

Alert no.

Scroll right to show:

Alarm Details • Time alert was
acknowledged
• Time alert cause was
rectified

You can select what type of alerts to display with [Priority Filter] and [Category Filter]
at the top of the list. The list can be sorted by [Priority], [Cat.], [Alert No.], [Description],
[Source], [Occurred Time], [ACKed Time] or [Rectified Time]. Click the corresponding
column title to sort. To find detailed information about an alert, select it to show de-
tailed information in the [Detail] box. To search the log, enter text in the [Log Search]
box then click the [Find] button. You can save the contents of the log to a USB flash
memory, in “.dat” format, by clicking the [Export Log] button.

20-9
20. ALERTS

Alert log in chart mode

To show the alert list in radar mode, right-click the [Alert List/Alert Log] button in the
Alert box, click [Alert List].

Priority filter

Category filter

Page selection buttons

Category Click to select page.
Available only when
Alert text multiple pages exist.
► : Show next page
►| : Jump to last page
Priority ◄ : Show previous page
Alert instance
Occured
time |◄ : Jump to first page

Alert no.
Scroll right to show:
Source • Time alert was acknowledged
• Time alert cause was rectified
• Time alert was silenced
• Time alert was transferred to
AMS

You can select what type of alerts to display with [Priority Filter] and [Category Filter]
at the top of the list. The list can be sorted by [Priority], [Cat.], [Alert No.], [Description],
[Source], [Occurred Time], [ACKed Time] or [Rectified Time]. Click the corresponding
column title to sort. To find detailed information about an alert, select it to show de-
tailed information in the [Detail] box. To search the log, enter text in the [Log Search]
box then click the [Find] button. You can save the contents of the log to a USB flash
memory, in “.dat” format, by clicking the [Export Log] button.

20.7 Alert Reception from Connected Sensors

An "ALR receive and ACK transmit" communication is available for every serial line
input. The ALR message from the sensor includes information about alerts from the
sensor, and is presented though the normal alert system. When you acknowledge an
alert, an ACK message is sent to the sensor to do remote acknowledge.

This interface is based on IEC 61162-1 and IEC 80/520/INF.

20-10
 20. ALERTS

20.8 List of Alerts

The table below lists the possible alerts for this radar. Each alert is listed with priority,
category and escalation. This radar can output alerts in ALF or ALR format. The alert
number for each depends on the output format and may differ.

Alert which are not acknowledge within the set time limit are escalated to either Alarm
level, or are repeated as a warning.

You can change the escalation settings from the [Alert Settings] page in the [Settings]
menu (see section 22.5).

You can downgrade the priority for some alerts to [Warning] from the [Chart Alerts]
page (see section 11.1.2).

ALF ALR Aggregated Alert Priority/

Alert name Escalation
No. Inst.* No. name Category
115 - 115 Loss of System Loss of System Warning/ Repeated warning
Communication Communication B
150 - 150 Early Course Early Course Warning/ Repeated warning
Change Change A
170 - 170 Positioning System Positioning System Warning/ Repeated warning
Failure Failure B
171 - 171 Crossing Safety Crossing Safety Alarm/A -
Contour Contour
172 - 172 Off Track Alarm Off Track Alarm Alarm/A -
173 1 620 Area With Special User Chart Danger Warning/ Repeated warning
Conditions Area A
173 2 621 Traffic Separation
Zone
173 3 622 Inshore Traffic
Zone
173 4 623 Restricted Area
173 5 624 Caution Area
173 6 625 Offshore Produc-
tion Area
173 7 626 Military Practice
Area
173 8 627 Seaplane Landing
Area
173 9 628 Submarine Transit
Lane
173 10 629 Anchorage Area
173 11 630 Marine Farm/
Aquaculture
173 12 631 PSSA Area
173 13 632 Areas to be Avoid-
ed
173 14 633 Buoy
175 1 455 Datum Mismatch EPFS1 Invalid/ Warning/ Repeated warning
missing datum B
175 2 456 EPFS2 Invalid/
missing datum

20-11
20. ALERTS

ALF ALR Aggregated Alert Priority/

Alert name Escalation
No. Inst.* No. name Category
175 3 457 Datum Mismatch EPFS3 Invalid/ Warning/ Repeated warning
missing datum B
175 4 458 EPFS4 Invalid/
missing datum
175 5 459 EPFS5 Invalid/
missing datum
175 6 460 EPFS6 Invalid/
missing datum
175 7 461 EPFS7 Invalid/
missing datum
175 8 462 EPFS8 Invalid/
missing datum
175 9 463 EPFS9 Invalid/
missing datum
175 10 464 EPFS10 Invalid/
missing datum
190 1 531 Target Capacity AIS Target Display Warning/ Repeated warning
100% A
190 2 533 AIS Target Capaci- Caution/B
ty 100%
190 3 535 AIS Target Acti- Warning/
vate 100% A
190 4 523 TT Auto ACQ
100%
190 5 525 TT MAN ACQ
100%
191 1 526 CPA/TCPA TT CPA/TCPA Alarm/A Repeated warning
191 2 536 AIS CPA/TCPA
192 1 521 ACQUISITION/ TT New Target Warning/ Repeated warning
192 2 529 ACTIVATION AIS New Target A
(NEW TARGET)
193 1 527 Lost Target Alert TT Lost Warning/ Repeated warning
193 2 528 REF Target Lost A
193 3 537 AIS Lost
194 1 720 Radar System Fail- No ANT Heading Warning/ Repeated warning
ure Signal B
194 2 721 No ANT Azimuth
Signal
194 3 722 No ANT Trigger
Signal
194 4 723 No ANT Video Sig-
nal
194 5 724 No RPU Gyro Sig-
nal
194 6 725 No ANT Echo Sig-
nal
194 7 726 RF Unit COM Error
194 8 727 Radar Sensor
COM Error
194 9 770 SPU Error

20-12
 20. ALERTS

ALF ALR Aggregated Alert Priority/

Alert name Escalation
No. Inst.* No. name Category
194 10 771 Radar System Fail- MTR-DRV Error Warning/ Repeated warning
194 11 772 ure PM Error B
194 12 773 RF-Converter Er-
ror
194 13 774 PSU-Control Error
194 14 781 MTR-DRV COM
Error
194 15 782 PM COM Error
194 16 783 RF-Converter
COM Error
260 - 260 Emergency Call Emergency Call Alarm/A -
10001 1 001 HW Status Notice Main Monitor Fan1 Caution/B -
Rotation Speed
Lowering
10001 2 002 Main Monitor Fan2
Rotation Speed
Lowering
10001 3 003 Main Monitor Fan3
Rotation Speed
Lowering
10001 4 004 Main Monitor Fan4
Rotation Speed
Lowering
10001 5 014 Sub Monitor Fan1
Rotation Speed
Lowering
10001 6 015 Sub Monitor Fan2
Rotation Speed
Lowering
10001 7 016 Sub Monitor Fan3
Rotation Speed
Lowering
10001 8 017 Sub Monitor Fan4
Rotation Speed
Lowering
10001 9 011 Main Monitor
RS485 Communi-
cation Timeout
10001 10 024 Sub Monitor
RS485 Communi-
cation Timeout
10001 11 012 Main Monitor No
Signal
10001 12 025 Sub Monitor No
Signal
10001 13 013 Main Monitor Sen-
tence Syntax Error
10001 14 026 Sub Monitor Sen-
tence Syntax Error
10001 15 027 Main Monitor COM
Timeout

20-13
20. ALERTS

ALF ALR Aggregated Alert Priority/

Alert name Escalation
No. Inst.* No. name Category
10001 16 028 HW Status Notice Sub Monitor COM Caution/B -
Timeout
10001 17 073 Processor Unit
CPU Temp High
10001 18 074 Processor Unit
GPU Temp High
10001 19 075 Processor Unit
CPU Board Temp
High
10001 20 076 Processor Unit Re-
mote 1 Temp High
10001 21 077 Processor Unit Re-
mote 2 Temp High
10001 22 078 Processor Unit
CPU Fan Rotation
Speed Lowering
10001 23 079 Processor Unit
Fan1 Rotation
Speed Lowering
10001 24 080 Processor Unit
Fan2 Rotation
Speed Lowering
10001 25 081 Processor Unit
Fan3 Rotation
Speed Lowering
10001 26 089 Processor Unit
CPU board Battery
Power Error
10001 27 090 Processor Unit
CPU board Core
Power Error
10001 28 070 RCU 1 COM Time-
out
10001 29 071 RCU 2 COM Time-
out
10001 30 072 RCU 3 COM Time-
out
10001 31 400 Network Printer
Not Available
10001 32 401 Local Printer Not
Available
10002 1 005 HW Status Abnor- Main Monitor LCD Warning/ Repeated Warning
mal Unit Lifetime Over B
10002 2 018 Sub Monitor LCD
Unit Lifetime Over
10002 3 006 Main Monitor High
Temperature In-
side Monitor
10002 4 019 Sub Monitor High
Temperature In-
side Monitor

20-14
 20. ALERTS

ALF ALR Aggregated Alert Priority/

Alert name Escalation
No. Inst.* No. name Category
10002 5 007 HW Status Abnor- Main Monitor Fan1 Warning/ Repeated Warning
mal No Rotation B
10002 6 008 Main Monitor Fan2
No Rotation
10002 7 009 Main Monitor Fan3
No Rotation
10002 8 010 Main Monitor Fan4
No Rotation
10002 9 020 Sub Monitor Fan1
No Rotation
10002 10 021 Sub Monitor Fan2
No Rotation
10002 11 022 Sub Monitor Fan3
No Rotation
10002 12 023 Sub Monitor Fan3
No Rotation
10002 13 082 Processor Unit
CPU Fan No Rota-
tion
10002 14 083 Processor Unit
Fan1 Fan No Rota-
tion
10002 15 084 Processor Unit
Fan2 Fan No Rota-
tion
10002 16 085 Processor Unit
Fan3 Fan No Rota-
tion
10002 17 086 Processor Unit
CPU board 5V
Power Error
10002 18 087 Processor Unit
CPU board 3.3V
Power Error
10002 19 088 Processor Unit
CPU board 12V
Power Error
10050 1 320 Serial Ch. COM Processor Unit Caution/B -
Timeout Ch.01 COM Time-
out
10050 2 321 Processor Unit
Ch.02 COM Time-
out
10050 3 322 Processor Unit
Ch.03 COM Time-
out
10050 4 323 Processor Unit
Ch.04 COM Time-
out
10050 5 324 Processor Unit
Ch.05 COM Time-
out

20-15
20. ALERTS

ALF ALR Aggregated Alert Priority/

Alert name Escalation
No. Inst.* No. name Category
10050 6 325 Serial Ch. COM Processor Unit Caution/B -
Timeout Ch.06 COM Time-
out
10050 7 326 Processor Unit
Ch.07 COM Time-
out
10050 8 327 Processor Unit
Ch.08 COM Time-
out
10173 1 634 Crossing Special UKC Limit Warning/ Repeated warning
10173 2 635 Area Non-official ENC A
10173 3 636 No Vector Chart
10173 4 637 Not Up-to-date
10173 5 638 Permit Expired
10190 1 530 Target Capacity AIS Target Display Caution/B -
95%
10190 3 534 AIS Target Acti-
vate 95%
10190 4 522 TT Auto ACQ 95%
10190 5 524 TT MAN ACQ 95%
10300 1 030 Sensor Adapter Sensor Adapter 1 Caution/B -
COM Timeout COM Timeout
10300 2 031 Sensor Adapter 2
COM Timeout
10300 3 032 Sensor Adapter 3
COM Timeout
10300 4 033 Sensor Adapter 4
COM Timeout
10300 5 034 Sensor Adapter 5
COM Timeout
10300 6 035 Sensor Adapter 6
COM Timeout
10300 7 036 Sensor Adapter 7
COM Timeout
10300 8 037 Sensor Adapter 8
COM Timeout
10300 9 038 Sensor Adapter 9
COM Timeout
10300 10 039 Sensor Adapter 10
COM Timeout
10300 11 094 Sensor Adapter 11
COM Timeout
10300 12 095 Sensor Adapter 12
COM Timeout
10300 13 096 Sensor Adapter 13
COM Timeout
10300 14 097 Sensor Adapter 14
COM Timeout
10300 15 098 Sensor Adapter 15
COM Timeout

20-16
 20. ALERTS

ALF ALR Aggregated Alert Priority/

Alert name Escalation
No. Inst.* No. name Category
10300 16 099 Sensor Adapter Sensor Adapter 16 Caution/B -
COM Timeout COM Timeout
10331 - 331 Selected Gyro sta- Selected Gyro sta- Warning/ -
tus missing tus missing B
10380 131 380 AIS COM Error AIS COM Error Warning/ Repeated warning
B
10400 1 255 CCRS COM Error Gyro 1 COM Error Caution/B Repeated warning
10400 2 256 Gyro 2 COM Error -
10400 3 257 Gyro 3 COM Error
10400 4 258 Gyro 4 COM Error
10400 5 259 Gyro 5 COM Error
10400 11 391 ROT Gyro 1 COM
Error
10400 12 392 ROT Gyro 2 COM
Error
10400 13 393 ROT Gyro 3 COM
Error
10400 21 290 EPFS 1 COM Error
10400 22 291 EPFS 2 COM Error
10400 23 292 EPFS 3 COM Error
10400 24 293 EPFS 4 COM Error
10400 25 294 EPFS 5 COM Error
10400 26 295 EPFS 6 COM Error
10400 27 296 EPFS 7 COM Error
10400 28 297 EPFS 8 COM Error
10400 29 298 EPFS 9 COM Error
10400 30 299 EPFS 10 COM Er-
ror
10400 41 280 SDME 1 COM Er-
ror
10400 42 281 SDME 2 COM Er-
ror
10400 43 282 SDME 3 COM Er-
ror
10400 51 235 Echo Sounder 1
COM Error
10400 52 236 Echo Sounder 2
COM Error
10400 53 237 Echo Sounder 3
COM Error
10400 61 300 Rudder 1 COM Er-
ror
10400 62 301 Rudder 2 COM Er-
ror
10400 63 302 Rudder 3 COM Er-
ror
10400 71 303 HCS 1 COM Error
10400 72 304 HCS 2 COM Error
10400 81 305 VDR COM Error

20-17
20. ALERTS

ALF ALR Aggregated Alert Priority/

Alert name Escalation
No. Inst.* No. name Category
10400 91 306 CCRS COM Error BNWAS COM Er- Caution/B -
ror
10400 101 360 Wind Sensor 1
COM Error
10400 102 361 Wind Sensor 2
COM Error
10400 103 362 Wind Sensor 3
COM Error
10400 111 370 Water Current
COM Error
10400 121 371 Water Temp COM
Error
10400 141 390 NAVTEX COM Er-
ror
10431 - 431 HUB-3000 LinkUP HUB-3000 LinkUP Warning/ Repeated warning
Error Error B
10450 - 330 Double Gyro Sta- Double Gyro Sta- Warning/ Repeated warning
tus Conflict tus Conflict B
10499 - 500 Watch Alert Watch Alert Warning/ Repeated warning
B
10500 1 851 Sensor Banned EPFS 1 Sensor Caution/B -
Banned
10500 2 852 EPFS 2 Sensor
Banned
10500 3 853 EPFS 3 Sensor
Banned
10500 4 854 EPFS 4 Sensor
Banned
10500 5 855 EPFS 5 Sensor
Banned
10500 6 856 EPFS 6 Sensor
Banned
10500 7 857 EPFS 7 Sensor
Banned
10500 8 858 EPFS 8 Sensor
Banned
10500 9 859 EPFS 9 Sensor
Banned
10500 10 860 EPFS 10 Sensor
Banned
10500 11 871 Gyro 1 Sensor
Banned
10500 12 872 Gyro 2 Sensor
Banned
10500 13 873 Gyro 3 Sensor
Banned
10500 14 874 Gyro 4 Sensor
Banned
10500 15 875 Gyro 5 Sensor
Banned

20-18
 20. ALERTS

ALF ALR Aggregated Alert Priority/

Alert name Escalation
No. Inst.* No. name Category
10500 21 861 Sensor Banned SDME 1 Sensor Caution/B -
Banned
10500 22 862 SDME 2 Sensor
Banned
10500 23 863 SDME 3 Sensor
Banned
10500 31 881 ROT Gyro 1 Sen-
sor Banned
10500 32 882 ROT Gyro 2 Sen-
sor Banned
10500 33 883 ROT Gyro 3 Sen-
sor Banned
10510 1 900 No Filter Source of No Filter Source of Warning/ Repeated warning
Sensor Data Position B
10510 2 901 No Filter Source of
COG/SOG
10510 3 902 No Filter Source of
CTW/STW
10510 4 903 No Filter Source of
Heading
10510 5 904 No Filter Source of
ROT
10520 - 689 Drift comp error Drift comp error Warning/ Repeated warning
B
10540 1 539 AIS Message Alert AIS Message Re- Caution/B -
ceived
10540 2 541 AIS Message
Transmit Error
10540 3 542 AIS Transmitting
10560 - 560 Association Association Caution/B -
10601 1 272 Sensor Data Not UTC Time Not Caution/B Repeated warning
Available Available
10601 2 277 Wind Speed/Direc-
tion Not Available
10601 3 279 COG/SOG Not
Available
10601 4 284 SOG Not Available
10601 5 450 Heading Sensor
Not Available
10601 6 453 SDME Sensor Not
Available
10602 1 472 Sensor Source Position Source Caution/B -
Change Change
10602 2 473 Heading Source
Change
10602 3 474 COG/SOG Source
Change
10602 4 475 CTW/STW Source
Change
10602 5 470 Datum Change

20-19
20. ALERTS

ALF ALR Aggregated Alert Priority/

Alert name Escalation
No. Inst.* No. name Category
10603 1 273 Sensor Data Not Depth(Bow) Not Caution/B -
Available Available
10603 2 274 Depth(Midship)
Not Available
10603 3 275 Depth(Stern) Not
Available
10603 4 278 STW Not Available
10603 5 285 Heading Magnetic
Not Available
10718 - 728 Radar Sensor SW Radar Sensor SW Warning/ Repeated warning
Version Error Version Error B
10740 1 730 EXT Radar Error EXT Radar STBY Warning/ Repeated warning
10740 2 740 EXT Radar No Sig- B
nal
10740 3 750 EXT Radar COM
Error
10760 - 760 Datum Mismatch Datum Mismatch Caution/B -
10800 1 691 RM Stop RM Stop - Exceed Alarm/A -
Max XTD
10800 2 692 RM Stop - Sensor
lost
10800 3 693 RM Stop - Internal
Error
10801 - 485 Depth Limit Depth Limit Alarm/A Repeated warning
10802 - 495 Anchor Watch Anchor Watch Warning/ Escalated to alarm
A
10803 - 640 Chartalign: Over Chartalign: Over Caution/B Repeated warning
30 min 30 min
10807 - 820 NAVTEX Mes- NAVTEX Mes- Caution/B Repeated warning
sage Received sage Received
10850 - 652 End of track End of track Warning/ Repeated warning
A
10999 - 999 Alert setting file Alert setting file Warning/ Repeated warning
read error read error B
*: “Inst.” denotes the instance for each alert, where applicable. “-” denotes that there
is no instance number for the alert.

20-20
21. PARAMETERS

21.1 Ship and Route Parameters

The purpose of the ship and route parameters is set the basic parameters for the ship.
These parameters are relative to ship steering and they are very important to get cor-
rect function of the integrated navigation system. They must be maintained carefully.
Modification requires a good knowledge of the parameters' importance.

Open the menu and select [Ship & Route Parameters] from the [General] menu to
show the [Ship & Route] page. Set each item referring to the description below.

Ship parameters description

[MAX Speed]: Maximum speed the ship can do.
[MAX Height]: Max. height of ship above sea level.
[MAX Draught]: Max. draught of ship.

Route parameters description

[MAX R.O.T]*: The maximum rate of turn of the ship. Set at installation.
[WPT Approach]*: The alert time before reaching the wheel over point.
[WPT Prewarning]*: The alert time before reaching the wheel over point.
[Default Line Radius]: Define the default value of radius between waypoints during au-
tomatic route steering.
[Default XTD Limit]: Define the default value of XTD limit.
[Default Safety Margin]: Define the default value of extension for channel limits to be
checked against selected alerts.
* Set at installation and cannot be changed by the operator.

21-1
21. PARAMETERS

21.2 Forwarding Distances

The forwarding distances are the distances the ship travels straight after the steering
command is given to the autopilot. These distances change according to the radius of
turn.

The forwarding distances are entered at installation and cannot be changed by the op-
erator. However, the operator can view the forwarding distances settings on the [For-
warding Distance] display ([MENU][General][Navigation Parameter]).

Note: These are the port side values. Starboard side values can also be shown. Con-
tact a FURUNO dealer for details.

21-2
 21. PARAMETERS

21.3 Cost Parameters

The cost parameters are used in the optimization calculation. Therefore define these
parameters before doing the calculation.

Open the menu and select [Cost Parameters] from the [General] menu to show the
[Cost Parameters] page. Set each item according to ship’s plan, etc.

At the [Cost] window, enter the cost/hour and cost/ton for heavy fuel oil and diesel oil.
At the [Fuel Consumption] window, define the fuel consumption figures for up to 12
different speeds. Before entering the data, plot the data on a graph, like the one shown
below. Use a second graph if, for example, diesel oil consumption is different from that
of heavy fuel oil. Reset the power to effect the settings.

FUEL CONSUMPTION
7

4
TON/h

0
0 1 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 20

SHIP’S SPEED (kn)

21-3
21. PARAMETERS

21.4 Instant Track Parameters

The instant track feature can create, in route monitoring, a simple route in the following
situations:

• Return to the monitored route when the vessel goes outside the channel limits.
• Temporarily deviate from the monitored route (avoid collision, etc.).

How to set instant track parameters

Set the parameters for the instant track ([MENU]  [General]  [Ship & Route Pa-
rameters]  [Instant Track] tab).

[Delay before Initiating First Turn]: Set the number of seconds (30 - 600 seconds) to
wait before initiating the first turn in the simple route.

[Turn Radius]: Set the turning radius (0.02 - 3.00 NM) to use between waypoints (four
waypoints) in the simple route.

[XTD Limit]: Set the channel limit (10 - 3704 m) for the instant track, automatically or
manually. The [Auto] setting uses the channel limit set for the monitored route.

[Route Check Strictly]: Check to prevent monitoring of instant track when a chart alert
(alarm or warning) is found through the route check. Uncheck to monitor instant track
in spite of chart alert found through the route check.

21-4
22. SETTINGS MENU
The [Settings] menu provides file import, export and maintenance, alert settings, test-
ing facilities (display, keyboard, self test), data sharing, customizing, screenshot pro-
cessing, and CCRP selection.

22.1 How to Access the Settings Menu

Click the Settings button ( ) on the Sta-
tus bar then select [Settings]. The right
message appears.

Click the [OK] button to show the [Settings]

menu.

For the service technician

No. Name Description

1 Pages (menus) Twelve menus.
2 Page selection Scroll the [Settings] menu.
buttons
3 Menu area The menu for the selected page appears here.
4 [Exit] button Click to close [Setting] menu.
To open a page, use the page selection buttons to select a page then click the tab of
the page required. The color of the border of the page selected is cyan.

22-1
22. SETTINGS MENU

22.2 File Export

The [File Export] page lets you export setting data, routes, user charts, radar maps
and radar installation to a USB flash memory, in .zip file format, to share with other like
units.

1
7
2
3 Playback data

4
5

No. Name Description

1 [Setting data] Check to export setting data (radar, chart, conning, com-
mon, performance monitor data) and ten user profile data.
2 [Route/User chart] Check to export all routes and user charts.
3 [Playback data] No use.
4 [Radar map] Check to export all radar maps.
5 [Radar Installation] Check to export all setting of the [RADAR INSTALLATION]
menu. The [RADAR INSTALLATION] menu is for a qualified
technician only.
6 [Export] button Click the button to open the [SAVE FILE] dialog box. Select
the destination to save then click the [Save] button to export
all selected objects.
7 [Execute] button Save the inside check data to SSD. Only a qualified techni-
cian can extract the check data.
Note 1: Item 5 does not appear until an object is selected.
Note 2: The message "Now processing" appears during the exporting. The message
"File export finished." appears upon completion of the exporting. Click the [OK] button.

22-2
 22. SETTINGS MENU

22.3 File Import

The [File Import] page lets you import setting data, routes, user charts, radar maps
and radar installation from an external media (USB flash memory, etc.).

2
Playback data

Radar Installation

No. Name Description

1 [Select file to Click to show the [OPEN FILE] dialog box, where you can select
import] button the file to import.
2 [Select data to Check the data to import, among [Setting data], [Route/User
import] chart], and [Radar map].
Note 1: [Playback data] is no use.
Note 2: [Radar Installation] available in Service mode only.
3 [Import] button Click to import the objects selected. The following message ap-
pears on the display.

Note 1: The system automatically restarts after setting data is imported.

Note 2: If importing could not be completed, first check if the USB flash memory is
properly inserted. If inserted properly, try importing again.
Note 3: The [Select data to import] menu does not appear until after a file is selected.
The [Import] button appears after the data to import is selected.
Note 4: The message "Now processing" appears during the importing. The message
"File import finished." appears upon completion of the importing. Click the [OK] button.

22-3
22. SETTINGS MENU

22.4 File Maintenance

The [File Maintenance] page lets you restore the last-saved route/user chart applica-
tion and route/user chart system.

1
2

No. Name Description

1 [Route/Userchart Click to restore last-saved route/userchart application.
Application Back-
up]
2 [Route/Userchart Click to restore last-saved route/userchart system.
System Backup]
3 [Restore] button Click to restore item selected.
Note: To restore the route data from the backup data, first check all route data then
do the restore from the latest data.

22-4
 22. SETTINGS MENU

22.5 Alert Setting

The [Alert Setting] page sets how long to wait before the priority of an alert is raised to
Warning or Alarm, when the alert goes unacknowledged. Click the [Escalation Setting]
button to show the escalation settings. Alerts can be escalated to alarm level or re-
peated as a warning.

A greyed out [Escalation Mode] or [Escalation Time] value means that the value can-
not be changed.

22-5
22. SETTINGS MENU

No. Name Description

1 Page selection Select alert page. : Go to first page; : Go to previous page
buttons : Go to last page; : Go to next page
2 [Save] button * Save settings.
3 [CANCEL] Cancel settings and restore all previous settings.
button *
4 [DEFAULT] but- Restore factory settings.
ton
5 Escalation Mode Set the escalation mode.
Warning: Warning is repeated
when the [Escalation Time] elaps-
es.
Alarm: The alert priority is changed
if the alert is not acknowledged before the [Escalation Time]
elapses.
To globally assign escalation mode on the displayed page;
change the setting below the item.
6 Escalation Time Set the escalation time, the time to
wait before escalation occurs. The
settings are (in seconds) 30, 670,
90 120, 150, 180, 210, 240, 270
and 300.
To globally assign escalation time on the displayed page;
change the setting below the item.
* These buttons appear when the settings of Escalation Mode or Escalation Time is
changed.

22-6
 22. SETTINGS MENU

22.6 Self Test

The [Self Test] page is mainly used to check the equipment. The chart radar is inop-
erative during the test.

OK
OK

Function: ecdis,conning,tcs,ams

No. Name Description

1 Test results, pro- The time of and results of the self test, and display of the program
gram numbers, don- numbers. (xx=version number), and dongle information.
gle information
2 [Start] button Start the self test.
3 [Stop] button Stop the self test. (Shown during test.)
4 [Export] button Save the results to external device (ex.: USB flash memory). Avail-
able after the results are shown on the display.
Self test results display
The normal results of the boards are shown as follows.

Item Normal result

SPU Status
12V Power Supply (V) 11.4 - 12.6
5V Power Supply (V) 4.75 - 5.25
3.3V Power Supply (V) 3.18 - 3.42
2.5V Power Supply (V) 2.4 - 2.6
1.8V Power Supply (V) 1.71 - 1.89
1.25V Power Supply (V) 1.19 - 1.31
1.2V_1 Power Supply (V) 1.14 - 1.26
1.2V_2 Power Supply (V) 1.14 - 1.26
3.3V_A Power Supply (V) 3.18 - 3.42
-10V Power Supply (V) -10.5 - -9.5

22-7
22. SETTINGS MENU

Item Normal result

0.9V_1 Power Supply (V) not connect
0.9V_2 Power Supply (V) not connect
1.8V_A Power Supply (V) not connect
HV (V) 500 - 560
Magnetron Heater Voltage • X-band 12kW:
(V) 8.1 - 8.6 or 6.8 - 7.3
• X-band 25kW:
7.0 - 7.5 or 5.7 - 6.2
• S-band
7.4 - 7.9 or 6.3 - 6.8
Magnetron Heater Current • X-band: 0.5 - 0.6
(A) • S-band: 1.1 - 1.4
IF 5V Voltage (V) 4.75 - 5.25
IF -10V Voltage (V) -10.5 - -9.5
MD 12V Voltage (V) 11.4 - 12.6
Antenna Speed (rpm) • Antenna rotation 24 rpm: 22 - 26
• Antenna rotation 42 rpm: 39 - 44
Magnetron Current (A) • X-band: 5.0 - 12.0
• S-band: 6.0 - 10.0
Trigger Frequency (Hz) • STBY: 0
• [2ND ECHO REJ]=[OFF], TT range*= 24NM:
S1: 2640-3360, S2: 2640-3360,
M1: 1320-1680, M2: 1060-1340, M3: 880-1120,
L (within 96NM): 530-670, L (120NM): 440-560
• [2ND ECHO REJ]=[OFF], TT range*= 32NM:
S1: 1940-2460, S2: 1940-2460,
M1: 1320-1680, M2: 1060-1340, M3: 880-1120,
L (within 96NM): 530-670, L (120NM): 440-560
• [2ND ECHO REJ]=[ON]:
S1: 2640-3360, S2: 2640-3360,
M1: 440-560, M2: 440-560, M3: 440-560,
L: 440-560
*: TT range ([MAX RANGE]) is set at the installation.
LNA Monitor Voltage (V) 0.5 - 1.5
Tune Indicator (V) 2.0 - 3.0
Tune Initialize Indicator (V) 2.0 - 3.0
IF Frequency (MHz) • Pulse length = [S1], [S2]: 0.0
• Pulse length = other than the above settings:
55.0 - 65.0
FAN1 Rotation Speed (rpm) 3000 - 4000
FAN2 Rotation Speed (rpm) 3000 - 4000
Board Temperature (degC) -40 - -70
V TRIG Voltage (V) 10.0 - 18.0
ROM Check OK
RAM Check OK
DIP Switch (SW7-SW0) Displays the DIP switch settings on the SPU board
Board Revision Number Displays the version of the SPU board
MD Board Revision Number Displays the version of the MD board
TX Type X-12kW/X-25kW/S-30kW
IP Address Displays IP address of the SPU board
SPU Error Status ffff

22-8
 22. SETTINGS MENU

Item Normal result

MTR-DRV Status
Board Temperature (degC) Ambient temperature: below +20°C
12V Power Supply (V) 9 - 15
Motor Current (A) • X-band: 24rpm: 0.8
• X-band: 42rpm: 1.2
• S-band: 24rpm: 1.3
• S-band: 42rpm: 2
Motor Voltage (V) 43 - 53 (33 - 53*)
*: For antenna unit installed on the foremast.
Motor Rotation Speed (rpm) 0 (STBY)/24/36/42
Board Revision Number Displays the version of the MTR-DRV board.
ROM Check OK
RAM Check OK
PM Status
12V Power Supply (V) 9 - 15
PLL Status UNLOCK
Board Revision Number Displays the version of the PM board.
ROM Check OK
RAM Check OK
RF-Converter Status
HPA Board Temperature -40 - 100
(degC)
6V Power Supply (V) 4.9 - 8
48V Power Supply (V) 40 - 53
IF PLL Status LOCK
RF PLL Status LOCK
Board Revision Number Displays the version of the RF-CONV board.
ROM Check not connect
RAM Check not connect
PSU-Control Status
Board Temperature (degC) 40- 100
FAN1 Rotation Speed (rpm) 3700- 5700
FAN2 Rotation Speed (rpm) 3700- 5700
FAN3 Rotation Speed (rpm) • X-band: 0
• S-band: 3700 - 5700
3.3V Power Supply (V) 3.0 - 3.6
12V_LAN Power Supply (V) 10.8 - 13.2
12V Power Supply (V) 10.0 - 13.2
48V Voltage (V) 45.1 - 51.3
48V Current (A) 0 - 7.5
Motor1 Voltage (V) 45.1 - 51.3
Motor2 Voltage (V) • S-band, 42 rpm: 45.1 - 51.3
• Other than above: 100
HV (V) 499.6 - 565.5
Board Revision Number Displays the version of the PSU CTRL board.
ROM Check OK
RAM Check OK
48V Status OK
HV Status OK
Motor1 Status OK

22-9
22. SETTINGS MENU

Item Normal result

Motor2 Status OK

22.7 Data Sharing

The [Data Sharing] page selects the items to share between the radar and the chart
radar.

NAV Tools
VRM
1
EBL
PI Line

Display Settings
2 Color Palette
Display Brilliance

No. Name Description

1 [NAV Tools] Check the NAV tools items to share them between the chart
and the radar.
2 [Display Settings] Check the display setting items to share between the chart
and the radar.

22-10
 22. SETTINGS MENU

22.8 Customize
The [Customize] page lets you set buzzer volume, key beep volume, and scrollwheel
rotation direction.

No. Name Description

1 [Wheel rotation] Set the direction of scrollwheel rotation direction.
[Normal]: Downward to increase value, upward to decrease
value.
[Reverse]: Reverse of [Normal].
2 [Key beep volume] Set the loudness of the key beep that sounds for correct key
or mouse button operation.
0: No beep, 1: LOW, 2: MID, 3: HIGH
3 [Alert sound vol- Set the loudness of the alert buzzer.
ume] 1: LOW, 2: MID, 3: HIGH

22-11
22. SETTINGS MENU

22.9 Display Test

The [DIsplay Test] page displays various test patterns to check the monitor for proper
display of colors. Click the [Display Test] button to start the test. The buzzer sounds
when the display test starts.

Left-click to proceed in the numerical order shown below; right-click to proceed in re-
verse order.

(1) (2) (3) (4)

Diagonal Black All colors Black

(5) (6) (7) (8)

White Red Green Blue

(9) (10) (11) (12)

Gray Red bars Green bars Blue bars

(13) (14) (15) (16)

Yellow bars Aqua bars Purple bars Gray bars

To quit the display test at any time, press the ESC key on the applicable Control Unit.

22-12
 22. SETTINGS MENU

22.10 Keyboard Test

The [Keyboard Test] page checks the controls and keys on the Radar Control Unit and
the ECDIS Control Unit and the trackball module on the Radar Control Unit, ECDIS
Control Unit and Trackball Control Unit.

5 6

3
4 5

No. Name Description

1 Common controls Operate the corresponding controls on the Ra-
dar Control Unit and chart radar Control Unit.
Rotate a control and the window above the
control shows the setting value. Push a control
and the corresponding location on screen
lights in light blue. (The EBL and VRM controls
do not have a push function.)
2 InstantAccess knob/key Check the InstantAccess knob and key.
1) Rotate the knob and the setting value ap-
pears in the window.
2) Push the knob and the knob lights in light
blue.
3) Push the key and the key lights in blue.
3 Keys of the Radar Control Operate each key. The key pressed lights in
Unit light blue.
4 Keyboard of the chart radar Operate each key. The key pressed lights in
Control Unit light blue.

22-13
22. SETTINGS MENU

No. Name Description

5 Keys of both the Radar Con- Operate each key. The pressed key lights in
trol Unit and chart radar light blue.
Control Unit
6 Trackball module Check the trackball module of a Control Unit:
1) Spin the scrollwheel and rotate the track-
ball. The indication above the operated
control shows the setting value.
2) Push each button. The window above a
pushed button lights in light blue.
3) Push the scrollwheel. The window above
the wheel lights in light blue.
7 [Buzzer ON] button Click the [Buzzer ON] button to sound the
buzzer. The buzzer sounds and the button
flashes (in red). Click the button again to can-
cel.
8 [Contact Output] button Click the [Contact Output] button to output the
Alarm output contact signal from the Proces-
sor Unit. Click the button again to cancel.

22-14
 22. SETTINGS MENU

22.11 Screenshots
The [Screenshot] page handles the exporting (to a USB flash memory) and deleting
of screenshots from the SSD.

4 5 6 7 8

No. Name Description

1 List List of screenshots taken. Screenshots are automatically
assigned a file name consisting of the time and date the
screenshot was taken.
2 Check boxes Put a checkmark in the box of the screenshot to process.
3 [Preview] Preview of the screenshot selected.
4 [Delete] button Delete the screenshot(s) selected.
5 [Export] button Export selected screenshot(s) to a USB flash memory.
6 [Print] button Print the screenshot selected.
7 [Apply] button Save comment.
8 [Comment] box Enter comment for screenshot. Put a check in appropri-
ate checkbox then enter comment.

22-15
22. SETTINGS MENU

22.11.1 How to export screenshots

You can export screenshots to a USB flash memory as follows:

1. Insert a USB flash memory in the USB port on the Control Unit.
2. Open the [Screenshot] page.
3. Put a checkmark in the checkbox of the screenshot(s) to export.
4. Click the [Export] button.
SAVE FILE

USB Flash 04.04.2012 19:23

5. Select the USB flash memory.

6. Click the [OK] button to export the screenshots selected.
7. If the exporting was successful, a window showing the number of files exported
appears. Click the [OK] button to finish.

22.11.2 How to delete screenshots

You can delete the screenshots saved in the SSD inside the EC-3000.

1. Select the [Screenshot] page.

2. Put a checkmark in the checkbox of the screenshot(s) to delete. To select all
screenshots, right-click the box to the left of the [Date] column then select [Select
all]. To clear all check marks, select [Clear all].
3. Click the [Delete] button. The confirmation message "Attention: Selected files will
be deleted. Do you wish to continue?" appears.
4. Click the [Yes] button to delete the screenshots selected. The message "File de-
letion succeeded" appears.
5. Click the [OK] button.

22.11.3 How to print screenshots

With connection of a printer you can print the screenshots stored in the SSD of the
processor unit.

1. Select the [Screenshot] page.

2. Put a checkmark in the checkbox of the screenshot(s) to print.
3. Click the [Print] button.

22-16
 22. SETTINGS MENU

22.12 User Default

The [User Default] page restores all default settings for [Radar menu], [Chart menu],
[User profile] and [Setting menu]. Click the [Restore User Setting] button. The mes-
sage "All setting data will be restored to the default. Do you wish to continue?" ap-
pears. Click the [Yes] button to restore default settings and reset the power.

If you require the setting data, copy it to a USB flash memory (using the file export fea-
ture), BEFORE restoring user defaults.

22-17
22. SETTINGS MENU

22.13 CCRP
The [CCRP] page provides for selection of CCRP (Consistent Common Reference
Point) and shows the setting of anchor installation position and the location of various
sensors.

No. Name Description

1 CCRP Select the CCRP to use in the case of multiple CCRPs.
2 Anchor Enter anchor installation position (X and Y values from
CCRP). The setting ranges are X, -15.0 to 15 m; Y, 0.0 to
300.0 m.
3 Display Filter Check the items to show on the ship’s graphic.
4 Ship’s graphic Shows the location of the sensors selected at the [Dis-
play Filter].

22-18
23. COMMON REFERENCE SYSTEM

23.1 Installation of the System

Special attention of following topics is required to maintain the "Common Reference
System." The origin of the common reference system is the conning position on ves-
sel.

• The values of the center and conning positions depend on the size and geometry of
the ship.
• Offsets from the antenna position to the conning position of position sensors de-
pend on the location of the antennas of the position sensor.
• Offsets from the antenna position to the conning position of the radars depend on
the location of the radar antennas.

23.2 Accuracy of the System

Accuracy depends on the following conditions:

 Gyro error referenced to chart orientation

 Accuracy of EPFS
 Accuracy of radar performance and display (see the specifications at the back of
this manual).
 Accuracy of setting of CCRP (see section 2.32)
The following items must be properly adjusted to meet the above conditions:
 Timing (Tx timing of radar echo). Timing is adjusted from the [RADAR INSTALLA-
TION] menu, accessible by a qualified technician. Contact a FURUNO dealer for
details.
 Heading (Adjustment of radar echo heading). Heading is adjusted from the [RA-
DAR INSTALLATION] menu, accessible by a qualified technician. Contact a FU-
RUNO dealer for details.
 Radar ANT position (Center of radar image is the radar antenna position). Radar
antenna position is set on the [Common Installation Settings] menu, accessible by
the qualified. Contact a FURUNO dealer for details.
 Conning position:
• The chart radar uses position data fed from a GPS navigator to calculate the lat-
itude and longitude position of the conning position.
• GPS antenna position and conning position are entered during the installation.
GPS antenna and conning positions are set on the [Common Installation Set-
tings] menu, accessible by the qualified. Contact a FURUNO dealer for details.
• The latitude and longitude position displayed at the top-right position on the
screen is the latitude and longitude position of the conning position.
• The chart datum used by the chart radar is recorded in geodetic datum WGS-84;
therefore, the geodetic datum setting on the GPS navigator must be WGS-84.

23-1
23. COMMON REFERENCE SYSTEM

 Gyro data:
• Serial format gyro data is fed directly from a gyrocompass, thus adjustment of
the heading indication on the chart radar is not necessary.
• If synchro or stepper gyro data is fed to the chart radar, the heading indication
on the chart radar must be adjusted to match that of the gyro. For the adjustment
procedure, see section 1.17.
 Speed data:
• Speed may be input from SDME or GPS.
• SDME may be single-axis water speed or dual-axis ground speed.
• GPS may be used to input COG/SOG.
• Ground speed may also be taken from TT reference target.
• Speed is entered from the [Setting] menu. For details, see section 1.16.

23-2
24. CONNING DISPLAYS

24.1 Main Conning Display

The main conning display provides relevant sensor information data (including engine
data) from external equipment, on one display to facilitate safe and efficient monitor-
ing. The ECDIS accepts sensor information data in analog, serial and contact signal
formats.

Six sets of conning displays are available, and they are arranged at installation. Con-
sult with the installer of the equipment to decide the content and layout of each display.

To show the conning display, click the Operating Mode button on the Status bar to se-
lect [CONNING for RADAR].

Note: Analog data is shown in the lowest value of the setting range when the data is
not input.

Conning display Status bar (see next page)

24-1
24. CONNING DISPLAYS

Conning display Status bar

No. Button Description

1 Operating mode Selects the operating mode, [RADAR], [CHART for RADAR] or [CON-
NING].
2 Conning display Selects the conning display sheet to use, Sheet.1 - Sheet.6. (Sheet name
sheet is decided at installation. “Sheet x” (x=sheet number) is the default sheet
name.)
3 [SILENT] Goes to the [SILENT] mode. See section 6.7.
4 [TOOL] Shows, hides the software keyboard; adjusts the volume of the key beep
and audio alert.

Shows, hides
software keyboard
Adjusts volume of Volume setting
key beep, audio
alert

To adjust a
volume, put Click up arrow
cursor in to raise volume;
applicable down arrow to
box. lower volume.

5 Selects a display palette. See section 1.5.

6 Adjusts the brilliance of a the monitor. See section 1.6.

7 Takes a screenshot. See section 1.21.

8 Displays AMS and conning software version and system information. The
information shown in the figure may differ from your own. See
section 1.24.

Display example
9 Date See section 1.20.
10 Time See section 1.20.

24-2
 24. CONNING DISPLAYS

No. Button Description

11 Status • Rotates clockwise if the system is working properly. If it is not spinning
Indicator the system is not working. Shortly after the working indicator stops spin-
ning the buzzer sounds and the status LED turns red. Reset the power
R to restore normal operation.
• If the primary display mode is specified during installation, the first letter
E C of the primary mode name appears at the center of the working indicator
as follows: C: Conning, E: ECDIS, R: Radar. The letter can be clicked
to return to the primary display mode.

24.2 Conning Display Examples

Six conning display sheets are available, and the content, layout and name of each
sheet can be customized, by a qualified technician. Below are some examples con-
ning display sheets.

Example 1 (General navigation)

24-3
24. CONNING DISPLAYS

Example 2 (General navigation)

Example 3 (General navigation)

24-4
 24. CONNING DISPLAYS

Example 4 (General navigation)

Example 5 (All waters, navigation)

Silence

24-5
24. CONNING DISPLAYS

Example 6 (All waters, harbor)

27 May 2016

Silence

Example 7 (Ocean, navigation)

27 May 2016

Silence

24-6
 24. CONNING DISPLAYS

Example 8 (Ocean, harbor)

27 May 2016

Silence

Example 9 (Offshore Service Vessel, Fore 1)

Silence

24-7
24. CONNING DISPLAYS

Example 10 (Offshore Service Vessel, Fore 2)

27 May 2016

Silence

Example 11 (Offshore Service Vessel, Aft 1)

Silence

24-8
 24. CONNING DISPLAYS

Example 12 (Offshore Service Vessel, Aft 2)

27 May 2016

Silence

24.3 Mini Conning Display

The mini conning display, available in the
Voyage navigation mode, provides various
navigation information and is set during
the installation. The display example be-
low shows heading, doppler log speed and
rudder angle. To show or hide the mini
conning display, click the [Mini Conning]
button on the InstantAccess bar™.

To shift the mini conning display, right-

click the mini conning display to show the
context-sensitive menu. Click an option:
[Left Top], [Left Middle], [Left Bottom],
[Right Top], [Right Middle] or [Right Bot-
tom].

24-9
24. CONNING DISPLAYS

24.4 Side Conning Display (landscape monitor only)

With the landscape monitor, the side conning display can be shown in the information
area, in the radar mode. The presence or absence of the display is determined during
the installation.

Four side conning sheets are preset during the installation according to expected us-
age, possible navigation conditions, etc. (The operator cannot modify the sheets.) You
can select a sheet by clicking the current sheet name at the top right corner on the
display.

Sheet name

Rudder

Side conning display

24-10
25. MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLE-
SHOOTING
Periodic checks and maintenance are important for proper operation of any electronic
system. This chapter contains maintenance and troubleshooting instructions to be fol-
lowed to obtain optimum performance and the longest possible life of the equipment.
Before attempting any maintenance or troubleshooting procedure please review the
safety information below. If you cannot restore normal operation after following the
troubleshooting procedures, do not attempt to check inside any unit; there are no user-
serviceable parts inside. Refer any repair work to a qualified technician.

WARNING NOTICE
Do not open the equipment. Do not apply paint, anti-corrosive
sealant or contact spray to coating or
Hazardous voltage which can plastic parts of the equipment.
cause electrical shock exists
inside the equipment. Only Those items contain organic solvents that
qualified personnel should can damage coating and plastic parts,
work inside the equipment. especially plastic connectors.
Turn off the radar power
switch before servicing the
antenna unit. Post a
warning sign near the
switch indicating it should
not be turned on while the
antenna unit is being
serviced.

Prevent the potential risk of

being struck by the rotating
antenna.
A transmitting radar
antenna emits
electromagnetic waves,
which can be harmful,
particularly the eyes.

Wear a safety belt and hard

hat when working on the
antenna unit.

Serious injury or death can

result if someone falls from
the radar antenna mast.

25-1
25. MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

25.1 Maintenance
Regular maintenance is essential to good performance. A regular maintenance pro-
gram should be established and should at least include the items shown in the table
below.

Maintenance schedule
Interval Check point Check and measures Remarks
When needed FURUNO-supplied Dust or dirt may be removed Do not use chemical-based
monitor unit and from a cabinet with a soft cleaners for cleaning. They
Processor Unit cloth. Water-diluted mild de- can remove paint and mark-
tergent may be used if de- ings.
sired. DO NOT use chemical
cleaners to clean the display
unit; they may remove paint
and markings.
To clean the LCD, wipe the
LCD carefully to prevent
scratching, using tissue paper
and an LCD cleaner. To re-
move dirt or salt deposits, use
an LCD cleaner, wiping slowly
with tissue paper so as to dis-
solve the dirt or salt. Change
paper frequently so the salt or
dirt will not scratch the LCD.
Do not use solvents such as
thinner, acetone or benzene
for cleaning. Also, do not use
a degreaser or an antifog
solution, as they can strip the
coating from the LCD.
Filter inside Proces- Have a technician clean the
sor Unit filter if it is dusty. See
section 25.4.
5 years Antenna Unit If the grease dries out the V Have a qualified technician
ring may break, allowing water apply the grease oil to the
to leak inside the antenna unit. antenna rotary.

25-2
 25. MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

Interval Check point Check and measures Remarks

3 to 6 months Cabling Check that all cabling is firmly
connected and is not dam-
aged.
Exposed bolts and Exposed bolts and nuts are Check that bolts and nuts
nuts of antenna unit subject to corrosion. Further, are not corroded and are se-
they may loosen by vibration. curely fastened. If corroded,
clean and coat with anticor-
rosive sealant.
Radiator Dust, dirt and salt deposits on The radiator is made of fiber-
the radiator cause signal at- glass reinforced plastic.
tenuation, resulting in loss of Therefore, do not used gas-
sensitivity. Wipe radiator with oline, benzene and the like
a freshwater-moistened cloth. to clean the radiator.
If the radiator is iced, use a
wooden or plastic headed
hammer to remove the ice.
DO NOT use a steel ham-
mer.
Terminals, connec- Check that all terminals and Have a qualified technician
tors connectors on circuit boards check terminals and connec-
are securely fastened. tors.
6 months to 1 Screws on terminal Check that all screws are Have a qualified technician
year boards in Proces- tightly fastened. check screws.
sor Units

25.2 How to Replace the Fuses

The fuse in the Power Supply Unit, Processor Unit, monitor unit and sensor adapter
protects those units from overvoltage (overcurrent) and internal fault. If a unit cannot
be turned on, check if its fuse has blown. If the fuse has blown, find out the cause be-
fore replacing the fuse. If the fuse blows again after replacement, contact your dealer
for advice.

WARNING
Use the proper fuse.

Use of a wrong fuse can damage the

equipment or cause fire.

Unit Power supply Type Code no.

Power Supply Unit PSU-014 100-230 VAC F1: FGBO 250V 7A PBF 000-178-084-10
Power Supply Unit PSU-015 100-230 VAC F1: FGBO 250V 3A PBF 000-155-841-10
F2: FGBO 250V 7A PBF 000-178-084-10
Power Supply Unit PSU-016 100-230 VAC F1: FGBO 250V 5A PBF 000-155-840-10
Power Supply Unit PSU-018 100-230 VAC F1: FGBO 250V 3A PBF 000-155-841-10
F2: FGBO 250V 7A PBF 000-178-084-10
Monitor Unit MU-190 100-230 VAC FGBO 250V 1A PBF 000-155-828-10
Monitor Unit MU-231 100-230 VAC FGBO 250V 1.5A PBF 000-155-833-10
Processor Unit EC-3000 100-115 VAC FGMB 125V 10A PBF 000-157-470-10
220-230 VAC FGMB 250V 5A PBF 000-157-570-10
Sensor Adapter MC-3000S 24 VDC FGMB 125V 3A PBF 000-157-481-10

25-3
25. MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

25.3 Trackball Maintenance

If the cursor moves abnormally, clean the trackball and inside the trackball housing (in-
cluding the lens) as shown below:

1. Turn the retaining ring on the trackball module in the direction of the arrows (see
figure below) to unlock it, then remove the retaining ring.

Trackball

Retaining ring

2. Use cellophane tape to remove the trackball form the trackball housing.
Place the trackball and the retaining ring on clean, soft cloth laid on a flat surface.
3. Clean the ball with a damp, soft cloth, then use a dry, lint-free cloth to carefully
wipe the ball dry.
4. Use a swab, moistened with water, to carefully clean the inside of the retaining
ring, the inside of the trackball housing, the supports and the lens. Change the
swab regularly so that dirt and dust build-up is easily removed.

Swab
Lens

Supports
Retaining ring - inner side

Trackball housing
5. Make sure that the trackball, trackball housing and retaining ring are completely
dry.
6. Re-set the ball and retaining ring. Be sure the retaining ring is not inserted re-
versely.

25-4
 25. MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

25.4 How to Clean the Filter in the Processor Unit

Have a qualified technician clean the air inlet filter in the Processor Unit when it be-
comes dusty. Remove the filter and clean it with water and a mild detergent. Rinse the
filter, allow it filter to dry then return it to the Processor Unit.

Air inlet Filter

Processor unit, left side

Note 1: Be sure the air inlet is not blocked. A blocked inlet can cause the temperature
to rise inside the cabinet, which can lead to malfunction.
Note 2: The right side of the Processor Unit has an exhaust vent. Remove dust from
the vent as necessary.

25.5 Troubleshooting
The troubleshooting table below provides common faults and the remedy with which
to restore normal operation.

Radar troubleshooting
If… then… Remedy
the radar echoes disappear and check the connection between Reconnect the cable (if loos-
the alert 727 (ALF format: the EC-3000 and radar sensor. ened) then restart the equip-
194,8) "Radar Sensor COM Er- ment.
ror" appears
the alert 750 (ALF format: • check the connection be- Reconnect the cable (if loos-
10740,3) "EXT Radar COM Er- tween the EC-3000 of this ened) then restart the equip-
ror" appears equipment and the EC-3000 ment.
in the LAN line.
• check the connection be-
tween the EC-3000 and ra-
dar sensor in the LAN line.
the equipment cannot be turned • power connector may have • Check connector.
on loosened.
• ship's mains is off. • Check ship's mains.
• fuse has blown. • Replace fuse.
the equipment can be turned on • brilliance is too low. • Adjust brilliance.
but nothing appears on the dis- • the ambient temperature is • The heater is warming the
play less than 0°C (32°F). EC-3000. The display ap-
pears in approx. 10 minutes.

25-5
25. MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

If… then… Remedy

key doesn't beep when operat- • key beep is turned off. • Turn on key beep from the
ed menu, referring to
section 22.8.
picture not updated or picture • If the picture freezes, the • Restart the equipment.
freezes. buzzer sounds and the Sta-
tus LED blinks in red.
picture does not change even • suspect faulty the RANGE • Hit the RANGE key several
though range is changed. key or video freeze. times. If nothing happens, re-
start the equipment.
only two index lines are dis- • check index line distance set- • Refer to section 2.22.3 for
played ting. how to adjust index line dis-
tance.
range rings are not displayed • range rings are hid. • Turn on the range rings.
tracked target is not tracked • sea clutter etc. are masking • Adjust A/C SEA and A/C
correctly tracked target. RAIN to suppress sea and
rain clutters.
sensitivity is poor • suspect second-trace echo • Reject second-trace echo;
or soiled radiator. clean radiator.

Chart troubleshooting
If… then… Remedy
message "No connec- • dongle is not connected. • Connect dongle.
tion to dongle" appears
the message "There is • dongle is not connected. • Connect dongle.
no dongle or an error • data in the dongle is corrupted. • Contact FURUNO for assistance.
has occurred in the
dongle. The system will
automatically shut
down." appears
monitored route is not • route has not been selected. • Select route to monitor.
displayed • monitor route has not been se- • Open the [Route] page of the
lected to be visible above the [Symbol Display] menu and check
chart. the monitored route parts to show.
planned route is not • route has not been selected. • Select route as “planned”.
displayed • planned route has not been se- • Open [Route] page of [Symbol Dis-
lected to be visible above the play] menu and check the planned
chart. route parts to show.
route monitoring is • Alert 691 (ALF format: • Steer the ship back to the route
stopped 10800,1): RM Stop - Exceed then restart route monitoring.
Max XTE. Own ship is too far
away from the route. • Request service.
• Alert 692 (ALF format:
10800,3): RM Stop - No Valid
Sensor Data. Chart radar inter- • Check sensor connections.
nal error.
• Alert 693 (ALF format:
10800,2): RM Stop - Other
Causes. Required data (posi-
tion, SOG/COG) not found.
symbol of user chart • two or more symbols may be • Do the delete action several times.
cannot be erased superimposed on each other.

25-6
 25. MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

If… then… Remedy

position cannot be • position sensor(s) is not select- • Check position sensor selections.
found ed on the [POSN] page.
• position sensor is turned off. • Turn on position sensor.
• sensor cable has loosened. • Check cable.
ENC chart cannot be • No ENC chart for area. • Open ENC chart from [Manage
displayed Charts] dialog box
• Dongle not connected. • Connect dongle.
past track is not • past track is not selected to be • Open [Tracking] page of [Symbol
displayed visible. Display] menu and select [Own
Ship Past Tracks] to [Primary] or
[Secondary] as appropriate.
monitored user chart is • user chart is not selected to be • Open [Mariner] page of [Symbol
not displayed on chart visible. Display] menu and select parts to
display show.
user chart is not dis- • user chart is not selected in • Select user chart in Voyage navi-
played on radar display Voyage navigation mode. gation mode.
the message "Nearing • the memory usage limit for soft- If you need to save your work, click
memory usage limit. ware is close to capacity. Per- the [Later] button then restart the
Click the Restart button formance may be affected. equipment. If you don't need to save
to restart the system to your work, click the [Restart] button.
prevent trouble." ap-
pears
the message "Memory • the memory usage limit for soft- Click the [Restart] button to reset the
usage limit reached. ware is reached. Performance power. No other operations are avail-
Click the Restart button may be affected. able than restart.
to restart the system to
prevent trouble." ap-
pears
both the display mode • the memory usage limit for soft- Stop all operations and restart the
buttons [RADAR] and ware is close to capacity. Per- equipment.
[CHART for RADAR] formance may be affected.
are yellow

25.6 Consumable Parts

The table below lists the consumable parts in the antenna unit, Monitor Units, Proces-
sor Unit and Sensor Adapters. Replace the parts before their expected expirations.

Consumable parts

Part Type Lifetime Remarks

Antenna Unit
Magnetron FNE1201 5,000 hours Check number of hours
used at TX time. Reset
MG5436 5,000 hours time then adjust the PM
MG5223F 7,000 hours gain after replacement
(see section 2.31).
Motor BV2-K155 10,000 hours For S-band radar
BV2-K156 10,000 hours For X-band radar
Monitor Unit

25-7
25. MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

Part Type Lifetime Remarks

BEZEL (19) & MU-190 50,000 hours
LCD ASSEMBLY
BEZEL (23) & MU-231 50,000 hours
LCD ASSEMBLY
Processor Unit EC-3000
CPU Fan KTA-555-01 8.5 years
Power Fan 109P0612H761 8.5 years
Chassis Fan 109P0612H761 8.5 years
Sensor Adapter MC-3000S
MC-CS Board 24P0114 8.5 years
Sensor Adapter MC-3010A
MC-ANLG Board 24P0115 7.0 years
The expected lifetimes are typical values. Actual lifetime depends on usage and am-
bient temperature.

25-8
 25. MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

25.7 Color Differentiation Test for S57 Charts

The color differentiation checks if the chart radar monitor can distinguish between the
various color-coded areas, lines and symbols.

1. Click the [Chart INFO] and [Chart 1] buttons on the InstantAccess bar™ to show
the [ECDIS Chart 1] menu.

New symbols
Color diagram

2. Click [Color diagram] to show the color test diagram.

If the colors are correct, the diagonal line will be distinguishable from its surroundings,
at any brilliance setting.

25-9
25. MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

25.8 Fallback Arrangements

If the top priority sensor (e.g. GPS1) can not be used, this equipment automatically
uses the second priority sensor (e.g. GPS2) when the multiple sensors (e.g. GPS1
and GPS2) are installed. When all sensors can not be used, each function is limited
as follows:

Sensor Operation of this equipment

Heading sensor • The HDG indication reads "***.*°".
• The presentation mode is automatically set for head-up.
• TT, AIS, radar map, chart and echo averaging (EAV) are disabled.
Speed sensor When LOG(WT) is selected:
• The sensor used is automatically switched in the following priority order:
GPS(BT) > LOG(BT).
• The SPD indication reads "***.* kn" when both GPS(BT) and LOG(BT)
can not be used.
When LOG(BT) is selected:
• The sensor used is automatically switched in the following priority order:
GPS(BT) > LOG(WT).
• The SPD indication reads "***.* kn" when both GPS(BT) and LOG(WT)
can not be used.
When GPS(BT) is selected:
• The sensor used is automatically switched in the following priority order:
LOG(BT) > LOG(WT).
• The SPD indication reads "***.* kn" when both LOG(BT) and LOG(WT)
can not be used.
COG/SOG sensor • When the GPS sensor can not be used, the values of COG and SOG are
calculated from HDG and LOG(BT).
• Additionally when the heading sensor can not be used, the values of
SOG is calculated from LOG(BT). The COG indication reads "***.*°".
Position sensor • The POSN indication reads all asterisks.
• AIS, radar map and chart are disabled.

25-10
APPENDIX 1 MENU TREE
Radar menu

1 ECHO 1 CUSTOMIZE 1 INT REJECT (OFF, 1, 2, 3)

ECHO 2 ECHO STRETCH (OFF, 1, 2, 3)
3 ECHO AVERAGE (OFF, 1, 2, 3)
4 NOISE REJECT (OFF, ON)
5 AUTO SEA (OFF, ON)
6 AUTO RAIN (OFF, 1, 2, 3, 4)
7 VIDEO CONTRAST (1, 2, 3 4; A, B, C)
8 PULSE 1 0.5 NM (S1, S2)
2 0.75 NM (S1, S2, M1)
3 1.5 NM (S1, S2, M1)
4 3 NM (S2, M1, M2, M3)
5 6 NM (M1, M2, M3, L)
6 12-24 NM (M2, M3, L)
9 CONDITION 1 SEA CONDITION (1, 2, 3, 4, 5)
2 STC ANT HEIGHT (5, 7.5, 10, 15, 20, 25,
30, 35, 40, 45, more 45 m)
3 LOW LEVEL ECHO (0 to 8, 0)
4 STC RANGE (-10 to +10, 0)
0 DEFAULT (NO, SAVE, USER, DEFAULT)
2 ECHO AREA* (CIRCLE, WIDE)
3 ECHO COLOR (YEL, GRN, WHT, AMBER*, COLOR*)
4 TRAIL 1 TRAIL MODE (REL, TRUE)
2 TRAIL GRAD (SINGLE, MULTI)
* Not available with
3 TRAIL COLOR* (GRN, BLU, CYA, PNK,
IMO or A type.
MAG, WHT, YEL)
4 TRAIL LEVEL (1, 2, 3, 4)
5 OS TRAIL (OFF, ON)
6 SUPPRESS TRAIL AROUND OS (OFF, ON)
5 2ND ECHO REJ (OFF, ON)
6 PERFORMANCE MON (OFF, ON)
7 SART (OFF, ON)
8 WIPER (OFF, 1, 2)
9 DUAL RADAR (OFF, COMBINE)

2 TT/AIS 1 ACQUISITION ZONE 1 AZ STAB (STAB HDG, STAB NORTH)

2 AZ POLYGON (OFF, STAB GND, STAB
HDG, STAB NORTH)
2 TRIAL MANEUVER 1 TRIAL MANEUVER (STATIC, DYNAMIC)
2 SPEED RATE
3 TURN RATE
4 TGT DATA* (ACTUAL, DATA)
3 TT 1 TT SELECT**
2 ALL CANCEL (NO, YES)
3 LOST FILTER MAX RNG (OFF, ON
(0 to 99 NM, 12))
4 AIS 1 VOYAGE DATA (NAV STATUS, ETA,
DESTINATION, DRAUGHT, CREW, PERSONS,
CARGO CATEGORY)
2 STATIC DATA
3 SLEEP ALL TGTS (NO, YES)
**: When [NUMBER OF TT] is [MAX]: 4 CPA AUTO ACTIVATE
(MANUAL 100, MANUAL 75•AUTO 25, 1 MAX RANGE (OFF, ON (0 to 99 NM, 12))
MANUAL 50•AUTO 50, MANUAL 25•AUTO 75, 2 MIN SHIP SPEED (OFF, ON
AUTO 100) (0-9.9 kn, 1.0))
3 EXCEPT CLASS B (OFF, ON)
5 DISP FILTER
1 SLEEPING CLASS A (OFF, ON)
2 SLEEPING CLASS B (OFF, ON)
3 BASE STATION (OFF, ON)
4 PHYSCIAL ATON (OFF, ON)
5 VIRTUAL ATON (OFF, ON)
6 MAX RANGE (OFF, ON (0 to 99 NM, 12))
7 MIN SHIP SPEED (OFF, ON
(Continued on next page) (0-9.9 kn, 1.0))

AP-1
APPENDIX 1 MENU TREE

(Continued from previous page)

6 LOST FILTER
1 MAX RANGE (OFF, ON (0-99 NM, 12))
2 MIN SHIP SPEED (OFF, ON
(0 to 9.9 kn, 1.0))
3 EXCEPT CLASS B (OFF, ON)
7 RECEIVED MESSAGES
8 TRANSMIT MESSAGE
1 ADDRESS TYPE (ADDRESSED,
BROADCAST)
2 MESSAGE TYPE (SAFETY, BINARY)
3 MMSI NO.
4 CHANNEL (A, B, A or B, A and B)
Page 2
1 OPEN FILE
2 SAVE FILE
3 EDIT
4 TRANSMIT MESSAGE
5 TT/AIS SYMBOL 1 SYMBOL COLOR (GRN, BLU, CYA, RED*1,
MAG, WHT, YEL*1)
2 ATON SYMBOL COLOR (GRN, BLU, CYA,
RED, MAG, WHT)
3 AIS ROT TAG LIMIT (0.0° to 359.9°, 000.0°)
4 TT POP-UP INFO (OFF, ON)
5 AIS POP-UP INFO (OFF, ON)
6 TT/AIS PAST POSN POINTS (5, 10)
7 AIS SCALED SYMBOL (OFF, ON)
6 ASSOCIATION 1 ASSOCIATION TGT (OFF, AIS, TT)
2 GAP (0.000 to 0.999NM, 0.050)
3 RANGE (0.000 to 0.000NM, 0.100)
4 BEARING (00.00° to 99.9°, 9.9°)
5 SPEED (0.0 to 9.9 kn, 6.0)
6 COURSE (00.0° to 99.9°, 25.0°)
3 NAV TOOL 1 PI LINE 1 PI LINE BEARING*1 (REL, TRUE)
2 SET ALL PI LINE (OFF, 1, 2, 3, 6)
3 NUMBER OF ALL PI LINE (OFF, 1, 2, 3, 6)
4 PI LINE MODE (PARALLEL, PERPEN-
DICULAR)
5 RESET PI LINE
6 RESET ALL PI LINE
7 TRUNCATE
PI 1 (to 6) TRUNCATE (OFF, ON)
2 EBL/VRM*3 1 EBL1*2 (REL, TRUE)
2 EBL2*2 (REL, TRUE)
3 VRM1*2 (NM, SM, km, kyd)
4 VRM2*2 (NM, SM, km, kyd)
5 EBL OFFSET BASE POINT (STAB GND,
STAB HDG, STAB NORTH)
6 VRM TTG (OFF, 1, 2, 1 and 2)
7 VRM OFFSET (OFF, LINK EBL)
3 CURSOR*2 1 CURSOR BEARING (REL, TRUE)
2 CURSOR RANGE (NM, SM, km, kyd)
3 CURSOR SIZE (SMALL, LARGE)
4 OWN SHIP VECTOR 1 VECTOR STAB IND (OFF, ON)
2 TIME INCREMENTS (OFF, ON)
3 OWN SHIP VECTOR (OFF, HDG, COURSE)
4 VECTOR COLOR (GRN, BLU, CYA,
RED, MAG, WHT)
5 TARGET VECTOR 1 REF TARGET VECTOR (OFF, ON)
6 RANGE RING*2 (OFF, ON)
7 BARGE 1 BARGE MARK (OFF, ON)
*1 Not available with IMO type. 2 BARGE SIZE (LENGTH, WIDTH)
3 ARRANGEMENT
*2 Not available with IMO or A type.
3
* EBL/VRM/CURSOR on IMO and A types.
EBL/CURSOR BEARING (REL, TRUE)
additionallly shown on those types.
(Continued on next page)

AP-2
 APPENDIX 1 MENU TREE

1 (Continued from previous page)

4 INFORMATION 1 DISP INFO BOX (OFF, ON)
BOX 2 SET NAV DATA 1 DEPTH (OFF, m, ft)
3 ZOOM DISPLAY (STAB GND, 2 DEPTH GRAPH SCALE (10, 20, 50, 100,
STAB HDG, STAB NORTH, 200, 500, Auto)
TT TRACK) 3 DEPTH MARK (0 - 500, 0))
4 TARGET DATA (1 BOX, 2 BOX, 4 CURRENT (OFF, ON)
3 BOX#) 5 WIND (OFF, m/s, kn)
6 WIND STAB (APPARENT, NORTH,
#: 23-inch monitor
THEORETICAL)
7 TEMPERATURE (OFF, °C, °F)
5 MAP•MARK 1 MARK SETTING 1 MAP MARK POSN (CURSOR, OS, LL)
2 MAP MARK L/L
3 MAP MARK COLOR*1 (RED, GRN, BLU, CYA,
MAG, YEL, WHT)
4 OWN SHIP MARK (MIN, SCALED)
*1: Not available with IMO or A type. 5 ANTENNA MARK (OFF, ON)
6 STERN MARK (OFF, ON)
7 DROP MARK (OFF, ON)
8 MAP MARK ALL DELETE
9 MAP MARK ALL COPY
Page 2
1 MAP MARK MANAGE
2 DISP CURVED EBL (OFF, ON)
2 RADAR MAP 1 SEL MAP OBJECT (MARK, BUOY, DANGER,
COASTLINE, CONTOUR LINE, NAV LINE,
PROHIBITED AREA)
3 ROUTE 1 DISP ROUTE (OFF, ON)
2 SEL ROUTE OBJECT (XTD LIMIT, SAFETY
MARGIN, LEG MARKS, WHEEL OVER LINE)
4 EVENT 1 DISP EVENT (OFF, ON)
2 SEL EVENT OBJECT (USER EVENT, AUTO
EVENT, POS EVENT)
5 USER CHART 1 DISP USER CHART (OFF, ON)
2 SEL USER CHART OBJECT (LINES,
LABELS, TIDALS, AREAS, CIRCLES,
CLEARING LINES)
6 CHART DISPLAY 1 OWN TRACK 1 DISP OWN TRACK (OFF, ON)
2 OWN TRACK SOURCE (PRIMARY,
SECONDARY, SYSTEM)
3 SAVE INTERNAL (30s, 1min, 2min, 3 min,
6min, 15min, DRAW ONLY)
4 DELETE OWN TRACK (NO, RED*2, GRN*2
BLU*2, YEL*2, CYA*2, MAG*2, WHT*2, 30%,
50%, 80%, ALL)
5 OWN TRACK COLOR*2 (RED, GRN, BLU,
YEL, CYA, MAG, WHT)
2 SEL DISPLAY OBJECT 1 SAVE TO PERSONAL
2 GENERAL
1 SYMBOLS (SIMPLIFIED, PAPER CHART)
2 BOUNDARIES (PLAIN, SYMBOLIZED)
3 SELECT OBJECTS (FOUR SHADES, FULL
LIGHT, SCALE MIN)
Page 2
1 SELECT OBJECTS (SHALLOW PATTERN,
SHALLOW WATER DANGER, UNKNOWN,
ACCURACY, HIGHLIGHT DATE DEPENDENT,
HIGHLIGHT INFO, HIGHLIGHT DOCUMENT,
CONTOUR LABELS, LAT/LON GRID)
3 STANDARD
1 SELECT OBJECTS (DRYING LINE, BUOYS,
BEACONS, AIDS TO NAVIGATION,
BOUNDARIES AND LIMITS, PROHIBITED
AND RESTRICTED AREAS, CHART SCALE
BOUNDARIES, CAUTIONARY NOTES, SHIP’S
ROUTEING SYSTEM AND FERRY ROUTES,
ARCHIPELAGIC SEA LANES,
MISCELLANEOUS)
*2: Not available with IMO type. 4 OTHER
1 SELECT OBJECTS (SPOT SURROUNDINGS,
SUBMARINE CABLES AND PIPELINES, ALL
ISOLATED DANGERS, MAGNETIC VARIATION,
DEPTH CONTOURS, SEABED, TIDAL, NATURAL,
AND MAN-MADE FEATURES, MISCELLANEOUS)
5 TEXT
1 SELECT OBJECTS (IMPORTANT TEXT (CLEARANCE,
BEARINGS, RADIO CHANNELS), OTHER TEXT,
NAMES, LIGHT DESCRIPTION, ALL OTHER,
1 2 NATURE OF SEABED, MAGNETIC VARIATION
AND SWEPT DEPTH, HEIGHT OF ISLET OR
(Continued on next page) LAND FEATURE, NTOM, OTHERS)

AP-3
APPENDIX 1 MENU TREE

(Continued from previous page)

1 2
3 SHALLOW CONTOUR (0 to 99, 10 m)
4 SAFETY DEPTH (0 to 99, 20 m)
5 SAFETY CONTOUR (0 to 99, 30 m)
6 DEEP CONTOUR (0 to 99, 60 m)
7 CHART MONOCHROME (OFF, ON)
8 AREA COLOR (COLOR FILL, GRAY SCALE WATER, NO COLOR)
9 RESET CNT AND DEPTH
7 OWN SHIP INFO 1 SENSOR (SYSTEM, LOCAL)
2 SYSTEM SETTING (HDG, SPD, COG/SOG, POSN)
3 LOCAL SETTING (Same choices as 2 SYSTEM SETTING.)

8 INITIAL *1: Not available with solid state radar.

1 TUNE INITIALIZE*1
SETTING 2 PALETTE (DAY-GRY, DAY-BLU, DUSK-GRY, DUSK-BLU,
NIGHT-GRY, NIGHT-BLU)
3 BRIGHTNESS 1 CONTROL PANEL
(Default setting for all 2 CHARACTER
brightness items is 15.) 3 CURSOR
4 ECHO
5 TRAIL
6 HL
7 OS SYMBOL
8 RING
9 BEARING CURSOR
Page 2
1 EBL
2 VRM
3 PI LINE
4 TT SYMBOL
5 AIS SYMBOL
6 MARK
7 CHART
4 ALERT 1 WATCH ALERT (OFF, 6MIN, 10MIN,
12MIN, 15MIN, 20MIN)
2 ANCHOR WATCH (OFF, ON, 0.01 to
9.99 NM, 0.01 NM)
3 PRIMARY ALERT
1 PRIMARY ALERT (TT NEW TARGET, AIS
NEW TARGET, TT LOST, AIS LOST, TT
AUTO ACQ 100%, TT MAN ACQ 100%,
WATCH ALERT)
5 ANT SELECT 1 DISP1 (ANT 1, 2, 3, 4; M, S)
2 DISP2 (ANT 1, 2, 3, 4; M, S)
3 DISP3 (ANT 1, 2, 3, 4; M, S)
4 DISP4 (ANT 1, 2, 3, 4; M, S)
5 STORE INTER-SW (NO, YES)
6 AUTO COURSE UP RESET (OFF, ON (22.5 to 45.0, 22.5°))
7 TIPS GUIDANCE (OFF, ON) *2: Not available with IMO type.
8 TT SIMULATION MODE
9 MAGNETRON RESET*2 1 TX TIME (000000.0 to 999999.9, 000000.0 H)
2 PM GAIN ADJ (AUTO, MANUAL: 000 to 255, 0)

AP-4
 APPENDIX 1 MENU TREE

Chart menu

MENU key
(press)
or
MENU bar
(click)
General Ship & Ship & Ship Parameters MAX Speed (0.8 to 80, 22.1 kn)
Route Route MAX Height (0.0 to 100, 16.1 m)
Parameters MAX Draught (0.0 to 100, 20.0 m)
Route Parameters MAX ROT (5 to 200, 60°/min)
WPT Approach (30 to 60, 30 sec)
WPT Prewarning (75 to 198, 90 sec)
Default Line Radius (0.1 to 3.0, 0.8 NM)
Default XTD Limit (10 to 3704, 185 m)
Default Safety Margin (0 to 1000, 40 m)
Instant Delay before Initiating First Turn (30 to 600, 60 sec)
Track Turn Radius (0.03 to 3.00, 1.00 NM)
XTD Limit (Auto, Manual; 10 to 3704 m, 185 m)
Route Check Strictly (Checkbox checked)
Navigation Forwarding Distance
Parameter
TCS (No use)
Cost Cost (Input values for Hour, Heavy Fuel Oil, Diesel Oil)
Parameters Fuel Consumption (Input values for Speed, Heavy Fuel Oil, Diesel Oil)
Route unit of “XTD” (m, NM)
Information
Sensor System/Local Sensor Type (System Sensor, Local Sensor)
Select
System HDG Data Source (Sensors)
Sensor PRIM*1, Second*1
Settings SPD Stabilization Mode (Bottom, Water)
Sensor Type (GPS, LOG) *1: Display only
Data Source (Sensors, Manual)
1
PRIM*
COG/ Data Source (Sensors)
SOG PRIM*1
POSN Data Source (Sensors, Manual)
PRIM*1, Second*1
Local Sensor HDG Data Source (Sensors, Analog Gyro (No use), Manual*2,
Settings Gyro Correction)
PRIM*1, Second*1 *2: Not available
SPD Stabilization Mode ( Bottom, Water) with IMO type.
Sensor Type (GPS, LOG)
Data Source (Sensors, Manual, Reference SPD, Drift)
PRIM*1
COG/ Data Source (Sensors)
SOG PRIM*1
POSN Data Source (Sensors, Manual)
PRIM*1, Second*1

Other Sensor Other Wind Speed (kn, m/s)

Settings Sensor Reference (APPARENT, NORTH, THEORETICAL)
Source of Wind ((T)HEORETICAL and (R)EL,
(T)HEORETICAL, (T)RUE)
Depth Below Trans. (Values for Bow, Mid and Aft)
Temperature (Temperature of water surface)
Water Current (Course and speed of water current)
Filter Status (Monitor status and integrity of sensors.)
1
(Continued on next page)

AP-5
APPENDIX 1 MENU TREE

(Continued from previous page)

1
DISP Setting Basic Light Popup (OFF, ON)
Setting Attributes Display (List, Text)
TM Reset (20 to 99, 80%)
Chart General Symbols (Simplified, Paper Chart)
Display Boundaries (Plain, Symbolized)
Check boxes (Four Shades, Full Light Lines, Scale MIN, Shallow
Pattern, Shallow Water Dangers, Uknown, Accuracy, Highlight Date
Dependent, Highlight INFO, Highlight Document, Contour Labels,
*1: All checked LAT/LON grid)
*2: All unchecked
Standard (Drying Line, Bouys, Beacons, Aids to Navigation, Buoys, Beacons, Structures,
Buoys, Beacons, Radar, Fog Signals, Others, Lights, Boundaries and Limits,
Prohibited and Restricted Areas, Chart Scale Boundaries, Cautionary Notes, Ship’s
Routeing System and Ferry Routes, Archipleagic Sea Lanes, Services,
Miscellaneous)
Other (Spot Surroundings, Submarine Cables and Pipelines, All Isolated Dangers, Magnetic
Variation, Depth Contours, Seabed, Tidal, Natural and Man-made Features, Port
Features, Miscellaneous)
Text (Important Text (Clearances, Bearings, Routes, Radio Channels, Other Text, Names,
Light Description, All Other, Nature of Seabed, Magnetic Variation and Swept Depth,
Height of Islet or Land Feature, NtoM, Others)
NtoM AIO (Temporary Notice, Preliminary Notice, No Information)
C-MAP (Temporary Notice, Preliminary Notice, No Information)
Symbol General Ship Outlines Ship Outlines (ON, OFF)
Display AIS Outlines (ON, OFF)
True outlines shown if (Set length and beamwidth.) > limit
*3: Display only Own Ship Limit*3 = 3 mm
AIS Limit*3 = 3 mm
Velocity Vectors Ship Vectors (ON, OFF)
Target Vectors (ON, OFF)
Style (std ECDIS, Conventional)
Time Increments (Checkbox unchecked)
Path Predictor (Checkbox unchecked)
Radar Antenna (Checkbox unchecked)
Tracking Own Ship CCRP (Checkbox unchecked)
Past Tracks Primary (Checkbox unchecked)
Secondary (Checkbox unchecked)
Pivot (Checkbox unchecked)
Style (Tick, Point)
Length (1-120 min, 1)
Labels (0-60 min, 0)
Events User Events (Checkbox unchecked)
Auto Events (Checkbox unchecked)
Position Events (Checkbox unchecked)
Show (Newer than 12 hours, Newer
than 24 hours, Newer than 1 week,
Newer than 2 weeks, Newer than 1
month, Newer than 3 months, All)
Route Monitored XTD Limit (Checkbox unchecked)
Route Safety Margin (Checkbox unchecked)
Leg Marks (Checkbox unchecked)
Wheel Over Line (Checkbox unchecked)
Planned XTD Limit (Checkbox unchecked)
Route Safety Margin (Checkbox unchecked)
Leg Marks (Checkbox unchecked)
Mariner User Chart Labels (Checkbox checked)
Lines (Checkbox checked)
Clearing Lines (Checkbox checked)
*4: Available on [NAVTEX Tidals (Checkbox checked)
Receiver] at installation only. Areas (Checkbox checked)
Circles (Checkbox checked)
Density (25%, 50%, 75%, No color fill)
Display user chart symbols name (Checkbox unchecked)
NAVTEX*4 (Checkbox checked)
Targets Color (Green, Blue, Black, Magenta, Brown)
AtoN Symbol Color (Green, Blue, Black, Magenta, Brown)
TT Size (Standard, Small)
AIS ROT TAG Limit (0.0°/min to 720.0°/min, 0.0)
TT Label (ON, OFF)
AIS Label (ON, OFF)
TT Pop-up INFO (ON, OFF)
1 2 AIS Pop-up INFO (ON, OFF)
Past Position TT/AIS Points (5, 10)
(Continued on next page)
Style (Points, Points and dots)

AP-6
 APPENDIX 1 MENU TREE

(Continued from previous page)

1 2
Chart Set WARNING or CAUTION for (Safety Contour*2, Navigational Hazard,
Alert Areas To Be Avoided, User Chart Danger, Traffic Separation Zone,
Inshore Traffic Zone, Restricted Area, Caution Area, Offshore Production
Area, Military Practice Area, Seaplane Landing Area, Submarine Transit
Lane, Anchorage Area, Marine Farm / Aqua Culture, PSSA Area, No
Vector Chart, Too Many Dangers, UKC Limit, Sounding UKC Limit,
Non-official ENC, Not Up-to-date, Permit Expired)
Shallow Contour (0-99*3, 10 m)
*2: Fixed at Alarm
Safety Depth (0-99, 20 m) 3
Safety Contour (0-99, 30 m) * : Maximum value defined by
Deep Contour (0-99, 60 m) value forSafety Contour

Log NAV Voyage Limits Speed (0 to 10, 5 kn)

Log Course (0.0 to 30.0, 10.0°)
Log Interval (1 to 4, 4 hours)
Distance Counter* Odometer *: Display only
Trip Meter
Target Danger Target (Log Interval 1 to 100, 10 min)
Log

TT/AIS Setting Setting.1 AIS DISP Sleeping Class A (ON, OFF)

Filter Sleeping Class B (ON, OFF)
Sleep All MAX Range (ON, OFF; 0 to 99 NM, 12 NM)
Targets MIN Ship Speed (ON, OFF; 0.0 to 9.9 kn, 1.0 kn)
AIS-CPA MAX Range (ON, OFF; 0 to 99 NM, 0 NM)
Auto MIN Ship Speed (ON, OFF; 0.0 to 9.9 kn, 1.0 kn)
Activate Except Class B (ON, OFF)
Setting.2 AIS Lost MAX Range (ON, OFF; 0 to 99 NM, 12 NM)
Target MIN Ship Speed (ON, OFF; 0.0 to 9.9 kn, 1.0 kn)
Filter Except Class B (ON, OFF)
TT Lost MAX Range (ON, OFF; 0 to 99 NM, 12 NM)
Target
Filter
Association Gap (0.000 to 0.050 NM, 0.050 NM)
Target Range (0.000 to 0.100 NM, 0.100 NM)
Bearing (0.0 to 9.9°, 9.9°)
Speed (0.0 to 6.0 kn, 6.0 kn)
Course (0.0 to 25.0°, 25.0°)
NAV Own Ship (Shows own ship’s MMSI No., Name, Call Sign, Type, Description,
Status Length, Width, Ref Bow, and Ref Port.)
Voyage Navigational Status (Underway using engine, At anchor, Not under
data command, Restricted maneuverability, Constrained by her
draught, Moored, Aground, Engaged in fishing, Under way sailing,
Reserved for high speed craft, Reserved for wing in ground,
power-driven vessel towing astern (regional use), power-driven
vessel pusing ahead or towing alongside (regional use), Reserved
for future use, AIS-SART (active), Not defined)
Persons (0 to 8191, 0)
MAX Draught (0.0 to 25.5, 0.0 m)
ETA
Destination
Cargo Category*1 (All ships of this type, Carrying DG, HS, or
1
* : May be hidden MP, IMO hazard or pollutant category X, Carrying DG, HS, or MP,
depending on AIS IMO hazard or pollutant category Y, Carrying DG, HS, or MP, IMO
transponder settings. hazard or pollutant category Z, Carrying DG, HS, or MP, IMO
hazard or pollutant category OS, Reserved for future use (×4), No
Additional Information)
NAV Tools Geometry Guide Box (Rhumbline, Great Circle)
EBL/VRM (Rhumbline, Great Circle)
PI Lines (Great Circle)
Rings (Rhumbline, Great Circle)
Divider (Rhumbline, Great Circle)
PI Lines Truncate Setting (Set forward and backward lengths of each PI line.)
Shared Monitoring (Set master and backup units.)
Route Transfer Func. OFF, Func. ON
Storing received route plans (Reject, Overwrite, Ignore)

AP-7
APPENDIX 1 MENU TREE

Settings menu

Settings File Export Select data to export (Setting data, Route/User chart, Playback data, Radar map, Radar Installation)
DB export
(Click)
File Import Select file to import
Select data to import (Setting data, Route/User chart, Playback data, Radar map, Radar Installation)

File Maintenance Restore the last-saved route/user chart application and route/user chart system

Alert Settings (Shows the settings window)

Self Test (Check various components of the system.)

Data Sharing NAV VRM (Checkbox checked)

Tools EBL (Checkbox checked)
PI Line (Checkbox checked)
Display Color Palette (Checkbox checked)
settings Display Brilliance (Checkbox checked)

Customize Wheel rotation (Normal, Reverse)

Key beep volume (0 to 3, 1)
Alert sound volume (1 to 3, 3)

Display Test (Display test patterns.)

Keyboard Test (Test the Radar Control Unit, ECDIS Control Unit and Trackball
Control Unit.)
Screenshot (Manage screenshots.)

User Default (Restore all user default settings.)

CCRP Select CCRP

Anchor X (-15.0 to 15.0, 0.0 m)
Y (0.0 to 300.0, 0.0 m)
Display Filter (CCRP, Center of Gravity, Pivot Point, Radar Antenna, GPS
Sensor, AIS Transponder, Echo Sounder, SDME Sensor, Anchor)

AP-8
APPENDIX 2 ABBREVIATIONS, SYM-
BOLS
Abbreviations
Abbreviation Meaning
A/C Anti Clutter
ACK Acknowledge
ACQ Acquire
ACT Activate
ADJ Adjustment
AIO Admiralty Information Overlay
AIS Automatic Identification System
ALL All
ALARM Alarm
ANT Antenna
Apr April
ATON Aid To Navigation
Aug August
AUTO Automatic
BB Blackbox
BCR Bow Cross Range
BCT Bow Cross Time
BLU Blue
BRG Bearing
BRILL Brilliance
BT Bottom Tracking
CANCEL Cancel
Caps Capital (letters)
CAT Category
CCRP Common Consistent Reference Position
CH Channel
COG Course over the ground
CORRE Correlation
CPA Closest Point of Approach
CPU Central Processing Unit
CSE Course
CU/TM Course-up/True Motion
CYA CYAN
DATA Data
Dec December
DEMO Demonstration
DISP Display
DIST Distance
DR Dead Reckoning
E English
E East

AP-9
APPENDIX 2 ABBREVIATIONS, SYMBOLS

Abbreviation Meaning
EAV Echo Average
EBL Electronic Bearing Line
ENTER Enter
ES Echo Stretch
ESC Escape
ETA Estimated Time of Arrival
EXT External
Feb February
FILT Filter
GAIN Gain
GPS Global Positioning System
GRN Green
GRY Gray
GYRO Gyrocompass
HDG Heading
HIDE Hide
HL Heading Line
hr hour
IMO International Maritime Organization
IND Indication
INS Integrated Navigation System
IR Interference Rejection
J Japanese
Jan January
Jul July
Jun June
kyd kiloyard
L Long (pulse length)
L/L Latitude/Longitude
LAN Local Area Network
LIST List
LL Latitude, Longitude
LO Low
MAG Magnetic or Magenta
MAN Manual
Mar March
MARK Mark
MAX Maximum
MENU Menu
MID Middle
min minute
MIN Minimum
MMSI Maritime Mobile Service Identity
MOB Man Overboard
MODE Mode
MON Monitor
MSG Message
NAV Navigation
Navtex Navigational Telex

AP-10
 APPENDIX 2 ABBREVIATIONS, SYMBOLS

Abbreviation Meaning
NM Nautical miles
NO. Number
N North
Nov November
NtoM Notices to Mariners
Oct October
OFF Off
OFFSET Offset
OS Own Ship
OWN Own
PALETTE Palette
PANEL Panel Illumination
PC Personal Computer
PERPENDIC Perpendicular
PI Parallel Index (lines)
POSN Position
PRIM Primary
PULSE Pulse
R Relative
RAD Radius
RAIN Rain
RANGE Range
REF Reference
Rel Relative
RM Relative Motion
RNG Range
ROT Rate of Turn
S South
s second
S1 (2) Short1(2) (pulse length)
SAR Search And Rescue
SART Search And Rescue Transponder
SEA Sea
SEL Select
Sep September
SM Statute Miles
SOG Speed Over the Ground
SPD Speed
SPEC Specification
SSD Solid State Drive, Solid State Device
S.SRC Sensor Source
STAB Stabilization
STBY Stand-by
STD Standard
SW Switch
T True
TARGET Target
TB True Bearing
TCPA Time to Closest Point of Approach

AP-11
APPENDIX 2 ABBREVIATIONS, SYMBOLS

Abbreviation Meaning
TEMP Temperature
TGT Target
TGT, TGTS Target, Targets
TIME Time
TM True Motion
TRAIL Trail
True-G True-ground
True-S True-sea
TT Tracked Target or Target Tracking
TTD Tracked Target Data
TTG Time to go
TTM Tracked Target Information
TUNE Tune
TX Transmit
UNDO Undo
UTC Universal Time, Coordinated
VECT Vector
VECTOR Vector
VIEW View
VRM Variable Range Marker
W West
W/O Without
WHT White
WOL Wheel Over Line
WOP Wheel Over Point
WPT Waypoint
WT Water Tracking
XTD Cross Track Distance
YEL Yellow

AP-12
 APPENDIX 2 ABBREVIATIONS, SYMBOLS

Symbols
Symbols on Control Unit

Symbol Name
Power switch

Gain

Symbols on display

Symbol name and description Symbol graphic(s)

Own ship - true scaled outline
This can be displayed when based on user selection
either beam width or length is more than 3 mm.

Own ship - simplified symbol

Own ship - minimized symbol

Radar antenna position

This symbol indicates location of the radar antenna.
Select if position of radar antenna is displayed with
symbol + in [MARK SETTING] menu.

Own ship heading line

This line originates from CCRP or Radar antenna
position.
CCRP: Consistent Common Reference Point
Beam line
This line passes through the CCRP or radar antenna
position.

Stern line

Velocity vector - time increments

AP-13
APPENDIX 2 ABBREVIATIONS, SYMBOLS

Symbol name and description Symbol graphic(s)

Velocity vector - stabilization indicator
Ground stabilization is indicated by double arrow-
head and water stabilization is indicated as single
arrowhead.

Past track
System past track is indicated by thick line. Raw
sensor primary past track is indicated by thin line.
Raw sensor secondary past track is indicated by
gray thin line.

Radar targets in acquisition state

5 mm in diameter
Radar targets in acquisition state - automatically
detected
Automatically detected target symbol is red and it
flashes until acknowledged. 5 mm in diameter
Tracked radar targets

18
3 mm in diameter
Tracked radar targets - dangerous targets
Dangerous target symbol is red and it flashes until
acknowledged.
18
Reference targets
TT: Std or small user selection by Symbol Display.
R4 18

Sleeping AIS targets

Orientation is towards heading (or COG if heading
unknown).
Sleeping AIS target with neither reported
If both heading and COG are unknown the orienta- heading nor COG
tion is toward top of display.

AP-14
 APPENDIX 2 ABBREVIATIONS, SYMBOLS

Symbol name and description Symbol graphic(s)

Activated AIS targets
Orientation is towards heading (or COG if heading
unknown).

If both heading and COG are unknown the orienta- Activated AIS target with neither reported
tion is toward top of display. heading nor COG

Activated AIS targets - true scaled outlines

• This can be displayed when based on user selec-
tion either beam width or length is more than 3
mm.
• AIS outline: ON/OFF

Activated AIS targets - dangerous targets

Dangerous target symbol is red and it flashes until
acknowledged.

Activated AIS target with neither reported

heading nor COG

Sarah J Sarah J

Activated AIS targets - alternative Associated targets represented by AIS target

symbols

Sarah J Sarah J
Associated targets represented by radar tar-
get symbols

18
Activated AIS targets - heading lines

AP-15
APPENDIX 2 ABBREVIATIONS, SYMBOLS

Symbol name and description Symbol graphic(s)

Activated AIS targets - heading lines - turn indica-
tors

Velocity vectors Radar target velocity vectors

AIS target velocity vectors

Sarah J Sarah J
Associated target velocity vectors

Sarah J Sarah J 18
Target past positions Radar target past positions

AIS target past positions

S arah J S arah J

Associated target past positions

S arah J S arah J 18

AP-16
 APPENDIX 2 ABBREVIATIONS, SYMBOLS

Symbol name and description Symbol graphic(s)

AIS aid to navigation (ATON)
Physical (real) ATON is solid line and virtual ATON
is dashed line.
An ATON in off position is yellow.

AIS search and rescue transmitter -SART

AIS base station

BS

AIS SAR vessel

AIS aircraft

Selected targets Selected radar targets

Selected AIS targets

5 S arah J S arah J
5

Selected association targets

5 S arah J 5 S arah J 18
5

Selected AIS ATON

5
Selected AIS SART

AP-17
APPENDIX 2 ABBREVIATIONS, SYMBOLS

Symbol name and description Symbol graphic(s)

Lost targets Lost radar targets
Lost target symbol is red and it flashes until acknowl-
edged.

Lost AIS targets

S arah J S arah J
Lost associated targets

S arah J S arah J 18
LOST AIS ATON

Lost AIS SART

Radar and AIS target acquisition area

Waypoint

Next waypoint

Routes

Event marker

AP-18
 APPENDIX 2 ABBREVIATIONS, SYMBOLS

Symbol name and description Symbol graphic(s)

User cursor

Electronic bearing line (EBL)

Second example show with range marker.

Variable range marker (VRM)

Range rings

Parallel index lines

Trial maneuver
Displayed (flashing) during trial maneuver.

Simulation mode
T
Displayed (flashing) during TT performance test.

Drop mark
S

AP-19
APPENDIX 2 ABBREVIATIONS, SYMBOLS

Radar map symbols

IMO and A types B-type

Category Symbol Color* Name Category Symbol Color Name

Red Buoy 7 colors Buoy

Green Buoy 7 colors Buoy

Red Buoy 7 colors Buoy

Green Buoy 7 colors Buoy

Red Buoy 7 colors Danger

Green Buoy 7 colors Danger

Mark Red Buoy Mark 7 colors Mark

Green Buoy 7 colors Mark

Purple Danger 7 colors Mark

Purple Danger 7 colors Mark

Yellow- 7 colors Mark

Mark
Orange
Yellow- 7 colors Mark
Mark
Orange
Yellow- 7 colors Mark
Mark
Orange
Purple Nav Line 7 colors Mark

White Coast Line 7 colors Mark

Gray Contour Line 7 colors Nav Line

Line Purple Prohibited Area 7 colors Coast Line

Purple Cable (Danger) 7 colors Contour Line

Yellow-
Line Mark Line 7 colors Prohibited Area
Orange
Yellow- Line Mark 7 colors Cable (Danger)
Orange
7 colors Line Buoy
*Fixed
7 colors Line Mark

7 colors Line Mark

7 colors Line Mark

AP-20
 APPENDIX 2 ABBREVIATIONS, SYMBOLS

Symbols on operating buttons

Symbol Meaning
Minimize button (on InstantAccess bar™)

Access AIS, Navtex functions (chart mode)

Display received AIS message (radar mode)

Access user profile, common settings

Information (show program no., operator's manual)

Undo, redo
Note: This symbol is not displayed on the FURUNO 19-inch monitor unit on
radar mode or chart radar mode.

Screenshot capture

• Adjust the monitor brilliance

• Adjust the control unit backlighting. (Chart mode only)

Color palette selection

AP-21
APPENDIX 3 DATA COLOR AND
MEANING

Indication Sensor HDG L/L SPD COG/SOG Display example

color color
SYSTEM GRN WHT THS-A GNS-A,D,F,P,R VBW-A VTG-A,D,P
HDT GGA-1,2,3,4,5 VHW
GLL-A,D and (status: A)
RMC-A,D,F,P,R
and (status: A)

*1 All values in green.

YEL WHT RAIM error in GBS sentence is
greater than 10 m and DGPS update
interval in GGA, GNS sentence is
higher than 10 s.

Position shown
*2 in yellow.
RED RED GNS-E(”YEL”),M,S VBW-V VTG-E,M,S
GGA-6(”YEL”),7,8 (Sentence
GLL-E(”YEL”),M,S and Status: V name
GGA-E,M,S and Status: V remains
RMC-E,M,S and Status: V yellow even if
GGA and GNS sentence DGPS update switching
interval is 30 s or more. from A to V.)
SPD, COG, SOG and POSN
values and pos. source name
in red.
GRN WHT THS-E,M, Sentence not input when: GNS-N, Sentence not Sentence not input
(***.*) sentence not incorrect value input when: when:
input if S,N or GGA-N, incorrect value VBW or VHW VTG-N, incorrect
HDT has GLL-N, incorrect value and Status: V has incorrect value or RMC-N,
incorrect RMC-N, incorrect value and Status: V value incorrect value
value
HDG value shown
*3 *4 with asterisks.
LOCAL GRN WHT THS-A GNS-A,D,F,P,R VBW-A VTG-A,D,P
HDT GGA-1,2,3,4,5 VHW
GLL-A,D and (status: A) Same as corresponding
RMC-A,D,F,P,R indication in SYSTEM.
and (status: A)
*1
YEL WHT RAIM error in GBS sentence is
greater than 10 m and DGPS update
interval in GGA, GNS sentence is Same as corresponding
higher than 10 s. indication in SYSTEM.
*2
RED RED GNS-E(”YEL”),M,S VBW-V VTG-E,M,S
GGA-6(”YEL”),7,8 (Sentence
GLL-E(”YEL”),M,S and Status: V name
GGA-E,M,S and Status: V remains Same as corresponding
RMC-E,M,S and Status: V yellow even if indication in SYSTEM.
GGA and GNS sentence DGPS update switching
interval is 30s or more. from A to V.)

GRN WHT THS-E,M, Sentence not input when: GNS-N, Sentence not Sentence not input
(***.*) sentence not incorrect value input when: when:
input if S,N or GGA-N, incorrect value VBW or VHW VTG-N, incorrect Same as corresponding
HDT has GLL-N, incorrect value and Status: V has incorrect value or RMC-N, indication in SYSTEM.
incorrect RMC-N, incorrect value and Status: V value incorrect value
value
*3 *4
MANUAL YEL YEL Manual Manual setting value Manual
(MAN) setting (Dead Reckoning) setting
(DR) value

HDG, SPD and POSN values

and "MAN"*5 in
yellow characters.
*1 “S” only (IEC 61162-1 ED.4) using RMC and GNS sentences. *2 “C” and “U” only (IEC 61162-1 ED.4) using RMC and GNS sentences.
*3 “V” only (IEC 61162-1 ED.4) using RMC and GNS sentences. *4 “V” only (IEC 61162-1 ED.4) using RMC sentence.
*5 “CORR1” replaces “MAN” when heading correction is applied.

AP-22
APPENDIX 4 ALERT LIST
ALF ALR Priority/
Alert name Meaning Remedy
No. Inst.* No. Category
115 - 115 Loss of System Warning/ Loss of communi- Check that the de-
Communication B cation between pro- vice is securely
cessor unit and connected.
external equipment.
150 - 150 Early Course Warning/ Waypoint is soon Be careful that
Change A being approached. WPT is approach-
Ship's position is ing.
less than set time of
prewarning from
WOL.
Default: 90 seconds
151 - 151 Actual Course Warning/ Waypoint is now be- Be careful that
Change A ing approached. WPT is approach-
Alert150 is ac- ing.
knowledged and
the ship's position is
less than set time of
approach alarm
from WOL.
Default: 30 seconds
152 - 152 Wheel Over Line Alarm/A Waypoint is now be- Be careful that ship
ing approached. crossed WPT.
When alert 150 and
151 are not ac-
knowledged, ship
crosses WOL.
When alert 150 is
not acknowledged,
this is generated in-
stead of alert 151.
(30 seconds before
WOL)
153 - 153 Track Control Stop Warning/ Track control is dis- Check the connec-
B continued because tion with sensors
sensors such as such as GYRO,
GYRO, GPS, LOG GPS and LOG, or
and Autopilot stop connection with
input during Track Autopilot.
Control.
154 - 154 Position Monitor Warning/ When inputting po- Check an accurate
A sition data from 2 position data, GPS
GPS or more GPS, reception status
there is a difference and GPS setting.
between position
data from each
GPS.
155 - 155 Heading Monitor Warning/ Sensor data related Check the connec-
A to Track Control tion with sensors
(GYRO, GPS, such as GYRO,
LOG) is lost. GPS and LOG.

AP-23
APPENDIX 4 ALERT LIST

ALF ALR Priority/

Alert name Meaning Remedy
No. Inst.* No. Category
156 - 156 Sensor Failure Alarm/B Deviation between Make deviation be-
current heading and tween current
plan course is more heading and plan
than set value. course smaller.
Default: 30 degrees
158 - 158 Course Difference Warning/ Waypoint is now be- Be careful that ship
A ing approached. crossed WPT.
When alert 150 and
151 are not ac-
knowledged, ship
crosses WOL.
When alert 150 is
not acknowledged,
this is generated in-
stead of alert 151.
(30 seconds before
WOL)
159 - 159 Low Speed Warning/ While carrying out Raise speed or
B TCS, ship's speed stop track control.
becomes less than
set value.
170 - 170 Positioning System Warning/ All position data has Check the connec-
Failure B been lost for more tion with all GPS.
than 30 seconds.
171 - 171 Crossing Safety Alarm/A When a check area Reconfirm Safety
Contour is set, the vessel Contour setting or
entered a shallower change the course.
area than the
threshold set in
[Safety Contour].
172 - 172 Off Track Alarm Alarm/A Deviation is big be- Reconfirm XTD
tween planning Limit or keep own
course and current ship inside of chan-
heading. While nel limit.
monitoring route,
ship position devi-
ates XTD Limit.
176 - 176 System Malfunc- Warning/ A system error has Restart the sys-
tion B occurred. tem. If the problem
persists, contact
your dealer.
177 - 177 System Malfunc- Warning/ A system error has Restart the sys-
tion of Backup B occurred. tem. If the problem
persists, contact
your dealer.
190 1 531 AIS Target Display Warning/ 100% of maximum The number of AIS
100% A number of target target became
which can be dis- 100% of that can
played is used. be displayed.
Change the display
number using filter
function.

AP-24
 APPENDIX 4 ALERT LIST

ALF ALR Priority/

Alert name Meaning Remedy
No. Inst.* No. Category
190 2 533 AIS Target Capaci- Warning/ 100% of memory Memory for AIS
ty 100% A capacity for AIS tar- targets is filled
gets is filled. 100%. Cancel un-
necessary targets.
190 3 535 AIS Target Acti- Warning/ 100% of capacity The number of ac-
vate 100% A for active AIS is tive AIS target be-
used. came 100% of its
limit. Change the
unnecessary tar-
gets to sleep
mode.
260 - 260 Emergency Call Alarm/A When not acknowl- Acknowledge 152
edging alerts relat- Wheel Over Line
ed to WPT alert or 153 Track
approach or track Control Stop.
control stop alert
during track control,
alert is forwarded to
BNWAS by this sig-
nal on 30 seconds
after passing WOL.
This is not shown.
10960 - 961 Takeover AMS Warning/
Master B
10001 1 001 Main Monitor Fan1 Caution/B For MU-190/231: If the error fre-
Rotation Speed Connected to quently
Lowering COM1(Main Moni- occurs, contact
tor). FURUNO and in-
Fan1 rotation speed form frequency of
is below threshold. occurrence.
10001 2 002 Main Monitor Fan2 For MU-231: Con- If the error fre-
Rotation Speed nected to quently
Lowering COM1(Main Moni- occurs, contact
tor). FURUNO and in-
Fan2 rotation speed form frequency of
is below threshold. occurrence.
10001 3 003 Main Monitor Fan3 For MU-231: Con- If the error fre-
Rotation Speed nected to quently
Lowering COM1(Main Moni- occurs, contact
tor). FURUNO and in-
Fan3 rotation speed form frequency of
is below threshold. occurrence.
10001 4 004 Main Monitor Fan4 For MU-190: Con- If the error fre-
Rotation Speed nected to quently
Lowering COM1(Main Moni- occurs, contact
tor). FURUNO and in-
Fan4 rotation speed form frequency of
is below threshold. occurrence.
10001 5 014 Sub Monitor Fan1 For MU-190/231: If the error fre-
Rotation Speed Connected to quently
Lowering COM2 (Sub Moni- occurs, contact
tor). FURUNO and in-
Fan1 rotation speed form frequency of
is below threshold. occurrence.

AP-25
APPENDIX 4 ALERT LIST

ALF ALR Priority/

Alert name Meaning Remedy
No. Inst.* No. Category
10001 6 015 Sub Monitor Fan2 Caution/B For MU-231: Con- If the error fre-
Rotation Speed nected to COM2 quently
Lowering (Sub Monitor). occurs, contact
Fan2 rotation speed FURUNO and in-
is below threshold. form frequency of
occurrence.
10001 7 016 Sub Monitor Fan3 For MU-231: Con- If the error fre-
Rotation Speed nected to COM2 quently
Lowering (Sub Monitor). occurs, contact
Fan3 rotation speed FURUNO and in-
is below threshold. form frequency of
occurrence.
10001 8 017 Sub Monitor Fan4 For MU-190: Con- If the error fre-
Rotation Speed nected to COM2 quently
Lowering (Sub Monitor). occurs, contact
Fan4 rotation speed FURUNO and in-
is below threshold. form frequency of
occurrence.
10001 9 011 Main Monitor For MU-190/231: Check the connec-
RS485 Communi- Connected to tion of brightness
cation Timeout COM1. There has control cable.
been no communi-
cation from proces-
sor unit through
RS485 for 180 sec-
onds. (No commu-
nication implies in
completed sen-
tence or checksum
error.)
10001 10 024 Sub Monitor For MU-190/231: Check the connec-
RS485 Communi- Connected to tion of brightness
cation Timeout COM2. There has control cable.
been no communi-
cation from proces-
sor unit through
RS485 for 180 sec-
onds. (No commu-
nication implies
incomplete sen-
tence or checksum
error.)
10001 11 012 Main Monitor No For MU-190/231: Check the connec-
Signal Connected to tion of video cable.
COM1. There has
been no signal con-
tinuously for 60 sec-
onds.
10001 12 025 Sub Monitor No For MU-190/231: Check the connec-
Signal Connected to tion of video cable.
COM2. There has
been no signal con-
tinuously for 60 sec-
onds.

AP-26
 APPENDIX 4 ALERT LIST

ALF ALR Priority/

Alert name Meaning Remedy
No. Inst.* No. Category
10001 13 013 Main Monitor Sen- Caution/B For Main monitor, If the error fre-
tence Syntax Error connected to quently
COM1, value of ex- occurs, contact
ternally input sen- FURUNO and in-
tence is out of range form frequency of
that defined by sen- occurrence.
tence.
10001 14 026 Sub Monitor Sen- For Sub monitor, If the error fre-
tence Syntax Error connected to quently
COM2, value of ex- occurs, contact
ternally input sen- FURUNO and in-
tence is out of range form frequency of
defined by sen- occurrence.
tence.
10001 15 027 Main Monitor COM Communication Check the connec-
Timeout with MU is interrupt- tion with the moni-
ed. 60 seconds tim- tor.
eout.
10001 16 028 Sub Monitor COM Communication Check the connec-
Timeout with MU is interrupt- tion with the moni-
ed. 60 seconds tim- tor.
eout.
10001 17 073 Processor Unit CPU temperature in Turn off Processor
CPU Temp High processor unit ex- Unit. If same error
ceeds threshold. occurs after a few
minutes, contact
FURUNO.
10001 18 074 Processor Unit GPU temperature in Turn off Processor
GPU Temp High processor unit ex- Unit. If same error
ceeds threshold. occurs after a few
minutes, contact
FURUNO.
10001 19 075 Processor Unit CPU temperature in Turn off Processor
CPU Board Temp processor unit ex- Unit. If same error
High ceeds threshold. occurs after a few
minutes, contact
FURUNO.
10001 20 076 Processor Unit Re- CPU temperature in Turn off Processor
mote 1 Temp High this processor re- Unit. If same error
10001 21 077 Processor Unit Re- mote control unit occurs after a few
mote 2 Temp High exceeds threshold. minutes, contact
FURUNO.
10001 22 078 Processor Unit Rotation speed of If the error fre-
CPU Fan Rotation CPU fan in proces- quently occurs,
Speed Lowering sor unit is below contact FURUNO
threshold. and inform fre-
quency of
occurrence.
10001 23 079 Processor Unit Rotation speed of If the error fre-
Fan1 Rotation fan1 in processor quently occurs,
Speed Lowering unit is below thresh- contact FURUNO
old. and inform fre-
quency of
occurrence.

AP-27
APPENDIX 4 ALERT LIST

ALF ALR Priority/

Alert name Meaning Remedy
No. Inst.* No. Category
10001 24 080 Processor Unit Caution/B Rotation speed of If the error fre-
Fan2 Rotation fan2 in processor quently occurs,
Speed Lowering unit is below thresh- contact FURUNO
old. and inform fre-
quency of
occurrence.
10001 25 081 Processor Unit Rotation speed of If the error fre-
Fan3 Rotation fan3 in processor quently occurs,
Speed Lowering unit is below thresh- contact FURUNO
old. and inform fre-
quency of
occurrence.
10001 26 089 Processor Unit CPU board battery Turn off Processor
CPU board Battery voltage in proces- Unit. If same error
Power Error sor unit is out of occurs after a few
threshold. minutes, contact
FURUNO.
10001 27 090 Processor Unit CPU board core Turn off Processor
CPU board Core voltage in proces- Unit. If same error
Power Error sor unit is out of occurs after a few
threshold. minutes, contact
FURUNO.
10001 28 070 RCU 1 COM Time- Caution/B Communication er- Check the connec-
out ror with this remote tion with this re-
10001 29 071 RCU 2 COM Time- control unit is de- mote control unit.
out tected. 40 seconds
10001 30 072 RCU 3 COM Time- timeout.
out
10001 31 400 Network Printer When executing Check that the
Not Available printout, network printer is connect-
printer is not recog- ed to network or
nized, network printer errors such
printer connection as paper shortage,
is interrupted, or paper jam and run
printer error such as out of ink does not
paper shortage, pa- occur.
per jam and run out
of ink occurs.
10001 32 401 Local Printer Not When executing Check that the
Available printout, local print- printer is connect-
er is not recognized, ed to network or
local printer con- printer errors such
nection is interrupt- as paper shortage,
ed, or printer error paper jam and run
such as paper out of ink does not
shortage, paper jam occur.
and run out of ink
occurs.

AP-28
 APPENDIX 4 ALERT LIST

ALF ALR Priority/

Alert name Meaning Remedy
No. Inst.* No. Category
10002 1 005 Main Monitor LCD Warning/ For MU-190: Con- LCD unit replace-
Unit Lifetime Over B nected to COM1. ment is required.
LCD unit operating Contact FURUNO.
time exceeds
50000 hours.
For MU-231: Con-
nected to COM1.
LCD unit operating
time exceeds
50000 hours.
10002 2 018 Sub Monitor LCD For MU-190: Con- LCD unit replace-
Unit Lifetime Over nected to COM2 ment is required.
LCD unit operating Contact FURUNO.
time exceeds
50000 hours.
For MU-231: Con-
nected to COM2
LCD unit operating
time exceeds
50000 hours.
10002 3 006 Main Monitor High Internal tempera- If the error fre-
Temperature In- ture exceeds quently occurs,
side Monitor threshold. contact FURUNO
Monitor: Connect- and inform fre-
ed to COM1 (Main quency of
Monitor). occurrence.
10002 4 019 Sub Monitor High Internal tempera- If the error fre-
Temperature In- ture exceeds quently occurs,
side Monitor threshold. contact FURUNO
Monitor: Connect- and inform fre-
ed to COM2 (Sub quency of
Monitor). occurrence.
10002 5 007 Main Monitor Fan1 For MU-190/231: If the error fre-
No Rotation Connected to quently occurs,
COM1 (Main Moni- contact FURUNO
tor). and inform fre-
Fan1 rotation speed quency of
is below threshold. occurrence.
10002 6 008 Main Monitor Fan2 For MU-190/231: If the error fre-
No Rotation Connected to quently occurs,
COM1 (Main Moni- contact FURUNO
tor). and inform fre-
Fan2 rotation speed quency of
is below threshold. occurrence.
10002 7 009 Main Monitor Fan3 For MU-231: Con- If the error fre-
No Rotation nected to COM1 quently occurs,
(Main Monitor). contact FURUNO
Fan3 rotation speed and inform fre-
is below threshold. quency of
occurrence.

AP-29
APPENDIX 4 ALERT LIST

ALF ALR Priority/

Alert name Meaning Remedy
No. Inst.* No. Category
10002 8 010 Main Monitor Fan4 Warning/ For MU-190: Con- If the error fre-
No Rotation B nected to COM1 quently occurs,
(Main Monitor). contact FURUNO
Fan4 rotation speed and inform fre-
is below threshold. quency of
occurrence.
10002 9 020 Sub Monitor Fan1 For MU-190/231: If the error fre-
No Rotation Connected to quently occurs,
COM2 (Sub Moni- contact FURUNO
tor). and inform fre-
Fan1 rotation speed quency of
is below threshold. occurrence.
10002 10 021 Sub Monitor Fan2 For MU-190/231: If the error fre-
No Rotation Connected to quently occurs,
COM2 (Sub Moni- contact FURUNO
tor). and inform fre-
Fan2 rotation speed quency of
is below threshold. occurrence.
10002 11 022 Sub Monitor Fan3 For MU-231: Con- If the error fre-
No Rotation nected to COM2 quently occurs,
(Sub Monitor). contact FURUNO
Fan3 rotation speed and inform fre-
is below threshold. quency of
occurrence.
10002 12 023 Sub Monitor Fan4 For MU-190: Con- If the error fre-
No Rotation nected to COM2 quently occurs,
(Sub Monitor). contact FURUNO
Fan4 rotation speed and inform fre-
is below threshold. quency of
occurrence.
10002 13 082 Processor Unit Rotation speed of If the error fre-
CPU Fan No Rota- fan in processor unit quently occurs,
tion is below threshold. contact FURUNO
and inform fre-
quency of
occurrence.
10002 14 083 Processor Unit Rotation speed of If the error fre-
Fan1 Fan No Rota- fan1 in processor quently occurs,
tion unit is below thresh- contact FURUNO
old. and inform fre-
quency of
occurrence.
10002 15 084 Processor Unit Rotation speed of If the error fre-
Fan2 Fan No Rota- fan2 in processor quently occurs,
tion unit is below thresh- contact FURUNO
old. and inform fre-
quency of
occurrence.
10002 16 085 Processor Unit Rotation speed of If the error fre-
Fan3 Fan No Rota- fan3 in processor quently occurs,
tion unit is below thresh- contact FURUNO
old. and inform fre-
quency of
occurrence.

AP-30
 APPENDIX 4 ALERT LIST

ALF ALR Priority/

Alert name Meaning Remedy
No. Inst.* No. Category
10002 17 086 Processor Unit Warning/ 5 V power voltage If the error fre-
CPU board 5V B of CPU board in quently occurs,
Power Error processor unit is out contact FURUNO
of threshold. and inform fre-
quency of
occurrence.
10002 18 087 Processor Unit 3.3 V power voltage If the error fre-
CPU board 3.3V of CPU board in quently occurs,
Power Error processor unit is out contact FURUNO
of threshold. and inform fre-
quency of
occurrence.
10002 19 088 Processor Unit 12 V power voltage If the error fre-
CPU board 12V of CPU board in quently occurs,
Power Error processor unit is out contact FURUNO
of threshold. and inform fre-
quency of
occurrence.
10050 1 320 Processor Unit Caution/B Input from EC-3000 Check the connec-
Ch.01 COM Time- serial ch.1 has been tion of Ch.1.
out discontinued for
more than certain
time.
(Set at installation)
Default: No timeout
10050 2 321 Processor Unit Input from EC-3000 Check the connec-
Ch.02 COM Time- serial ch.2 has been tion of Ch.2.
out discontinued for
more than certain
time.
(Set at installation)
Default: No timeout
10050 3 322 Processor Unit Input from EC-3000 Check the connec-
Ch.03 COM Time- serial ch.3 has been tion of Ch.3.
out discontinued for
more than certain
time.
(Set at installation)
Default: No timeout
10050 4 323 Processor Unit Input from EC-3000 Check the connec-
Ch.04 COM Time- serial ch.4 has been tion of Ch.4.
out discontinued for
more than certain
time.
(Set at installation)
Default: No timeout
10050 5 324 Processor Unit Input from EC-3000 Check the connec-
Ch.05 COM Time- serial ch.5 has been tion of Ch.5.
out discontinued for
more than certain
time.
(Set at installation)
Default: No timeout

AP-31
APPENDIX 4 ALERT LIST

ALF ALR Priority/

Alert name Meaning Remedy
No. Inst.* No. Category
10050 6 325 Processor Unit Caution/B Input from EC-3000 Check the connec-
Ch.06 COM Time- serial ch.6 has been tion of Ch.6.
out discontinued for
more than certain
time.
(Set at installation)
Default: No timeout
10050 7 326 Processor Unit Input from EC-3000 Check the connec-
Ch.07 COM Time- serial ch.7 has been tion of Ch.7.
out discontinued for
more than certain
time.
(Set at installation)
Default: No timeout
10050 8 327 Processor Unit Input from EC-3000 Check the connec-
Ch.08 COM Time- serial ch.8 has been tion of Ch.8.
out discontinued for
more than certain
time.
(Set at installation)
Default: No timeout
10173 1 634 UKC Limit Warning/ Measured depth Be careful that
A from echo sounder measured depth is
is less than set UKC less than UKC lim-
limit value. it.
10173 2 635 Non-official ENC When Non-official Be careful of the
ENC is set to Warn- object mentioned
ing/Caution in chart left, on ship's direc-
alert, the non-offi- tion.
cial chart area is de-
tected inside the
check area.
10173 3 636 No Vector Chart When No Vector Be careful of the
Chart is set to object mentioned
Warning/Caution in left, on ship's direc-
chart alert, the No tion.
Vector Chart area is
detected inside the
check area.
10173 4 637 Not Up-to-date When Not Up to Be careful of the
Date is set to Warn- object mentioned
ing/Caution in chart left, on ship's direc-
alert, a chart area tion.
that is not up-to-
date is detected in-
side the check area.
10173 5 638 Permit Expired When Permit Ex- Be careful of the
pired is set to Warn- object mentioned
ing/Caution in chart left, on ship's direc-
alert, a chart area tion.
that has an expired
permit is detected
inside the check ar-
ea.

AP-32
 APPENDIX 4 ALERT LIST

ALF ALR Priority/

Alert name Meaning Remedy
No. Inst.* No. Category
10190 1 522 TT Auto ACQ 95% Caution/B Appears when ca- Remove TT sym-
pacity for automati- bol manually be-
cally tracked targets cause the capacity
is full. for TT is 95%.
10190 2 524 TT MAN ACQ 95% Appears when ca- Remove TT sym-
pacity for manually bol manually be-
tracked targets is cause the capacity
full. for TT is 95%.
10190 3 530 AIS Target Display 95% of maximum The number of AIS
95% number of target target became
which can be dis- 95% of that can be
played is used. displayed. Change
the display number
using filter func-
tion.
10190 4 532 AIS Target Capaci- 95% of maximum The number of AIS
ty 95% number of target target became
which can be stored 95% of that can be
is used. stored. Sleep un-
necessary targets.
10190 5 534 AIS Target Acti- 95% of capacity for The number of ac-
vate 95% active AIS is used. tive AIS target be-
came 95% of its
limit. Change the
unnecessary tar-
gets to sleep
mode.
10300 1 030 Sensor Adapter 1 Caution/B Communication er- Check the connec-
COM Timeout ror with this sensor tion with this sen-
10300 2 031 Sensor Adapter 2 adapter is detected. sor adapter and
COM Timeout 30 seconds time- network.
10300 3 032 Sensor Adapter 3 out. This sensor
COM Timeout adapter is turned
off, or there is a
10300 4 033 Sensor Adapter 4
problem with net-
COM Timeout
work.
10300 5 034 Sensor Adapter 5
COM Timeout
10300 6 035 Sensor Adapter 6
COM Timeout
10300 7 036 Sensor Adapter 7
COM Timeout
10300 8 037 Sensor Adapter 8
COM Timeout
10300 9 038 Sensor Adapter 9
COM Timeout
10300 10 039 Sensor Adapter 10
COM Timeout
10300 11 094 Sensor Adapter 11
COM Timeout
10300 12 095 Sensor Adapter 12
COM Timeout
10300 13 096 Sensor Adapter 13
COM Timeout

AP-33
APPENDIX 4 ALERT LIST

ALF ALR Priority/

Alert name Meaning Remedy
No. Inst.* No. Category
10300 14 097 Sensor Adapter 14 Caution/B Communication er- Check the connec-
COM Timeout ror with this sensor tion with this sen-
10300 15 098 Sensor Adapter 15 adapter is detected. sor adapter and
COM Timeout 30 seconds time- network.
10300 16 099 Sensor Adapter 16 out. This sensor
COM Timeout adapter is turned
off, or there is a
problem with net-
work.
10300 20 040 RADAR 1 COM Caution/B Communication er- Check the connec-
Timeout ror with the RADAR tion between the
10300 21 041 RADAR 2 COM is detected. 30 sec- RADAR and the
Timeout onds timeout. The network.
10300 22 042 RADAR 3 COM RADAR is turned
Timeout off, or there is a
problem with net-
10300 23 043 RADAR 4 COM
work.
Timeout
10300 24 044 RADAR 5 COM
Timeout
10300 25 045 RADAR 6 COM
Timeout
10300 26 046 RADAR 7 COM
Timeout
10300 27 047 RADAR 8 COM
Timeout
10300 28 048 RADAR 9 COM
Timeout
10300 29 049 RADAR 10 COM
Timeout
10300 30 050 ECDIS 1 COM Caution/B Communication er- Check the connec-
Timeout ror with the ECDIS tion between the
10300 31 051 ECDIS 2 COM is detected. 30 sec- ECDIS and the
Timeout onds timeout. The network.
10300 32 052 ECDIS 3 COM RADAR is turned
Timeout off, or there is a
problem with net-
10300 33 053 ECDIS 4 COM
work.
Timeout
10300 34 054 ECDIS 5 COM
Timeout
10300 35 055 ECDIS 6 COM
Timeout
10300 36 056 ECDIS 7 COM
Timeout
10300 37 057 ECDIS 8 COM Caution/B Communication er- Check the connec-
Timeout ror with the ECDIS tion between the
10300 38 058 ECDIS 9 COM is detected. 30 sec- ECDIS and the
Timeout onds timeout. The network.
10300 39 059 ECDIS 10 COM RADAR is turned
Timeout off, or there is a
problem with net-
work.

AP-34
 APPENDIX 4 ALERT LIST

ALF ALR Priority/

Alert name Meaning Remedy
No. Inst.* No. Category
10300 40 060 MFD 1 COM Time- Caution/B Communication er- Check the connec-
out ror with the MFD is tion between the
10300 41 061 MFD 2 COM Time- detected. 30 sec- MFD and the net-
out onds timeout. The work.
10300 42 062 MFD 3 COM Time- RADAR is turned
out off, or there is a
problem with net-
10300 43 063 MFD 4 COM Time-
work.
out
10300 44 064 MFD 5 COM Time-
out
10300 45 065 MFD 6 COM Time-
out
10300 46 066 MFD 7 COM Time-
out
10300 47 067 MFD 8 COM Time-
out
10300 48 068 MFD 9 COM Time-
out
10300 49 069 MFD 10 COM Tim-
eout
10331 - 331 Selected Gyro sta- Warning/ When connected If the error fre-
tus missing B with Double Gyro quently occurs,
System, instrument contact FURUNO
produced by Yoko- and inform fre-
gawa Electric, quency of
"Double Gyro" sta- occurrence.
tus cannot be ac-
quired.
10380 131 380 AIS COM Error Warning/ Data from AIS has Check the connec-
B been discontinued tion with AIS and
for more than set network.
time.
(Set at installation)
Default: 60 seconds
AIS is turned off, or
there is a problem
with network.
10400 1 255 Gyro 1 COM Error Caution/B Data from this gyro Check the connec-
10400 2 256 Gyro 2 COM Error has been discontin- tion with this gyro
10400 3 257 Gyro 3 COM Error ued for more than and network.
set time.
10400 4 258 Gyro 4 COM Error
(Set at installation)
10400 5 259 Gyro 5 COM Error Default: 60 seconds
This gyro is turned
off, or there is a
problem with net-
work.
10400 11 391 ROT Gyro 1 COM Caution/B Data from this 1 Check the connec-
Error ROT gyro has been tion with this ROT
10400 12 392 ROT Gyro 2 COM discontinued for gyro.
Error more than set time.
10400 13 393 ROT Gyro 3 COM (Set at installation)
Error Default: 60 seconds

AP-35
APPENDIX 4 ALERT LIST

ALF ALR Priority/

Alert name Meaning Remedy
No. Inst.* No. Category
10400 21 290 EPFS 1 COM Error Caution/B Ship position data Check the connec-
10400 22 291 EPFS 2 COM Error from this GPS has tion with this GPS
10400 23 292 EPFS 3 COM Error been discontinued and network.
for more than set
10400 24 293 EPFS 4 COM Error
time.(Set at installa-
10400 25 294 EPFS 5 COM Error tion)
10400 26 295 EPFS 6 COM Error Default: 60 sec-
10400 27 296 EPFS 7 COM Error onds. This GPS is
10400 28 297 EPFS 8 COM Error turned off, or there
10400 29 298 EPFS 9 COM Error is a problem with
network.
10400 30 299 EPFS 10 COM Er-
ror
10400 41 280 SDME 1 COM Er- Caution/B Speed data from Check the connec-
ror this SDME sensor tion with this
10400 42 281 SDME 2 COM Er- has been discontin- SDME sensor and
ror ued for more than network.
10400 43 282 SDME 3 COM Er- set time. (Set at in-
ror stallation) Default:
60 seconds
This SDME sensor
is turned off, or
there is a problem
with network.
10400 51 235 Echo Sounder 1 Caution/B Input of depth data Check the connec-
COM Error from this echo tion with this echo
10400 52 236 Echo Sounder 2 sounder has been sounder and net-
COM Error discontinued for work.
10400 53 237 Echo Sounder 3 more than set time.
COM Error (Set at installation)
Default: 60 seconds
This echo sounder
is turned off, or
there is a problem
with network.
10400 61 300 Rudder 1 COM Er- Caution/B Rudder data from Check the connec-
ror this rudder sensor tion with this rud-
10400 62 301 Rudder 2 COM Er- has been discontin- der sensor and
ror ued for more than network.
10400 63 302 Rudder 3 COM Er- set time. (Set at in-
ror stallation)
Default: 60 sec-
onds. This rudder
sensor is turned off,
or there is a prob-
lem with network.

AP-36
 APPENDIX 4 ALERT LIST

ALF ALR Priority/

Alert name Meaning Remedy
No. Inst.* No. Category
10400 71 303 HCS 1 COM Error Caution/B Data from this HCS Check the connec-
10400 72 304 HCS 2 COM Error has been discontin- tion with this HCS
ued for more than and network.
set time.
(Set at installation)
Default: 60 seconds
This HCS is turned
off, or there is a
problem with net-
work.
10400 81 305 VDR COM Error Caution/B Sentence from VDR Check the connec-
has been discontin- tion with VDR and
ued for more than network.
set time.
(Set at installation)
Default: 180 sec-
onds
VDR is turned off, or
there is a problem
with network.
10400 91 306 BNWAS COM Er- Caution/B Caution Sentence Check the connec-
ror from BNWAS has tion with BNWAS
been discontinued and network.
for more than set
time. (Set at instal-
lation)
Default: 180 sec-
onds
BNWAS is turned
off, or there is a
problem with net-
work.
10400 101 360 Wind Sensor 1 Caution/B Data from this wind Check the connec-
COM Error sensor has been tion with this wind
10400 102 361 Wind Sensor 2 discontinued for sensor.
COM Error more than set time.
10400 103 362 Wind Sensor 3 (Set at installation)
COM Error Default: 60 seconds
This wind sensor is
turned off, or there
is a problem with
network.
10400 111 370 Water Current Caution/B Data from water Check the connec-
COM Error current has been tion with water cur-
discontinued for rent and network.
more than set time.
(Set at installation)
Default: 60 seconds
Water current sen-
sor is turned off, or
there is a problem
with network.
Check the connec-
tion with water cur-
rent and network.

AP-37
APPENDIX 4 ALERT LIST

ALF ALR Priority/

Alert name Meaning Remedy
No. Inst.* No. Category
10400 121 371 Water Temp COM Caution/B Data from water Check the connec-
Error temp. has been dis- tion with water
continued for more temp and network.
than set time.
(Set at installation)
Default: 60 seconds
Water temp sensor
is turned off, or
there is a problem
with network.
10400 141 390 NAVTEX COM Er- Caution/B Data from NAVTEX Check the connec-
ror has been discontin- tion with NAVTEX
ued for more than and network.
set time.
(Set at installation)
Default: 180 sec-
onds
NAVTEX is turned
off, or there is a
problem with net-
work
10400 151 310 Other Sensor 1 Caution/B Data from other Check the connec-
COM Error sensor has been tion with the other
10400 152 311 Other Sensor 2 discontinued for sensor and net-
COM Error more than set work.
10400 153 312 Other Sensor 3 time.(Set at installa-
COM Error tion) Default: 180
seconds
10400 154 313 Other Sensor 4
Other sensor is
COM Error
turned off, or there
10400 155 314 Other Sensor 5 is a problem with
COM Error network.
10400 156 315 Other Sensor 6
COM Error
10400 157 316 Other Sensor 7
COM Error
10400 158 317 Other Sensor 8
COM Error
10400 159 318 Other Sensor 9
COM Error
10400 160 319 Other Sensor 10
COM Error
10400 161 411 Other Sensor 11
COM Error
10400 162 412 Other Sensor 12
COM Error
10400 163 413 Other Sensor 13
COM Error
10400 164 414 Other Sensor 14
COM Error
10400 165 415 Other Sensor 15
COM Error
10400 166 416 Other Sensor 16
COM Error

AP-38
 APPENDIX 4 ALERT LIST

ALF ALR Priority/

Alert name Meaning Remedy
No. Inst.* No. Category
10400 167 417 Other Sensor 17 Caution/B Data from other Check the connec-
COM Error sensor has been tion with the other
10400 168 418 Other Sensor 18 discontinued for sensor and net-
COM Error more than set work.
10400 169 419 Other Sensor 19 time.(Set at installa-
COM Error tion) Default: 180
seconds
10400 170 420 Other Sensor 20
Other sensor is
COM Error
turned off, or there
10400 171 421 Other Sensor 21 is a problem with
COM Error network.
10400 172 422 Other Sensor 22
COM Error
10400 173 423 Other Sensor 23
COM Error
10400 174 424 Other Sensor 24
COM Error
10400 175 425 Other Sensor 25
COM Error
10400 176 426 Other Sensor 26
COM Error
10400 177 427 Other Sensor 27
COM Error
10400 178 428 Other Sensor 28
COM Error
10400 179 429 Other Sensor 29
COM Error
10400 180 430 Other Sensor 30
COM Error
10431 - 431 HUB-3000 LinkUP Warning/
Error B
10499 - 500 Watch Alert Warning/ Watch alert interval ACK the alert,
B reached. check the radar
display.
10450 - 330 Double Gyro Sta- Warning/ When connected If the error fre-
tus Conflict B with Double Gyro quently
System, instrument occurs, contact
produced by Yoko- FURUNO and in-
ogawa Electric, two form frequency of
gyro has been dis- occurrence.
played "Selected"
status for 3 sec-
onds.

AP-39
APPENDIX 4 ALERT LIST

ALF ALR Priority/

Alert name Meaning Remedy
No. Inst.* No. Category
10500 1 851 EPFS 1 Sensor Caution/B Own ship position Reset the filter to
Banned data from this GPS confirm that it isn't
10500 2 852 EPFS 2 Sensor is determined ab- a temporal error
Banned normal by integrity value. If the data is
10500 3 853 EPFS 3 Sensor check. normal, it is reus-
Banned able. However, if
it's continually re-
10500 4 854 EPFS 4 Sensor
moved, there is a
Banned
possibility that cor-
10500 5 855 EPFS 5 Sensor rect data is not re-
Banned ceived from
10500 6 856 EPFS 6 Sensor sensor. In this
Banned case, contact FU-
10500 7 857 EPFS 7 Sensor RUNO.
Banned
10500 8 858 EPFS 8 Sensor
Banned
10500 9 859 EPFS 9 Sensor
Banned
10500 10 860 EPFS 10 Sensor
Banned
10500 11 871 Gyro 1 Sensor Caution/B Heading data from
Banned this Gyro is deter-
10500 12 872 Gyro 2 Sensor mined abnormal by
Banned integrity check.
10500 13 873 Gyro 3 Sensor
Banned
10500 14 874 Gyro 4 Sensor
Banned
10500 15 875 Gyro 5 Sensor
Banned
10500 21 861 SDME 1 Sensor Caution/B Own ship speed
Banned data from this
10500 22 862 SDME 2 Sensor SDME sensor is de-
Banned termined abnormal
10500 23 863 SDME 3 Sensor by integrity check.
Banned
10500 31 881 ROT Gyro 1 Sen- Caution/B Heading data from
sor Banned this ROT Gyro is
10500 32 882 ROT Gyro 2 Sen- determined abnor-
sor Banned mal by integrity
10500 33 883 ROT Gyro 3 Sen- check.
sor Banned
10510 1 900 No Filter Source of Warning/ No valid position Check the connec-
Position B sensor is available tion with all GPS.
for filter. (Banned or
connection error)
10510 2 901 No Filter Source of No valid COG/SOG
COG/SOG sensor is available
for filter. (Banned or
connection error)

AP-40
 APPENDIX 4 ALERT LIST

ALF ALR Priority/

Alert name Meaning Remedy
No. Inst.* No. Category
10510 3 902 No Filter Source of Warning/ No valid CTW/STW Check the connec-
CTW/STW B sensor is available tion with all GPS.
for filter. (Banned or
connection error)
10510 4 903 No Filter Source of No valid heading
Heading sensor is available
for filter. (Banned or
connection error)
10510 5 904 No Filter Source of No valid position
ROT sensor is available
for filter. (Banned or
connection error)
10520 - 689 Drift comp error Warning/
B
10540 1 539 AIS Message Re- Caution/B AIS message is re- -
ceived ceived.
10540 2 541 AIS Message Caution/B AIS message trans- Check the connec-
Transmit Error mission failed. tion with AIS.
10540 3 542 AIS Transmitting Caution/B AIS transponder is -
transmitting.
10560 - 560 Association Caution/B TT and AIS target Check the associa-
pair meet the condi- tion target.
tions of association.
10601 1 272 UTC Time Not Caution/B Time data of all Check the connec-
Available available GPS sen- tion with all GPS.
sor has been not
available for more
than 3 seconds.
10601 2 277 Wind Speed/Direc- Wind speed/direc- Check the connec-
tion Not Available tion data of all avail- tion with all wind
able WIND sensors sensors.
has been not avail-
able for more than 3
seconds.
10601 3 279 COG/SOG Not COG/SOG data of Check the connec-
Available all available GPS tion with all GPS.
sensor has been
not available for
more than 3 sec-
onds.
10601 4 284 SOG Not Available There is no SOG Check that the
sensor data or the sensor is powered.
SOG sentence is in-
valid.
10601 5 450 Heading Sensor Heading data of all Check the connec-
Not Available available gyro has tion with all gyro.
been not available
for more than 2 sec-
onds.

AP-41
APPENDIX 4 ALERT LIST

ALF ALR Priority/

Alert name Meaning Remedy
No. Inst.* No. Category
10601 6 453 SDME Sensor Not Caution/B Speed data from all Check the connec-
Available available SDME tion with all SDME.
has been not avail-
able for more than 3
seconds.
10602 1 472 Position Source Caution/B Position sensor -
Change used in system (dis-
tributed by own
ship's information
management) is
changed.
10602 2 473 Heading Source Heading sensor -
Change used in system (dis-
tributed by own
ship's information
management) is
changed.
10602 3 474 COG/SOG Source COG/SOG sensor -
Change used in system (dis-
tributed by own
ship's information
management) is
changed.
10602 4 475 CTW/STW Source CTW/STW sensor -
Change used in system (dis-
tributed by own
ship's information
management) is
changed.
10602 5 470 Datum Change Current datum of Check the opera-
EPSF is changed. tor's manual of
Acquisition timing: GPS.
Once in 60 seconds
or when position
sensor is changed.
10603 1 273 Depth(Bow) Not Caution/B Depth data of all Check the connec-
Available available depth tion with all echo
10603 2 274 Depth(Mid) Not sensor(Bow/Miship/ sounders.
Available Stern) has been not
10603 3 275 Depth(Stern) Not available for more
Available than 3 seconds.
10603 4 278 STW Not Available STW data of all Check the connec-
available SDME tion with all SDME.
sensors has been
not available for
more than 3 sec-
onds.
10603 5 285 Heading Magnetic Heading data of all Check the connec-
Not Available available magnetic tion with all mag-
gyro has been not netic gyro.
available for more
than 3 seconds.

AP-42
 APPENDIX 4 ALERT LIST

ALF ALR Priority/

Alert name Meaning Remedy
No. Inst.* No. Category
10690 - 690 TC Start Timeout Alarm/B Operation to start Perform operation
track control in au- to start track con-
topilot is not per- trol again.
formed in 30
seconds after per-
forming the opera-
tion to start track
control in ECDIS.
*Currently not used
because TCS start
operation is caused
by autopilot.
10718 - 728 Radar Sensor SW Warning/ Software version Update the radar
Version Error B not correct. software. If the
problem persists,
consult your deal-
er.
10740 1 730 EXT Radar STBY Warning/ The antenna unit Set the antenna
B selected with the In- unit to transmit
terswitch is in state.
stand-by
10740 2 740 EXT Radar No Sig- No video signal Check the antenna
nal from the antenna unit.
unit selected with
the Interswitch.
10740 3 750 EXT Radar COM No communication Check that both
Error from the antenna the antenna unit
unit selected with and the processor
the Interswitch. unit are powered.
Also check the wir-
ing between the
antenna unit and
the processor unit.
10760 - 760 Datum Mismatch Caution/B Datum mismatch Match the datum.
between EPFS and
chart.
10800 1 691 RM Stop - Exceed Alarm/A Route monitoring is Start route moni-
Max XTD stopped because toring after ap-
distance from route proaching the
is more than set val- monitoring route.
ue of Max XTE.
10800 2 692 RM Stop - Sensor Error occurs inside If the error fre-
lost of route monitoring quently occurs,
function. contact FURUNO
and inform fre-
quency of occur-
rence.
10800 3 693 RM Stop - Internal Required data for Check the connec-
Error route monitoring tion with GYRO,
such as position, GPS and SDME.
SOG/COG cannot
be acquired.

AP-43
APPENDIX 4 ALERT LIST

ALF ALR Priority/

Alert name Meaning Remedy
No. Inst.* No. Category
10801 - 485 Depth Limit Alarm/A Seabed has been Be careful of risk of
less than set depth grounding.
for more than 3 sec-
onds.
10802 - 495 Anchor Watch Warning/ While anchor watch Be careful of drag-
A alert function is en- ging anchor.
abled, ship's posi-
tion has been
outside of alarm
area centering cer-
tain position for
more than 3 sec-
onds.
10803 - 640 Chartalign: Over Caution/B Own ship position Reset offset.
30 min has been offset for
more than 30 min-
utes.
10807 - 820 NAVTEX Mes- Caution/B NAVTEX message -
sage Received is received.
10850 - 652 End of track Warning/ Ship will reach last Be careful that last
A waypoint in 30 sec- waypoint is ap-
onds. proaching.
10851 - 665 Autopilot Mode Alarm/A In communication Check the mode in
Conflict between AP, TCS autopilot.
mode of ECDIS and
AP are different.
10852 - 667 AP Receive Error Caution/B Communication be- Check the connec-
tween AP and EC- tion with autopilot.
DIS is discontinued.
10853 - 675 Use MAN steering Warning/ All GPS signals are Switch autopilot
B lost during track mode to manual or
control, and track auto.
control has been
continued for 10
minutes in DR.
Alarm generates
every 2 minutes.
10854 - 694 Speed Recovered Warning/
B
10855 - 695 Position Monitor Caution/B When inputting po- Check an accurate
sition data from 2 position data, GPS
GPS or more GPS, reception status
there is a difference and GPS setting.
between position
data from each
GPS.
10860 1 645 Navigational Haz- Warning/
ard A
10950 - 950 BAM COM Error Caution/B Communication Check connection
with BAM (Bridge to BAM system. If
Alert Management) the problem per-
system interrupted sists, consult your
or lost. dealer.

AP-44
 APPENDIX 4 ALERT LIST

ALF ALR Priority/

Alert name Meaning Remedy
No. Inst.* No. Category
30960 - 960 Takeover AMS Warning/
Master B
10960 - 961 Takeover AMS Warning/
Master B
40960 - 962 Takeover AMS Warning/
Master B
50960 - 963 Takeover AMS Warning/
Master B

AP-45
FURUNO FCR-21x9-BB, FCR-28x9 SERIES

SPECIFICATIONS OF MARINE RADAR

FCR-21x9-BB, FCR-28x9 SERIES

1 GENERAL
1.1 Model
Model Frequency Monitor Output Transceiver Radiator
Band power (kW) location length
FCR-2119-BB 12
User supply
FCR-2129-BB 25 In antenna
FCR-2819 X-band 12 unit 6.5/8 ft
FCR-2829 MU-231 25
FCR-2829W 25 TR unit
FCR-2139S-BB User supply In antenna
FCR-2839S S-band 30 unit 12 ft
MU-231
FCR-2839SW TR unit
1.2 Radar picture
Operating mode Radar mode, Chart radar mode, Chart for radar mode
Orientation mode Head-up/Head-up TB (RM), North-up (RM/TM), Course-up (RM)
(RM: relative motion, TM: true motion)

2 MONITOR UNIT
2.1 MU-231
Display Color LCD, raster scan, daylight bright, radar echoes in 32 levels
Screen size 23.1-inch
Effective area 470.40 x 352.80 mm
Resolution UXGA (1600 x 1200)
Effective radar diameter 335.2 mm
Visible distance 1.02 m nominal
2.2 MU-190 (option)
Display Color LCD, raster scan, daylight bright, radar echoes in 32 levels
Screen size 19-inch
Effective area 376.32 x 301.06 mm
Resolution SXGA (1280 x 1024)
Effective radar diameter 290 mm
Visible distance 1.02 m nominal

3 ANTENNA UNIT
3.1 Type Slotted waveguide array
3.2 Polarization Horizontal
3.3 Wind resistance Relative wind 100 kn
3.4 Beam width and sidelobe attenuation
X-band S-band
XN20AF XN24AF SN36AF
Radiator length (ft) 6.5 8 12
Beam width (H) 1.23° 0.95° 1.8°
Beam width (V) 20° 25°
Sidelobe within ±10° -28 dB -24 dB
Sidelobe outside ±10° -32 dB -30 dB

SP - 1 E3607S01E-M
FURUNO FCR-21x9-BB, FCR-28x9 SERIES

3.5 Rotation
FCR- 2119-BB/2129-BB/2819/2829 24 rpm or 42 rpm (High Speed Craft: HSC)
FCR-2139S-BB/2839S 21 rpm (50 Hz)/26 rpm (60 Hz)/45 rpm (HSC)
FCR-2829W 24 rpm
FCR-2839SW 21 rpm (50 Hz)/26 rpm (60 Hz)
3.6 De-icer On: when temperature goes down to +5°C
Off: when temperature goes up to +12°C

4 RADAR TRANSCEIVER UNIT

4.1 Frequency X-band: 9410 MHz ±30 MHz
S-band: 3050 MHz ±30 MHz
4.2 Output power FCR-2119-BB/2819: 12 kW
FCR-2129-BB/2829/2829W: 25 kW
FCR-2139S-BB/2839S/2839SW: 30 kW
Unwanted emissions comply with ITU-R
4.3 Pulselength (PL), Pulse Repetition Rate (PRR) and Range Scale
Range S1 S2 M1 M2 M3 L
PL (µs) 0.07 0.15 0.3 0.5 0.7 1.2
PRR (Hz) 3000* 3000* 1500 1000 1000 600**
Range Scale 0.125, 0.25, 0.5, 0.75, 0.75, 1.5, 3, 6, 12, 3, 6, 12, 6, 12, 24,
(NM) 0.5, 0.75, 1.5 1.5, 3 3, 6 24 24 48, 96
*: 2200 Hz with TT range on 32 NM.
**: 500 Hz on 96 NM range
4.4 Duplexer
FCR-2119-BB/ 2129-BB/2819/2829/2829W/2139S-BB/2839S
Ferrite circulator with diode limiter
FCR-2839SW Ferrite circulator with TR limiter
4.5 Display-related specifications
Minimum range 22 m
Range discrimination 26 m
Range scales (NM), Range ring interval
0.125 (.025), 0.25 (0.05), 0.5 (0.1), 0.75 (0.25), 1.5 (0.25),
3 (0.5), 6 (1), 12 (2), 24 (4), 48 (8), 96 (16)
Range accuracy Within 1% or 10 m, whichever is greater
Bearing discrimination 1.5° (XN20AF), 1.2° (XN24AF), 2.0° (SN36AF)
Bearing accuracy ±1°
Radar map Route, Coastline, Buoy, etc. 4,000 pts in radar mode
Target tracking (TT) Acquisition: 0.1 to 32 NM, 100 targets
Auto tracking on all acquire targets
Vector time: Off/30s/1-60 minutes
Trail maneuver available
AIS Complies with IMO SN CIRC. 217, IEC60936-5
Capacity: 2000 targets
Past position: 5/10 pts on all activated targets
Time of vector: Off/30s/1-60 minutes

SP - 2 E3607S01E-M
FURUNO FCR-21x9-BB, FCR-28x9 SERIES

5 CHART INDICATION (ECDIS)

5.1 Display contents
Chart materials IMO/IHO S57-3 ENC or C-MAP CM-93/3 vectorized material
Own ship display Own ship mark/track and numeral position in lat/lon,
speed, course and heading
Target tracking (TT) Range, Bearing, Speed, Course, CPA/TCPA,
Target information from AIS
Other information Route, Waypoint, Nav line, Electronic chart information,
Various alarms
5.2 Display features Chart zoom-in/out, Cursor (EBL, VRM and parallel index lines),
Scroll, Symbol select, One touch activation,
Electric chart information auto-update
One-touch restore One-touch restore of standard mode
5.3 User interface
Position fixing Navigation by position from external EPFS,
Dead reckoning by gyro/log,
Route planning Planning by rhumb line, Great circle, Route creation
Route monitoring Off-track display, Waypoint arrival alarm, Shallow depth alarm,
Route information indication
User chart User chart creation
MOB (Man Overboard) Position, etc. at time of man overboard are recorded and
MOB mark is displayed on the screen.

6 INTERFACE
6.1 Processor unit (EC-3000)
Number of port
Serial 7 ports (IEC61162-1/2: 2 ports, IEC61162-1: 5 ports)
Digital input 1 port: contact signal, 100 ohm max. or 24VDC input
Alarm output 6 ports: contact signal 0.5A/60V max. NC: 4, NO: 2
DVI output 3 ports: DVI-D (2), DVI-I or RGB picture data (1 port for VDR)
USB 4 ports (3 ports for control units)
LAN 2 ports: Ethernet 1000Base-T for network equipment, sensor
adapter and spare
Data sentences (IEC61162-1/2)
Input ABK, ACK, ACN (ACM), ALR, CUR, DBT, DPT, DTM, GGA, GLL,
GNS, HBT, HDT, MTW, MWV, NRX, RMC, RRT, THS, VBW, VDM,
VDO, VDR, VHW, VSD, VTG, ZDA
Output ABM, ACK, ALC, ALF, ALR, ARC, BBM, EVE, HBT, OSD, RRT,
RSD, TLB, TTD, TTM, VSD
6.2 Ethernet interface for IEC61162-450 (EC-3000)
Port (LAN2) 1000Base-TX, IPv4, 8P8C connector
Data sentences Same as 6.1 sentences
IEC61162-450 transmission group
Input MISC, TGTD, SATD, NAVD, VDRD, RCOM, TIME, PROP,
USR1 to USR8
Output Arbitrary (default: TGTD)
Multicast address 239.192.0.1 to 239.192.0.16

SP - 3 E3607S01E-M
FURUNO FCR-21x9-BB, FCR-28x9 SERIES

Destination port 60001 to 60016

Re-transmittable binary image transfer
Multicast address 239.192.0.26 to 239.192.0.30
Destination port 60026 to 60030
Other network function excepted IEC6162-450
HTTP: *.*.*.*: 80, XML-RPC: *.*.*.*: 6403
Syslog: 239.190.0.254: 514
6.3 Ethernet interface for IEC61162-450 (MC-3000S)
Port 100Base-TX, IPv4, 8P8C connector
Maximum data rate 800 sps
Data sentences Output: XDR
IEC61162-450 transmission group
Input MISC, TGTD, SATD, NAVD, VDRD, RCOM, TIME, PROP,
USR1 to USR8
Output Arbitrary (default: MISC)
Multicast address 239.192.0.1 to 239.192.0.16
Destination port 60001 to 60016
Re-transmittable binary image transfer
Multicast address 239.192.0.26 to 239.192.0.30
Destination port 60026 to 60030
Other network function excepted IEC6162-450
HTTP: *.*.*.*: 80, XML-RPC: *.*.*.*: 6403
Syslog: 239.190.0.254: 514
6.4 Sensor adapter (option)
MC-3000S (serial) 8 ports: I/O, IEC61162-1/2: 4 ports, IEC61162-1: 4 ports
MC-3010A (analog) 3 ports: Input, -10 to +10 V, 0 to 10 V or 4 to 20 mA
MC-3020D (digital-in) 8 ports: relay contact, logics set from program
MC-3030D (digital-out) 8 ports: relay contact, normal open and normal close available
6.5 Radar processor unit (RPU-013)
Heading signal Sync signal (20-100 VDC or 20-135 VAC, 50/60/400/500 Hz) or
stepper signal (20-100 VDC), built-in interface (option) required,
AD-10 format

7 POWER SUPPLY
7.1 Monitor unit
MU-231 100-230 VAC, 1.0-0.6 A, 1 phase, 50-60 Hz
MU-190 (option) 100-230 VAC, 0.7-0.4 A, 1 phase, 50-60 Hz
7.2 Processor unit (EC-3000) 100-115/220-230 VAC: 1.5-0.7 A, 1 phase, 50-60 Hz
7.3 Sensor adapter 24 VDC: 1.4 A (for 11 units), Input to MC-3000S, the sources of
other sensor adapters are fed from MC-3000S
7.4 Radar processor unit (RPU-013)
FCR-2119-BB/2819 100-115 VAC: 2.6 A (3.0 A), 1 phase, 50-60 Hz
220-230 VAC: 1.6 A (1.7 A), 1 phase, 50-60 Hz
FCR-2129-BB/2829 100-115 VAC: 3.0 A (3.4 A), 1 phase, 50-60 Hz
220-230 VAC: 1.8 A (1.9 A), 1 phase, 50-60 Hz ( ): 42 rpm
FCR-2139S-BB/2839S/2839SW
100-115/220-230 VAC: 2.6/1.6 A, 1 phase, 50-60 Hz

SP - 4 E3607S01E-M
FURUNO FCR-21x9-BB, FCR-28x9 SERIES

FCR-2829W 100-115/220-230 VAC: 3.0/1.8 A, 1 phase, 50-60 Hz

7.5 HUB 100-230V AC: 0.1 A max, 1 phase, 50/60 Hz
7.6 S-band antenna
Model Antenna voltage input (at wind speed 100 kn)
200VAC,3ø,50Hz 380VAC,3ø,50Hz 220VAC, 220VAC, 440VAC,
220VAC,3ø,60Hz 440VAC,3ø,60Hz 3ø,50 Hz 3ø,60Hz 3ø,60 Hz
(HSC) (HSC) (HSC)
FCR-2139S-BB 3.0A 1.5A 3.5A 3.5A 1.7A
FCR-2839S 3.0A 1.5A 3.5A 3.5A 1.7A
FCR-2839SW 3.0A 1.5A - - -

8 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
8.1 Ambient temperature
Antenna unit -25°C to +55°C (storage: -25°C to +70°C)
Others -15°C to +55°C
8.2 Relative humidity 93% or less at +40°C
8.3 Degree of protection
Antenna unit IP56
Processor unit RPU-013: IP20, EC-3000: IP20 (IP22: option)
Transceiver/power supply unit IP20
Control/monitor unit IP22
Sensor adapter IP20 (IP22: option)
HUB HUB-100: IP20, HUB-3000: IP22
8.4 Vibration IEC 60945 Ed.4

9 UNIT COLOR
9.1 Antenna unit N9.5
9.2 Processor/transceiver unit 2.5GY/1.5
9.3 Control unit N3.0
9.4 Monitor unit N2.5

10 PERFORMANCE MONITOR
10.1 PM-31 (X-band)
Frequency 9370 to 9450 MHz
Input power +8 dBm min., +28 dBm max.
Output power -36 dBm (2nd pulse max. output),
-56 dBm (2nd pulse min. output)
Step level 7.5 to 10.5 dB (1st pulse to 2nd pulse)
10.2 PM-51 (S-band)
Frequency 3020 to 3080 MHz
Input power +5 dBm, min., +15 dBm max.
Output power -15 dBm (2nd pulse max. output),
-35 dBm (2nd pulse min. output)
Step level 9.0 to 11.0 dB (1st pulse to 2nd pulse)

SP - 5 E3607S01E-M
INDEX
A voyage data (chart mode) ..................... 18-4
A/C RAIN control....................................... 2-5 Alert box ............................... 2-55, 6-12, 20-2
A/C SEA control ........................................ 2-3 Alert list ................................................... 20-6
ACQ ACT key............................................ 4-7 Alert log ................................................... 20-9
Acquisition zone Alert parameters page............................. 12-7
acknowledging alarm for ......................... 3-5 Alert state icon ........................................ 20-4
deactivating ............................................. 3-4 Alerts
sleeping ................................................... 3-4 acknowledging ...................................... 20-6
stabilization ............................................. 3-5 alert list .................................................. 20-6
AIO alert log ................................................. 20-9
chart cells ................................................ 9-9 alert state icons ..................................... 20-4
chart object information ........................... 9-9 buzzer silencing..................................... 20-5
displaying ................................................ 9-8 buzzer stop button................................. 20-5
information to display ............................ 9-11 definition ................................................ 20-1
information to display (S57) .................. 10-5 list of .................................................... 20-11
AIS message format..................................... 20-3
association ............................................ 4-15 Anchor watch ............................... 2-52, 15-10
association, conditions for ............ 4-14, 18-9 Antenna marker....................................... 2-35
automatic activation of targets ................ 4-7 ARCS charts
automatic target activation (chart mode)18-6 license restoring .................................... 7-14
CPA/TCPA alarm .................................. 4-11 Area report ............................................ 13-14
deleting received and sent Association.............................................. 18-9
safety messages ................................ 17-3 radar ...................................................... 4-14
filtering targets......................................... 4-6 B
filtering targets (chart mode) ................. 18-5 Barge marker .......................................... 2-34
function off............................................... 4-2 Basic setting page ..................................... 8-3
hiding....................................................... 4-3 Bearing measurement
lost target .............................................. 4-12 chart ...................................................... 6-21
lost target alarm .................................... 4-12 radar, chart radar................................... 2-21
Lost target alert filter (chart mode) ........ 18-7 BRILL control ..................................... 1-7, 1-8
lost target filter....................................... 4-13 Brilliance
messages, displaying ............................ 4-19 AIS symbol ............................................ 4-11
messages, receiving ............................. 4-18 AIS symbol brilliance ............................. 4-11
messages, transmitting ................ 4-17, 4-18 screen data ........................................... 2-36
own ship data (chart mode)................... 18-9 TT symbol................................................ 3-9
past position display .............................. 4-13 Buzzer stop button .................................. 20-5
pop-up info .............................................. 4-9
received and sent safety C
messages .................................. 17-2, 17-3 CCRP ...................................................... 2-49
ROT tag limit ......................................... 4-21 CCRP page ........................................... 22-18
scaled symbol ....................................... 4-21 CCRS ...................................................... 16-1
sending safety messages...................... 17-1 Chart alerts
showing ................................................... 4-3 introduction............................................ 11-1
sleeping activated targets (chart mode) 18-6 objects used in ...................................... 11-3
sleeping targets ....................................... 4-8 own ship check...................................... 11-4
symbol brilliance.................................... 4-11 route planning ....................................... 11-5
symbol color .......................................... 4-12 Chart cells
symbols ................................................... 4-3 catalog of............................................... 7-17
symbols (chart mode)............................ 18-4 deleting.................................................. 7-20
target data (basic) ................................... 4-9 editing.................................................... 7-19
target data (chart mode)............... 18-7, 18-8 grouping ................................................ 7-19
target data (expanded) .......................... 4-10 status..................................................... 7-20
vectors................................................... 4-14 Chart database (chart radar) ................... 2-60
voyage data.................................. 4-16, 18-4 Chart database button............................. 8-12

IN-1
INDEX

CHART DISP button ................................2-58 Cursor position box

Chart display indications ..........................1-14 chart .......................................................6-18
Chart legend radar, chart radar ...................................1-27
C-MAP....................................................10-3 Customize page .....................................22-11
S57...........................................................9-2 Customized echo
Chart objects (chart radar) programming ..........................................2-12
custom sets of ........................................2-60 restoring .................................................2-13
CHART ON/OFF button ...........................2-57 restoring to default settings ....................2-13
Chart radar display indications.................1-13 selection .................................................2-12
Chart scale ...............................................6-16
D
Chart scale indication (chart radar) ..........2-63
Danger targets log
Chart synchronization
viewing ...................................................19-9
select units to synchronize .....................7-29
Data sharing...........................................22-10
synchronization status............................7-30
Deep contour .............................................8-1
Chart usage log........................................19-8
Depth sensor..........................................16-15
Charts
Details log ................................................19-5
cell deleting ............................................7-20
Display date ...............................................9-4
cell editing ..............................................7-19
Display test page ...................................22-12
Check results page ..................................12-9
Divider
Circle report ...........................................13-15
activating ..............................................15-14
Clearing line report.................................13-14
characteristics ......................................15-15
C-MAP charts
limitations .............................................15-15
cartographic services .............................10-1
Drop mark
catalog of chart cells ..............................7-17
bearing reference ...................................2-51
chart cell grouping..................................7-19
erasing ...................................................2-52
chart cell status ......................................7-20
hiding......................................................2-51
chart legend ...........................................10-3
inscribing ................................................2-51
database deletion...................................7-11
showing ..................................................2-51
database installation ................................7-7
Dual radar ................................................2-44
deleting...................................................7-23
Dynamic trial maneuver ...........................3-19
eToken registration ..................................7-6
export list of............................................7-13 E
install/update history ..............................7-16 EBL
license installation ....................................7-8 bearing measurement on chart ..............6-21
opening ..................................................7-21 bearing measurement on radar,
permit status...........................................7-15 chart radar...........................................2-21
subscription services..............................10-2 bearing reference on chart .....................6-21
update file, applying ...............................7-10 bearing reference on radar, chart radar .2-22
update file, generating............................7-10 context-sensitive menu on chart ............6-22
C-MAP DL charts hiding on chart........................................6-21
enabling..................................................7-12 offsetting on radar, chart radar...............2-22
update file, applying ...............................7-12 showing on chart ....................................6-21
update file, generating............................7-11 EBL OFFSET key........................... 2-22, 2-24
COG/SOG page .......................................16-4 EBL, VRM boxes......................................6-12
Color differentiation test (S57 charts) ......25-9 Echo area.................................................2-57
Context-sensitive menu Echo averaging ..........................................2-8
EBL, VRM on chart ................................6-22 Echo color ................................................2-57
radar.......................................................1-26 Echo stretch ...............................................2-7
radar, chart radar ...................................1-24 Echo-referenced speed..............................3-2
Context-sensitive menus ENC charts
chart .......................................................6-13 AIO display...............................................9-8
Controls......................................................1-1 catalog of chart cells ..............................7-17
Cost parameters ......................................21-3 chart cell grouping..................................7-19
Course-up mode ......................................2-16 chart cell status ......................................7-20
CPA/TCPA alarm chart installation .......................................7-3
AIS .........................................................4-11 deleting...................................................7-23
TT...........................................................3-17 ENC coverage indication........................7-25
Cursor attributes ......................................2-35 ENC list export .......................................7-13

IN-2
 INDEX

ENC permit display ............................... 7-13 L

export list of ........................................... 7-13 Label report ........................................... 13-15
install/update history ............................. 7-16 Line report ............................................. 13-14
license backup ...................................... 7-14 Look-ahead page ........................... 11-4, 15-7
license deletion ....................................... 7-5 Lost target alarm ..................................... 3-18
license installation, automatic ................. 7-2 AIS ........................................................ 4-13
license installation, manual ..................... 7-3
M
license restore ....................................... 7-14
Magnetron reset ...................................... 2-48
manual updates..................................... 7-25
Mains switch.............................................. 1-6
opening ................................................. 7-21
Manual updates
permit status.......................................... 7-15
deleting update symbols........................ 7-27
publishers notes .................................... 7-24
inserting new update symbols ............... 7-26
reconverting .......................................... 7-32
modifying existing update symbols........ 7-28
F Mariner page ........................................... 8-10
Fallback arrangements.......................... 25-10 Mini conning display................................ 24-9
File export page ...................................... 22-2 MOB position........................................... 1-31
Filter status............................................ 16-10
N
Full user chart report ............................. 13-13
Navigation data ....................................... 16-8
Full WPT report ..................................... 12-25
Navtex
G deleting messages ................................ 17-5
GAIN control.............................................. 2-3 receiving messages............................... 17-4
General page ..................................... 8-4, 8-6 Noise rejector ............................................ 2-9
H North marker ........................................... 2-33
Head Up TB mode .................................. 2-16 North-up mode ........................................ 2-16
Heading input ................................. 1-30, 6-29 Notes on radar, chart radar ..................... 2-64
Heading line ............................................ 2-33 O
Head-up mode ........................................ 2-16 Odometer resetting ................................. 6-36
HL OFF key............................................. 2-33 Off center display (radar) ........................ 2-25
I OFF CENTER key................................... 2-25
INDEX LINE key...................................... 2-29 Offset EBL
Indications origin point............................................. 2-23
chart display .......................................... 1-14 usage .................................................... 2-22
chart radar display................................. 1-13 Operating mode ...................................... 6-16
radar display.......................................... 1-11 Operator’s manual................................... 1-38
Information box Optimize page .............................. 12-7, 12-16
nav data ................................................ 2-38 Other sensors page................................. 16-5
nav data selection ................................. 2-40 Overlay/NAV Tools box
route information ................................... 2-39 anchor watch ....................................... 15-10
Instant access bar look-ahead page ................................... 15-7
chart display ............................................ 6-6 PI (parallel index) page ......................... 15-1
radar, chart radar .................................. 1-17 predictor ................................................ 15-9
Instant Track ring ........................................................ 15-8
parameters ............................................ 21-4 UKC..................................................... 15-11
Instant track Overlay/Nav Tools box ............................ 6-12
back to track.......................................... 14-8 Own ship functions box ........................... 6-10
button label.......................................... 14-13 Own ship marker ..................................... 2-33
details.................................................. 14-11 P
messages ............................................ 14-10 Palette button ............................................ 1-7
monitoring ........................................... 14-11 Parallel index lines
safe off track.......................................... 14-7 activating, deactivating .......................... 15-5
stopping monitoring ............................. 14-12 bearing reference ......................... 2-30, 15-5
Interference rejector .................................. 2-7 displaying .............................................. 2-29
Interswitch ............................................... 2-41 erasing .................................................. 2-29
K interval................................................... 15-6
Keyboard test page ............................... 22-13 length adjustment ......................... 2-31, 15-7
line interval ............................................ 2-29

IN-3
INDEX

line orientation........................................2-29 map points used.......................................5-3

mode ............................................ 2-30, 15-5 mark entry ................................................5-2
number of lines to display ......................15-5 radar map no............................................5-4
number to show......................................2-29 route display...........................................5-14
orientation ..............................................15-6 showing ....................................................5-1
resetting ....................................... 2-30, 15-6 Radar overlay
Passage plan report ...............................12-26 errors in ........................................ 15-3, 15-4
Past position display Rain clutter adjustment
AIS .........................................................4-13 automatic..................................................2-5
TT...........................................................3-15 manual .....................................................2-5
Performance monitor ...............................2-47 Range and bearing between two targets .2-24
Permanent warning box ...........................6-12 Range measurement
Permanent warnings chart .......................................................6-21
C-MAP charts.........................................10-4 radar.......................................................2-19
S57 charts ................................................9-3 radar, chart radar ...................................2-19
Permit status ............................................7-15 Range selection .......................................2-18
PI (parallel index) page ............................15-1 Range/Presentation mode box.................2-14
Position Recording
alignment..............................................16-13 chart usage log.......................................19-8
primary and secondary...........................16-7 danger targets log ..................................19-9
source ....................................................16-6 details log ...............................................19-5
Position events.........................................19-2 position events .......................................19-2
Position offset (radar)...............................1-32 user events.............................................19-1
POSN page ..............................................16-4 voyage log..............................................19-6
Power switch ..............................................1-6 Reports
Predictor...................................................15-9 area ......................................................13-14
Presentation library ....................................9-6 circle.....................................................13-15
Presentation mode clearing line ..........................................13-14
chart .......................................................6-17 full user chart........................................13-13
Primary alert priority (radar) .....................2-56 Full WPT ..............................................12-25
Printing label......................................................13-15
cell status list..........................................7-22 line........................................................13-14
chart list..................................................7-21 passage plan........................................12-26
S57 chart object information ....................9-7 tidal.......................................................13-13
Processor unit EC-3000 .............................1-5 WPT table ............................................12-24
Program nos. ...........................................1-38 Ring page.................................................15-8
Public key (ENC charts) .............................7-1 Route bank.............................................12-14
Publishers notes ......................................7-24 Route information box ..............................6-11
Pulse length ...............................................2-2 Route page ................................................8-9
changing...................................................2-3 Route transfer log ..................................19-11
selection ...................................................2-2 Routes
adding waypoints at end of route .........12-10
R
changing waypoint position ....................12-9
Radar Control Unit RCU-025 .....................1-1
creating new...........................................12-3
Radar display indications .........................1-11
deleting.................................................12-21
Radar map
deleting waypoints................................12-10
copying individual marks and lines...........5-7
exporting FAR-3xx0 data .....................12-20
copying marks and lines in an area..........5-7
exporting FEA-2x07, csv, ASCII data...12-20
copying marks and lines to another
full WPT report .....................................12-25
map file..................................................5-8
importing csv, ASCII data.....................12-19
erasing all marks and lines in a map file ..5-6
importing FEA-2x07 data .....................12-18
erasing individual marks and lines ...........5-5
importing FMD-3xx0, FCR-2xx9 data...12-18
erasing marks and lines in an area ..........5-5
inserting waypoint ................................12-10
exporting ..................................................5-9
optimizing .............................................12-16
features on/off ........................................5-13
overview in planning...............................12-1
hiding........................................................5-1
passage plan report .............................12-26
importing ................................................5-10
route bank ............................................12-14
line entry...................................................5-2
SAR......................................................12-11
map comment ..........................................5-4

IN-4
 INDEX

selecting for monitoring ......................... 14-1

selecting route components to display .. 14-4 Status bar
stopping monitoring ............................... 14-3 chart display ............................................ 6-4
switching monitored to planning ............ 14-6 radar, chart radar................................... 1-15
transfer ................................................ 12-22 STBY TX button ........................................ 2-1
user chart page (route planning) ........... 12-6 Stern marker ........................................... 2-33
Waypoints page (monitoring) ................ 14-4
T
waypoints page (route planning) ........... 12-5
TARGET DATA key .................................. 4-9
WPT table ........................................... 12-24
Target list (TT, AIS) ................................. 3-11
S TARGET LIST key .................................. 3-11
S57 charts Targets page ........................................... 8-11
chart legend ................................... 9-2, 10-3 Tidal report ............................................ 13-13
chart object information ........................... 9-7 Time ........................................................ 1-32
chart update approval ............................. 9-5 Tips ................................................ 1-39, 6-24
display date ............................................. 9-4 Track
permanent warnings................................ 9-3 erasing .................................................. 5-14
presentation library.................................. 9-6 setup ..................................................... 5-13
symbols used in ...................................... 9-6 Trackball Control Unit RCU-026................ 1-4
update review date .................................. 9-4 Trackball maintenance ............................ 25-4
Safety contour .................................. 8-1, 11-2 Tracking page ........................................... 8-8
Safety depth .............................................. 8-1 TRAIL key ............................................... 2-27
SAR route.............................................. 12-11 Trails
SART color ...................................................... 2-28
introduction............................................ 2-53 indications ............................................. 2-26
receiving ................................................ 2-53 level of afterglow ................................... 2-28
Screenshots own ship’s ............................................. 2-28
capturing screen.................................... 1-33 resetting ................................................ 2-27
deleting................................................ 22-16 suppressing trails around own ship ....... 2-28
exporting ............................................. 22-16 trail stabilization in true motion .............. 2-27
Screenshots page ................................. 22-15 trail time................................................. 2-27
Sea clutter adjustment true or relative ....................................... 2-26
automatic................................................. 2-4 Trial maneuver
manual .................................................... 2-4 dynamic trial .......................................... 3-19
Second-trace echoes .............................. 2-14 procedure .............................................. 3-21
Self test page .......................................... 22-7 static trial ............................................... 3-20
Sensor information box .......... 1-19, 1-20, 6-9 terminating ............................................ 3-22
Sensor set (system, local) ....................... 1-27 Trip meter resetting ................................. 6-36
Sensors menu ......................................... 16-2 True motion mode ................................... 2-17
Set and drift............................................. 3-16 True motion reset .................................... 6-19
Settings menu ......................................... 1-33 TT
accessing .............................................. 22-1 acquisition zone ............................... 3-3, 3-5
CCRP .................................................. 22-18 alert list .................................................. 3-23
customize page ................................... 22-11 association ................................. 4-15, 18-10
display test page ................................. 22-12 automatic acquisition............................... 3-3
file export page...................................... 22-2 automatic acquisition zone ...................... 3-3
file import page...................................... 22-3 CPA/TCPA alarm .................................. 3-17
file maintenance page ........................... 22-4 data display ........................................... 3-10
keyboard test page.............................. 22-13 hiding....................................................... 3-1
screenshots page ................................ 22-15 lost target alarm..................................... 3-18
self test page ......................................... 22-7 lost target alert filter (chart mode) ......... 18-3
user default page ................................ 22-17 manual acquisition................................... 3-5
Shallow contour......................................... 8-1 past position display .............................. 3-15
Ship and route parameters...................... 21-1 past positions, attributes (chart mode) .. 18-3
SPD page................................................ 16-3 pop-up info ............................................ 3-11
Speed input .................................... 1-28, 6-27 showing ................................................... 3-1
Split screen ............................................. 6-24 simulation mode .................................... 3-22
Standard page........................................... 8-4 static trial maneuver .............................. 3-20
Static trial maneuver ............................... 3-20 symbol brilliance...................................... 3-9

IN-5
INDEX

symbol color .............................................3-9 hiding on chart........................................6-21

symbol color (chart mode)......................18-1 range measurement on chart .................6-21
symbol size (chart mode) .......................18-1 range measurement on radar,
symbols ....................................................3-8 chart radar...........................................2-19
symbols (chart mode).............................18-1 showing on chart ....................................6-21
target data (chart mode).........................18-2
W
target list.................................................3-11
Watch alert ...............................................2-37
terminating a trial maneuver...................3-22
Waypoints page
terminating tracking on target...................3-7
route monitoring .....................................14-4
trial maneuver ........................................3-19
route planning ........................................12-5
trial maneuver procedure .......................3-21
Wind sensor ...........................................16-13
vector .....................................................3-14
Wiper........................................................2-10
TUNE button ..............................................2-1
WPT table report .............12-24, 12-25, 12-26
Tuning
automatic..................................................2-1 Z
initializing..................................................2-1 Zoom ........................................................2-32
manual .....................................................2-2
U
UKC page
setting...................................................15-11
UKC window.........................................15-12
UKC window ..........................................15-12
Undo .............................................. 12-4, 13-6
Update Review date...................................9-4
User chart page
route planning ........................................12-6
User charts
area report............................................13-14
circle report ..........................................13-15
clearing line report................................13-14
creating ..................................................13-3
deleting.................................................13-12
deleting objects from ..............................13-8
editing objects on ...................................13-7
full report ..............................................13-13
importing ..............................................13-10
information in route monitoring...............14-5
label report ...........................................13-15
line report .............................................13-14
notes ......................................................13-5
route monitoring ...................................13-16
selecting objects to display ....................13-9
tidal report ............................................13-13
User default page...................................22-17
User events ..............................................19-1
User profiles ................................... 1-33, 1-34
V
VECTOR MODE key................................3-14
VECTOR TIME key ..................................3-14
Vectors
own ship .................................................2-34
target ......................................................2-34
Voyage log
conditions for logging .............................19-8
viewing ...................................................19-7
VRM
context-sensitive menu on chart ............6-22

IN-6